Page 1

INTRODUCTION

3RZHUHG%\7KH6XQ 6HHSDJH

“Song and Eggs” by Wendy Wallin Malinow 2010 Saul Bell Design Award 1st Place, Metal Clay

800.545.6566 riogrande.com

2

www.riogrande.com

800.545.6566


We packed this year’s Creative Arts book with projects for every artist! Products & Inspiration— i t ’s a l l w a i t i n g f o r y o u i n s i d e . Like this metal clay pendant project by Patrick Kusek. He’ll show you how stone-set bezel cups are an easy way to add a professional look to your metal clay designs. Learn new techniques and pick up the supplies you need all in one stop. So clear your table, turn the page and dive right in! Metal clay bezel cup necklace by Patrick Kusek, page 80.

Check out all of this year’s projects below!

COPPRclay earrings using Embeddables® by MariaElena Baca, page 16.

Dynasty stamp bracelet by Yvonne M. Padilla, page 24.

BRONZclay garden stake by Yvonne M. Padilla, page 40.

PMC3™ ring with decorative plaque by Yvonne M. Padilla, page 56.

Flameworked ruffle cone bead by Eleanor MacNish, page 116.

Fused glass pendant by Valerie Hensen, page 128.

Cast glass pendant and earring set by Patti Sowell, page 134.

Enameled pendant by Jeanette Landenwitch, page 155.

Wire-wrapped pendant by Patti Sowell, page 187.


TABLE OF CONTENTS M E TA L C L AY PMC® Certification and Rio Rewards . . . . 4 PMC® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Wire and findings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 COPPRclay™ & BRONZclay™ Clay and firing tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Forming tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 PROJECT COPPRclay Earrings Using Embeddables™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Metal clay kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 PROJECT Dynasty Stamp Bracelet. . . . . 24 Stamps and textures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 PROJECT BRONZclay™ Garden Stake . . 40 PROJECT Ring with Decorative Plaque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Firing tools and equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Finishing tools and equipment . . . . . . . . 65 Faceted stones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Cabochons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 PROJECT Metal Clay Bezel Cup Necklace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Cleaning supplies and equipment. . . . . 82 Books and DVDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

GLASS Messy Color™ 104 COE glass . . . . . . . . . . 86 Uroboros® FX 90 COE glass . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Uroboros System 96® COE glass . . . . . .100 PROJECT Flameworked Ruffle Cone Bead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116 Flameworking tools and equipment .118 Findings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127 PROJECT Fused Glass Pendant . . . . . . .128 Fusing tools and equipment . . . . . . . . .130 PROJECT Cast Glass Pendant & Earring Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 Casting tools and equipment . . . . . . . .136 Finishing tools and equipment . . . . . . .139 Optical and safety supplies . . . . . . . . . . .147 Findings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150 Books and DVDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154

ENAMEL PROJECT Enameled Cloisonné Pendant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155 Lead-free enamels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159 Leaded enamels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160 Stampings and wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165 Tools and equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168 Acrylin jewelry paint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172 Resin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173 Findings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177

“Enamel is all about light play.” —William Brinker

I was playing with a kaleidoscope, and realized that the mirrors and the symmetry of the contents were endlessly fascinating. It was playing with light. And enamel is all about playing with light. I decided to put these two things together. —William Brinker

CHAIN MAIL Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184 Jump rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186

WIRE-WRAPPING PROJECT Wire-Wrapped Pendant . . . .187 Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188 Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191 Benches and organizers . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196 Beadalon® wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198 Books and DVDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200

BEAD-STRINGING Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201 Stringing material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203

D I S P L AY & PAC K AG I N G Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205 Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205 Display and travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208

Saul Bell Design Award . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Ordering information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210

“Kaleidoscope Pendant” by William Brinker (relief engraving by Amayak Stepanyan) 2010 Saul Bell Design Award First Place, Enamel


PMC

®

CERTIFICATION & RIO REWARDS

RIO REWARDS PMC® CERTIFICATION GET CERTIFIED doing what you love! Established in 1998 by PMC® expert Tim McCreight, the Rio Rewards PMC Certification program is a highly regarded program for the PMC enthusiast seeking the recognition that a standardized level of expertise offers. The three-day intensive program includes a demanding curriculum and is intended for those who possess a familiarity with PMC. World-class instructors teach specific skills and techniques and evaluate each piece made to assess the level of accomplishment before awarding certification. Classes are small—limited to 10–15 students—and guarantee plenty of one-on-one instruction. Each class includes a series of seven projects carefully designed to include a range of techniques that help you continue to work or teach using PMC. By successfully completing these projects, you will learn how to: • • • • •

make and use simple tools create organic forms work with geometric precision assemble dry sheet to make a form work on a hollow form

• • • • •

double fire torch fire create a mirror polish size rings use shrinkage creatively

• • • • •

carve dry PMC® solder findings into place make and use a rubber mold apply liver of sulfur black patina set a stone

• • • • •

rehydrate dry PMC® use Aura 22 use the PMC® syringe use PMC® paper make your own slip

Those completing the program receive PMC® certification, enrollment in the Rio Rewards special purchase program (see below) and a one-year membership in the PMC Guild. In addition, you’ll find inspiration while working with other talented PMC artists!

Rio Rewards is a special pricing program available to individuals who attend a Rio Rewards PMC® Certification class. This program discounts all silver PMC products and many PMC-related products. There are no minimums or purchasing requirements, so you can purchase only the PMC products you need! Membership in Rio Rewards does not expire and is not subject to fees or further obligation.

MEET OUR RIO REWARDS INSTRUCTO R S (left to right, top to bottom)

Tonya Davidson

For more information about either the Rio Rewards Program or PMC® Certification, or to register for a PMC Certification class:

Call 505.839.3216 (in Albuquerque);

PMC PRO™ bracelet by Celie Fago

866.346.2698 (toll free); e-mail education@riogrande.com or visit

riorewards.com.

Chris Darway Terry Kovalcik Patrik Kusek Barbara Becker Simon CeCe Wire Jeanette Landenwitch Tim McCreight J. Fred Woell (not shown) Celie Fago (not shown) 4

riogrande.com

800.545.6566


So, what is it about

METAL CLAY?

It can be pinched, rolled, carved, sculpted, formed, fired and finished. It’s the versatile medium that has inspired metalsmiths to try new techniques and explore the creative possibilities of a material that begins in such a workable, responsive state and, once fired, becomes a strong piece of metal. With all the varieties of Precious Metal Clay™ (including new PMC PRO™), BRONZclay™ (including new FASTfire BRONZclay™) and COPPRclay™, artists all over the world are embracing the freedom and potential offered by a little piece of clay. As artists continued to work with it and share their discoveries, there arose a need for a line of PMC products and tools. Metal clay’s potential and its devoted following continues today, supported by exciting evolutions of the clay itself, innovative tools and the adventurous spirit of the artists and designers who love working with it. Whether you are just starting out in the medium, or are already hooked, you will find everything you need—from the clay to the forming, firing and finishing tools to the creative ideas—to immerse yourself in the world of metal clay.

PMC PRO™ vessel by Celie Fago

Time to play! SILVER PMC® STARTER KITS Get started quickly and easily with the help of well-known PMC® expert Tim McCreight! The kit includes not only PMC, but also a shrinkage ruler and a special booklet written by Tim. The booklet contains a step-by-step project designed especially for the PMC variety in your kit and a discussion on choosing the PMC variety best suited to your particular projects. Three kits are available below. Silver PMC3™ Starter Kit Silver PMC3™ Starter Kit

This kit includes Tim McCreight’s PMC3™ booklet, a two-sided PMC® ruler, 25 grams of PMC3, a 15-gram jar of PMC3 slip and a 9-gram syringe of PMC3 slip. Description Silver PMC3™ starter kit

Order # 100-982

kit $84.00

Silver PMC+™ Starter Kit This kit includes Tim McCreight’s PMC+™ booklet, a two-sided PMC® ruler, 28 grams of PMC+, an 18-gram jar of PMC+ slip and a 9-gram syringe of PMC+ slip. Silver PMC+™ Starter Kit

Description Silver PMC+™ starter kit

Order # 100-981

kit $94.00

Silver PMC® Sampler Kit This kit includes Tim McCreight’s PMC® booklet, a two-sided PMC ruler, 31 grams of original PMC, 28 grams of PMC+™ and 25 grams of PMC3™. Description Silver PMC® sampler kit PMC® guide

Silver PMC® Sampler Kit

Order # 100-983 100-973

kit $115.00 FREE

Important! All formulas of PMC® have a strong adverse reaction to aluminum. Do not use aluminum tools or allow your PMC to come into contact with any aluminum object.

5


S I LV E R O R I G I N A L P M C ®

& PMC PRO™

SHOULD I USE? ®

P MC

o r i g i n a l P M C®

• Your best economic value—you get more clay for your dollar. • Original formula shrinks more. Use this formula to create the smallest possible versions from Cold Mold-type molds.

P MC + ™

• Due to its lighter density, original formula is ideal for extra-large earrings. • Optimum working properties make this the best formula for texture transfers. P M C+™

• Fires quickly, making it the ideal for demonstrations and teaching environments. • A bit more dense than original PMC®, this formula is better suited for rings, • PMC+ is stronger than original PMC and less prone to breakage. • Available in a paper form that’s ideal for origami-style projects and fold-forms. P M C3™

• When fired at 1650° for two hours, PMC3™ is the strongest fine silver metal clay available. • Low-fire attributes make this formula ideal for use with various gemstones and glass. • In its clay state, PMC3 is softer than PMC+™, offering working properties similar

PMC PRO ™

P MC 3 ™

buttons and any pieces that may take some abuse or stress.

to original PMC® that make it versatile enough for nearly any metal clay technique.

PMC PRO™

• Once fired, this formula is 2–3 times stronger than Original PMC®, making it the go-to formula for rings, delicate designs and functional components that require strength.

• Longer working time makes PMC PRO™ ideal for carving and joining. • Rugged! Takes three times as much pressure to bend compared to other silver clay.

Top three pieces by Yvonne M. Padilla; bottom piece by Hattie Sanderson

WHICH PMC

®

SILVER PMC+™ PMC+™ shrinks less and has a stronger molecular bond than original-formula PMC®. It fires at a lower temperature, allowing you to combine sterling findings with your PMC+ before firing.

B A

C

PMC+ paper is a thin, flexible sheet that allows you the creative freedom to fold, form, onlay, weave or decorate PMC. Each sheet has a thickness of .01" (30 ga.) before firing and about .009" after firing; contains 5g silver. Made in Japan. Composition: 90% fine silver powder, 10% water and organic binder Shrinkage: 12% Color: Pickle white Physical Properties: • Firing temp.: 1650°F (900°C) for two hours to achieve highest hardness and maximum durability; or 1470°F (800°C) for 30 minutes; or 1560°F (850°C) for 20 minutes; or 1650°F (900°C) for 10 minutes. • Melting point: 1762°F (960°C) • Density after firing: 9.15 specific gravity (rolled silver = 10.5 specific gravity) Form A. Clay

B. Slip C. D. Paper, E. 5g sheet

D E Easily extrude PMC® slip with the PMC Easy Squeeze (see page 23).

6

Pkg Qty 45-gram 28-gram 18-gram 6-gram 18-gram jar 9-gram syringe 3cm x 12cm 6cm x 6cm

Order # 100-883 100-880 100-881 100-885 100-882 100-884 100-887 100-886

1-4 5-9 10-14 pkg pkg pkg $72.13 $70.13 $68.13 45.76 44.26 42.76 30.46 29.46 28.46 11.74 11.49 11.24 32.46 31.21 32.46 20.23 19.73 19.23 12.91 12.41 11.91 12.91 12.41 11.91

PMC® prices are based on a $18 silver market; please call for current pricing. Also be sure to inquire about additional quantity price breaks.

riogrande.com

800.545.6566


S I LV E R P M C 3 ™ & P M C + ™ PMC™ PRO Introducing the fourth generation of Precious Metal Clay™! PMC PRO™ silver clay is significantly stronger than Original PMC®, making it the ideal choice for rings, delicate designs and functional components such as clasps, hinges and prongs— anything that requires a bit more oomph! Please Note: During firing, PMC PRO must be embedded in coconut shell–based activated carbon in a firing pan (see page 14). Made in Japan. Composition: Metal powder (90% fine silver, 10% copper alloy), water and organic binder Shrinkage: 15–20% Color: Gray Physical Properties: • Firing temp.: 1400°F (760°C) for 1 hour in a firing pan, embedded in coconut shell–based activated carbon (ensure there is ½" of carbon surrounding each piece; avoid using too much carbon, as this will reduce the temperature inside the container). For one or two small pieces, it is possible to fire at the same temperature and reduce firing time to 30 mins. For larger pieces and full loads, fire at the same temperature for 2 hours. • Melting point: 1450°F (790°C) • Density after firing: 9.5 specific gravity Form A. Clay

Pkg Qty 25-gram 50-gram

Order # 100-769 100-768

1-4 pkg

A

5-9 10-14 pkg pkg call for pricing call for pricing

SILVER PMC3™ PMC3™ fires at very low temperatures and is the strongest of the fine silver PMC® varieties when fired for two hours at 1650°F. It has a finer, smoother composition that’s easy to work with and manipulate. Embed findings with confidence—a lower firing temperature means they won’t be heat-damaged. Made in Japan. Composition: 90% fine silver powder, 10% water and organic binder Shrinkage: 12% Color: Pickle white Physical Properties: • Firing temp.: 1650°F (900°C) for two hours to achieve highest hardness and maximum durability; or 1110°F (600°C) for 45 minutes; or 1200°F (650°C) for 20 minutes; or 1290°F (700°C) for 10 minutes. • Melting point: 1762°F (960°C) • Density after firing: 9.3 specific gravity (rolled silver = 10.5 specific gravity) Form B. Clay

C. Slip D.

Pkg Qty 50-gram 25-gram 16-gram 9-gram 6.3-gram 15-gram jar 9-gram syringe

Order # 100-775 100-771 100-770 100-776 100-773 100-772 100-774

1-4 5-9 10-14 pkg pkg pkg $88.04 $85.04 $82.04 44.02 42.52 41.02 26.30 28.30 27.30 16.73 14.48 15.48 12.91 12.41 12.16 28.21 27.21 26.21 20.23 19.73 19.23

B

C

D

SILVER ORIGINAL PMC® Versatile PMC® entices you to roll up your sleeves and dig in. Pinch it, roll it, cut it, shape it. Then fire it like clay, and it comes out of the kiln a pure silver object. Anything you can do with clay, you can do with PMC! Made in Japan. Composition: 77% fine silver powder, 23% water and organic binder Shrinkage: 28% Color: Pickle white Physical Properties: • Firing temp.: 1650°F (900°C) for 2 hours • Melting point: 1762°F (960°C) • Density after firing: 7.92 specific gravity (rolled silver = 10.5 specific gravity) E.

Form Clay

Pkg Qty 50-gram 31-gram 20-gram 7-gram

Order # 100-997 100-990 100-996 100-998

1-4 5-9 10-14 pkg pkg pkg $77.04 $74.04 $72.04 47.50 46.00 44.50 31.62 30.62 29.62 12.32 12.07 11.82

E

7


AURA 22 & KEUM-BOO

“ Look, Ma, no solder!”

AURA 22 Aura 22 is a liquid form of 22K gold that can be painted onto your fine or sterling silver designs, then fired to permanently bond the gold to the silver surface. Unlike other embellishment processes, such as gold electroplating, this remarkable liquid (containing 91.6% pure gold and 8.4% pure silver) requires no special equipment. Apply it with a paint brush, creating accents on jewelry as freely and easily as brushing paint onto canvas.

—Barbara Fernald

Made in Japan Description Aura 22, 1-gram jar

Order # 600-800

1-4 each $68.71

5-9 10+ each each $64.71 $60.71

Necklace by Barbara Fernald 2006 Saul Bell Design Award Second Place Winner, PMC®

Prices are based on a $1200 gold market; please call for current pricing.

Paint it GOLD . . . with Aura 22 1) Fire your PMC® piece at any of the recommended firing schedules for the type of clay used. 2) The fired piece must be completely clean and have a “kiln white” surface. Note: After firing the PMC, don’t touch the piece where Aura 22 will be applied; oil from your hands will prevent Aura 22 from fusing to the surface. If the piece is not clean or if it has been handled excessively, heat-clean it before applying Aura 22 by heating it to dull red with a torch and letting it air cool. You can also clean the piece by placing it in a kiln and raising the temperature over 1000°F. If you are not sure if the piece is clean, err on the side of caution and heat-clean it. 3) Once the piece is clean, paint a thin layer of silver PMC slip onto areas where Aura 22 will be applied. Allow the slip to dry. 4) Apply 2–3 layers of Aura 22 on the slip surface, allowing it to dry between each layer. 5) Place the piece on a soldering pad or kiln shelf (page 62). Using a torch (pages 59–61), gently apply heat to the entire piece until it turns red, fusing the Aura 22 to the PMC. You will notice the Aura 22 has fused to the PMC once the Aura 22 appears a few shades lighter. 6) While the piece is still hot from firing, use a pair of tweezers (page 48) to hold it and burnish the Aura 22 using an agate burnisher (page 49). This will help to lock the gold Aura 22 and silver PMC together. 7) If desired, polish the piece by hand or in a tumbler.

Christine Dhein of The Revere Academy of Jewelry Arts shows you how to enhance silver and PMC® designs using the beautiful, ancient technique of keum-boo. KEUM-BOO: BEYOND THE BASICS DVD Covers advanced jewelry making techniques such as roller printing and hollow form construction. Learn how to bond gold to a three-dimensional, textured surface, how to make repairs and much more. 90 minutes. KEUM-BOO: THE ART OF BONDING GOLD TO SILVER DVD Perfect for anyone who wants an introduction to the keum-boo process, this volume teaches by showing how to create a pair of earrings and add patina. 60 minutes. Beyond the Basics DVD

PMC® bracelet made using keum-boo process by Celie Fago, 2007 Saul Bell Design Award finalist.

560-236 $59.95

The Art of Bonding Gold to Silver DVD 560-235 $49.95

23.5KY 23.5K YELLOW FOIL FOR KEUM-BOO Size

Order #

each

KEUM-BOO ON SILVER BOOK 3½" x 3½" (approx.) 623-013 $64.37 by Celie Fago Artist and instructor Celie Fago introduces you to the beautiful process of keum-boo (fusing pure gold foil to silver). Keum-Boo on Silver You will learn every step of this unique process—using your tools, preperation, application and finishing—through color photographs and detailed instruction. A valuable resource for all skill levels. Softbound; 48 pages. 550-605

8

$16.95

riogrande.com

800.545.6566


PMC

®

GOLD, RAW MATERIALS, PMC GUILD

JROG

Gold PMC® prices are based on a $1200 market; please ask for current pricing when you order. Also be sure to inquire about additional quantity price breaks.

22K YELLOW GOLD PMC® This 22-karat gold variety is the strongest PMC® material made (as strong as 18K gold) and provides the color and value of highkarat gold with a toughness usually found only in lower karats. Its workability is much like silver PMC3™; it’s water soluble and re-useable. Suitable for torch- or kiln-firing. After firing, refine it as you would any gold. Composition: 91.7% pure gold, 8.3% silver, water and organic binder Shrinkage: 12% Color: Rich yellow Physical Properties: • Firing temperatures: 1290°F (700°C) for 90 mins.; 1380°F (750°C) for 60 mins.; 1560°F (850°C) for 30 mins.; or 1650°F (900°C) for 10 mins. • Melting point: 1832°F (1000°C) Made in Japan Form Clay

Size 10-gram 3-gram

Order # 600-982 600-981

each $547.10 172.13

A N OT E A B O U T P U R E G O L D & P M C ® Pure gold will not firescale or oxidize when heated. Incorporate it into your PMC® designs and fire! They’ll fuse together to create a strong metallurgical bond.

Sheet

24K YELLOW GOLD SHEET & ROUND WIRE ¼-Hard Order gold sheet in sizes up to 2" x 6".

30-ga. Round Wire 28 26 24 22

See a full selection of raw materials at riogrande.com.

Description Gauge Sheet 30

Round wire

28 26 24 22

1/1000" .010

.013 .016 .020 .025

Approx. dwt./ mm Square Inch .25 2.04 dwt./ Foot .33 .307 .40 .490 .50 .770 .65 1.23

Order # 608-030

Minimum Purchase 1" x .5"

608-128 608-126 608-124 608-122

39" 25" 16" 10"

All gold raw materials (sheet, wire) are custom cut. Each purchase is sold by weight (pennyweight).

JOIN THE PMC GUILD! The PMC Guild is an educational organization whose mission includes providing support, instruction, research and exposure for artists working in metal clay. Members not only benefit from these important efforts, but also from the special features of the PMC Guild website, including the ability to promote classes and access the full ten-year archive of the Guild’s publications. Membership includes: • Four copies each year of fusion, the quarterly journal of the PMC Guild, packed with information and news of special importance to metal clay artists. • PMC Guild Annual, a full-color book featuring photos of some of the best work being done in metal clay around the world. • Discounted rate for the biennial PMC Conference. • Access to members-only features online. To join the PMC Guild, visit pmcguild.com.

PMC PRO™ pendant by Tim McCreight

9


F I N E S I LV E R R AW M AT E R I A L S A

B

C

A N O T E A B O U T F I N E S I LV E R & P M C ® Fine silver will not firescale or oxidize when heated. Incorporate it into your PMC® designs and fire! They’ll fuse together to create a strong metallurgical bond. Important: We do not recommend firing sterling findings or raw materials with PMC. .999 FINE SILVER SHEET Dead Soft 6" x 36" silver sheet; when you order, one dimension must be 6".

D

E

F

G H I J K L M N

O P Q R .

S T U V W X Y Z A1 B1 C1 D1

E1

F1

10

All silver raw materials (sheet, strip, wire) are custom cut; each item is sold by weight (troy ounces) and priced at current market at the time you order. Prices shown for items E1 and F1 are based on a $18 silver market. Please call for exact pricing based on current daily market.

A. B. C. D. E. F.

Gauge 28 26 24 22 20 18

Approx. 1/1000" .013 .016 .020 .025 .032 .040

Approx. mm .33 .40 .50 .65 .80 1.00

Size/Oz. 6" x 2½" 6" x 2" 6" x 1½" 6" x 13⁄16" 6" x 1" 6" x ¾"

Weight 6" x 1" .443 oz. .531 oz. .617 oz. .824 oz. 1.063 oz. 1.343 oz.

Order # 101-928 101-926 101-924 101-922 101-920 101-918

Minimum Purchase 6" x 1" 6" x 1" 6" x 1" 6" x 1" 6" x .5" 6" x .5"

.999 FINE SILVER CLOISONNÉ STRIP Dead Soft Width x Thickness G. .060" x .005" H. .040" x .010"

Width x Thickness 1.50 x .13mm 1.02 x .25mm

Sold on 1-oz. spools; please call for pricing Length/ Oz. Order # 50.00 ft. 102-202 33.00 ft. 102-200

.999 FINE SILVER STRIP Dead Soft Plain Gauge I. 28 J. 28 K. 30 L. 28 M. 28 N. 26

Width x Thickness 3⁄32" x .013" 1⁄8" x .013" 1⁄8" x .010" 3⁄16" x .013" ¼" x .013" 1/8" x .016"

Width x Thickness 2.38 x .33mm 3.18 x .33mm 3.18 x .25mm 4.76 x .33mm 6.35 x .33mm 3.18 x .41mm

Length/ Oz. 13.50 ft. 9.00 ft. 12.50 ft. 6.00 ft. 4.75 ft. 8.75 ft.

Order # 101-071 101-001 101-091 101-051 101-076 101-003

1/8"

x .016" x .013" 1/8" x .010" 3/16" x .013"

3.18 x 4.1mm 3.18 x .33mm 3.18 x .26mm 4.76 x .33mm

7.58 ft. 10.80 ft. 11.90 ft. 7.00 ft.

104-006 101-002 104-005 101-052

1/8"

3.18 x .41mm 3.18 x .33mm 3.18 x .26mm 4.76 x .41mm 4.76 x .33mm 4.76 x .26mm

8.62 ft. 11.25 ft. 12.99 ft. 5.56 ft. 7.25 ft. 8.85 ft.

104-008 101-005 104-007 104-010 101-055 104-009

Serrated Bezel O. 26 28 30 P. 28

1/8"

Scalloped Bezel Q. 26 28 30 R. 26 28 30

x .016" x .013" 1/8" x .010" 3/16" x .016" 3/16" x .013" 3/16" x .010" 1/8"

.999 FINE SILVER ROUND WIRE Dead Soft Approx. Length/ Minimum Gauge 1/1000" mm Oz. Package Order # Purchase S. 30 .010 .25 192.00 ft. spool only 105-330 96 ft. 105-328 60 ft. T. 28 .013 .33 120.00 ft. spool only U. 26 .016 .40 75.00 ft. spool only 105-326 37.5 ft. V. 24 .020 .50 47.62 ft. spool/coil* 105-324 24 ft. W. 22 .025 .65 29.85 ft. spool/coil* 105-322 15 ft. X. 20 .032 .80 18.80 ft. coil only 105-320 9.5 ft. Y. 18 .040 1.00 11.82 ft. coil only 105-318 6 ft. Z. 16 .051 1.30 7.41 ft. coil only 105-316 3.5 ft. A1. 14 .064 1.60 4.65 ft. coil only 105-314 2.5 ft. B1. 12 .081 2.00 3.00 ft. coil only 105-312 1.5 ft. C1. 10 .102 2.59 1.84 ft. coil only 105-310 1 ft. D1. 8 .128 3.25 1.158 coil only 105-308 7 in. *Normally delivered spooled; can be coiled by request. A Note on Spooling: We charge 30¢ (each additional spool) for spooling wire on more than one spool.

.999 FINE SILVER MICRO-MESH Each sheet measures 6cm x 6cm (211/32" x 211/32"). Mesh E1. Fine F1. Medium

Wires/cm Thickness 11 .010" 6 .022"

Order # 100-101 100-103

Sold in packages of 4 1-4 5-9 10-19 pkg pkg pkg $16.00 $14.50 $13.00 25.00 22.50 20.25

riogrande.com

800.545.6566


EMBEDDABLES™ EMBEDDABLES® FIRE-IN-PLACE FINDINGS FOR METAL CLAY Silver Embeddables® are made with our exclusive silver alloy and can be safely fired with all varieties of silver PMC® and are great for use with glass-fusing techniques.

S I LV E R

Small notched pegs push easily into the clay; simply position the finding and fire according to the directions for the clay you’re using. Settings are pre-notched for easy stone-setting. Bronze Embeddables® are ideal for BRONZclay™. Copper Embeddables® are ideal for COPPRclay™ designs and are also suitable for glass-fusing. Silver Description A. Pendant bail B. C.

Bail Size (mm) 11.8 x 5.9 14.2 x 7.7 18.5 x 9.6

Size (mm) 6 x 3.9 8 x 5.3 10 x 6.4

D. Eyelet E. F. G. H.

Size (mm) 6.4 x 3 7.1 x 3.6 7.2 x 4.1 9.1 x 5.1 11 x 6.1

Eyelet (OD) 1.6mm 2mm 2.5mm 3mm 3.5mm

I. Round ReadyJ. Set™ settings K. L. M.

Stone Size 2mm 3mm 4mm 5mm 6mm

Order # 687-045 687-046 687-047

Sold in packages of 2 1-2 3-5 6-11 pkg pkg pkg $6.27 $5.02 $4.20 8.64 7.24 6.27 14.46 12.47 11.22

687-011 687-012 687-013 687-014 687-015

Sold in packages of 20 $4.55 $3.94 $3.67 5.99 5.19 4.83 7.68 6.65 6.19 12.74 11.03 10.27 17.34 15.61 13.87

687-072 687-073 687-074 687-075 687-076

Sold in packages of 10 $5.61 $4.99 $4.37 7.26 5.81 4.87 9.35 7.83 6.78 11.24 9.73 8.39 13.95 12.98 12.02

Bronze N. Pendant bail O. P.

11.8 x 5.9 14.2 x 7.7 18.5 x 9.6

6 x 3.9 8 x 5.3 10 x 6.4

687-048 687-049 687-050

Sold in packages of 10 $5.90 $4.70 $3.95 9.80 7.85 6.60 12.55 11.70 10.80

Q. Eyelet R. S. T. U.

6.4 x 3 7.1 x 3.6 7.2 x 4.1 9.1 x 5.1 11 x 6.1

1.6mm 2mm 2.5mm 3mm 3.5mm

687-016 687-017 687-018 687-019 687-020

Sold in packages of 50 $5.40 $4.75 $4.05 6.30 5.40 4.50 8.15 7.00 5.80 11.25 9.40 7.50 11.55 10.00 9.35

V. Round ReadyW. Set™ settings X. Y. Z.

2mm 3mm 4mm 5mm 6mm

687-085 687-086 687-087 687-088 687-089

Sold in packages of 20 $3.70 $2.95 $2.00 4.70 3.55 2.95 6.70 5.75 4.80 9.55 8.15 6.80 10.35 9.20 7.75

Copper A1. Pendant bail B1. C1.

11.8 x 5.9 14.2 x 7.7 18.5 x 9.6

6 x 3.9 8 x 5.3 10 x 6.4

687-368 687-369 687-370

Sold in packages of 10 $5.95 $4.75 $4.00 10.05 8.05 6.75 14.00 13.05 12.10

D1. Eyelet E1. F1. G1. H1.

6.4 x 3 7.1 x 3.6 7.2 x 4.1 9.1 x 5.1 11 x 6.1

1.6mm 2mm 2.5mm 3mm 3.5mm

687-363 687-364 687-365 687-366 687-367

Sold in packages of 50 $5.05 $4.45 $3.80 6.65 5.70 4.75 8.20 7.05 5.85 9.75 8.80 7.80 11.75 10.20 9.50

I1. Round ReadyJ1. Set™ settings K1. L1. M1.

2mm 3mm 4mm 5mm 6mm

687-371 687-372 687-373 687-374 687-375

Sold in packages of 20 $3.85 $3.05 $2.05 4.80 3.60 3.00 7.10 6.05 5.05 9.85 8.45 7.05 11.85 10.90 9.90

See page 16 to learn how to use Embeddables®!

B

A

D

E

I

J

C

F

K

G

L

H

M

BRONZE

N

O

Q

S

R

V

W

P

Y

X

U

T

Z

COPPER

A1

B1

D1

I1

E1

J1

C1

F1

K1

Firing Information Metal Temperature Silver 1650°F Bronze 1550°F Copper 1700°F–1800°F

G1

L1

H1

M1

Time up to 2 hrs. up to 3 hrs. up to 3 hrs.

11


COPPRclay™ & BRONZclay™ & WIRE

play time just got more colorful! BRONZclay™ and COPPRclay™ cuff by Patrik Kusek

A B C

COPPRCLAY™ COPPRclay™ is versatile and economical—sculpt big and let your imagination go! COPPRclay can be pinched, rolled, sculpted, cut or manipulated any way you like. Then fire it, and the binder burns away, leaving a solid, pure copper object. Because COPPRclay is pure copper, it can be used for enameling; make sure to follow the recommended firing schedule detailed in the instructions. The 30-gram size is perfect for instructors, who generally require smaller amounts in the classroom. Please Note: During firing, COPPRclay must be embedded in coconut shell–based activated carbon (do not use coal-based, acid-washed carbon). Carbon and firing pans are sold separately; see page 14. Composition: Pure copper, water & non-toxic binding materials Shrinkage: 20% Firing Temp.: Ramp at full speed to 1700°F–1800°F (927°C–982°C) and hold for 3 hours (total firing time, including ramp time, will be about 4 hours). Please Note: Most firings perform well at 1700°F, however, if your pieces are not sintering properly, try increasing the temperature to 1800°F. If blistering occurs at 1800°F, slightly decrease the firing temperature. If you plan to enamel the piece, follow the recommended firing schedule listed in the instructions. Form A. Clay B. C.

Size 200-gram 100-gram 30-gram

Order # 132-008 132-007 132-006

1-2 3-5 6-9 each each each $35.98 $34.50 $32.98 19.98 18.98 18.50 8.55 8.15 7.95

G H

D E F BRONZCLAY™ BRONZclay™ provides an incredible artistic range and, because it’s bronze, it’s also extremely economical. You can use it very affordably for large pieces—even sculptures—and for creating specialized tools! Form it, dry it, then fire—the binders burn away, leaving a solid, pure bronze object. Note the 30-gram size! It’s perfect for teachers who require smaller amounts in the classroom. Please Note: During firing, BRONZclay must be embedded in coconut shell–based or coal-based, acid-washed activated carbon. Carbon and firing pans are sold separately; see page 14. Composition: 89% copper, 11% tin, water & non-toxic binding materials Shrinkage: 17–20% Firing Temp.: Ramp at slow speed to 1550°F (843°C) and hold for 3 hours Form D. Clay E. F.

Size 200-gram 100-gram 30-gram

Order # 101-008 101-007 101-006

BRONZE ROUND WIRE Dead Soft Great for use with BRONZclay™ and COPPRclay™ designs, this CDA #521 alloy (92% copper/8% tin) has a melting point of 1880°F. Please Note: Although this wire is dead soft, it tends to be stiffer than deadsoft wires of the same gauge in other metals.

I J K

12

1-2 3-5 6-9 each each each $35.98 $34.50 $32.98 19.98 18.98 18.50 8.55 8.15 7.95

G. H. I. J. K.

Gauge 14 16 18 20 22

Approx. 1/1000" mm .064 1.60 .051 1.30 .040 1.00 .032 .80 .025 .65

Approx. Ft./Lb. 80 ft. 127 ft. 200 ft. 323 ft. 514 ft.

Order # 134-314 134-316 134-318 134-320 134-322

1-lb. coils; sold individually 1-2 3-5 6-11 each each each $23.25 $22.25 $21.35 23.25 22.25 21.35 23.25 22.25 21.35 23.45 22.40 21.50 23.60 22.55 21.65

riogrande.com

800.545.6566


FA S T f i re B R O N Z c l a y ™ & B R O N Z E M E TA L C L AY B O O K FASTFIRE BRONZCLAY™ The faster way to fire! FASTfire BRONZEclay™ drastically cuts your firing time—making it ideal for production work, the classroom, or for those times when you just want to bring your creations to life a bit quicker. With FASTfire, you can fire your pieces in 2 hours.

fire it FAST!

Just like original BRONZclay (facing page), FASTfire™ BRONZclay is versatile and economical—see how far (and big!) your designs can go! Please Note: During firing, FASTfire BRONZclay must be embedded coconut shell–based activated carbon. Carbon and firing pans are sold separately; see page 14. Composition: 90% copper, 10% tin, water & non-toxic binding materials Shrinkage: 5–10% Firing Temp.: Ramp at full speed to 1525°F (830°C) and hold for 2 hours. Form A. Clay B. C.

Size 30-gram 100-gram 200-gram

Order # 101-014 101-015 101-016

1-2 each $8.98 20.98 37.98

3-5 each $8.55 19.98 36.50

C

6-9 each $8.35 19.50 34.98

B A

BRONZE METAL CLAY

³

by Yvonne M. Padilla

Bronze clay exploded into the metal clay field and now here’s a well-designed book that can take you deep into that arena with imaginative and varied projects . . . a book that can quickly propel even the beginning metal clayer to a competent skill level using bronze clay.

³ BRONZE METAL CLAY BOOK by Yvonne M. Padilla

—Linda Kaye-Moses, author of Pure Silver Metal Clay Beads and designer of doming plates for metal clay

´

This is an important book for the field and I join the throngs of people who will thank you for writing it. Bravo! —Tim McCreight, world-renowned metal clay expert

´

Explore the remarkable potential of bronze metal clay in this colorful book. Discover the differences between bronze clay and silver clay, and learn intermediate as well as advanced techniques through 35 step-by-step projects for non-jewelry items and jewelry items such as earrings, necklaces, rings and bracelets. Exclusively through Rio, your book comes signed by the author . 550-712

$17.95

YVONNE is an accomplished metal clay designer, an enthusiastic teacher and a member of the Rio Grande Technical Support Team. She is one of the first artists in the United States to work extensively with bronze metal clay.

13


BRONZclay™/COPPRclay™ TOOLS STAINLESS STEEL FIRING PANS & LIDS BRONZclay™, FASTfire BRONZclay™, COPPRclay™ and PMC PRO™ must be fired in a firing pan filled with activated carbon (items F and G). Use a slotted lid (items D and E) when firing FASTfire BRONZclay to facilitate faster sintering. The small-sized pan (item C) is perfect for firing Accent Silver™ accents onto your metal clay piece (page 17). Items A–C include solid lids. A

Description Order # A. Firing pan 7" x 6½" x 4" B. With lid 7" x 6½" x 2½" C. 4¼" x 7" x 2½" D. Slotted lid 5½" x 6" (fits items A & B) E. 4¼" x 7" (fits item C)

B

703-202 703-206 703-225 703-199 703-220

1-3 each $24.50 23.50 23.50 13.25 15.25

4-9 each $23.30 22.35 22.35 11.25 13.25

10+ each $19.95 19.00 19.00 9.25 11.25

ACTIVATED CARBON BRONZclay™ and FASTfire BRONZclay™ can be fired in either type of activated carbon. The coconut shell–based carbon produces a light color patina on your pieces; the coal-based, acid-washed carbon creates a more intense color patina. Important: COPPRclay™ and PMC PRO™ must only be fired in the coconut shell–based activated carbon.

C

To prepare the carbon, place it inside a firing pan, cover with the lid and fire for 30 minutes at 1550°F. E

D

Description F. Coal-based, acid-washed carbon G. Coconut shell–based carbon

F

Order # 703-204 703-205

Sold in 5-lb. bags 1-3 4-9 10+ each each each $17.95 $15.95 $13.50 17.95 15.95 13.50

STAINLESS STEEL REMOVAL FORKS Use these removal forks to lift firing pans from the kiln and transfer them to a heat-safe material for cooling. Item H fits items A and B; two wood handles ensure good grip and leverage; tines are 6½" long. Item I fits the small firing pan, item C.

G

Length H. 36" I. 16"

Order # 703-203 100-944

1 each $12.95 14.95

2+ each $11.65 13.45

H I

Stacking BRONZclay™ & COPPRclay™

for

Firing

BRONZclay™ and COPPRclay™ must be embedded in activated carbon inside a firing pan for proper firing. Make sure all pieces are completely surrounded by activated carbon. Fill your firing pan so it has ½"–1" of carbon covering the bottom. Place your piece(s) on the carbon. If you’re firing more than one piece, leave about ½" between them, and make sure they don’t touch the walls of the firing pan. Add another layer of activated carbon on top of the pieces. At this point, additional layers of pieces can be added following the same requirements. Once all layers are in place, top off the container with a final layer (minimum ½" thick) of activated carbon. Place the lid on the container, and place it in the kiln for firing.

14

Removing BRONZclay™ or COPPRclay™ pieces from the kiln? The range of colors and effects produced by the activated carbon is such a surprise, and is one of the best features about these clays.

riogrande.com

800.545.6566


BRONZclay™/COPPRclay™ TOOLS & KITS

It’s that ancient, rustic look—BRONZclay™

“Freedom of design!” —Yvonne M. Padilla

has added a timeless effect to my metal clay work. It comes out of the kiln looking like it’s been buried for centuries and still treasured! —Yvonne M. Padilla BRONZclay™ earrings by Yvonne M. Padilla

RIO BRONZCLAY™/COPPRCLAY™ TOOL KIT The perfect starter kit for working with BRONZclay™ and COPPRclay™. Tools come in a bronze-color canvas pouch, keeping them separate from other metal clay tools to avoid contamination. Kit includes: • 2½" bent burnisher • Cool Roller & size 4 spacers • #6 soft taper-point chisel Colour Shaper™ • awl • polyblade • retractable scalpel • 6" steel ruler • greenware file • paint/slip brush • roll-up pouch Description Order # A. Rio BRONZclay™COPPRclay™ tool kit 111-579

A

kit $39.95

C Choose your Rio kiln with or without a convenient bead door.

ADVANCED BRONZCLAY™/COPPRCLAY™ KITS WITH KILN These comprehensive kits have everything you need to create with BRONZclay™ and COPPRclay™—even the kiln! Includes: • Rio 8-program, 120V kiln (#100-945) or Rio 120V kiln with bead door (#100-979) • BRONZclay™, 200 grams • COPPRclay™, 200 grams • Rio BRONZclay™/COPPRclay tool kit • Rio PVC work surface • Double-ended carving tools, set/4 • Solderite™ shelf kit • Pocket needle files, set/6 • Carving tools, set/5 • Rio 1-qt. rotarty tumbler • Stainless steel firing pan • Polishing paper, asst./12 • Stainless steel shot, 3 lbs. • Half-round sanding sticks, set/6 • Tweezers, 18"L • Super Sunsheen burnishing compound, 4 oz. • Kiln glasses, IR #3 • Rehydration kit • Firing pan removal fork • Rio Cold Mold™ compound, 1 lb. • Coal-based, acid-washed activated carbon, 5 lbs. • Coconut shell–based activated carbon, 5 lbs. Description B. Kit with standard kiln C. Kit with bead-door kiln Kit without kiln (not shown)

Order # 100-945 100-979 100-950

B

kit $1,135.00 1,175.00 445.00

BRONZCLAY™/COPPRCLAY CARVING SET This carving set has become the hands-down favorite of our in-house metal clay expert! These lightweight tools are extra-sharp and easy to control, offering more freedom to carve large pieces. Wood octagonal handles keep carvers from rolling. Set includes two V-groove tips (one small, one large), two gouge tips (one small, one large) and one skew tip. Description D. Carving set

Order # 700-210

set $65.00

D

15


“I love the workability of COPPRclay™— imagination becomes They’re a must-have reality!”

component! I keep Embeddables® on

—MariaElena Baca

hand not just for use in my metal clay designs, but also for my fused glass pieces. Easy to use & beautiful!

what you’ll need: • • • • • • • • • • •

—MariaElena Baca

COPPRclay™ (#132-008, pg. 12) • CoolSlip (#111-448, pg. 23) • Rio PMC® kiln (#703-117, pg. 62) Rio BRONZclay™/COPPRclay™ tool kit (#111-579, pg. 15) Chi’ing Dynasty Stamp, “Cherry Blossom” (#111-554, pg. 26) • STUSA™ flat-nose pliers (#111-051, see riogrande.com) • Rio PVC work surface (#111-567, pg. 21) Round copper wire, 22-ga. (#132-322, see riogrande.com) Firing pan & removal fork (#703-202 & #703-206, pg. 14) • 3M sponge sanding pads (#337-318, pg. 67) Coconut shell–based activated carbon (#703-205, pg. 14) MIDAS® brass, bronze & copper oxidizer (#331-040,see riogrande.com) Copper Embeddables® eyelets & 4mm setting (#687-363 & #687-373 pg. 11) Sterling 2.3mm rose gold–plated oval chain (#624-958/B, see riogrande.com) Klay Kutters, circle & teardrop (#111-390 & #111-462, pg. 41) • Color-quick thickness guides (#111-569, pg. 23) Wax jewel-setting sticks (#116-950, see riogrande.com) • 4mm chrome diopside (#083-102, pg. 71)

COPPRclay™ earrings by MariaElena Baca

PROJECT Earrings Using Embeddables Before you begin. Spray the roller, work surface and Dynasty Stamp with CoolSlip spray to ensure clean, detailed, and distortion-free results. Roll out your clay 9-cards thick using the blue thickness guides. This thickness allows enough room to properly embed the copper findings. Place your rolled-out clay on top of the Dynasty Stamp and apply firm and even pressure as you roll across the clay. Experiment to achieve the definition you desire without thinning your clay sheet more than 1 card thickness (fig. a). Cut out 2 large circles and 10 teardrops using Klay Kutters (fig. b). When all your shapes have been cut, peel away the remaining clay to reveal your shapes. Using the retractable scalpel, make a slice into the edge of one of the shapes (fig. c). Fill the slot with slip and insert the Embeddables® eyelet into the slot. The ring area of the eyelet should rest against the edge of the shape for a secure result. Press the slot firmly closed to hold the eyelet

d

a

16

e

b

f

c

g

®

(fig. d) and set aside. Add slip to the outside of the joint if necessary to completely fill any recesses (fig. e). Don’t worry at this point if you have excess, this can be cleaned up after the pieces are fully dried. Repeat the steps in figures c–e to set the Embeddables™ eyelets in the remaining teardrops and circles. For the center setting, simply press the setting into each circle at the desired location while it is still malleable (fig. f). Secure the setting using a liberal amount of slip. The four remaining teardrops will become your leaves. Score the backs of the leaves lightly, cement in place using slip and allow to dry (fig. g). Use 3M sanding sponges to smooth the edges and to remove excess slip from around all Embeddables™ and joints. Firing. Embed the COPPRclay™ pieces in coconut shell–based activated carbon inside a firing pan and place it in the kiln (we recommend arranging the pieces toward the back of the pan for best firing results). Use a full ramp to 1700°F and fire for 3 hours. continued on facing page

riogrande.com

800.545.6566


A C C E N T S I LV E R ™ & C L AY- B O N D ™ BRONZclay™ pendant with Accent Silver™ created by MariaElena Baca

ACCENT SILVER™ AND COMPLETE STARTER KIT Add silver-color accents to BRONZclay™ and COPPRclay™ designs with easy-to-use Accent Silver™. The starter kit (item B) includes: • Accent Silver™; 5g jar • Small steel hand brush • Pen-style steel brush • Acrylic work surface, 4" x 2¾"; set/2 • Small stainless steel firing pan; 4¼"W x 7"D x 2½"H • Stainless steel firing pan removal fork • Murena-Sable premium artist’s brush • Palette knife, 6"L x 3⁄8"W • 3M sanding sponge pads (1 each 80-, 150-, 320-, 600- and 1000-grit) Description A. Accent Silver™; 10-gram jar B. Accent Silver™ starter kit

Order # 100-941 100-946

A

B. Complete starter kit

1 2 each each $39.95 $37.95 95.00 89.00

C

ACCENT SILVER™ TOOLS Accent Silver™ must be fired embedded in coconut shell–based activated carbon (page 14) inside a firing pan (item C). Use the stainless steel fork (item D) to remove the pan after firing. The pen-style steel brush (item E) burnishes Accent Silver™ after firing. The steel bristles on the steel hand brushes (items F and G) are ideal for a first-pass polish or for cleaning the piece after it’s been removed from the kiln (also great for harder metals such as BRONZclay™ and COPPRclay™). Use one acrylic work surface (item H) for mixing Accent Silver, the other to hold your piece in place while you apply it. C. D. E. F. G. H.

Description Firing pan; 4¼"W x 7"D x 2½"H Firing pan removal fork; 16"L Pen-style steel brush; 4¾"L Small steel hand brush; 7¼"L Steel short-bristle hand brush; 8½"L Acrylic work surface, 4" x 2¾"; set/2

Order # 703-225 100-944 100-940 100-938 111-939 100-939

I.

Order # 115-601 115-602

Twist the end to retract the brush on item E for damage-free storage.

1-2 3-5 each each $23.50 $22.35 14.95 13.45 12.50 10.50 8.95 7.95 8.95 7.95 9.95 8.95

CLAY-BOND™ No need to use a torch or solder to join metal clay pieces! Clay-Bond™ is a powder that turns into a solder paste after you add water. Simply brush it onto the pieces you intend to combine using a brush with short, stiff bristles, then fire the piece embedded in activated carbon. The result is a strong joint between the metal pieces. The binder contained in Clay-Bond dries quickly and holds the pieces in place, so there’s no risk of pieces shifting before firing. Description 5-gram jar 10-gram jar (not shown)

D

E

F

G

1 2 each each $21.00 $19.00 32.00 30.00

H

I

continued from facing page

Once your pieces have fired, you can finish them by hand or with a flexshaft, Dremel® tool or tumbler. Use the MIDAS® brass, bronze & copper oxidizer to emphasize the cherry blossom designs. Setting: The prongs on the Embeddables® settings are pre-notched. Simply place your stone in the setting using a wax jewel-setting stick, being careful to keep it level, then tighten the prongs with pliers (fig. h).

h

Connect the leaf drops using jump rings (see riogrande.com) or use open links of the cable chain itself (fig. i). Form ear wires using 22-ga. round copper wire.

i

Finished? Not quite! Find that perfect display and just-right packaging at riogrande. com!

17


PMC

®

KITS

G E T S TA R T E D WITH THE K I T ! Whether you’re just starting out or you’re already addicted to working with PMC®, we’ve got the kit for you! Choose the version that’s best-suited for your needs and it will feel right at home in your studio!

BASIC PMC® KIT WITH TORCH A great starter kit! Includes the Rio PMC® tool kit and a torch for hand-firing. Kit includes: • Rio PMC® tool kit • Rio PMC® torch-firing kit w/screens & stand • PMC3™; 25-gram lump and 15-gram jar of slip • Rio 2-part mold compound; 1 lb. • 3M Tri-M-Ite® polishing paper asst.; pkg/12 • Straight, serrated steel utility tweezers • Pocket needle file set, cut #2; set/6 • PMC® greenware file; pkg/3 • MIDAS® liver of sulfur; 8-oz. can • Rio PVC PMC® work surface • Sunshine® Cloth • PMC Basics DVD Description A. Basic kit with torch

A

Choose your Rio kiln with or without a convenient bead door.

E

D

18

Order # 100-928

kit $399.00

BASIC PMC® KIT WITH SPEEDFIRE™ This kit includes the SpeedFire™ cone system, which fires all varieties of PMC® and lets you see your pieces during the firing process. Kit includes: • Rio PMC® tool kit • PMC® Speedfire™ cone system • PMC3™; 25 grams • PMC3™ slip; 15-gram jar • Rio 2-part mold compound; 1 lb. • 3M Tri-M-Ite® polishing paper asst.; pkg/12 • Straight, serrated steel utility tweezers • Pocket needle file set, cut #2; set of 6 • PMC® greenware file; pkg/3 • MIDAS® liver of sulfur; 8-oz. can • Rio PVC PMC® work surface • Sunshine® Cloth • PMC Basics DVD Description C. Basic kit with SpeedFire™

C

kit $289.00

BASIC PMC® KIT WITH ULTRALITE KILN An excellent starter kit, this kit, including an Ultralite kiln, fires PMC+™, PMC3™ and PMC® Gold. Kit includes: • Ultralite kiln with three-piece drying disc set; 120 volts • PMC3™ clay; 25 grams • PMC3™ slip; 15-gram jar • Rio PVC PMC® work surface • Rio PMC® tool kit • Rio 2-part mold compound; 1 lb. • 3M Tri-M-Ite® polishing paper asst.; pkg/12 • Straight/serrated steel utility tweezers • Pocket needle file set, cut #2; set/6 • PMC® greenware file; pkg/3 • MIDAS® liver of sulfur; 8-oz. can • Sunshine® Cloth • PMC Basics DVD Description B. Basic kit with torch

B

Order # 100-925

Order # 100-924

kit $360.00

ADVANCED PMC® KITS WITH KILN For the serious PMC® artist! Kits include: • Rio 120V standard kiln (100-926) or Rio bead-door kiln (100-927) • PMC3™; 25-gram lump and 15-gram jar of slip • Rio PMC® tool kit • Rio 2-part mold compound; 1 lb. • 3M Tri-M-Ite® polishing paper asst.; pkg/12 • Rio single-barrel mini rotary tumbler • Super Sunsheen™ burnishing compound; 4 oz. • Pocket needle file set, cut #2; set/6 • PMC® greenware file; pkg/3 • Half-round sanding sticks; set/ 6 • MIDAS® liver of sulfur; 8-oz. can • Double-ended carving tools; set/4 • PMC® rehydration kit • Stainless steel shot; 3 lbs. • Kiln glasses • Rio PVC PMC® work surface • Solderite™ shelf kit • 18" tweezers • Sunshine® Cloth Description D. Kit with standard kiln E. Kit with bead-door kiln Kit without kiln (not shown)

Order # 100-926 100-927 100-929

riogrande.com

kit $1,090.00 1,130.00 425.00

800.545.6566


M E TA L C L AY M A S T E R TO O L K I T

“It’s all about building —I love the architectural ability.” “Locked Inside” by Dina Alexander 2008 Saul Bell Design Award First Place, PMC®

—Dina Alexander

111-593 Metal clay master kit

A

METAL CLAY MASTER TOOL KIT No stone was left unturned in creating this comprehensive master tool kit! This artist’s bucket, packed with every hand tool the metal clay artist needs to create, has been traveling with our in-house metal clay experts to trade shows and classes, and it’s no surprise that it’s gotten all the attention. Customers noticed it, wanted it, and asked for it—so here it is! Kit includes: • Rio PVC PMC® work surface • Slik Balm, 3.5-oz. tin • Rio Cold Mold, 1-oz. jar; pkg/6 • Rio PMC® tool kit • Delight™ paper clay modeling compound, two 3.17 oz. (90g) packages • Half-round sanding sticks set/6 • Makin®s Professional® Ultimate Clay Extruder™ • Pro-polish polishing pads; pkg/50 • Murena-Sable premium artist’s brush • Steel utility tweezers Description Metal clay master kit

Order # 111-593

• Sunshine® Cloth • Soft Colour Shapers™; set/5 • Makin’s® Mini Geo Clay Cutters; set/12 • Metal clay templates (fat rectangles, tapered squares, tapered rectangles); set/3 • Dynasty Stamp sampler kit (selection of Chi’ing, Aegean, La Mer & Tapestry stamps) • Color-Quick thickness guide set • Klay Kutter sets: circle; square; oval • Knife-style agate burnisher • 3M sponge sanding pads; assortment of 5

• Small steel hand brush • Artist’s bucket • Greenware file • Steel ruler; 6" • Rehydration kit • Clay shapers; set/5 • CoolSlip, 4-oz. bottle • Double-ended carving tools; set/4 • Acrylic work surfaces; set/2 • Ceramic Shrinkage Stopper set, size 7¾"–9"

kit $345.00

19


M E TA L C L AY TO O L S RIO PMC® TOOL KIT This perfect starter kit includes premium tools and accessories that greatly enhance your designs. Many items are available separately (see below), allowing you to add to kits you already own. Kit includes: • 2½" bent burnisher • Cool Roller™ & size-4 spacers • polyblade • #6 soft taper-point chisel Colour Shaper™ • retractable scalpel • shrinkage ruler • brass brush • paint/slip brush • roll-up pouch • awl Description A. Rio PMC® tool kit

A

B

Order # 111-411

METAL CLAY ROLLERS Roll out your metal clay to precise, repeatable thicknesses. These tools have a groove milled at each end to accept calibrated spacer rings—a size-4 spacer, for example, gives you a four-card thickness. To change thickness, roll off the spacers and roll on another size. Each includes one pair of size-4 spacers. Additional sizes available. Description B. PVC Cool Roller™; 6"L x 1" dia. C. Acrylic roller; 8"L x 1" dia.

Order # 111-426 111-832

each $17.75 17.75

Description Replacement spacers

Order # 111-383 111-430 111-431 111-432

Sold in packages of 4 (2 pairs) pkg $8.50 8.50 8.50 8.50

Size 3 4 5 7

BRASS BRUSH The fine bristles effectively burnish PMC® pieces; the curved handle improves access to the piece. Brush head: 1½"L x 3⁄8"W; bristles: 7⁄16"L.

C

Description D. Brass brush; 7¾" long

D

Order # 111-388

each $13.95

POLYBLADE This sharp, flexible, stainless steel blade makes smooth, curved cuts as well as micro-thin precision cuts in metal clay. E.

E

Description Polyblade; 6" long

Order # 111-385

each $10.95

RETRACTABLE SCALPELS FOR METAL CLAY These retractable scalpels are favorites of our in-house metal clay experts—the super-sharp blade makes it easy to cut metal clay. The blade is easily tucked away inside the plastic housing using a simple thumb slide. Available with a straight tip and curved tip.

F

G Description F. Straight; 4¼" long G. Curved; 4¼" long

H

Order # 111-563 111-564

Sold in packages of 3 pkg $12.95 12.95

AWL The steel, 13⁄8" needle tip on this versatile awl is heat-treated. Description H. Awl; 3½" long

Order # 111-386

each $8.95

BENT BURNISHER Use this highly polished, stainless steel burnisher to smooth and finish your metal clay designs. Bent 2½" tip helps you easily access detailed surfaces and tight areas.

I

I. front side

J

Description Bent burnisher; 6½" long

Order # 113-023

each $7.95

PMC® SHRINKAGE RULER Use before firing to account for shrinkage on PMC® designs.

back side

J.

20

kit $42.95

Description Shrinkage ruler; 6" long

Order # 100-975

riogrande.com

each $2.75

800.545.6566


WORK SURFACES

Item A has a quick-reference firing chart.

A

RIO PVC PMC® WORK SURFACE The Rio PVC work surface features a quick-reference firing chart and rulers, grids and pre-designed shapes to help you lay out PMC® work. Size A. 10" x 8"

Order # 111-567

each $16.95

PMC® TEFLON® WORK SURFACES These non-stick Teflon®-coated plastic work surfaces are a favorite among PMC® artists! Item B measures 9" x 9" (8" x 8" non-stick surface); item C measures 9" x 6" (8" x 5" non-stick surface). Replacement Teflon surfaces available for both sizes. Description B. Teflon®-coated work surface; 9" x 9" Replacement non-stick surface; 8" x 8" C. Teflon®-coated work surface; 9" x 6" Replacement non-stick surface; 8" x 5"

Order # 111-646 111-647 111-565 111-566

B

each $19.95 10.95 16.95 9.95

C

SIX-PIECE ACRYLIC SET FOR METAL CLAY This six-piece acrylic set provides slick surfaces for working with metal clay. Use the small size as a “snake roller”; use sheets together to form flat edges and structures. The set includes six sheets in four sizes: • two 4" x 23/4" • two 6" x 4" • one 6" x 8" • one 8" x 10"; use this size on top of the Rio PMC® work surface (item A) to determine measurements as you work. Description D. Acrylic set; set/6

Order # 400-909

set $17.95

NON-STICK METAL CLAY WORK SURFACE This small work surface is suitable for metal clay work. It features a non-stick silicone surface. Compact 6" x 6" size stores easily. Description E. Non-stick work surface; pkg/4

Order # 111-736

D

pkg $21.00

RUBBER BENCH BLOCK This rubber bench block offers a hard surface with just a bit of give and won’t mar your metal clay pieces. F.

Description Rubber bench block; 4"W x 4"D x 1"H

Order # 111-670

each $11.95

E F

21


WORK SURFACES & TOOLS

“It allows for spontaneous creativity!”

My work as a metalsmith continues to grow thanks to the variety of techniques PMC® allows. While I still use my hard-earned traditional metals skills, my tool

—CeCe Wire

box of techniques has doubled in size. —CeCe Wire

PMC® pendant by CeCe Wire

SELF-HEALING PRECISION WORK SURFACE & KNIFE KIT This work surface is marked with an 8" ruler and gridded in half-inch increments to help you lay out and cut your metal clay designs. Surface is self-healing, offering a smooth finish and long shelf life. Includes a 6" cutting knife with a 1" blade. Work surface also available separately.

A

Description A. Self-healing work surface kit; 9" x 5½" Self-healing work surface; pkg/2

Order # 111-737 111-739

kit $12.95 12.95

PLASTIC WORK SURFACE This large work surface features rulers (for both inches and centimeters) along its edges, is gridded in half-inch increments, and has 60° and 45° angled lines to help you lay out metal clay designs. B.

Description Plastic work surface; 12½" x 12½"

Order # 111-738

each $12.95

RETRACTABLE KNIVES WITH CLIP These retractable blades will soon be your go-to tool for all your metal clay work! Lightweight but durable, this narrow blade is ideal for detailed trimming and scoring in metal clay. Features a side clip, and fully retracts with a push of the button (just like your favorite pen!) and features a scored grip for a secure hold while cutting. Description C. Black; 5½" long Replacement blades D. Silver 5½" long Replacement blades

B

Order # 111-749 111-749/1 111-750 111-750/1

each $14.50 8.50 14.50 8.50

KNIFE & BLADE HOLDER KIT Keep your sharp metal-clay tools, such as blades, scribes and awls, safely stored but ready-to-retrieve in this handy kit. E.

C

Order # 111-751 111-752

kit $14.95 9.95

METAL CLAY STRIPPING TOOL Create perfectly parallel strips of clay in just about any width up to ½" (12mm) with this handy blade tool. The tool comes with five blades (2¼"W x ¾"H) and 12 pairs of brass washers. Arrange the blades and washers in a variety of configurations to achieve the cut width you want. CAUTION: Blades are very sharp; wear finger or hand protection and handle them with care.

D

E F

22

Description Knife & blade holder kit Replacement blade cartridge; pkg/15

F.

Description Metal clay stripping tool

Order # 111-594

riogrande.com

each $23.00

800.545.6566


SUPPLIES COLOR-QUICK THICKNESS GUIDE SET FOR METAL CLAY Use these convenient and durable plastic guides in pairs to roll metal clay to varying thicknesses—no more hassling with playing cards. Includes a color-coded chart and two of each color/card thickness. Guides measure 6"L x 1"W. Description A. Color-Quick guide set; set/12

Order # 111-569

set $16.95

COOLSLIP Spray CoolSlip on your work surfaces, roller, molds, stamps and tools to prevent them from sticking to your metal clay and to ensure clean, detailed, distortion-free designs. Non-toxic and non-reactive. B.

Description CoolSlip spray, 4-oz. bottle

Order # 111-448

each $9.95

SLIK BALM Slik balm is smooth and silky—never sticky like oil-based creams can be. All-natural ingredients, such as pure soy, almond and aloe, won’t contaminate clay. Effective on hands, surfaces and tools. Description C. Slik balm; 3.5-oz. tin

Order # 111-458

A

each $16.95

CLAYMATE HAND CREAM This all-natural, fragrance-free conditioner/hand cream is ideal for the metal clay artist. Metal clay won’t stick to it, keeping your clay manageable and off your hands. Description D. ClayMate hand cream, 2-oz. jar

Order # 111-427

each $8.95

METAL CLAY WARMING & DRYING PLATE The coffee-mug warmer has become a staple in many artists’ studios for good reason: it dries metal clay much faster than air drying. E.

Description Metal clay warming & drying plate

Order # 111-735

C

D B

each $17.95

METAL CLAY REHYDRATION/SLIP KIT Keep metal clay moist and workable. Includes a spray bottle (6"H x 11/2" dia.), a clear screw-cap jar (11/2"D x 11/2" dia.) and 6"L pallet knife. F.

Description Metal clay rehydration kit

Order # 111-401

E

kit $11.95

PUMP RESERVOIR DISPENSER BOTTLE Open the hinged lid and depress the center post to dispense a small amount of water into the stainless steel reservoir cup, readily available for use on metal clay pieces. Description G. Pump dispenser bottle

Order # 504-025

G

1 2+ each each $20.25 $18.25

PMC® EASY SQUEEZE This tool allows you to extrude PMC® slip with precise control and it’s easy on your hands! Includes instructions. Made in the USA. Description H. PMC® Easy Squeeze; 6½"L

Order # 111-577

1-2 each $21.00

METAL CLAY SYRINGE HOLDER Store your metal clay syringe tips in this convenient jar to keep the clay from drying out. Fill the jar with just enough water to cover the syringe tips, screw on the lid then insert the syringes (up to four) in the holes. Use the included corks to plug holes not being used. I.

Description Metal clay syringe holder

Order # 111-831

F

1 each $16.95

H Simply load the PMC® syringe into the cradle and use the trigger to extrude. Syringe not included, see pages 6 and 7 for syringes.

I

23


DYNASTY STAMPS

FORM

This is where it all begins. Play time. With that first

pinch, fold or impression, the creative process takes over. You can get as simple or as detailed as you want at this stage. You can let the ideas come to life right in your hands as they follow your intuition to see where it goes. And there are no mistakes. Wrong direction? Just roll it up and start again! Can’t do that with sheet silver!

I adore these stamps! They work fabulously on PMC®, BRONZclay™ and COPPRclay™ and add such versatility to my metal clay designs. Elegantly designed and manufactured and so easy to use! I can’t wait to see what comes next in this line!

—Yvonne M. Padilla

“The textures add versatility to your designs!” —Yvonne M. Padilla

BRONZclay™ bracelet using Dynasty Stamps by Yvonne M. Padilla

PROJECT Dynasty Stamp Bracelet Use Chi’ing Dynasty stamps (pages 26–28) to create beautifully detailed metal clay jewelry. Designed by artist Candace Gates, Dynasty Stamps offer crisp detail and superior manufacturing— and they’re so easy to use! Find more Dynasty Stamps on pages 26–37. Creating the bracelet charms. Rub a small amount of olive oil on Slim the work surface and the Cool Roller. Burnisher Set (see riogrande.com) Roll out a piece of BRONZclay™ 113-028

$13.75

a

b

5-cards thick. Press a Dynasty Stamp into the surface of the clay (figs, a, b & c). Use the utility knife to cut around the design. Poke a small hole in the middle of two ends of the piece; later, when the clay is dry, you will use the needle file to enlarge and smooth the holes. Set the stamped clay on the warming plate and allow it to dry completely. continued on facing page

24

c riogrande.com

800.545.6566


PROJECT Dynasty Stamp Bracelet what you’ll need: • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• • • •

BRONZclay™ (#101-007, pg. 12) Dynasty texture stamps (pgs. 26–36) Bronze wire, 20 ga. and 22 ga. (#134-320 and #134-322, pg. 12) Rio PVC PMC® work surface (#111-567, pg. 21) BRONZclay™/COPPRclay™ tool kit (#111-579, pg. 15) Olive oil Nail file Rio PMC® Kiln (#703-117, pg. 62) Stainless steel firing pan and removal fork (#703-202 and #703-206, pg. 14) Activated carbon (pg. 14) Warming & drying plate (#111-735, pg. 23) Nugget brass beads (#638-866), rolled brass beads (#638-871) and coral beads (#090-328); see riogrande.com Swanstrom round-nose pliers (#111-298), Swanstrom chain-nose pliers (#111-300) and Swanstrom super-flush cutters #111-305); see riogrande.com Round needle file (#114-738; see riogrande.com) MIDAS® bronze oxidizer (#331-043, see riogrande.com) Sunshine® Cloth (#337-039, pg. 82) Slim burnisher set (#113-028, see riogrande.com)

e

f

continued from facing page Repeat the steps on the facing page to create the remaining charms, using a different Dynasty Stamp for each charm. Use “The Wisemen” stamp (#111-552, pg. 26) to make a toggle bar and ring. Make sure to trim out the center of the ring. Use the awl to poke a hole in the ring and a hole in the center of the bar. Set the pieces on the drying plate and dry completely. When all the stamped pieces are dry, use the nail file to refine and smooth all edges (fig. d). Using the needle file, gently enlarge the holes in all the pieces.

d

Place all the pieces vertically in the firing pan, embedded in the activated carbon. This will keep the pieces from slumping during firing. Place the firing pan in the kiln and ramp at 250°F/hour to 1550°F and hold for 3 hours. Once the firing cycle is complete, carefully remove the firing pan using the removal fork.

Remove the pieces from the pan and rinse with water to remove any residue left from the activated carbon. Dip the pieces into the MIDAS® bronze oxidizer to create a black oxidized finish; remove the pieces and rinse well. To finish by hand, use a Sunshine® Cloth to remove the oxidation from the raised texture, then use a slim burnisher to bring out the highlights. Or, you can polish each piece on a muslin buff treated with Zam polishing compound. Use soap and water to rinse any excess compound.

g

Assembling the bracelet. Using the Swanstrom round-nose pliers, make six 5mm jump rings from the 20-ga. bronze wire. Use the jump rings to connect the BRONZclay™ pieces (fig. e). Note: Do not connect the toggle and ring pieces yet. Using the Swanstrom super-flush cutters, cut a 3" length of the 20-ga. bronze wire. Use the round-nose pliers to make a wrapped loop with the wire, and attach it to one end of the bracelet. Add one brass bead, one coral bead and one more brass bead to the wire. Hook the other end of wire through the small hole in the toggle ring the wire-wrap the end (fig. f).

h Repeat the steps above to attach the toggle bar to the other end of the bracelet. Using the super-flush cutters, cut (18) 11/2"-long pieces of 22-ga. bronze wire. Using the Swanstrom chain-nose pliers, make a small spiral at one end of each of the wires to create decorative head pins (fig. g). Add a mix of brass and coral beads to each head pin. Use the round-nose pliers to create an eye at the top of each pin; snip off any excess wire using the super-flush cutters. Connect three beaded head pins to each jump ring to complete the bracelet.

25


CHI’ING DYNASTY STAMPS

Dream it. Make it! That’s what Dynasty Stamps are all about. I came up with the idea to re-create my 18th century Chi’ing Dynasty artifacts into textures so I could reproduce them in PMC®. Then I needed to create elements for accompanying pieces (earrings, charms, smaller pendants). And from there, the ideas just flowed! —Candace Gates

A. Chi’ing Dynasty Stamp master set

CHI’ING DYNASTY STAMP SHEETS (continued on pages 27 & 28) These Asian-style, antique-look stamps add intricate designs, details and textures to your metal clay designs—they’re exact replicas of 18th and 19th century Chi’ing Dynasty designs. The pattern details are deeply etched, then molded onto a rubber sheet to ensure clear, crisp impressions in your metal clay. Coat the sheets with an anti-stick formula such as Slik Balm or CoolSlip (page 23) for defect-free release. Use the entire sheet or isolated portions. The master set (item A) includes all the stamps shown on pages 26–28 and an artist’s bucket. Sold as a set of 23 1-2 3-5 set set $175.00 $160.00

Description Order # A. Chi’ing Dynasty Stamp master set 111-562 (all stamps shown on pages 26–28); set/23

“Market Day” full sheet (shown actual size).

“Cherry Blossom”

26

C

“Bamboo Stalks”

B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. L. M. N. O.

B

D

Sheet Size (approx.) “Market Day” full sheet 3¼" x 3¾" “Cherry Blossom” 4¼" x 3" “Bamboo Stalks” 4¼" x 3" “Coral Branch” 4¼" x 3" “Small Leaves” 4¼" x 3" “Chi’ing Dynasty” bail 4¼" x 3" “Deco-Links” 4¼" x 3" “Chi’ing Dynasty” bail 4¼" x 3" “The Wisemen” 4¼" x 3" “Monogram Counter” 4¼" x 3" “The Drummer” 4¼" x 3" “Market Day” 4¼" x 3" “Jasmine” bracelet sheet 8¼" x 1¾" “Empress” bracelet sheet 8¼" x 1¾"

“Coral Branch”

E

1-2 3-5 each each $12.95 $10.95 12.95 10.95 12.95 10.95 12.95 10.95 12.95 10.95 12.95 10.95 12.95 10.95 12.95 10.95 12.95 10.95 12.95 10.95 12.95 10.95 12.95 10.95 12.95 10.95 12.95 10.95

111-538 111-554 111-548 111-546 111-547 111-561 111-556 111-553 111-552 111-543 111-544 111-549 111-539 111-540

“Small Leaves”

riogrande.com

F

800.545.6566


CHI’ING DYNASTY STAMPS

“Chi’ing Dynasty” bail sheet G

“Deco-Links” sheet

H

Pendant created by Candace Gates using the “Market Day” stamp (below).

“Chi’ing Dynasty” bail strip sheet

I

“The Wisemen” sheet

J

“Monogram Counter” sheet

K

“The Drummer” sheet

L

“Market Day” sheet

M

N “Jasmine” bracelet sheet

O “Empress” bracelet sheet

27


CHI’ING DYNASTY STAMPS

“Seeker” sheet

A

“Pagoda” sheet

B

“Traveler” sheet

C PMC® pendant by Candace Gates using the “Pagoda” sheet.

“You can do ANYTHING with metal clay!” —Candace Gates CHI’ING DYNASTY STAMP SHEETS

(continued from pages 26 & 27)

“Floral Dynasty” sheet

“Shy Beauty” sheet

28

D

“Plum Harvest” sheet

E

F

“Manchu Men” sheet

G

A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I.

Sheet Size Description (approx.) “Seeker” 4¼" x 3" “Pagoda” 4¼" x 3" “Traveler” 4¼" x 3" “Floral Dynasty” 4¼" x 3" “Plum Harvest” 4¼" x 3" “Shy Beauty” 4¼" x 3" “Manchu Men” 4¼" x 3" “Chi’ing Dynasty” square bezel 4¼" x 3" “Chi’ing Dynasty” round bezel 4¼" x 3"

“Chi’ing Dynasty” square bezel sheet

H

Order # 111-558 111-555 111-557 111-545 111-550 111-551 111-559 111-541 111-542

“Chi’ing Dynasty” round bezel sheet

riogrande.com

1-2 3-5 each each $12.95 $10.95 12.95 10.95 12.95 10.95 12.95 10.95 12.95 10.95 12.95 10.95 12.95 10.95 10.95 8.95 10.95 8.95

I

800.545.6566


AEGEAN DYNASTY STAMPS

A. Aegean Dynasty Stamp master set

AEGEAN DYNASTY STAMP SHEETS (continued on page 30) More stamps to add to your metal clay tool box! Named for the islands in the Aegean Sea, the pattern details of these stamps are deeply etched, then molded onto a rubber sheet to ensure clear, crisp impressions in your metal clay. Coat the sheets with an anti-stick formula such as Slik Balm or CoolSlip (page 23) for defect-free release. Use the entire sheet or isolated portions. The master set (item A, below) includes all the stamps shown on pages 29 and 30 and an artist’s bucket. “Mersini” large sheet

B

“Aegina” sheet

C

Description Order # A. Aegean Stamp master set 111-856 (all stamps shown on pages 29 and 30); set/16

B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I.

“Anafi” sheet

D

“Argos” sheet

E

“Delos” sheet

F

“Eleni” clasp sheet

G

“Mersini” large “Aegina” “Anafi” “Argos” “Delos” “Eleni” clasp “Kasos” “Kyra” clasp

“Kasos” sheet

Sheet Size (approx.) 4¼" x 3" 4¼" x 3" 4¼" x 3" 4¼" x 3" 4¼" x 3" 4¼" x 3" 4¼" x 3" 4¼" x 3"

H

111-853 111-840 111-847 111-849 111-843 111-846 111-850 111-844

Sold as a set of 16 1-2 3-5 set set $125.00 $110.00 1-2 3-5 each each $12.95 $10.95 12.95 10.95 12.95 10.95 12.95 10.95 12.95 10.95 12.95 10.95 12.95 10.95 12.95 10.95

“Kyra” clasp sheet

I

29


AEGEAN DYNASTY STAMPS

I absolutely adore Dynasty Stamps! Not only is the artwork beautifully designed, but the stamps are made specifically with metal clay in mind. —Yvonne M. Padilla

“Aegina Cross” sheet

A

“Mersini” small sheet

B

“Milos” clasp sheet

C

“Moira” clasp sheet

D

PMC3® pendant by Candace Gates using the “Aegina Cross” sheet, this page

AEGEAN DYNASTY STAMP SHEETS

(continued from page 29) “Mykonos Cross” sheet

“Aegean” bail sheet

30

E

G

“Nisi” sheet

F

A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H.

Description “Aegina Cross” “Mersini” small “Milos” clasp “Moira” clasp “Mykonos Cross” “Nisi” “Aegean” bail “Alatas” bracelet

“Alatas” bracelet sheet

Sheet Size (approx.) 4¼" x 3" 4¼" x 3" 4¼" x 3" 4¼" x 3" 4¼" x 3" 4¼" x 3" 3" x 4¼" 8¼" x 1¾"

1-2 3-5 each each $12.95 $10.95 12.95 10.95 12.95 10.95 12.95 10.95 12.95 10.95 12.95 10.95 12.95 10.95 12.95 10.95

Order # 111-842 111-851 111-845 111-848 111-852 111-841 111-855 111-854

H

riogrande.com

800.545.6566


LA MER DYNASTY STAMPS

A. La Mer Dynasty Stamp master set

LA MER DYNASTY STAMP SHEETS

(continued on page 32) Bring the sea to your designs when you create your own unique jewelry collections based on these themes. Draw from the entire line of La Mer texture sheets to make charms, pendants, earrings, bracelets and more— even napkin rings!

“Shell” sheet

B

Pendant “Seahorse” sheet

C

Teardrop “Mermaid” sheet D

Round “Seahorse” sheet

E

Round “Coral” sheet

F

Round cut-out “Coral” sheet

“Seahorse” dog-tag sheet

H

“La Mer” buttons/clasps sheet

I

“Sea Turtle” sheet

The details in each La Mer texture sheet are deeply etched, then molded onto a rubber sheet to ensure clear, crisp impressions in your metal clay—the detail is astonishing. Coat the sheets with an anti-stick formula such as Slik Balm or CoolSlip (page 23) for defect-free release. The master set (item A, above) includes all the stamps shown on pages 31 and 32 and an artist’s bucket. Sold as a set of 19 1-2 3-5 Description Order # set set 111-888 $150.00 $135.00 A. La Mer master set (all stamps on pages 31 and 32)

B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J.

G

Sheet Size 1-2 3-5 Description (approx.) Order # each each “Shell” 3" x 4¼" 111-857 $12.95 $10.95 Pendant 3" x 4¼" 111-858 12.95 10.95 “Seahorse” Teardrop 3" x 4¼" 111-859 12.95 10.95 “Mermaid” Round 3" x 4¼" 111-860 12.95 10.95 “Seahorse” Round “Coral” 3" x 4¼" 111-861 12.95 10.95 Round cut-out3" x 4¼" 111-862 12.95 10.95 “Coral” “Seahorse” 3" x 4¼" 111-863 12.95 10.95 dog-tag “La Mer” 3" x 4¼" 111-864 12.95 10.95 buttons/clasps “Sea Turtle” 3" x 4¼" 111-865 12.95 10.95

J

31


LA MER DYNASTY STAMPS

LA MER DYNASTY STAMP SHEETS (continued from page 31)

A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J.

Description “Fish” tag “Octopus & Crab” “Shell” toggle clasp “Seahorse & Shell” connector “La Mer” bail “Seashell” tag Small “Coral” bracelet Large “Coral” bracelet Large “Shells” necklace Large “Seahorse” necklace

“Shell” toggle clasp sheet

Sheet Size (approx.) 3" x 4¼" 3" x 4¼" 3" x 4¼" 3" x 4¼" 3" x 4¼" 3" x 4¼" 8¾" x 1½" 8¾" x 1½" 5" x 4¼" 5" x 4¼"

C

1-2 3-5 each each $12.95 $10.95 12.95 10.95 12.95 10.95 12.95 10.95 12.95 10.95 12.95 10.95 12.95 10.95 12.95 10.95 16.95 14.95 16.95 14.95

Order # 111-866 111-867 111-868 111-871 111-869 111-870 111-873 111-874 111-875 111-876

D

“Seahorse & Shell” connector sheet

“Fish” tag sheet

“La Mer” bail sheet

G

Small “Coral” bracelet sheet

H

Large “Coral” bracelet sheet

A

“Octopus & Crab” sheet

B

E

“Seashell” tag sheet

F

Pendant by Louise K. Shadonix, made using a “Seahorse” sheet, this page

Large “Shells” necklace sheet

32

I

Large “Seahorse” necklace sheet

riogrande.com

J

800.545.6566


LA MER DYNASTY STAMPS Necklace by Louise K. Shadonix using “La Mer” napkin ring sheets, this page

A “Starfish” round box sheet

B “Seahorse” round box sheet

C “La Mer” napkin ring sheet

D “Shells & Scrolls” round box sheet

LA MER STAMP SHEETS

(continued from facing page) Please Note: Items A–D are not included in the master set (item A, page 31).

A. B. C. D.

Sheet Size Description (approx.) “Starfish” round box sheet 10¾" x 2" “Seahorse” round box sheet 10¾" x 2" “La Mer” napkin ring sheet 10¾" x 2" “Shells & Scrolls” round 10¾" x 2" box sheet

1-2 3-5 Order # each each 111-878 $17.95 $15.95 111-879 17.95 15.95 111-887 17.95 15.95 111-886 17.95 15.95

ARTIST’S BUCKETS There’s room for everything (and everything will stay in its place) inside these durable artist’s buckets! Nylon construction stands up to daily wear and tear. Bucket-style organizer makes it easy to find and retrieve what you need; the supported open base is perfect for holding larger items. Attached handle lets you carry everything with you. Item E has 26 pockets; item F has 32 outside-flap pockets and eight interior pockets. E. F.

Description Size Round 6¾" dia. x 8"H Square 9½"W x 9½"D x 8½"H

1 2+ Order # each each 116-588 $17.50 $15.50 116-589 23.00 21.00

E

Item F shown with tools and supplies (not included).

F

33


TAPESTRY DYNASTY STAMPS

A. Tapestry Dynasty Stamp master set

TAPESTRY DYNASTY STAMP SHEETS (continued on facing page) Inspired by 18th century European textile designs, as well as the innovation the characterized the Industrial Revolution, Tapestry Dynasty designs range from the ornate to the mechanized.

“Renaissance”

The pattern details are deeply etched, then molded onto a rubber sheet to ensure clear, crisp impressions in your metal clay. Coat the sheets with an anti-stick formula such as Slik Balm or CoolSlip (page 23) for defect-free release. Use the entire sheet or isolated portions. The master set (item A, below) includes all the stamps shown on pages 34–36 (except the “Lowercase Initials” and “Uppercase Initials” sheets) and an artist’s bucket.

B

Description A. Tapestry Dynasty Stamp master set (all stamps shown on pages 34–36 except “Uppercase Initials” & “Lowercase Initials”); set/19

“Chrysanthemum”

C

“Lotus Blossom”

D

“Peony”

34

B. C. D. E. F. G. H.

E

“Orchid Lattice”

“Renaissance” “Chrysanthemum” “Lotus Blossom” “Peony” “Orchid Lattice” “Borders One” “Borders Two”

F

Sheet Size (approx.) 4" x 3" 4" x 3" 4" x 3" 4" x 3" 4" x 3" 2¾" x 4¼" 2¾" x 4¼"

Order # 111-488

111-472 111-473 111-474 111-475 111-477 111-479 111-480

Sold as a set of 19 1-2 3-5 set set $150.00 $135.00

1-2 each $12.95 12.95 12.95 12.95 12.95 12.95 12.95

3-5 each $10.95 10.95 10.95 10.95 10.95 10.95 10.95

“Borders One”

G

“Borders Two”

H

riogrande.com

800.545.6566


TAPESTRY DYNASTY STAMPS

“‘Tapestry’ is like a Jules Verne dreamscape, weaving inspirations from European tapestry designs with the funky elements of vintage timepieces.”

Bracelet with ??? charm using the “Uppercase Initials” sheet (page ?25).

—Candace Gates

“Ornate Pocket Watch”

“Gear Pocket Watch”

A

PMC3™ pendants made by Candace Gates using the “Stamp & Key” elements sheet, this page

B

“Roman Numeral Pocket Watch”

C

TAPESTRY DYNASTY STAMP SHEETS

(continued from facing page) A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I.

Description “Ornate Pocket Watch” “Gear Pocket Watch” “Roman Numeral Pocket Watch” “Steam Punk” “Steam Punk” elements “Steam Punk Sphere” elements “Steam Punk Gear” elements “Swirl” elements “Stamp & Key” elements

Sheet Size (approx.) 4½" x 4¼" 4½" x 4¼" 4½" x 4¼"

Order # 111-486 111-487 111-493

1-2 3-5 each each $16.95 $14.95 16.95 14.95 16.95 14.95

4" x 3" 4" x 3" 3¾" x 4½"

111-476 111-478 111-481

12.95 12.95 12.95

10.95 10.95 10.95

3¾" x 4½"

111-482

12.95

10.95

3¾" x 4½" 3¾" x 4½"

111-483 111-484

12.95 12.95

10.95 10.95 “Steam Punk”

“Steam Punk Sphere” elements F

“Steam Punk Gear” elements

G

“Swirl” elements

D

H

“Steam Punk” elements

E

“Stamp & Key” elements I

35


TAPESTRY DYNASTY STAMPS & SAMPLER SET TAPESTRY DYNASTY STAMP SHEETS

(continued from page 35) Items A and B come with a canvas carrying bag.

A. B. C. D. E.

Description “Uppercase Initials” “Lowercase Initials” “Ornate Bypass” ring “Scroll Bypass” ring “Swirl” sampler strip

Sheet Size (approx.) 7" x 8¼" 7" x 8¼" 4½" x 3¾" 4½" x 3¾" 8½" x 1¾"

1-2 3-5 Order # each each 111-489 $29.95 $26.95 111-490 29.95 26.95 111-491 16.95 14.95 111-492 16.95 14.95 111-485 12.95 10.95

Items A and B come with a canvas carrying bag.

A

“Uppercase Initials”

“Lowercase Initials”

B

PMC3™ charm made by Candace Gates using “ Uppercase Initials” sheet, this page

“Ornate Bypass” ring

C

“Scroll Bypass” ring

“Swirl” sampler strip

D

E

DYNASTY STAMP SAMPLER SERIES #1 This assortment of Dynasty Stamps includes nine of the most popular stamps from the Chi’ing, Aegean, La Mer and Tapestry series. It also includes one “Sea Horse” bypass ring texture stamp—not available anywhere else! Comes with an artist’s bucket that stores your stamps and metal clay hand tools. Set includes: • Chi’ing: “Market Day” and “Floral Dynasty” • Aegean: “Eleni” clasp, “Mersini” small & “Aegean” bail • La Mer: “La Mer” napkin ring, “Shell” & “Sea Horse” bypass ring stamps • Tapestry: “Roman Numeral Pocket Watch” & “Lotus Blossom” • “Sea Horse” bypass ring stamp • Artist’s bucket

F. Dynasty Stamp Sampler Series #1

36

F.

Description Sampler Series #1

Order # 111-494

riogrande.com

1-2 3-5 set set $89.00 $79.00

800.545.6566


DYNASTY STONESETTER™ TOOLS & HANDLES STONESETTER™ COMPLETE KIT This kit includes two StoneSetter™ template sheets and six different Dynasty handle sheets to create your own stone-setting tools for metal clay, custom-made tool handles, game board pieces and more! Description A. StoneSetter™ complete kit

Order # 111-591

1-2 kit $17.95

3-5 kit $15.95

STONESETTER™ TOOL TEMPLATE SHEETS Dynasty StoneSetter™ tool template sheets allow you to create your own stone-setting tools to make adding cabochons and stones to your fired metal clay designs fast and easy. Use the templates to make a stone-setting tool out of metal clay (make a custom handle for your tool using the handle sheets below), then use your newly made tool to make impressions into your metal clay designs for setting stones. The sheets offer many styles to accommodate the most popular cabochon shapes and sizes. Includes instructions. Sheet Size Description (approx.) B. Circles, Triangles, Squares 5¾" x 4½" C. Ovals, Teardrops, Rectangles 5¾" x 4½"

Order # 111-591 111-592

1-2 each $17.95 17.95

A

Squares: 6mm, 10mm, 13mm, 15mm 18mm, 23.5mm Triangles: 13mm, 21mm Circles: 4mm, 6mm, 7mm, 10mm, 12.5mm, 16mm, 18mm, 24mm, 32mm

3-5 each $15.95 15.95

DYNASTY STAMP HANDLE SHEETS These template sheets are perfect for creating metal clay handles for the StoneSetter™ tools you make using tool template sheets (items B & C, above). Another couple of ideas for these little gems? Add your own custom-made, decorative handle to the end of your tools, or (and this, we love!), design board game pieces—think chess, Monopoly®, Life®, Sorry!® and more. Add any additional design elements you like! Includes instructions and a creative guide. Description D. “Ornate” #1 E. “Ornate” #2 F. “Sea Life” #1 G. “Sea Life” #2 H. “Nature” #1 I. “Nature” #2

Sheet Size (approx.) 3½" x 4¼" 3½" x 4¼" 3½" x 4¼" 3½" x 4¼" 3½" x 4¼" 3½" x 4¼"

Order # 111-585 111-586 111-588 111-590 111-587 111-589

1-2 each $12.95 12.95 12.95 12.95 12.95 12.95

3-5 each $10.95 10.95 10.95 10.95 10.95 10.95

B Ovals: 7.5 x 5mm, 8.5 x 6mm, 10 x 8mm, 13 x 10mm, 15 x 13mm, 18 x 13mm, 21.5 x 15.5mm, 30 x 20.5mm, 32.5 x 23.5mm, 28 x 9mm, 16 x 6mm Teardrops: 10 x 8mm, 15 x 8mm, 15 x 10mm, 20 x 13mm, 30 x 18mm Rectangles: 12 x 10mm, 16 x 12.75mm

C Below and to the right are two PMC3™ StoneSetter™ tools made by Candace Gates using the “Sea Life” #1 handles sheet (below) and the Ovals, Teardrops, Rectangles StoneSetter™ template (above).

PMC3™ shell piece (at left) set with cabochons using a StoneSetter™ tool made by Candace Gates with the Ovals, Teardrops, Rectangles StoneSetter™ template.

“Ornate” #1

D

“Ornate” #2

E

“Sea Life” #1

F

“Sea Life” #2

G

“Nature” #1

H

“Nature” #2

I

37


TEXTURE STAMPS Beautiful

Family

Good fortune

Happiness Harmony

WOOD DESIGN STAMP Use these substantial wood blocks to stamp designs into your metal clay work. Blocks are carved with computer-controlled precision for crisp detail. Item C includes four double-ended square block stamps and eight round single stamps. Items D and E are double-ended stamps. Use CoolSlip or Slik Balm (page 23) to treat the blocks before using them. Made in the USA.

Dragon

¼"

A. Chinese character design stamps; set of 6 designs

¼"

B. Small design stamps; set of 9 designs

A. B. C. D. E.

Description Chinese character design stamps; 6 designs Small design stamps; 9 designs Design stamps; 12 stamps with 16 designs Celtic series; 9 stamps with 18 designs Southwest series; 13 stamps with 26 designs

Order # 111-794 111-792 111-793 111-731 111-774

set $33.00 45.00 64.00 65.00 85.00

Designs shown directly adjacent are on opposite ends of a double-sided stamp.

Item C includes 8 round stamps, 3 double-sided 11/8" square stamps, and one doublesided ½" square stamp.

11⁄8"

Items D and E are double-sided stamps.

½"

C. Design stamps; set of 12 stamps with 16 designs

Designs shown directly adjacent are on opposite ends of a double-sided stamp.

11⁄8"

2¼"

D. Celtic series, set of 9

11⁄8"

11⁄8" ½"

E. Southwest series, set of 13

38

21⁄8"

riogrande.com

800.545.6566


TEXTURE TIPS & SHEETS PMC® TEXTURE TIPS SET Add design and texture to metal clay with these easy-to-clean, textured rubber tips. Each ½" x ½" tip is mounted on a 2¾"L hardwood handle and delivered in a wood block organizer that keeps tips separated and upright. Description A. Texture tips

Order # 111-560

set $65.00

A. Texture tips, set of 24 ½"

MAKIN’S® TEXTURE SHEET SET Use these textured, clear plastic sheets alone or in combination to embellish your metal clay jewelry designs. The sheet set includes one sheet each of the four patterns in each set shown below (20 sheets total). Sheets measure 7½" x 5". Set A: sand, waves, cobblestones, bricks Set B: stripes, checks, screen, dots Set C: honeycomb, woven, eyelet, lace Set D: woodgrain, scales, stars, snowflakes Set E: small curls, large curls, knitting, quilting Description B. Makin’s® texture sheets; set/20

Set A; set of 4

Set B; set of 4

Order # 111-457

Sold as a set of 20 sheets set $21.00

Set C; set of 4

Set D; set of 4

Set E; set of 4

Texture set includes sets A–E (20 sheets)

D. Square, set of 3 C. Round, set of 3

F. Mini Geo, assortment of 12

E. Oval, set of 3

MAKIN’S® CLAY CUTTER SETS & MINI GEO SET The super-thin edges on these cutters make it easy to cut shapes from your metal clay—use them as you would a cookie cutter! The upper edge is rolled to protect fingers. • Item C: Round (20mm, 30mm and 40mm in dia.; all are 20mmH) • Item D: Square (20mm, 30mm and 40mm; all are 20mmH) • Item E: Oval (19 x 13mm, 28 x 20mm and 40 x 28mm; all are 20mmH) • Item F: Mini Geo set (includes 12 assorted shapes varying from 12–15mm by 12mmH); comes in a metal tin C. D. E. F.

Description Round; set/3 Square; set/3 Oval; set/3 Mini Geo set; assortment/12

Order # 111-660 111-661 111-662 111-663

set $7.75 7.75 7.75 12.50

39


PROJECT BRONZclay™ Garden Stake

Create whimsical stakes for the garden using versatile BRONZclay™!

need: • BRONZclay tool kit (#111-579, pg. 15) • Slik Balm (#111-458, pg. 23) 45) • Thickness guide set (#111-569, pg. 23) • Alphabet stamp set (see pg. 53 for a selection) 96 6 & #111-395, pg. 41) 5, pg. 44) • Greenware file (#111-400, pg. 66) ead, Chrysolite (#075-787/21, see riogrande.com) 12) • 1mm drill bit (349-106, see riogrande.com h cutters ((#111-712); see riogrande.com • Water

Roll out a large piece of BRONZclay™ 6 cards thick. Lay the cushion template on top of the rolled clay and cut out the shape using the awl from the tool kit. Set the piece aside and allow it to air dry. Roll out another piece of clay 4 cards thick. Cut out one small flower and one large flower using the Klay Kutters. Use the craft knife from the tool kit to give the flowers more definition. Rub a dab of Slik Balm on top of the second largest dome on the plate and place one of the flower shapes onto the dome, gently pressing it into place; allow it to dry on the dome. Repeat with the second flower shape (fig. a). Mix equal parts of Rio Cold Mold so you have a 1½"diameter ball. Roll the ball into a log shape approximately 3" long by 1" wide. Press the twig into the mold and allow the mold to set completely (approx. 15 minutes) (fig. b). Once the mold has cured, remove the twig. Roll a piece of BRONZclay™ into a snake shape, about the same size as the twig. Press the clay into the mold, firmly enough for the clay to fill in the details (fig. c).

a

b

Carefully remove the clay from the mold. Use the craft knife to trim the edges of the clay as necessary. Set the clay piece aside and allow it to dry completely. Roll out a piece of clay 4 cards thick. Gently press the alphabet stamps into the damp clay to spell out your herb of choice. Use the craft knife to trim the edges as necessary, then set the piece aside to dry (fig. d). Once all the pieces are dry, use the sandpaper or nail file to smooth all edges. Sand the back side of the twig piece until it is flat. Using the brush from the tool kit, apply a small amount of water to the bottom-center of the cushion plaque and to the back of the twig piece; allow the water to absorb into the clay. Apply a dollop of frosting-thick slip to the wet end of the twig piece. Press the twig onto the wet area of the cushion plaque and hold it in place for several seconds, allowing the bond to set. Use the blending tool from the kit to remove excess slip (fig. f). Apply a dollop of slip to the name plate and press it onto the center of the cushion plaque (fig. g). Hold it in place and allow it to set. Set the stake aside and allow the slip to dry completely. Once it’s dry, use the dark-red side of the greenware file on the entire piece to soften edges and to remove small scratches and excess slip.

c

d

e

f

g

continued on facing page

40

Flower Klay Kutter (item I, facing page), shown enlarged

riogrande.com

800.545.6566


K L AY K U T T E R S KLAY KUTTERS A favorite tool among metal clay users! Use these fancy-shaped brass cutters to stamp shapes from your metal clay. All are ¾" deep. Graduated Sets Sold in sets A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H.

Description Lilac Circle Heart Square Star Triangle Oval Teardrop

Set Qty 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5

Widths ¾", 5⁄8", ½", 5⁄16" ¾", 5⁄8", ½", 3⁄8", ¼" ¾", 5⁄8", ½", 3⁄8", ¼" ¾", 5⁄8", ½", 3⁄8", ¼" ¾", 5⁄8", ½", 3⁄8", ¼" 1", ¾", ½", 3⁄8", ¼" 7⁄8", ¾", 5⁄8", ½", 3⁄8" 7⁄8", ¾", 5⁄8", ½", 3⁄8"

Order # 111-394 111-390 111-391 111-392 111-389 111-393 111-409 111-462

set $14.30 14.30 14.30 14.30 14.30 14.30 14.30 14.30

111-395 111-396 111-397

Sold in sets of 4 $14.30 14.30 14.30

Assortment Sets (circle, flower, teardrop, heart) I.

¾" wide ½" wide 3⁄8" wide

A. set of 4

B. set of 5

Klay Kutters are not shown actual size.

C. set of 5

D. set of 5

continued from facing page

Use the 1mm drill bit by hand to make a hole in the center of each continued facing flower andfrom in the toppage right corner of the cushion plaque. Fire all the pieces in a firing pan, embedded in coconut shell–based activated carbon. After firing, allow the pieces to cool, then polish and oxidize as desired. (In this project, we put the flower pieces in a rotary tumbler to achieve a high polish; the plaque was given a matte finish using the dark-red side of the greenware file. Assembly. Use the flush cutters to cut a piece of 2"-long bronze wire. Use the round-nose pliers to make a tight loop at one end of the wire; thread it through the Swarovski Elements bead then both flower pieces, with the flowers facing the loop. Pass the straight end of the wire through the cushion plaque (fig. h) and pull the wire taut until the bead and flower pieces are flush against the cushion plaque (fig. i). Use the round-nose pliers to turn the wire on the back of the cushion plaque into a U-shape to secure the wire in place(fig. j); trim off excess wire.

E. set of 5

h

F. set of 5

i

G. set of 5

j

H. set of 5

Finished? Not quite!

I. set of four

Find that perfect display and just-right packaging at riogrande. com! (¾" assortment shown)

41


C L AY S H A P E R S A

B

C

D

COLOUR SHAPERS™ Sculpt, cut, decorate, and draw lines, contours and edges on metal clay with these responsive tools. The silicone tips let you produce smooth, precise surfaces with no smudges or fingerprints. Seamless nickel ferrules secure all working tips into hardwood handles. Clean the silicone quickly and easily in water after use. Made in China. Double-Ended Shapers (items A–E) Items A and B feature one extra-firm silicone tip and one metal tip that’s perfect for carving and removing clay. Items C and D feature one firm silicone tip and one brush or sponge tip for smoothing; item E has one soft silicone tip and one mop brush for smoothing. Clay Shapers & Soft Shapers (items F–I)

E

F

G

Clay shapers (items F and H) feature extra-firm silicone tips for precise, controlled shaping and detailed work. The set of five clay shapers (item H) includes one each of the following styles: angle chisel, cup chisel, cup round, flat chisel, taper point. The soft shapers (items G and I) feature lacquered, color-coded hardwood handles and extra-soft tips. The set of five (item I) includes one each of the following styles: angle chisel, cup chisel, round cup chisel, flat chisel, tapered chisel. A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I.

Description Flat chisel, small Tapered end, small Tapered end & fine-tip brush Flat end & flame-tip sponge Tapered end & mop brush Clay shaper, taper point Soft shaper, tapered chisel Clay shapers; set/5 Soft shapers; set/5

Overall Length 6" 6" 8" 7¼" 8¾" 6¼" 6" 6¼" 6"

Tip Length ¼" ¼" ½" ½" ½" ¼" ¾" ¼" ¾"

Order # 111-568/1 111-568/2 111-732 111-733 111-761 111-447 111-402 111-449 111-407

each $12.50 12.50 12.50 12.50 12.50 10.95 9.95 34.50 29.50

H

“I absolutely love the material and the challenge it provides!” —Angela Baduel-Crispin

I

I am always trying to travel new roads and see what a material can do other than the obvious or what it is traditionally used for. I turn things upside down, inside out, pierce & push to see where they go and what they do . . . then turn left. —Angela Baduel-Crispin

“Oh! Ring” by Angela Baduel-Crispin 2010 Saul Bell Design Award; Second Place Winner, Metal Clay

42

riogrande.com

800.545.6566


C L AY E X T R U D E R S & F O R M I N G S TA K E S MAKIN’S PROFESSIONAL® ULTIMATE CLAY EXTRUDERS™ Create embellishments for your metal clay designs with these easy-to-use extruders. A rubber O-ring cleans the sides of the tube while the clay is pushed through, minimizing mess and ensuring the clay is used efficiently. Item A is made of anodized aluminum, so it’s ideal to use with all types of metal clay; includes extruder (6½"L x 7⁄8" dia.), 20 pattern discs and a spare O-ring. Item B is stainless steel, ideal for all types of metal clay and includes 10 discs for extruding different shapes. Use ClayCore™ adapters (items C and D) to create hollow forms such as beads, bails or lengths of tubing (see right). A. B. C. D.

Description Aluminum extruder kit Stainless steel extruder kit ClayCore™ 1, 2, 3mm adapter set ClayCore™ 3.5, 4, 4.5mm adapter set

Order # 111-570 111-575 111-571 111-572

Use the ClayCore™ adapters (items C and D) along with a design disc to extrude hollow-core lengths that can be cut into beads.

each $26.50 49.95 14.50 14.50 Replacement O-rings are also available at any hardware store.

A. aluminum extruder with 20 discs B. stainless steel extruder with 10 discs

C. 1, 2 and 3mm core adapters

D. 3.5, 4 and 4.5mm core adapters

Choose the forming stake you need and insert it into the stable wood block—your hands are free to form, shape and bend metal clay!

E

MICRO-FORMING STAKE & BLOCK SETS FOR METAL CLAY These micro-forming stake and block sets will quickly become your favorite metal clay forming tools! In the clay’s pre-fired state, create domes, curves and bends over nine different Delrin® stakes. The wood block firmly holds the stake upright so your hands are free to work. The deluxe version (item F) features a steel collet with an adjustable set-screw that allows you to lock the forming stake in place while you work (hex key included). Both blocks have a 2½"-diameter base and are 3" tall. F E. F.

Description Micro-forming stakes & block Deluxe micro-forming stakes & block

Order # 111-578 112-935

each $34.00 60.00

43


DOMING PLATES

D Oval sizes: 18 x 40 x 15mmH, 13.5 x 30.5 x 12mmH, 10.6 x 22 x 9mmH, 17 x 8 x 7.5mmH and 12 x 7 x 6mmH

A Cone diameters (base): 12.5mm, 25mm, 34mm and 46mm; all are 1¼"H

E Square sizes: 9.5 x 9.5 x 12.5mmH, 13.5 x 13.5 x 16mmH, 17.25 x 17.25 x 20mmH, 21 x 21 x 24mmH and 25 x 25 x 28mmH

B Round sizes: 35mm dia. x 18mmH, 25mm dia. x 12mmH, 19mm dia. x 10mmH, 14mm dia. x 8mmH and 11mm dia. x 6mmH

C Round sizes: 35mm dia. x 26mmH, 25mm dia. x 23mmH, 19mm dia. x 16mmH, 14mm dia. x 12mmH and 11mm dia. x 9mm

Rectangle sizes: 31 x 25 x 12.5mmH, 27 x 21 x 16mmH, 23 x 17 x 20mmH, 20 x 13 x 24mmH and 16 x 9.5 x 28mmH

F

DOMING PLATES Use these doming plates, designed by master metal-clay artist Linda Kaye-Moses, to create consistent hollow forms in your metal clay designs. Milled of urethane plastic, these plates are ultra-smooth to minimize potential texture transfer to your piece. Each plate has a consistent shape in graduated sizes, and the plates are color-coded for ease of use in your studio. A. B. C. D. E. F.

Plate size (approx.) 8½" x 3¼" 8½" x 3" 8½" x 3" 6¾" x 3¼" 6¾" x 3¼" 10" x 3¼"

Shapes Cones Round low Round high Ovals Squares Rectangles

Order # 111-654 111-655 111-656 111-657 111-658 111-659

each $32.00 32.00 32.00 32.00 32.00 32.00

Doming plates work just like a metalsmith’s forming stake— they’re perfect for forming your metal clay designs before firing.

G

H

METAL CLAY STONE-SETTING BUR SETS These stone-setting burs are ideal for use with metal clay; simply press the bur into the clay to create a perfectly shaped seat for your stone. • Square set (item G)—Includes one of each of the following head sizes: 3 x 3, 4 x 4 and 5 x 5mm. All are 2¾" long. • Cone set (item H)—Includes one of each of the following head sizes: 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 and 10mm. The 2mm and 3mm burs are 1½"long; all others are 2" long. Description G. Square; set/3 H. Cone; set/8

44

Order # 111-255 111-365

riogrande.com

set $15.75 17.75

800.545.6566


TEMPLATES METAL CLAY TEMPLATES These templates are designed to help you create shapes in metal clay or sheet metal. Lay the template on the material and, using a scalpel, scribe or divider, cut or scratch along the shape of the template. Four shape templates are included in sets #1 and #2 (the small templates measure 3" x 2Ÿ". Each large template featured below measures 5" x 3½". Set #1 Includes dog-tag, triangle, cushion and bail templates. 111-601

$25.95

Set #2 Includes heart, barrel, teardrop and bail templates. 111-602

$25.95

Set #3 Includes tapered square, fat rectangle and tapered rectangle templates. 111-642

$22.95

Set #4 Includes pod, tongue and shield templates 111-643

$22.95

Set #5 Includes paired leaves, oak leaf and ginkgo leaf templates 111-644

$22.95

Set #6 Includes capsule, Gothic keyhole and mehndi frame templates 111-645

$22.95

45


CARVING TOOLS

A. Complete set

Basic

B

WOLF TOOLS® “ WICKED SHARP” WAX CARVING TOOL SETS Kate Wolf’s “wicked sharp” wax tools are great for carving metal clay, too! Precision-crafted from chromium manganese tool steel, each tool is set into finished beechwood handles and secured by brass ferrules. Each comes shaped, sharp and ready to use; any may be further customized to meet specific carving needs. Some styles feature safety edges that protect finished areas while carving. • Handles are color-banded and numbered for easy identification. • Each set includes a 25-page, full-color instruction booklet (including steps on how to further modify carvers) and over 100 photographs and illustrations. • Complete set (item A): all 18 carving tools (basic, fine and specialty, items B–D) in a plastic and wood canister with protective cover. • Item B: six basic carving tools. • Item C: six fine carving tools ideal for settings, piercing and more. • Item D: six specialty carving tools for lathe and hand work. • Item E: the downsized version of the eight most popular “wicked sharp” tools—ideal for fine, intricate designs and for small, recessed or undercut areas. Includes a protective, covered canister.

Fine carving A. B. C. D. E.

Order # 700-321 700-351 700-352 700-353 700-890

set $143.75 55.00 55.00 55.00 64.95

WAX-WORKING TOOL SET Economical, open-ended, sharp-edged carvers/scrapers provide four shapes in two sizes to give you eight carving tools per set. Great for scraping and removing metal clay for detailed carving tasks. • Use the sharp edge for hollowing out metal clay forms and the undersides of rings and bracelets. • Open shapes have precision-sharpened edges for quick metal clay removal and neat shaving—metal clay shavings simply fall away. • Long-lasting, tempered steel carving edges remain sharp; octagonal handles won’t roll when set down.

C Specialty

D Micro

F.

E

F

Description Complete set (includes styles B–D, below) Basic; set/6 Fine; set/6 Specialty; set/6 Micro; set/8

Description Wax-working tools; set/4

Length 6½" (165mm)

Order # 700-810

1-2 set $22.65

BASIC WAX TOOL SET WITH STAND A good starter set for carving metal clay! This set of seven doubleended steel tools offers 14 different points for design flexibility. • Stainless steel tools are durable and long-lasting. • Includes a wood base and sharpening stone to custom-shape tools. Description G. Basic wax tools; set/7

Length 61/2" (165mm)

Order # 700-278

1-2 set $26.95

DOUBLE-ENDED SCOOP CARVER SET Ideal for use with wax and metal clay, these sharp-edged, scoopshaped tools are great for carving, transferring material, working models and more. The set of two offers four different carver sizes: 3.1, 4.4, 5.0 and 7.7mm. Rust-free stainless steel. Description H. Double-ended carvers; set/2

Length 5¼" (133mm)

Order # 700-202

set $10.50

H. set of 2

G

46

riogrande.com

800.545.6566


CARVERS & BURNISHERS MAKIN’S® PROFESSIONAL® TOOL KIT Use these quality, professional tools to stamp, mark, texture, cut and brand your metal clay creations. This 27-piece set of professional tools is delivered in a clear plastic storage box (not shown) with design stamps removeable dividers and includes: • 2 aluminum assembly handles, 5½" long • 3 sphere points (7⁄32", 5⁄16", 3⁄8") • 3 cutter wheels (straight, narrow wavy and wide wavy) • 2 assembly heads • 3 texture points • 3 bullet points (fine, rounded and medium) texture tips & bullet points • 1 cutting tip • 1 feather point • 3 design stamps (moon, dart board, star), 5⁄16" diameter feather sphere points point • 5 texture tips (dot, script, stencil, lines, shading) • 1 small plastic container (not shown) Description A. Professional tool kit

Order # 111-451

kit $39.99

CARVING TOOL SET This set contains seven of the most popular tools from the clay and ceramics industry—each is exceptionally well-suited to metal clay work. Set includes: • Lace tool with a needle point on one end and a curved blade with a sharp tip on the other for pressing and clean-up; 6½" long. • Double-sided steel drill for creating holes approximately 1⁄8" in diameter; 6¾" long. • Sgraffito tool for creating line widths up to 1⁄8" with a single stroke and varying pressure. • Cut-out tool with a sharp, curved blade for cutting through clay; 5¾" long. • Carbide steel saw for cutting straight lines; 51⁄8" long. • Clean-up tool with one curved blade and one triangle blade; 6" long. • Pallet knife for effectively smoothing curves and surfaces; 6" long. B.

Description Carving tool kit; set/7

Order # 111-398

Order # 111-537

Order # 111-748

assembly heads texture points cutting tip

A

B. set of 7

C. set of 4

set $19.95

INTERCHANGEABLE-TIP BURNISHER This interchangeable-tip burnisher comes with four tips (1⁄32", 1⁄16" and 1⁄8" ball tips and one spoon tip)—perfect for your metal clay work. 4¾"-long handle. Description D. Interchangeable-tip burnisher

cutter wheels

set $22.95

DOUBLE-ENDED CARVING TOOL SET Our in-house PMC® experts love these carvers! Sharp-edged, stainless steel tools are durable and economical. Great for carving, shaping, modeling, cutting and burnishing metal clay. Set includes the following double-ended carvers: burnisher/spatula, double spoon, double sickle and scoop/ball burnisher. Description C. Double-ended carving tools; set/4

assembly handles

D

set $12.75

DOUBLE-ENDED PMC® BALL BURNISHER SET These stainless steel ball burnishers are perfect for burnishing away the white oxidized surface left after firing metal clay. Angled ends get into deep textures and crevices without scratching the surface. Tip sizes: 1mm/1.5mm, 1.5mm/2mm and 2mm/3mm. All are 6¾" long. E.

Description Ball burnisher; set/3

Order # 113-054

set $29.95

E. set of 3

47


TOOLS

“The exploration process has been exciting!”

I love the colors that develop during BRONZclay’s firing process. And it’s really, really strong! I’ve had success throwing it on a wheel. I like making larger sculptural pieces, so the lower cost of

—Jeanette Landenwitch

BRONZclay eases my mind and frees my creativity. —Jeanette Landenwitch

BRONZclay™ necklace by Jeanette Landenwitch— Executive Director, PMC Guild

A

B

C

D

STAINLESS STEEL CROSS-LOCK TWEEZERS WITH FIBER GRIPS Use these tweezers for soldering, keum-boo and Aura 22 applications. Will not contaminate clay pieces. Made in Pakistan. • Heat-resistant fiber grips protect your fingers from heat. • Polished stainless steel tips provide a firm grip. • Cross-lock mechanism opens when pressed to grip objects securely. Shape A. Straight B. Curved

1-2 each $5.25 5.25

Length Order # 6½" (165mm) 115-051 6½" (165mm) 115-050

STAINLESS STEEL CROSS-LOCK TWEEZERS The tips on these cross-lock tweezers remain closed until you squeeze them open. Made in India. Description C. Straight/beveled

1-2 each $5.45

Length Order # 4¾" (114mm) 115-205

STEEL CURVED UTILITY TWEEZERS Long, curved tips provide sure and easy handling of small components—excellent for soldering and torch-firing PMC. Chrome-plated steel construction. Made in India. Description D. Curved tip tweezers

Length 61/2" (165mm)

Order # 115-065

1-2 each $8.50

SLIM AUTOMATIC CENTER PUNCH This center punch has a lightweight aluminum body, a steel point and an adjustable-pressure stroke. Press down to release an internal hammer for a controlled impact. Made in the USA.

E

F

E.

front

back

G

Description Center punch

Length 5½" (140mm)

Order # 118-111

each $18.50

RULERS These rulers measure in inches and millimeters. Item F is steel and converts measurements on the reverse side; etched tables are long-lasting and easy to read. Item G is plastic; one side has a weight conversion chart; the other a bracelet- and ring-measuring gauge. Description F. Steel G. Plastic; pkg/10

Length 6" (150mm) 6" (150mm)

Order # 116-086 116-022/10

1-2 each $7.95 13.50

MULTI-SIZER ADJUSTABLE FINGER GAUGE Keep inexpensive finger gauges on hand for those who can’t come into your store to be measured. Customers simply adjust the sizer to fit and returns it to you. Measures sizes 1–17 in ¼-size increments. H

48

Description H. Adjustable finger gauges; pkg/100

Order # 116-213

riogrande.com

1-2 pkg $33.00

800.545.6566


BURNISHERS & FILES

C B A

AGATE BURNISHERS Agate burnishers are ideal for working with metal clay and for any application that needs a softer touch. Also great for burnishing gold foil to silver for keum-boo and a variety of other processes. Description A. Ball-style B. Knife-style C. Sword-style

Overall Length 7½" (191mm) 8" (203mm) 7" (178mm)

Tip Length 1½" (38.1mm) 1½" (38.1mm) 1" (25.4mm)

Order # 111-361 111-362 111-363

each $18.95 15.95 15.95

BORO BURNISHER SETS These burnishers are made of boro glass and stay cool longer than steel burnishers, making them ideal for keum-boo applications. Also use them for simply burnishing metal. • Item D includes three double-ended burnishers, giving you six shapes to work with: angled ball, small ball, large ball, round flat, flame tip and flat. • Item E includes four double-ended burnishers, giving you eight shapes to work with: angled ball, small ball, large ball, round flat, point, spatula, flame tip and flat. Description Length D. Set/3 8" (203mm) E. Set/4 8" (203mm)

Order # 116-473 116-474

D. set of 3

E. set of 4

set $34.00 43.00

POCKET NEEDLE FILE SET This handy set includes six files (round, half-round, square, threesquare, equalling and barrette) and a 5½" handle/storage barrel. Files are made in China; handles are made in the USA. • The barrel of the handle doubles as a convenient file holder. • Files insert into the handle collet for quick, easy file changes. F.

Cut # #2

Overall Length 4" (100mm)

Cutting Length 1¾" (45mm)

Order # 114-262

1-2 set $16.75

F. set of 6

KEY-RING NEEDLE FILE SET These five miniature files are hung from a key ring so each one is available when needed. All files have a single-cut, coarse surface. The set includes three-square, round, half-round, flat and knife files. Cut G. Coarse

Overall Length 4" (100mm)

Cutting Length Order # 13/4" (4.4mm) 114-473

1-2 set $11.95

GERMAN POCKET DIAMOND NEEDLE FILE SET This needle file set includes five diamond files: triangle, flat, round, half-round and square shapes. • 3⁄8" diameter anodized storage handle features a pocket clip. • Files have shortened shafts to store in the barrel of the non-slip, 59⁄16" handle (creates a file 7"–8" long) for convenience. Abrasive/ Mesh H. 120/140

Overall Length 4" (100mm)

Cutting Length 2" (50mm)

Order # 114-261

1-2 set $24.95

G. set of 5

On-the-go shaping and filing capabilities are yours with this pocket-sized diamond needle file set.

H. set of 5

49


PLIERS, CUTTERS & SHEARS

A. set of 4

SWANSTROM PLIERS & CUTTER SET The round-nose plier and the cutter in this set feature knurled jaw-stops so you can adjust the stop and achieve the same pressure again and again. All have the exclusive Scrivet® joint; easily adjust the joint with a Torx® wrench. • Flat-nose: 6" (152mm) overall length; 1" (25mm) jaw length • Round-nose: 5.75" (146mm) overall length; .75" (19mm) jaw length • Needle chain-nose: 6" (152mm) overall length; 1" (25mm) jaw length • Super-flush cutter: 5.63" (143mm) overall length; .63" (16mm) jaw length; 14-gauge maximum cut Description A. Swanstrom pliers & cutter; set/4

B. set of 4

Description Swanstrom micro pliers & cutter; set/4

D

“Botanical Bracelet” by Patrik Kusek 2007 Saul Bell Design Award Winner, PMC®

Order # 111-729

1 2 set set $130.00 $120.00

ERGO HANDLE PLIERS & SIDE-CUTTER SET This set includes four pliers and a cutter; each features stainless steel construction with double-leaf springs, non-slip Ergo PVC handles, a brushed finish, non-glare surface and box joint. Includes round-nose, chain-nose and flat-nose pliers as well as a side cutter. Jaw length for pliers: 0.8" (20mm); jaw length for side cutter: 0.5" (12.7mm). Overall Description Length C. Ergo pliers & side-cutter; set/4 5" (127mm)

Item D available with curved blades, too.

1 2 set set $154.00 $144.00

SWANSTROM MICRO PLIERS & CUTTER SET All the quality and dependability you count on from Swanstrom in handy smaller sizes for intricate work—perfect for chain mail work! These pliers and cutter feature knurled jaw-stops so you can adjust the stop and achieve the same pressure again and again. Soft-Touch™ handles, adjustable Scrivet® joints and an anti-glare black finish to prevent eye fatigue; sturdy machine-hardened construction. • Flat-nose: 4.53" (115mm) overall length; .80" (20mm) jaw length • Round-nose: 4.48" (114mm) overall length; 0.75" (19mm) jaw length • Chain-nose: 4.61" (117mm) overall length; .88" (22mm) jaw length • Super-flush cutter: 4.26" (108mm) overall length; .40" (10mm) jaw length; 20-gauge maximum cut B.

C. set of 4

Order # 111-026

Order # 111-140

set $34.00

GERMAN SHOP SHEARS Light-duty shears are great for intricate work. Use the curved-blade shears (see inset) to cut smooth, even curves! Cut metal up to 26 gauge. Made in Germany. • Ground and polished tool steel. • Large, comfortable loop handles. Blade D. Straight Curved

Overall Length 7" (178mm) 7" (178mm)

Blade Length 1.42" (36mm) 1.38" (35mm)

Order # 111-237 111-236

each $16.95 16.95

It’s a typical Sunday afternoon at my country house in Northern California, a weekend retreat of sorts from the busy day-to-day life in San Francisco. The garden was burgeoning with fresh citrus, grapes and peaches. Even the pomegranates were starting to plump up. The flowers were in full bloom, too: calla lilies, roses, and enormous dahlias. This garden stands as a tribute to my father’s love of growing fruit trees and my mother’s love of flowers. Here is the result of my inspiration. —Patrik Kusek

50

riogrande.com

800.545.6566


TOOLS SWANSTROM DISC CUTTER SET Manufactured in the USA exclusively for Rio Grande by Swanstrom, this high-quality precision disc cutter is made of shock-resistant tool steel, hardened and tempered, with precision-ground surfaces. The cutting edge on each punch is angled and sharply ground to cut cleanly—cut after cut, year after year. The set includes a 57⁄8"-dia. rubber base that holds the cutter and punches and can be used as a support during punching. Made in the USA. • Spring-loaded die plates allow you to open and close them Earrings by Tim Sheriff easily according to the thickness being punched. • Designed for non-ferrous metals up to 16 ga. (1.29mm). • Punch sizes: 1⁄8"–1¼" (1⁄8" increments). Cutter No. of Description Dimensions Punches A. Swanstrom disc 4" dia. x 1¼"H 10 cutter set Replacement rubber base Replacement 1⁄8" steel punch; pkg/2

Order # 112-509

There is always one question on my mind: What if? What if we made a disc cutter with spring-loaded dies and a clamping feature? What if we made a tool to stretch rings of wire into various shapes? What if I punch out a disc and dome it? Wow! Highly polished silver is reflective! What if I put a red Swarovski® faceted bead inside the domed disc? Hmmmm . . .

—Tim Sheriff

set $265.00

112-509/1 112-509/2

12.95 12.95 A

DELRIN® CENTER-POSITIONING DIES FOR SWANSTROM DISC CUTTERS Use these Delrin® centering dies with your Swanstrom disc cutter (item A, above) to create perfectly centered washer components. Cut a hole in your sheet with a punch the size of your desired inner ring diameter. Then move the metal to the larger punch size and use the appropriate centering die to center the metal. Clamp the metal securely and punch a hole with the punch size of your desired outside ring size. Simple and effective! Includes 10 die sizes: 1⁄8"–1¼" in 1⁄8" increments. Please Note: The 1/8" die is made of steel, not Delrin®, for durability. Description B. Centering die set

No. of Dies 10

Die Sizes 1⁄8"–1¼"

Order # 112-524

Positioning dies effectively center your metal, allowing you to create consistently sized ring components (washers) of just about any width.

set $56.00

STEEL BENCH BLOCK Use this high-quality steel bench block for flattening, laying out or chasing. Ground flat, polished and case-hardened. Dimensions C. 315⁄16" x 315⁄16" x 4¾" (100 x 100 x 20mm)

Order # 115-316

B

1 2 each each $34.00 $32.00

ECONOMY ESSENTIAL DAPPING SET This set includes eight punches, sized 27, 23, 19, 17, 14, 11, 8 and 5mm, and a flat dapping block with cavity sizes 28, 24, 20, 18, 15, 12, 9 and 6mm. The set is delivered in a wood stand. Made in India. Description D. Economy dapping set

Shipping Weight 6 lbs. (2.7kg)

Order # 112-930

C

1 2 set set $69.00 $59.00

D

51


FLEX SHAFTS Prodigy™ handpiece, shown enlarged; mandrel and disc not included.

PRODIGY™ FLEX SHAFT SYSTEM Prodigy™ flex shafts are very affordable and extremely well built. Easy to set up and use, it holds a wide variety of attachments and tools and is compatible with most handpieces. Use the Prodigy for polishing, grinding, cutting, texturing, drilling and carving your metal clay designs. • 1⁄8hp ball bearing 20,000rpm motor. System includes: • Electronic foot control with plastic housing for hands-free speed control. • Key-type chuck (holds shanks up to 5⁄32" (4mm) in diameter. • A Prodigy™ key-type handpiece (also available separately; item B, below); fits most standard flex shaft motors with quick-attach shafts. Description A. Prodigy™ flex shaft system

Amps 2.6

Shipping Weight 12.5 lbs.

Order # 117-095

each $99.00

PRODIGY™ FLEX SHAFT HANDPIECE This key-type chuck-style handpiece holds many accessories and tools. Fits most standard flex shaft motors with quick-attach shafts.

A. Prodigy™ flex shaft system B. Prodigy™ handpiece (included with item A)

Item A includes a key-type handpiece and chuck handle.

B.

Description Prodigy™ flex shaft handpiece only

Order # 117-098

each $27.95

PRODIGY™ FLEX SHAFT COMPLETE KIT This kit includes everything you need to help you set up and begin using your Prodigy™ flex shaft. • Prodigy™ flex shaft system with Prodigy key-type chuck-style handpiece (item A, above) • Comfort handle chuck key • Flex shaft swing-away motor stand; 42" • 26-piece flex shaft accessory kit • Making the Most of Your Flex-shaft book • Muslin buff, 7⁄8" dia.; pkg/12 • Hard felt buffs, mounted shapes; pkg/8 • Sunsheen™ rouges: red (16 oz.), green (16 oz.), white (11 oz.) • 3M ¾" radial bristle discs; 12 each of 1μ-, 220-, 400-grit • 3⁄32"-shank screw mandrel with 1/16" screw; pkg/6 • 3⁄32" high-speed twist drills; set/12 • Rio steel bur assortment; set/24 • 3M Viper™ safety glasses • Alligator Skin®, 90-ft roll; pkg/4 • 3M 8233 N100 dust/mist and fume respirator • Bur-Life® lubricant with base and four cartridges • Deluxe rotating bur holder

Use the tools in the PMC® polishing set (page 65) with a Prodigy™ flex shaft.

PRODIGY™: a must-have for every bench.

C

Description C. Prodigy™ flex shaft complete kit

Shipping Weight 7 lbs.

Order # 117-155

kit $365.00

SMALL HIGH-SPEED STEEL DRILL SET Set of 20 high-speed steel drills are packaged in a durable metal index case. Shank sizes match head sizes; set includes sizes #61–#80 (.039"–.0135"). Description D. High-speed drills, set/20

52

D

Order # 349-094

riogrande.com

set $33.00

800.545.6566


STAMPING TOOLS STAMPING KIT This kit contains everything you need to stamp designs onto your metal clay pieces or create your own quality tags. • German straight, light-duty shears • Peddinghaus nylon-head mallet • Economy brass mallet • 100 x 100 x 20mm steel bench block • Precision hole punch • Steel stamp set, 27-piece alphabet; 1⁄16" Description A. Stamping kit

Order # 112-077

kit $99.00

STAMP SETS Hardened steel stamps with crisp faces are available with Corsiva or Comic Sans font in uppercase or lowercase. All sets include 26 letters and an “&”. Each 3mm-high character is mounted on a 2¼"-long straight shank. Description B. Corsiva C. D. Comic Sans E.

uppercase lowercase uppercase lowercase

Order # 111-346 111-347 111-348 111-349

A

set $40.00 40.00 40.00 40.00

B

Corsiva, uppercase

Comic Sans, uppercase

D

Corsiva, lowercase

C

Comic Sans, lowercase

E items B–E, shown enlarged

ALPHABETIC & NUMERIC STAMP SETS Take part in metal-stamping—the jewelry process that continues to grow in popularity—with these stamp sets. Item F includes 26 uppercase block letters and an ”&” symbol. Item G includes the numbers 0 through 8 (number 6 reverses for 9). 3⁄32"-high characters are mounted on the end of 2¼"-long straight shanks. Description Order # F. Alphabetic; uppercase block letters 111-338 G. Numeric; 0–8 111-339

set $19.95 19.95

“999 FS” MARKING STAMPS Stamps are precision-etched from 5⁄16" water-hardened tool steel and heat-treated to HRC58/60 for crisp, detailed surfaces and a longer service life. Both measure 1mm. Mark the quality of your designs with these durable tool-steel copyright stamps. Description H. “999 FS” straight stamp I. “999 FS” bent stamp

Order # 112-130/04 112-130/03

each $21.00 21.50

F G

999 FS 1mm The example above is shown actual size, as it will look when stamped on your metal clay pieces.

H

I

53


VAC - U - F O R M ™ M O D E L - M A K I N G RIO PRO-FORM VAC-U-FORM™ Metal clay artists will love the Rio Pro-Form Vac-U-Form™! Create one-of-a-kind, highly detailed plastic molds from your original pieces in just a few simple steps. Using vacuum power with heat and a special highly conforming plastic modeling material (items B–D), the Rio Pro-Form Vac-U-Form™ produces molded models quickly and easily—an affordable way for artists to develop their metal clay jewelry line. The Pro-Form is easy to operate; instructions are included. Check out the instructional video at riogrande.com.

Heating element under hood swivels out of the way.

Mold frame holds modeling plastics. Vacuum platform with more perforations for improved draw.

Make masters from almost any object you like! Please Note: The Rio Pro-Form is not suitable for deeply undercut designs or models. • Produce multiple models and customized patterns for metal clay. • Press the metal clay into plastic molds to form pendants, earrings and other components, then remove the mold and fire the clay. • Create matching halves and join them before firing the clay; ideal for beads and other hollow pieces. • Get a full-contoured shape from pieces with large surface areas. • More perforations in the vacuum plate offer a superior draw. • The powerful heating element heats evenly, capturing exceptional detail and texture in the mold surface. • 120 volts AC.

Vacuum and heat switches.

Create replicas using the special conforming plastic modeling material and the vacuum technology of Rio Vac-U-Form™.

A

Description A. Rio Pro-Form Vac-U-Form™ plastic modeling sheet

Order # 700-658

each $375.00

ambient air pressure

Visit riogrande.com to watch a video on how to use the Vac-U-Form™ with metal clay! B

vacuum

Makes matched model halves.

C Vacuums deep contours.

D Picks up fine details and textures.

U s i n g t h e R i o Va c - U - F o r m ™ 1. Place the plastic sheet in the molding frame. 2. Set your originals on the vacuum platform. 3. After heating the plastic, switch the vacuum on and pull the molding frame down onto the vacuum platform. 4. Let the mold cool, then trim the excess plastic from your models, sprue, and you’re ready to mold.

MODELING PLASTICS • Choose .040"-thick (1mm) sheets for large, simple parts requiring greater thickness for effective casting. • Choose .020"-thick (.5mm) sheets for small, intricate parts; these sheets reproduce surface detail well. For large parts with a lot of detail, mold the original in .020" plastic, then brush molten wax onto the back of the pattern to add thickness as needed. • Heat only until a ¼" droop forms (bubbles will form if over-heated); then slide mold frame down over the vacuum plate. • All sheets are 5" square. True Form Molding Plastic The sharp image detail of this thinner, rigid molding plastic is ideal for duplicating the fine details on the inside of your molds. It also works well on contour forms. Clear, non-stick, rigid body. B.

Description True Form; pkg/25

Thickness .020"

Order # 700-665

1-2 pkg $11.95

Tuffy Molding Plastic This hard molding plastic is excellent for exterior-shape duplication and for forming large, smooth forms. Use for deep contours. Description C. Tuffy; pkg/25

1

2

Thickness .040"

Order # 700-667

1-2 pkg $14.75

Soft Flex Molding Plastic This highly flexible, thick, soft plastic is ideal for detailed interior and exterior duplication; works well on organic-shaped contour forms. • Easy to cut with scissors. • Corners will draw back slightly when heated; use a spray release agent.

3

54

4

Description D. Soft Flex; pkg/25

Thickness .040"

Order # 700-669

riogrande.com

1-2 pkg $17.95

800.545.6566


MOLDING & MODELING MATERIALS RIO COLD MOLD Two-part Rio Cold Mold compound delivers 0% shrinkage and needs no heat. Combine equal amounts of each part; no release agents are needed—ideal for molding originals or master models and for duplicating metal clay pieces. Try the handy-sized 1-oz. portions— mix a small amount of compound quickly and easily with no measuring or guesswork. Compact and portable, they allow you to capture a unique design or texture in minutes—don’t leave your studio without them! Description A. 1-lb. jar B. 1-oz. jar; pkg/6

Order # 701-046 701-042

A

1-2 3-5 each each $25.25 $23.98 19.95 18.95

DELIGHT™ PAPER CLAY MODELING COMPOUND This amazingly lightweight, non-toxic paper clay compound is soft and ready to use right out of the package. Use it to create a model or form that you can coat with a thin sheet of PMC® —simply sculpt it then let it air-dry! Leave a small hole in the metal clay, then fire the piece. The compound burns out completely (no ash or residue of any kind), leaving a hollow, lightweight metal form. Package contains two 3.17 oz. (90g) pouches of compound. Description C. Delight™ paper clay; pkg/180g

Order # 100-949

1-2 pkg $9.95

B

3-5 pkg $9.45

CLAY/SILICA MELTING CRUCIBLE This convenient, quality clay/silica crucible is ideal when using alumina hydrate to support PMC® designs for firing. It’s the neat, safe way to put both the alumina hydrate and your designs inside the kiln. Description D. Crucible

Order # 704-120

1-2 each $11.65

C Use alumina hydrate to support delicate pieces— especially designs with curved surfaces. Crucible not included, see item D.

ALUMINA HYDRATE Place alumina hydrate in any high-temperature ceramic crucible (not included; we highly recommend item D) or on a shelf in your kiln to support delicate PMC® pieces while they are fired. E.

Description 5-lb. package 1-lb. package

Order # 100-961 100-960

each $13.75 5.25

CORK CLAY Use cork clay as a core for hollow PMC® objects such as beads. It burns out cleanly and completely. Keep unused cork clay tightly wrapped in plastic. Please Note: Once dried, cork cannot be

D

E

 WARNING! Alumina hydrate is extremely hazardous if inhaled. Please carefully read the MSDS provided with this product and follow all recommended safety precautions.

re-hydrated. • Always fire in a well-ventilated area. Cork clay produces smoke as it burns and may leave a small amount of green ash after firing. Any ash can simply be rinsed away with water. • Important: Do not open the kiln during firing; cork clay may ignite. F.

Description Cork clay; 250–270g/pkg

Order # 100-976

pkg $11.00

Cork clay provides support for hollow pieces such as beads and conchos.

G o o d ve nti lati on—always a g re at ide a

F

While good ventilation is always a good idea when firing PMC®, it becomes even more important as you incorporate other materials into your pieces. For safety reasons, if you plan to fire PMC creations built using cork clay or other organic substrate materials, we strongly encourage you to ensure your kiln is well-ventilated. If you don’t have a vent hood, and an open window and a fan aren’t enough, consider moving your kiln outdoors. Rio recommends that you choose only organic materials for use with your PMC®. If you plan to use non-organic, petroleum-based substrates (such as Styrofoam™), we recommend they be removed from the design prior to firing.

55


PROJECT Ring with Decorative Plaque

PMC® ring by Yvonne M. Padilla

w h a t yo u ’l l n e e d : • • • •

PMC3™ (#100-771, pg. 7) ClayMate (#111-427, pg. 23) texture (optional) sanding sponge (#337-318, pg. 67)

• PMC® tool kit (#111-411, pg. 20) • sanding stick (pg. 67) • paper & pencil • polishing paper (pgs. 66 and 67)

• shrinkage ruler (#100-975, pg. 20) • Rio work surface (try #111-567, pg. 21) • PMC® slip (#100-772, pg. 7) • ring pellet mold (#111-380 or #111-381, pg. 57) • ring mandrel (#116-001, pg. 192)

Before You Begin. Determine what size you want the ring to be after firing. Create a template by cutting a strip of paper and wrapping it around a ring mandrel at a point two sizes larger than the desired finished size, marking the strip where it overlaps. Then add 2mm to allow for overlapping. Wrap plastic wrap around the mandrel to keep the PMC® from sticking to the mandrel as you form the ring.

Return the piece to the drying tray and allow it to dry completely.

e Creating the Ring. Shape the PMC® into a log shape and roll it out evenly, six playing cards thick (fig. a). Texture the surface as desired.

a

Cut the PMC® to the desired width, keeping cuts parallel to one another (fig. b).

f

Lay the paper template next to the strip of PMC®. Using the craft knife, trim both ends so they are square (fig. c).

b

c

d 56

Gently lift the strip of PMC and wrap it around the plastic-covered ring mandrel at the size you determined earlier. Overlap the ends by 1mm. Apply a small amount of water to wet the seam. Using the blending tool, blend the seam together until it disappears (fig. d). Blend carefully to avoid distorting the ring shape. Allow it to dry partially. When the ring is dry enough to support itself, slide the plastic and ring off the mandrel, remove the plastic from inside the ring and place the ring on a drying tray. Allow it to dry completely. Using the Soft Colour Shaper, apply PMC3™ slip to the inside seam and blend it until the seam disappears (fig. e).

g

h

i

Once the ring is dry, gently sand the edges and the inside seam (fig. f). If necessary, apply more slip to the seam and allow it to dry again. Creating the Decorative Plaque. Roll out a piece of PMC3™ four playing cards thick; texture if desired. Cut out a plaque in the desired shape. Apply water or slip to the seam of the ring. Place the plaque onto the seam ensuring that there is full contact between the plaque and the ring (fig. g). If you wish to add more embellishment, apply using water or slip (fig. h). Allow ring to dry completely. If necessary, finish any sanding that is needed. Place the correct size ring pellet on a firing shelf. Position the ring around the pellet (fig. i). This will keep the ring round during firing and ensures that it’s fired to the correct size. Fire at 1650°F for at least one hour; fire for two hours for maximum strength. Brush with a brass brush; finish as desired.

Finished? Not quite!

Find that perfect display and just-right packaging at riogrande. com!

riogrande.com

800.545.6566


RING-MAKING TOOLS MATT™ HARDWOOD RING MANDREL & STAND Use this highly polished, tapered hardwood ring mandrel to form PMC® rings. Sturdy steel base allows 360° rotation. Description A. Matt™ hardwood ring stand

Order # 700-545

1-2 each $19.95

RING PELLET MOLDS These ring pellet molds allow you to make ring sizing pellets when you need them. Use sizing pellets inside ring shanks to constrain PMC® during firing, ensuring the fired rings are calibrated to standard US ring sizes. For a finished size 6 ring, simply insert the pellet marked “6” into the ring and fire. Your perfectly sized ring will have a smoother, cleaner shank and will shine up brilliantly.

A

Find convenient 2-kg canisters of Kerr SatinCast® investment in your Tools & Equipment catalog and at riogrande.com.

B

Easier than trying to calculate shrinkage and more economical than paying for commercially made molds, these molds make all the pellets you need—for pennies apiece. Simply mix a small batch of investment (see your Tools & Equipment catalog or riogrande.com) and pour it into the mold. After 2–3 hours, you can pop out your sizing pellets.

Use molds to create pellets that ensure perfectly sized rings.

 WARNING! Pellet molds (item B) require the use of investment, which contains silica. Exposure to crystalline silica can be dangerous. Refer to the silica warning in your Tools & Equipment catalog and the MSDSs for pertinent safety information. Further, the user is encouraged to seek advice regarding safe handling procedures from outside professionals before attempting to use pellet molds.

Pellet molds are available in both whole and half sizes; each produces a set of nine pellets in size 4–12 or 4½–12½ with the size marked on the pellet. Description B. Whole-size pellet mold Half-size pellet mold (not shown)

Order # 111-380 111-381

each $28.25 28.25

RING-MAKING MANDRELS & STAND These ring-making mandrels, available in half and whole sizes, allow you to form metal clay rings, then fire using the pellets you’ll make with the pellet molds above. The ring size is stamped on each 3"-long elm mandrel. The 3¼"W x 4"D x 4"H steel stand can be inverted so you can work on rings from two directions; the mandrel can also be removed from the stand for hand-held work. • The complete set (item C) includes the stand and 12 double-ended mandrels in a wood base in sizes 4–15 (half and whole sizes), allowing you to make PMC® rings in post-fire sizes 2–13 or 2½–13½ (accounting for the approximate 12% shrinkage when firing PMC). • The whole-size set (item D) includes the stand and six double-ended mandrels in a wood base in whole sizes, 4–15 (makes rings in sizes 2–13). • The half-size set (item E) includes the stand and six double-ended mandrels in a wood base in half sizes 4½–15½ (makes rings in sizes 2½–13½). Description C. Complete set; whole and half sizes, 4–15 D. Whole sizes, 4–15 E. Half sizes, 4½–15½

Order # 700-830 700-831 700-832

C

set $69.95 38.95 38.95

D

LONG TWEEZERS Use these extra-long tweezers to safely and easily remove PMC® pieces from your kiln after firing. F.

Length 18"L (457mm)

Order # 710-939

each $22.95

F

E

57


RING-MAKING TOOLS PMC® RINGMAKER MOLDS

Complete half-round RingMaker set

Coat the mold with a bit of oil. Set the thickness guide in the base and place a flattened ball of clay in the center.

Visit rio g ran d e. c om to se e a vid eo u s in g Ri ngM a ke r m olds ! Complete flat ring RingMaker set

Innovative RingMaker molds make it easy to make perfectly round, seamless PMC® rings (they can be used with BRONZclay™ and COPPRclay™, too!). Complete sets include a base, a top, a thickness guide and a cylinder. To adjust the thickness of the flat rings, use one of the flat ring wide-joint accessories (choose the set that matches the width of your complete flat ring set). Simply remove the 2mm thickness guide included in the complete set and replace it with the set including the 1.5, 2.5 or 3.5mm wide-joint accessory, or the set including the 2.5, 3.0 and 3.5mm wide-joint accessory. Visit riogrande.com to see a video using RingMaker molds.

• Available in half-round or flat styles in four mold sizes: 17, 21, 25, 29. Please Note: Post-fire ring sizes shown below are approximate. • Acrylic molds are easy to clean and re-use; sizes are clearly marked. Description Complete half-round RingMaker set

Thickness Width 2.6mm 4mm

Complete flat ring RingMaker set

2mm

5mm

8mm Push the cylinder through. What’s left inside the mold is a seamless ring, ready to fire and finish!

Adjust the thickness of your rings by swapping out the 2mm thickness guide included in the flat ring RingMaker set for a thickness guide wide-joint accessory (either 1.5, 2.5 or 3.5mm, or 2.5, 3.0 and 3.5mm).

12mm

Flat ring wide-joint thickness accessory set

1.5, 2.5 5mm and 3.5mm

1.5, 2.5 8mm and 3.5mm

2.5, 3.0 12mm and 3.5mm

Order # 116-431 116-432 116-433 116-434 116-435 116-436 116-437 116-438 116-439 116-440 116-441 116-442 116-443 116-444 116-445 116-446 116-447 116-448 116-449 116-450 116-451 116-457 116-458 116-459 116-460 116-461 116-462 116-463

each $42.95 42.95 42.95 42.95 44.95 44.95 44.95 44.95 44.95 44.95 44.95 44.95 44.95 44.95 44.95 44.95 44.95 44.95 44.95 44.95 44.95 44.95 44.95 44.95 44.95 44.95 44.95 44.95

Designed specifically for use with PMC3™ and PMC+™, re-useable ceramic Shrinkage Stoppers help control shrinkage of rings during firing. After firing, the ring is round, smooth and ready to finish. Each Stopper includes one 150mm-long white ceramic tape strip (prevents clay from sticking to the Stopper) and one 150mm-long black alumina tape strip (smooths the inside of the ring as it fires); both are long enough to fire approximately two rings (replacement 600 x 20mm strips available below).

Ceramic Shrinkage Stopper Sets

CERAMIC SHRINKAGE STOPPERS SETS Each set includes four Shrinkage Stoppers, one package of ten 600 x 20mm white ceramic tape strips and one package of ten 600 x 20mm black alumina tape strips.

58

Approx. U.S. Ring Size (Post-Fire) 4½–5¾ 6–7¼ 7¾–9 9¼–10½ 4½–5¾ 6–7¼ 7¾–9 9¼–10½ 4½–5¾ 6–7¼ 7¾–9 9¼–10½ 4½–5¾ 6–7¼ 7¾–9 9¼–10½ 4½–5¾ 6–7¼ 7¾–9 9¼–10½ 4½–5¾ 6–7¼ 7¾–9 9¼–10½ 4½–5¾ 6–7¼ 7¾–9 9¼–10½

CERAMIC SHRINKAGE STOPPERS & REPLACEMENT TAPES

Dried PMC3™ ring blank made using the RingMaker mold; carved and finished ring by Yvonne M. Padilla.

Description Set #8–#11 (ring sizes 4½–5¾, approx. US sizes) Set #12–#15 (ring sizes 6–7¼, approx. US sizes) Set #16–#19 (ring sizes 7¾–9, approx. US sizes) Set #20–#23 (ring sizes 9¼–10½, approx. US sizes)

Mold Size # 17 21 25 29 17 21 25 29 17 21 25 29 17 21 25 29 17 21 25 29 17 21 25 29 17 21 25 29

Order 116-464 116-465 116-466 116-467

set $34.95 34.95 34.95 34.95

Approx. U.S. Stopper ring size 1-2 Stopper Number (post-fire) Order # each Number #1 1–1¼ 116-470/1 $19.75 #16 116-470/2 19.75 #17 #2 1¾–2 #3 2¼–2½ 116-470/3 19.75 #18 #4 2¾–3 116-470/4 19.75 #19 #5 3–3¼ 116-470/5 19.75 #20 #6 3½–3¾ 116-470/6 19.75 #21 #7 3¾–4 116-470/7 19.75 #22 #8 4–4¼ 116-470/8 19.75 #23 #9 4¼–4½ 116-470/9 19.75 #24 #10 4½–4¾ 116-470/10 19.75 #25 #11 5¼–5½ 116-470/11 19.75 #26 116-470/12 19.75 #27 #12 5¾–6 #13 6–61/4 116-470/13 19.75 #28 #14 6¼–6½ 116-470/14 19.75 #29 #15 6½–7 116-470/15 19.75 #30 Please Note: Post-fire sizes shown above are approximate.

Approx. U.S. ring size 1-2 (post-fire) Order # each 7–7¼ 116-470/16 $19.75 7¼–7½ 116-470/17 19.75 8–8¼ 116-470/18 19.75 8½–8¾ 116-470/19 19.75 8¾–9 116-470/20 19.75 9¼–9½ 116-470/21 19.75 9½–9¾ 116-470/22 19.75 10–10¼ 116-470/23 19.75 10¾–11 116-470/24 19.75 11¼–11½ 116-470/25 19.75 11½–11¾ 116-470/26 19.75 12–12¼ 116-470/27 19.75 12½–13 116-470/28 19.75 13 116-470/29 19.75 13–13¼ 116-470/30 19.75

Description Order White ceramic tape, 600 x 20mm; pkg/10 strips 116-475 Black alumina tape, 600 x 20mm; pkg/10 strips 116-476

riogrande.com

pkg $13.95 13.95

800.545.6566


“We have entered the age of true alchemy!” —Gail Crosman Moore

What do I love about metal clay? Its elastic nature lets me sculpt and create dimension and then magically turn it into metal. That says it all! —Gail Crosman Moore

FIRE As magical as it is intimidating, fire brings your metal clay work to life—solid and tangible. It’s a delicate process, with absolutes such as firing times and temperatures. And these absolutes are crucial to “’Waves & Seeds” by Gail Crosman Moore 2009 Saul Bell Design Award 2nd Place Winner, PMC®

the survival of your piece—under-fire, and it could break . . . over-fire, it could melt. But firing is also a creative process. Depending on

the kind of piece you’re firing, you can adapt the process—does it need to be supported with alumina hydrate? Does the ramp need to be slow because there are stones present? The piece drives the firing. And the best part? When firing in a kiln, you can take a break and know you’re still creating!

F i r i ng O p ti o n s Torches (#500-230, this page and page 60)—Versatile! Effective for firing individual PMC+™ or PMC3™ pieces, plus PMC PRO™, BRONZclay™, COPPRclay™ and FASTfire BRONZclay™, then applying Aura 22. A great way to demonstrate firing and what happens to PMC® in the classroom. Ultralite Kiln (#703-016, page 60)—Great for firing a few small PMC® pieces at once and for keum-boo techniques. SpeedFire™ (#703-072, page 60)—Portable; features a temperature gauge.

S o me F i ri n g D o n ’ts Rio Grande does not endorse either of the methods below to fire PMC®. They are inexact and potentially unsafe. Hot Pots—Hot Pots burn a methanol-based fuel and tend to be messy and smelly.

Blazer Butane Micro Torch (shipped empty; see page 60. 500-230 $59.00

Firing on a stove-top—A fixture is placed on top of a kitchen range to fire the PMC® piece.

59


HAND-FIRING TOOLS ULTRALITE KILN FOR PMC® OR GRANULATION This small, lightweight beehive-style kiln is highly effective for firing PMC+™ and PMC3™ as well as hard enamel on metal—great for granulation! Its 3"-dia. ceramic-embedded, recessed element reaches 1500°F (815°C); adjust the temperature with the controller (#703-009). The disc set (item B) includes three textured discs for curing and for firing PMC® pieces. The red-brass covers (item C) fit above the element in the kiln to moderate its heat and broaden its versatility. The flat disc holds flat pieces; the circle with a depression holds volumetric items (beads, rings, etc.). Made in the USA. Power: 110 volts, 250 watts, 2.5 amps Dimensions: 5½"W x 5½"D x 6½"H (14 x 14 x 16.5cm) Shipping weight: 1.8 lbs. (.82kg)

A stainless steel work spatula is included with item A. The unique design of the Ultralite kiln lid allows it to reach temperatures up to 1500°F (871°C).

A

B

Description A. Ultralite kiln Ultralite kiln controller (not shown) Replacement element (not shown) B. PMC® drying disc set; pkg/3 C. Red-brass covers; set/2

C

Red-brass discs moderate heat inside the kiln—ideal for keum-boo processes.

E

1-2 each $178.00 25.95 38.40 22.90 28.00

RIO PMC® TORCH-FIRING KIT Control the firing process without a kiln! The mesh screens don’t retain heat like some soldering pads do, so you can control the heat that comes in contact with the PMC® piece. Made in the USA. • Includes a blazer butane micro-torch (shipped empty) with auto-ignition and a flame that’s easy to adjust with one hand. • Comes with a stainless steel 9"-tall tripod, a 6" x 6" heavy-duty mesh screen and a 6" x 6" fine-mesh screen. • 150g (9-oz.) butane cartridges available separately (see riogrande.com).

D

Important: For safe use, the SpeedFire® requires 2 feet of clearance on all sides and 5 feet of clearance above.

Order # 703-016 703-009 703-026 703-008 703-023

Description D. Rio PMC® torch-firing kit Torch only Heavy-duty screen only Fine-mesh screen only Butane refill (not shown)

A built-in pyrometer provides accurate temperature control for PMC®.

The SpeedFire® cone intensifies and directs heat upward to the stainless steel mesh firing grid. Caution: Do not allow hair, hands or face near cone during firing as this will cause severe burns.

Order # 500-085 500-230 502-010 502-096 500-181

kit $70.50 59.00 6.25 9.25 4.90

PMC® SPEEDFIRE® CONE SYSTEM The SpeedFire® cone system fires all varieties of PMC® at optimal temperatures and lets you see your pieces during the firing process. • Original PMC®: fire at 1650°F (899°C) for 2 hours. PMC+™: fire at 1650°F (899°C) for 10 minutes. PMC3™: fire at 1290°F (699°C) for 10 minutes, or at 1200°F (649°C) for 20 minutes, or at 1110°F (593°C) for 45 minutes. • Fires more than 100 grams of PMC at once. • Fire ceramic or glass right into your PMC pieces. • Long fuel life; one propane cylinder (not included, available at most outdoor/hardware supply stores) lasts about three hours. • System includes a SpeedFire™ cone, a specially designed burner assembly, a fuel tank stabilizer base, a stainless steel mesh firing grid, a pyrometer with probe, installation hardware and instructions. E.

Description PMC® SpeedFire™ cone system

Order # 703-072

each $149.00

G KILN GLASSES A nylon wrap-around frame, adjustable temples and an impactresistant lens with scratch-resistant coating offer maximum protection; 99.9% UV protection. Meets ANSI Z87.1 requirements

SPEEDFIRE® SUPER-MINI™ BURNER KIT This powerful burner is ideal for all varieties of metal clay (fire designs weiging up to 40g and up to 7 cards thick on the 2½"-square heavy-duty screen). Powered by butane lighter fuel (not included), the burner provides 25–30 mins. of firing. Features a safety lock to prevent accidental ignition and inadvertant release of fuel. Measures 6" dia. x 4"H. Kit includes: • SpeedFire® burner; max. temperature: 1550°F (843°C). • 6" x 6" heat-proof pad. • 7" fine-tip steel tweezer.

Description G. Kiln glasses; IR #3

F.

F

60

Order # 350-042

each $7.95

Description SpeedFire® Super-Mini™ burner kit

Order # 703-089

riogrande.com

kit $89.95

800.545.6566


SOLDERING This piece (“Tall Granary,” by CeCe Wire) is soldered to sterling silver bands.

TORCH SELECTION Choosing a torch can be daunting. We suggest you start simple; as your skills evolve, so can your tool arsenal and your designs! Two of the more popular torches are the SilverSmith™ and the Smith® Little Torch™ (see below). Many PMC® artists start with a butane micro torch (#500-086, below). Although it’s a bit limited in application, it’s a great way to get comfortable working with a flame! SILVERSMITH™ ACETYLENE/ATMOSPHERIC AIR SYSTEM Use this complete system for silversmithing and light casting projects— great for silversmiths and craftspeople! Knobs are designed for easy one-handed on/off adjustment and control. Larger tips are ideal for annealing, sweat-soldering, brazing and light casting applications. Additional tips are available below. • Fast, economical heat. • No oxygen needed. • Burn acetylene and atmospheric air at 1700°F (927°C). • All-metal construction with long-wearing, precision-machined brass parts that are nickel-plated for added heat resistance. • Sensitive, dual-gauge regulator with large, easy-to-read dials. • All-metal handles with O-ring-sealed tips for safety and durability. Includes the accessories below. • 10-foot long-wear rubber hose; single line. • Torch handle. • Acetylene B-type, 40 cu. ft. tank. • #00 torch tip. • Acetylene B-fitting regulator; dual-gauge. • B/MC tank key. • Leak detector fluid. • Tinted safety glasses. • Torch striker. Description A. Acetylene torch system with tank Torch system without tank, key and glasses

Order # 500-109/NW 500-105

Item A is shown attached to an acetylene B-type, 40 cu. ft. tank (tank is shipped empty).

Order # 500-086

single-valve, non-gauged propane and oxygen regulators

each $339.00 205.00

LARGE BUTANE TORCH This jumbo, ergonomic butane torch features an electronic ignition and large fuel capacity—one full tank allows 90 minutes of burn time. Features an adjustable flame (larger flame allows for many applications), quick-refill design, self-ignition and safety lock. 7¼" tall. Reaches temperatures up to 2370°F (1299°C). Description B. Large butane torch

A

B

8-foot fuel and oxygen hoses with B fittings (9/16")

tanks not included

C Little Torch™ torch body

each $39.95

LITTLE TORCH™ PROPANE & OXYGEN SET FOR DISPOSABLE TANKS This portable torch is designed for use with 14.1-oz. disposable propane and 1.1 cu. ft. disposable oxygen tanks (not included*). • Includes the Little Torch™ body, #5 torch tip, Safe-D-Tect leak detector, 8-foot fuel and oxygen hoses, and preset propane and oxygen regulators for disposable tanks. • Wire tank holder/support included. • Accommodates Little Torch tip sizes #3 through #7. • For disposable LP gas and oxygen tanks, see your Tools & Equipment catalog and riogrande.com. • Instructions are included. Please Note: Not compatible with multi-flame melting tips. Description Order # set 500-090 $239.00 C. Little Torch™ propane and oxygen set *Tanks are available separately; see your Tools & Equipment catalog or riogrande.com.

D. SILVER WIRE SOLDER Cadmium-Free All are 20-gauge. Call for pricing. Hardness Extra-easy Easy Medium Hard

% Silver Melt Temp. 56 1145°F 65 1240°F 70 1275°F 75 1365°F

Sold by the ounce; minimum order is ½-ounce Flow Temp. Length/Oz. Order # 101-705 1207°F 21.5 ft. 1325°F 21.5 ft. 101-100 1360°F 21 ft. 101-703 1450°F 21 ft. 101-704

D

F

E

SILVER PASTE SOLDER Easy Combined solder and flux eliminates over- or under-fluxing. Reaches melting temperature quickly, reducing heat damage. Cadmium-free; for best results, use within 6 months of purchase. Call for pricing. E.

Description 560 easy

F.

650 easy

Melt Temp. 1145°F 1280°F

Flow Temp. 1205°F 1325°F

Jar Qty 1 oz. 10 oz. 1 oz. 10 oz.

Order # 103-099 103-093 103-100 103-094

61


KILNS

Items A and B feature four user-defined programs offering greater versatility with other clay products.

A

Item B features a special door for supporting bead mandrels.

RIO PMC® KILNS WITH FIVE PRE-SET PMC PROGRAMS Designed for firing PMC®, BRONZclay™ and COPPRclay™ and ideal for a wide range of applications, these kilns are your best value! You can fire enamel on metal, fuse glass or cure paint on china. Easy to use and program, these kilns feature five pre-set PMC programs, one that is ideal for 22K gold PMC, plus four you can custom-design. Use additional shelf kits (items C and D) to substantially expand the kiln’s firing capacity. Item B offers a special built-in bead door to support more effective glass bead production. Both models feature: • Ample space for firing, with built-in vent hole and plug. • Galvanized steel case with an inter-wall layer of air to help keep it cool. • Inner ceramic-fiber firing chamber with embedded elements. • A fiber shelf with four ceramic feet. Overall dimensions: 13¼"W x 12¼"D x 15½"H (33 x 31 x 39cm) Inside chamber: 8"W x 7¾"D x 5¾"H (20.3 x 19.7 x 14.6cm) Max. temperature: 2000°F (1093°C) Power: 120 volts, 1370 watts, 11.4 amps (220-volt models available by special order) Shipping weight: 35 lbs. (15.9kg) Description A. Rio PMC® kiln B. Rio PMC® kiln with bead door

C B

D

E

Kiln wash is highly recommended to protect the floor and shelves of your kiln; see page 171.

62

each $715.00 775.00

SHELF KITS FOR RIO PMC® KILNS Make your Rio PMC® kiln as efficient as your production needs require with these stackable shelf kits from Rio. You’ll greatly increase your firing capacity. Stack shelves, separated by feet, to create firing layers inside your PMC kilns. Item C includes two 7" x 7" x ½" ceramic shelves and eight ceramic feet. Item D includes one 6" x 6" x ½" Solderite™ pad and four ceramic feet. Description C. Ceramic shelf kit D. Solderite™ shelf kit

Order # 703-080 703-067

kit $25.50 12.95

CALDERA® KILN AND BEAD COLLAR Use the optional bead collar (item F) with your Caldera® kiln to stack two or more of these compact, portable kilns, creating the room you need for large projects. • Hot enough for pottery and stoneware as well as all formulas of PMC®, glass, enamel, porcelain, ceramics and most bead components. • Easy to use with the Sentry Xpress three-key controller and delayed start. • Includes four user-defined programs (eight segments each). • Elements are mounted in recessed grooves. • Bead collar features a 7½" x 2" door for annealing glass beads. Overall dimensions: 13"W x 13"D x 111/4"H (33 x 33 x 28.6cm) Inside chamber: 8"W x 8"D x 6½"H (20.3 x 20.3 x 16.5cm) Bead collar OD: 13"W x 13"D x 4¼"H (33 x 33 x 10.8cm) Bead collar ID: 8"W x 8"D x 4¼"H (20.3 x 20.3 x 10.8cm) Max. temperature: 2350°F (1288°C) Power: 120 volts, 15 amps Shipping weight: Oven, 46 lbs. (21kg); bead collar, 14 lbs. (6.4kg) E. F.

Use the bead collar (item F) to expand your oven capacity and stack collars for tall projects.

Order # 703-117 703-118

Description Caldera® kiln Bead collar

Order # 703-112 703-113

each $649.95 135.00

F

riogrande.com

800.545.6566


KILNS RIO ENAMELING KILNS Rio enameling kilns feature three pre-set firing temperatures for enamels and six that you can define to fit your firing needs. Use the exclusive built-in Rio controller to set and maintain firing temperatures. The easy-latch door will not jar your enamels when opening and closing. Also suitable for metal clay, glass and ceramics, both models include: • Ample space for firing (item B accepts taller pieces). • Galvanized steel case with high-temperature insulating firebrick that keeps the exterior cool. • Elements are protected in recessed grooves. Rio Model 900 Perfect for enameling most small or flat pieces. Overall dimensions: 14"W x 18"D x 16¼"H Inside chamber: 8½"W x 9"D x 4½"H Max. temperature: 2000°F (1093°C) Power: 120 volts, 1100 watts, 9 amps Shipping weight: 63 lbs. (28.5kg) Description A. Rio Model 900 enameling kiln

A

Kiln wash is highly recommended to protect the floor and shelves of your kiln; see page 171.

Order # 703-119

each $685.00

The exclusive, easy-to-use Rio controller sets and maintains accurate firing temperatures.

Rio Model 1000 Ideal for all types of enameling; accommodates tall pieces. Overall dimensions: 14"W x 18"D x 20"H Inside chamber: 8½"W x 9"D x 8¾"H Max. temperature: 2000°F (1093°C) Power: 120 volts, 1680 watts, 14 amps Shipping weight: 74 lbs. (33.5kg) B.

Description Rio Model 1000 enameling kiln

Order # 703-121

each $899.00

FIREFLY KILN This powerful, portable kiln gives you the freedom to create anywhere you find a standard 120-volt outlet. Fire PMC®, glass, stoneware, enamels and more with incredible results. Infinitely adjustable temperature control with digital accuracy allows you to fire with precision. Constructed of 2½"-thick insulating firebricks, interlocked at the corners for strength and durability, this kiln holds heat efficiently and ensures a safe, gradual cool-down. Sturdy 3" steel base and rubber feet allow you to set up on any heat-safe surface without stands. A digital pyrometer is included. Overall dimensions: 15"W x 18½"D x 12"H (38 x 47 x 30.5cm) Inside chamber: 8"W x 8"D x 4½"H (20.3 x 20.3 x 11.4cm) Max. temperature: 2350°F (1288°C) Power: 120 volts, 1680 watts, 14 amps Shipping weight: 45 lbs. (20.4kg) Description C. Firefly kiln

Order # 703-114

B

each $395.00 BRONZclay™ bracelet by Celie Fago

C

63


Above: Some of our winners and their award-winning designs from the 2010 competition in the Metal Clay, Beads and Enamel categories. See how far you can reach!

EMBRACE THE CHALLENGE! Set your sights higher than ever before. Let the materials themselves inspire your vision and fuel your passion. Discover new worlds in the process, and take us there with you. The Saul Bell Design Award competition encourages artists and designers, students and professionals, to test the boundaries of innovation and technique in any of six categories. Push your most daring design ideas into the spotlight—anything can happen when you reach.

SAUL BELL DESIGN AWARD www.saulbellaward.com


FINISH

The home stretch! And often the most creative part of the process. Here, you get to play with the surface of the metal—highlighting the bright silver, gold or bronze, emphasizing depth and texture and creating interesting contrasts. Some artists will spend only minutes forming, then many hours finishing. There are so many design decisions to make at this point, and they require considering the piece, listening to it. Does it scream for color? A high polish? A satin finish? Burnished edges? Let the piece decide.

FINISHING METHODS

“It’s so immediate & humble in its requirements.”

HAND FINISHING: The simplest way to finish PMC® is to use your hands and some good, old-fashioned elbow grease.

—Barbara Simon

• Polishing papers are rated in grits. The grit tells you how many particles per square inch the paper has; the lower the number, the more coarse the paper. • Begin with a coarse paper (about 400-grit) and graduate to increasingly finer papers until you achieve the finish you want. Change the direction of the stroke when you change grits to see when the marks from the previous paper have been removed. Use adequate pressure so each grit paper can work effectively. • A hand burnisher (page 66) can be an alternative to using sanding paper. After firing, run the burnisher along the surface of the metal, moving in the same direction for each stroke, and overlapping strokes to avoid leaving drag marks.

“Red Rocks” by Barbara Simon with hand-finished PMC® beads

3M RADIAL BRISTLE DISC MASTER KIT Get fast, superior results with radial bristle discs from 3M! Their unique, three-dimensional abrasive/flexible bristle design provides a uniform finish on your PMC® work. Great for heavy cleaning (even in hard-to-reach, detailed areas), removing firescale and light oxide, pre-polishing, semi-finishing, blending, texturing and polishing—without using messy compounds. Recommended handpiece speed is 15,000rpm; max is 30,000rpm. Kit includes: • Thirty-six 9⁄16"-diameter discs, six of each grit: 120, 220, 400, pumice, 6μ and 1μ. • Eighteen ¾"-diameter discs, six of each grit: 80, 220 and 400. • Eighteen 1"-diameter discs, six of each grit: 36, 50 and 80. • Four mandrels. Description A. Master kit

Order # 332-595

Description PMC® polishing set

Order # 349-125

• Mounted motors give you the convenience of hands-free operation and accept larger attachments—ideal for large or flat pieces and for higher production needs.

kit $59.50

PMC® POLISHING SET This 12-piece set is ideal for texturing and polishing your PMC® designs. All tools have 3⁄32" shanks for use with a Prodigy™ flex shaft (see page 142). Kit includes brushes and buffs (use with a polishing compound such as Zam; see your Tools & Equipment catalog or riogrande.com), ruby stones for grinding, white stones for polishing and texturing wheels. Delivered in a wood organizer. B.

MECHANICAL FINISHING: Use a mechanical polisher, such as a Prodigy™ flex shaft (page 142), to create textures with less time and effort. They hold a variety of attachments, offering a range of application options. Most polishers accept a range of accessories. We recommend: • A foot-pedal control—keeps your hands free to work; allows you to control the motor speed as you work, changing speeds as necessary for each piece. • A flex shaft reduces hand fatigue and strain; it allows you to hang the motor from a stand and work with a smaller, lighter handpiece.

set $21.95

Use these polishing tools with a Prodigy™ flex shaft (page 142) for efficient and fast finishing.

A

B

65


HAND-FINISHING

C B A

AGATE BURNISHERS Agate burnishers are ideal for metal clay and any application requiring a softer touch; use them to burnish unfired PMC®, too. Also great for burnishing gold foil to silver for keum-boo.

D. set of 3

Description A. Ball-style B. Knife-style C. Sword-style

Overall Length 7½" (191mm) 8" (203mm) 7" (178mm)

Tip Length 11⁄2" (38.1mm) 1½" (38.1mm) 1" (25.4mm)

Order # 111-361 111-362 111-363

each $18.95 15.95 15.95

BORO GLASS BURNISHER SETS These burnishers are made of boro glass and stay cool longer than steel burnishers—great for keum-boo and for burnishing metal clay. Item D includes three double-ended burnishers (6 shapes: angled ball, small ball, large ball, round flat, flame tip and flat); item E includes four double-ended burnishers (8 shapes: angle ball, small ball, large ball, round flat, point, spatula, flame tip and flat). Please Note: Glass burnishers cannot be quenched. Description D. 8"L (203mm); set/3 (6 shapes) E. 8"L (203mm); set/4 (8 shapes)

Order # 116-473 116-474

set $34.00 43.00

E. set of 4

MIDAS® LIVER OF SULFUR XL GEL Use MIDAS® XL Gel to patina metals such as sterling silver, copper and bronze. It is formulated for extended shelf life, versatility and convenience. MIDAS XL Gel may be used in its ready form or by mixing one teaspoon of gel with 12 oz. of heated water. Jar contains 4 oz., enough to make 24 12-oz. portions of dark patina solution. F.

G F

Description 4-oz. jar

Order # 331-033

PMC® GREENWARE FILE This washable, flexible file is easy to maneuver for cleaning and smoothing PMC® greenware. Designed to accommodate open or confined areas easily, it offers both a fine-abrasive side (white) and a medium-abrasive side (dark red). Description G. 7"L x ¾"W; pkg/3

Enlargement, 600 grit 20-micron

Order # 111-400

pkg $12.95

SPECTRUM™ FINISHING PAPERS ASSORTMENT The screen mesh structure of Spectrum™ finishing papers resists loading and is reversible so you can use both sides, enabling faster, effective finishing and a longer service life. Synthetic fiber backing contains carefully graded white aluminum oxide abrasive; use wet or dry. Assortment of six 8¼" x 11" sheets in 600, 800, 1000, 2000, 3000 and 4000 grits. H

66

each $14.50

Description H. Spectrum ™ finishing papers assortment; set/6

Order # 337-216

riogrande.com

set $10.95

800.545.6566


HAND-FINISHING 3M MICRON-GRADED ABRASIVE FINISHING SHEET ASSORTMENTS These 8½" x 11" finishing sheets feature 3M micron-graded abrasives. Use progressively finer grades to create a more consistent finish on your metal clay pieces after each grade of abrasive. WetorDry® Tri-M-Ite® polishing paper (item A) is a soft, cloth-like material, ideal for interior shapes and for polishing just about any contoured surface. Use Imperial™ micro-finishing film (item B) wet or dry on most surface areas; its tough, flexible film backing provides consistent results.

Abrasive finishing sheets can be used wet or dry.

A. set of 12

Description Order # set A. 3M WetorDry® Tri-M-Ite® papers, 337-308 $11.75 includes two sheets each of 30μ, 15μ, 9μ, 3μ, 2μ and 1μ abrasive; set/12 11.75 B. 3M Imperial™ Micro-Finishing film, 337-310 includes one sheet each of 80μ, 60μ, 40μ, 30μ, 15μ and 9μ abrasive; set/6 These sheets work well on almost any surface!

3M SPONGE SANDING PAD SET Use wet or dry for smoothing and shaping metal clay. Sponge sanding pads are flexible enough to conform to almost any contour or surface. Micron-graded abrasives make them safe for every stage of sanding and pre-polishing. Set includes one pad each of 80, 150, 320, 600 and 1000 grit. • High-quality pads are made of long-lasting, closed-cell foam rubber and are permanently bonded with aluminum oxide abrasives. • Convenient, hand-sized pads (4½" x 5½") can be folded or trimmed to fit into detailed areas. Description C. 3M sponge sanding pad set; set/5

1-4 set $10.50

Order # 337-318

B. set of 6

Trim these 4½" x 5½" flexible pads to fit into detailed areas.

C. set of 5

PRO-POLISH POLISHING PADS These pre-treated 2" squares are great for touch-ups and removing tarnish. An excellent size for hand-polishing, pads are tight-bond cellular foam with permanently bonded micro-abrasives. Description D. 2" (51mm) square; pkg/50

Order # 337-020

1-4 pkg $7.75

5-9 pkg $6.90

10-49 pkg $6.35

D

CHAMOIS POLISHING STICK SET Extra-soft chamois sticks are perfect for bringing a high shine and final polish to PMC®—they work especially well inside rings. E.

Description 9" long; 6" polishing surface; set/3

Order # 338-552

set $6.95

E. set of 3

F. set of 6

TAPERED SANDING STICK SETS These tapered, sanding stick sets include six grits: 6/0, 4/0, 3/0, 2/0, 1 and 2 and are excellent for all precious metals, BRONZclay™ and PMC®. Sanding surface width tapers from ¾" to 5⁄16". Half-Round Order # 337-593

set $9.50

G. 9¼" long; 5½" sanding surface; set/6 337-594

$12.50

F.

Description 9¼" long; 6" sanding surface; set/6

Round G. set of 6

67


Mass Finishing Mass finishing (tumbling) allows you to finish the entire surface of several pieces at the same time. Jewelry items are placed in a container or drum along with polishing media and a polishing compound (a specialized soap made for working with metals). The machine rotates, tumbles or vibrates the container, creating steady, repetitive motion that polishes the metal.

“All finished!” —Yvonne M. Padilla

• Pieces must be brass-brushed before being put into a tumbler. • Steel media (below and on the facing page) is the easiest to use and is available in several shapes to produce different finishes. • Magnetic finishers work with a strong magnet inside their bases that rotates, pulling magnetic (steel) media through the compound, polishing the jewelry pieces. • Magnetic finishing is the fastest of these methods and is ideal for highly textured pieces but can leave “ping” marks on your pieces if run too long.

pendant by Yvonne M. Padilla

MAGNETIC POLISHING UNIT This unit has a small footprint, making it ideal for use in your shop. Features a built-in 60-minute timer. Made in Korea. • Compact design (6"W x 7"D x 10"H) with fixed-speed 110V motor. • Pin capacity: 100 grams. • 4" diameter bowl • Shipping weight: 10.4 lbs. (4.7kg). Description A. Magnetic polisher

Order # 202-065

each $199.00

SUPER MINI MAGNETIC POLISHER This mini magnetic finisher is ideal for running one or two smaller, detailed PMC® pieces at a time. Made in Korea. • Compact design (4"W x 4"D x 9"H) with fixed-speed. • Pin capacity: 23 grams (includes .5mm x 5mmL steel pins). • Power: 120V, 60Hz, 95 watts • Weight: 16 lbs. (7.3kg). • Shipping weight: 18 lbs. (8.2kg).

A

B B.

Description Mini magnetic polisher

Order # 202-015

each $159.00

MODEL 100 MAGNETIC POLISHER • Compact design (75⁄8"W x 8½"D x 7"H) with a fixed-speed, 1⁄8hp motor (120V, 60Hz, 95 watts) and a mechanical two-hour timer. • 5" (127mm) diameter bowl finishes 10–15 rings per batch. • Pin capacity: 80 grams (.5mm x 4mm pins included). • Weight: 18.7 lbs. (8.5kg). • Shipping weight: 21 lbs. (9.5kg). Description C. Model 100 magnetic polisher

C

Order # 202-201

each $459.00

RAYTECH CENTRIFUGAL MAGNETIC FINISHER SYSTEM, CMF-400 • Space-saving 6¾"W x 6¾"D (172 x 172mm) base with a fixed-speed, 1⁄32hp motor (115V, 60Hz, 30 watts); 120-minute mechanical timer. • Pin capacity: 125 grams (.5mm pins included). • 4" diameter bowl. • Shipping weight: 17 lbs. Description D. CMF-400 system

Order # 202-183

each $525.00

STAINLESS STEEL PIN MEDIA FOR MAGNETIC FINISHERS D

E E.

68

Size 0.5mm diameter x 5mmL

Sold in packages of 250 grams (8.8 oz.) 1-3 4+ Order # pkg pkg 339-355 $15.95 $13.95

riogrande.com

800.545.6566


MASS FINISHING RIO SINGLE-BARREL ROTARY TUMBLER KIT Rio’s mini kit includes everything you need to finish small quantities of metal clay items. Kit includes a single barrel tumbler (item B, below), 3 lbs. of mixed steel shot and 4 oz. of Super Sunsheen™ burnishing compound. Description Order # A. Single-barrel tumbler kit 202-209 Replacement burnishing compound, 4 oz. 339-323

kit $145.00 6.95

mixed shot

RIO ROTARY TUMBLERS These dependable tumblers feature easy-to-use screw-on lids, giving you quick access to contents, and also feature clear barrels, allowing you to monitor your pieces (item B is a single barrel, item C is a double barrel). Both tumblers feature no-leak closure rings and non-slip belts. Item B handles small-sized runs and touch-up work; item C handles medium-sized runs. The clear replacement barrel (item D) uses an innovative See-Thru design, allowing you to monitor your pieces while they run. Each holds up to 3 lbs. of steel shot. Description B. Single barrel C. Double barrel D. Replacement barrel

Order # 202-210 202-211 202-212

A. Kit includes tumbler, shot and burnishing compound.

each $90.95 119.00 29.95

SUNSHEEN™ STEEL SHOT CLEANER Clean your steel shot occasionally for brighter workpieces. • Acid-based, non-caustic solution contains citric acid. • Use five ounces to make one gallon of solution. • Compatible media: carbon steel and stainless steel shot. E.

Size 1 gallon (makes 25 gallons) 1 quart (makes 6 gallons)

Order # 339-316 339-317

8½"

1 2 3+ each each each $27.45 $25.25 $23.00 10.50 9.60 8.80

6¼"

B

STAINLESS STEEL SHOT Create beautiful finishes on PMC®! Simple, reliable stainless steel media needs no storage maintenance. Clean occasionally with Sunsheen™ steel shot cleaner (item E). Use stronger compounds safely with this corrosion-resistant shot. The heavier weight of stainless steel burnishes uniformly on any metal surface. F.

Description Mixed shot, 1 lb. Mixed shot, 10 lbs.

Order # 339-097 339-389

pkg $18.00 159.00

8½" 11"

C

The barrel features an easy-to-use screw-top lid and a sixsided design that increases media efficiency.

D

E

F

69


STONE FIRING GUIDE Over the years, Rio Grande has tested lots of natural gemstones for use in PMC®. You can benefit from our experience! The following charts can guide you toward stones to consider and stones to avoid when co-firing in PMC. We recommend firing gemstones in PMC3™ at the minimum firing temperature of 1110°F for 45 minutes. We also recommend ramping the temperature up at a rate of 500°F per hour. Always allow slow cooling.

Unsafe

“Ode to Jasper Johns” with enamel and a synthetic pink sapphire fired in place by CeCe Wire

The gemstones listed below experience extensive damage in the kiln.

Good Bets We’ve had consistent success with the gemstones below; but be aware that natural gemstones can vary. Never risk firing an invaluable stone. Gemstone Type

Stone Only 1110°F/45 min.

In PMC3™ 1110°F/45 min.

Chrome Diopside Almandine Garnet Pyrope Garnet Rhodolite Garnet Tsavorite Garnet Hematite Moonstone White Topaz Peridot Green Topaz Black Star Sapphire Tanzanite Green Tourmaline Oregon Sunstone

not tried survived survived survived not tried not tried survived survived survived survived survived survived survived survived

survived survived survived survived survived survived survived survived survived survived survived survived survived not tried

Guide

good bet good bet good bet good bet good bet good bet good bet good bet good bet good bet good bet good bet good bet good bet

Iffy

Gemstone Type

Stone Only 1110°F/45 min.

In PMC3™ 1110°F/45 min.

Blue Goldstone Brown Goldstone Smoky Quartz Agate (Cameo) Amethyst Aquamarine Aventurine Carnelian Blue Mist Chalcedony Citrine Iolite Jadeite Malachite Mexican Fire Opal Black Onyx Rhodochrosite Rose Quartz Tiger’s Eye Blue Topaz Turquoise Rainbow Topaz

damaged damaged damaged damaged destroyed not tried damaged damaged damaged damaged destroyed damaged destroyed not tried damaged damaged destroyed darkened destroyed destroyed damaged

not tried not tried not tried not tried not tried damaged not tried not tried not tried not tried not tried not tried not tried damaged damaged not tried not tried not tried not tried not tried damaged

Guide

unsafe unsafe unsafe unsafe unsafe unsafe unsafe unsafe unsafe unsafe unsafe unsafe unsafe unsafe unsafe unsafe unsafe unsafe unsafe unsafe unsafe

See cabochons on pages 78 and 79.

In our experience, the following gemstones suffered some slight degradation in the kiln and, in some cases, we saw inconsistent results. Gemstone Type

Stone Only 1110°F/45 min.

In PMC3™ 1110°F/45 min.

Guide

Pink Tourmaline Denim Lapis Lapis Lazuli—Dark Labradorite Rainbow Moonstone Aquamarine Silver Moonstone Peach Moonstone

damaged survived damaged survived damaged survived slight damage slight damage

damaged survived not tried survived damaged damaged slight damage slight damage

unsafe iffy iffy iffy iffy iffy iffy iffy

I tend to design in circles and triangles. I design on paper first and try to make something nobody else would try doing, something almost crazy sometimes. Of course, you get into actually making it and find things you didn’t anticipate— then it gets challenging.

70

—Gordon Uyehara

“Ancient Life” by Gordon Uyehara 2005 Saul Bell Design Award, Second Place Winner, PMC®

riogrande.com

800.545.6566


FACETED STONES

chrome diopside almandine garnet tsavorite garnet This brilliant, high-quality green gemstone is a member of the pyroxene family and contains chromium, an element that provides its rich green color. Quality • Treatment: None (N) Care • Wash with warm, soapy water • Avoid harsh detergents • Never clean ultrasonically • Never steam clean Color: Intense, deep green Clarity: Eye-clean Round mm 3 4 5

Quality • Treatment: None (N) Care • Wash with warm, soapy water • Avoid harsh detergents • Ultrasonic cleaning is usually safe • Never steam clean

The vibrant green color of tsavorite garnet is the result of its vanadium and chromium content. Quality • Treatment: None (N) Care • Wash with warm, soapy water • Avoid harsh detergents • Ultrasonic cleaning is usually safe • Never steam clean

Color: Medium to brownish red Clarity: Eye-clean Round Packaging varies; please see below

Color: Intense green Clarity: Eye-clean Round

mm 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 Sold individually 8 $22.25 $21.25 $20.25 Oval 45.45 43.45 41.45 6x4 85.35 83.35 81.35 7x5 8x6 10 x 8 12 x 10

Order # 083-101 083-102 083-103

Oval 083-107 083-108 083-109

6x4 7x5 8x6

Almandine garnet’s rich, deep red color is typical of garnets containing iron.

SIZING CHART Round

Sold individually 1-2 3-5 6-11 each each each $9.90 $8.40 $7.55 12.60 11.55 10.70 23.45 21.30 20.30

Pkg Qty 10 10 10 6 6 6 2

6 6 2 1 1

Octagon 2

2.5

3

6

3.5

4

5

2 1 1

10

6 8 10

Octagon

10 x 8

12 x 8

12 x 10

3-5 pkg $7.30 8.25 9.50 8.15 9.90 15.85 23.40

6-11 pkg $7.00 7.50 8.25 7.20 8.40 15.15 22.70

Packaging varies; please see below 066-978 $9.90 $8.25 $7.45 066-979 15.70 15.05 14.60 067-013 11.50 10.25 9.25 067-014 15.00 14.35 13.65 067-015 41.25 40.00 38.75 Packaging varies; please seebelow 067-018 $15.75 $14.00 $12.75 067-019 21.75 20.90 20.25 077-910 47.35 45.25 43.45

Antique Checkerboard

8

6x4 8x6

8x6 10 x 8 12 x 10

Order # 066-970 066-971 066-972 066-974 066-975 066-976 091-335

1-2 pkg $8.00 9.00 10.85 8.95 11.55 16.65 24.40

091-223 091-224 091-225

mm 2.5 3 4 5

Order # 067-068 083-000 083-002 067-069

Sold individually 1-2 3-5 6-11 each each each $11.15 $10.15 $9.10 13.15 11.95 10.75 74.25 72.00 69.75 248.50 246.75 245.00

“Ancient Life” by Gordon Uyehara 2005 Saul Bell Design Award, Second Place Winner, PMC®

Sold individually $6.95 $5.95 $5.35 19.15 18.40 17.85 72.00 70.20 69.30

14 x 10

Oval

6x4 7x5

8x6

10 x 8

Antique Checkerboard

4

6

12 x 10

14 x 12

“It’s still magic to me.” 10

—Gordon Uyehara

71


FACETED STONES

I’ve always collected old buttons to make molds. I found this paisley button and loved it so much that I immediately made a mold from it to use in my PMC® pieces. I jazz them up with lots of color—set different stones right into the PMC—then fire! —Yvonne M. Padilla

Color: Rose to lavender Clarity: Clear and bright Round

rhodolite garnet Rhodolite garnet’s deep purple hues are due to its iron content. Quality • Treatment: None (N) Care • Wash with warm, soapy water • Avoid harsh detergents • Ultrasonic cleaning is usually safe • Never steam clean

mm 2 2.5 3

Order # 090-294 090-295 090-296

Sold in packages of 6 1-2 3-5 6-11 pkg pkg pkg $6.95 $6.50 $5.95 8.50 7.60 6.70 9.45 8.45 7.45

4 5 6 8

066-231/1 066-232/1 066-236 066-260

Sold individually $4.50 $3.75 $3.25 6.60 5.90 5.15 12.00 11.00 10.00 36.30 35.20 34.10

Oval 6x4 7x5 8x6

066-233/1 066-234 066-235

Sold individually $5.50 $4.75 $4.25 9.10 8.10 7.10 17.50 15.75 14.00

Stone-set PMC® pendant by Yvonne M. Padilla

Octagon mm 8x6 10 x 8

Order # 066-237 077-911

Sold individually 1-2 3-5 6-11 each each each $30.00 $28.65 $27.30 54.30 52.20 50.10

066-566

Sold individually $14.00 $12.75 $12.20

060-279 060-280

Sold individually $6.75 $5.95 $5.25 10.50 9.55 9.10

Trillion 6

Princess 4 5

MACHINE-CUT STONES

garnet

rhodolite garnet

Top-quality, eye-clean garnet gemstones feature exact cuts and sizes, and are a great value when you need to buy in bulk. Stones arrive embedded in a plastic carrying sheet as shown at right.

Top-quality, eye-clean garnet gemstones feature exact cuts and sizes, and are a great value when you need to buy in bulk. Stones arrive embedded in a plastic carrying sheet shown below.

This plastic card securely holds 50 gemstones. Pop out the stones you need and still easily maintain your inventory.

72

Order # 090-039 090-041 090-043 090-044

Sold in packages of 50 1 2-3 4+ pkg pkg pkg $18.40 $16.75 $16.05 18.95 18.10 17.40 21.10 20.50 19.85 23.15 22.45 21.80

Top-quality, eye-clean peridot gemstones feature exact cuts and sizes, and are a great value when you need to buy in bulk. Stones arrive embedded in a plastic carrying sheet shown below.

This plastic card securely holds 50 gemstones. Pop out the stones you need and still easily maintain your inventory.

MACHINE-CUT RHODOLITE GARNET

MACHINE-CUT GARNET mm 2 2.5 3 3.5

peridot

mm 2 2.5 3 3.5

Order # 090-048 090-050 090-052 090-053

Sold in packages of 50 1 2-3 4+ pkg pkg pkg $20.70 $19.80 $18.40 22.40 21.40 20.40 26.75 25.50 24.40 34.00 33.00 32.00

This plastic card securely holds 50 gemstones. Pop out the stones you need and still easily maintain your inventory.

MACHINE-CUT PERIDOT mm 2 2.5 3 3.5

Order # 090-030 090-032 090-034 090-035

Sold in packages of 50 1 2-3 4+ pkg pkg pkg $18.90 $17.95 $16.95 20.40 19.50 18.75 22.75 22.05 21.50 30.75 29.85 29.10

riogrande.com

800.545.6566


FACETED STONES

“It’s always fun to take a vintage design and alter it with PMC® and gemstones.” —Yvonne M. Padilla

white sapphire

peridot

Genuine white sapphire is a natural, inexpensive alternative to diamonds. It is suitable for all jewelry applications. Quality • Treatment: None (N) Care • Wash with warm, soapy water • Avoid harsh detergents • Ultrasonic and steam cleaning are usually safe

Peridot is the gem form of the mineral olivine. Its yellowish to vibrant green color is caused by iron. It looks beautiful set in yellow or white gold. Quality • Treatment: None (N) Care • Wash with warm, soapy water • Avoid harsh detergents • Never clean ultrasonically • Never steam clean

Color: White to bluish-white Clarity: Eye-clean Round mm 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 5

Sold individually 1-2 3-5 6-11 each each each $3.50 $3.25 $3.00 4.25 4.00 3.75 5.85 5.35 5.00 8.60 8.10 7.75 13.40 12.75 12.20 30.60 29.15 27.85

Order # 066-990 066-991 066-992 066-993 066-994 066-995

Oval 6x4 7x5

Sold individually $81.00 $79.00 $77.00 140.40 138.60 136.80

074-568 074-569

Princess 3 4 5

Sold individually $33.40 $32.40 $31.60 64.80 63.20 62.00 139.50 138.60 137.70

074-565 074-566 074-567

Stone-set PMC® pendant by Yvonne M. Padilla

Octagon Color: Medium green Pkg Clarity: Bright, eye-clean mm Qty Round Packaging varies; please see below 6 x 4 10 mm 3 4 5 6 8

Pkg Qty 10 10 6 2 1

Oval 6x4 10 7x5 2 8x6 2 10 x 8 1 12 x 10 1

1-2 pkg $9.60 11.60 12.50 13.20 54.25

Order # 090-188 090-189 090-190 090-191 067-074

3-5 pkg $7.70 9.25 11.35 12.00 53.40

6-11 pkg $6.95 8.75 10.35 10.95 52.50

7x5 8x6 10 x 8

Packaging varies; please see below 1-2 3-5 6-11 Order # pkg pkg pkg 090-196 $21.25 $20.65 $20.00 090-197 13.60 12.40 11.85 090-198 15.30 13.95 13.40 067-076 123.25 121.15 119.00

2 1 1

Princess 4 5

Packaging varies; please see below 090-200 $13.75 $12.40 $11.00 090-201 11.95 10.60 9.65

10 2

Packaging varies; please see below Trillion Packaging varies; please see below 090-192 $13.00 $11.85 $11.35 5 6 090-204 $12.00 $10.95 $10.45 090-193 9.75 8.80 7.80 6 090-225 12.00 10.95 10.45 2 090-194 14.80 13.50 12.90 Sold individually 090-195 48.45 47.05 45.60 Antique Checkerboard 067-075 232.00 228.00 224.00 6 091-242 $12.75 $12.40 $12.00

SIZING CHART Round

2

2.5

Octagon

3

3.5

4

5

6

Oval

6x4

6x4

8

7x5

Princess

7x5

8x6

10 x 8

3 12 x 10

4

8x6

Antique Checkerboard

Trillion

5

5

10 x 8

6

6

73


FACETED STONES

simulated alexandrite Laboratory-grown corundum (flame fusion method). Strong color changes range from bluish-green to bluish-purple to purplish-red. Some stones show more blue; some show more red. Treatment: Imitation (IMIT) Round

simulated blue zircon Laboratory-grown spinel Treatment: Imitation (IMIT)

simulated aquamarine Laboratory-grown spinel Treatment: Imitation (IMIT)

Order # 088-084

Sold in packages of 50 1-2 3-5 6-11 pkg pkg pkg $13.00 $11.70 $11.05

2.5 3

088-086 088-088

Sold in packages of 25 $11.25 $10.15 $9.60 13.25 11.95 11.30

3.5 4 5 6

088-090 088-092 088-096 088-100

Sold in packages of 10 $10.00 $9.00 $8.50 10.80 9.75 9.20 12.20 11.00 10.40 16.50 14.85 14.05

8

088-104

Sold in packages of 6 $19.20 $17.30 $16.35

10

069-286

Sold in packages of 2 $15.70 $14.15 $13.35

8 10

088-107 088-108 069-287

Sold in packages of 2 $10.00 $9.00 $8.50 11.70 10.55 9.95 18.70 16.85 15.90

8x6 10 x 8 12 x 10

mm 2

Oval 8x6 10 x 8 12 x 10

Round mm 2

Order # 088-114

Sold in packages of 50 1-2 3-5 6-11 pkg pkg pkg $11.50 $10.35 $9.80

2.5 3 3.5

088-116 088-118 088-120

Sold in packages of 25 $10.00 $9.00 $8.50 11.75 10.60 10.00 14.00 12.60 11.90

4 5 6

088-122 088-126 088-130

Sold in packages of 10 $10.10 $9.10 $8.60 12.20 11.00 10.40 17.50 15.75 14.90

088-134 069-276

Sold in packages of 2 $8.20 $7.40 $7.00 12.70 11.45 10.80

088-137 088-138 069-277

Sold in packages of 2 $8.90 $8.05 $7.60 9.70 8.75 8.25 14.10 12.70 12.00

Oval

Round mm 2

Order # 088-344

Sold in packages of 50 1-2 3-5 6-11 pkg pkg pkg $13.00 $11.70 $11.05

2.5 3

088-346 088-348

Sold in packages of 25 $12.50 $11.25 $10.65 13.25 11.95 11.30

3.5 4 5

088-350 088-352 088-356

Sold in packages of 10 $9.20 $8.30 $7.85 10.70 9.65 9.10 12.80 11.55 10.90

6

088-360

Sold in packages of 6 $12.90 $11.65 $11.00

8 10

088-364 068-742

Sold in packages of 2 $8.20 $7.40 $7.00 13.30 12.00 11.35

088-367 088-368 068-743

Sold in packages of 2 $8.90 $8.05 $7.60 9.70 8.75 8.25 14.10 12.70 12.00

Oval 8x6 10 x 8 12 x 10

Stone-set PMC速 pendant by Yvonne M. Padilla

SIZING CHART Round 2

2.5

5

3

6

3.5

4

8

10

Oval

8x6

simulated garnet Laboratory-grown spinel Treatment: Imitation (IMIT) Round Sold in packages of 50 mm 2 2.5 3

74

Order # 088-004

1-2 3-5 6-11 pkg pkg pkg $13.00 $11.70 $11.05

088-006 088-008

Sold in packages of 25 $11.25 $10.15 $9.60 13.25 11.95 11.30

10 x 8

12 x 10

Round (cont.) mm 3.5 4 5 6

Order # 088-010 088-012 088-016 088-020

Sold in packages of 10 1-2 3-5 6-11 pkg pkg pkg $10.00 $9.00 $8.50 10.80 9.75 9.20 12.20 11.00 10.40 16.50 14.85 14.05

8

088-024

Sold in packages of 6 $19.20 $17.30 $16.35

10

069-266

Sold in packages of 2 $15.00 $13.50 $13.35

Oval 8x6 10 x 8 12 x 10

088-027 088-028 069-267

Sold in packages of 2 $10.00 $9.00 $8.50 11.70 10.55 9.95 18.70 16.85 15.90

riogrande.com

800.545.6566


FACETED STONES

simulated pink tourmaline

lab-grown ruby

lab-grown sapphire

Also known as simulated rose. Laboratorygrown corundum (flame fusion method) Treatment: Imitation (IMIT)

Laboratory-grown corundum (flame fusion method) Treatment: Synthetic (SYN)

Laboratory-grown corundum (flame fusion method) Treatment: Synthetic (SYN)

Round

Round

Round

mm 2

Order # 088-154

Sold in packages of 50 1-2 3-5 6-11 pkg pkg pkg $13.00 $11.70 $11.05

mm 2

Order # 088-274

Sold in packages of 50 1-2 3-5 6-11 pkg pkg pkg $16.50 $15.70 $14.85

2.5 3

088-276 088-278

Sold in packages of 25 $12.50 $11.25 $10.65 13.75 12.40 11.70

2.5 3

088-156 088-158

Sold in packages of 25 $11.25 $10.15 $9.60 13.25 11.95 11.30

3.5 4 5

088-280 088-282 088-286

Sold in packages of 10 $10.00 $9.00 $8.50 10.80 9.75 9.20 12.20 11.00 10.40

3.5 4 5

088-160 088-162 088-166

Sold in packages of 10 $10.00 $9.00 $8.50 10.80 9.75 9.20 12.20 11.00 10.40

088-290

Sold in packages of 6 $11.85 $10.65 $10.05

6

088-170

Sold in packages of 6 $11.70 $10.55 $9.95

088-294 068-732

Sold in packages of 2 $9.10 $8.20 $7.75 15.00 13.50 12.00

8 10

088-174 088-450

Sold in packages of 2 $9.10 $8.20 $7.75 15.00 13.50 12.00

088-297 088-298 068-733

Sold in packages of 2 $10.00 $9.00 $8.50 11.70 10.55 9.95 18.20 16.40 15.50

088-177 088-178 069-291

Sold in packages of 2 $9.50 $8.55 $7.60 11.70 10.55 9.95 18.20 16.40 15.50

6 8 10

Oval 8x6 10 x 8 12 x 10

Oval 8x6 10 x 8 12 x 10

Packaging varies; please see below 1-2 3-5 6-11 Order # pkg pkg pkg 068-244 $16.25 $14.65 $13.85 068-246 11.00 9.90 9.35 068-248 12.20 11.00 10.40 068-252 17.00 15.30 14.45 068-256 14.00 12.60 11.90 068-260 10.10 9.10 8.60 068-264 11.30 10.20 9.65 068-727 17.20 15.50 14.65

2 2 1 1

Packaging varies; please see below 068-267 $10.90 $9.85 $9.30 068-268 12.90 11.65 11.00 068-498 12.75 11.50 10.85 068-499 15.60 14.05 13.30

Oval 8x6 10 x 8 12 x 10 14 x 10

SIZING CHART

DIMPLE-SETTING “Dimple setting” is ideal for stones 2mm or smaller (see pendant at left). 1. Create the PMC® piece. Choose where the stones will be set, making sure the PMC is thicker than the stone depth in those areas. 2. Gently press the tip of a rubber-tipped tool into the clay to create a dimple; make sure you don’t go all the way through the clay. 3. Using tweezers, place the stone pavilion side down into the dimple (1–2mm deep). With the handle end of a paintbrush, gently press the stone into the clay just below the surface; ensure there’s enough clay coming up over the stone to secure it after shrinkage occurs. Dry completely. 4. Once the piece is dry, sand the edges and top so the setting is smooth; brush away any PMC® filings left on the stone’s surface. 5. Fire the piece using a slow ramp according to the appropriate firing schedule. 6. When firing is complete, open the kiln door slightly to allow some heat to vent out. To avoid thermal shock to the stones, don’t remove the piece until the temperature drops below 200°F. Brass-brush the cooled piece and finish as desired.

mm 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 8 10

Pkg Qty 25 10 10 10 6 2 2 2

Round 2

2.5

5

3

6

3.5

4

8

10

Oval

simulated topaz Laboratory-grown corundum Treatment: Imitation (IMIT) Round mm 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 5 6

8x6

Order # 088-314

Sold in packages of 25 1-2 3-5 6-11 pkg pkg pkg $12.50 $11.25 $10.65

088-316 088-318 088-320 088-322

Sold in packages of 10 $9.50 $8.55 $8.10 10.60 9.55 9.05 12.00 10.80 10.20 13.20 11.90 11.25

088-326 088-330

Sold in packages of 6 $12.00 $10.80 $10.20 16.70 15.05 14.20

10 x 8

12 x 10

Round (cont.) mm 8 10

Order # 088-334 068-737

Sold in packages of 2 1-2 3-5 6-11 pkg pkg pkg $10.10 $9.10 $8.60 15.00 13.50 12.00

088-337 088-338 068-738

Sold in packages of 2 $10.00 $9.00 $8.50 11.70 10.55 9.95 18.70 16.85 15.90

Oval 8x6 10 x 8 12 x 10

75


FACETED STONES

“I can set a stone into the ring and fire it all together!”

Stone-set PMC® ring made with a RingMaker mold (page 58) by Yvonne M. Padilla

—Yvonne M. Padilla

RingMaker molds are so cool! I took a rolled out piece of PMC®, placed it in a mold and pressed the clay into a perfect, seamless ring blank. Then I set a stone into the PMC, let it dry and sanded it into the setting shape I wanted. I attached the setting to the ring blank with a bit of slip and fired. And it fits me perfectly! —Yvonne M. Padilla LAB-GROWN EMERALD Round

chatham created emerald

mm 3 4 5 6

Quality • Growth Method: Laboratory • Mohs Hardness: 7.5–8 • Treatment: Synthetic (SYN)

6x4 7x5 8x6

®

Care • Wash with warm, soapy water • Avoid harsh detergents • Ultrasonic and steam cleaning are usually safe

chatham created padparadscha ®

Quality • Growth Method: Laboratory • Mohs Hardness: 9 • Treatment: Synthetic (SYN)

Care • Wash with warm, soapy water • Avoid harsh detergents • Ultrasonic and steam cleaning are usually safe

Order # 074-595 074-596 074-597 074-598

1-2 each $18.00 39.60 81.00 140.40

Sold individually 3-5 6-11 each each $17.55 $17.10 38.65 37.65 79.00 76.95 136.90 133.40

074-599 074-600 074-601

$72.00 118.80 203.40

Sold individually $70.20 $68.40 115.85 112.90 198.35 193.25

Oval

Octagon 7x5 8x6

074-602 074-603

Sold individually $156.60 $152.70 $148.80 243.00 236.95 230.85

LAB-GROWN PADPARADSCHA Round Sold individually mm 3 4 5 6

Order # 074-604 074-605 074-606 074-607

1-2 each $18.00 40.80 79.20 138.00

3-5 6-11 each each $17.55 $17.10 39.80 38.80 77.25 75.25 134.55 131.10

074-608 074-609 074-610

$70.80 127.20 198.00

Sold individually $69.05 $67.30 124.05 120.85 193.05 188.10

Oval 6x4 7x5 8x6

LAB-GROWN ALEXANDRITE Round Sold individually

chatham created alexandrite

mm 3 4 5 6

Quality • Growth Method: Laboratory • Mohs Hardness: 7 • Treatment: Synthetic (SYN)

6x4 7x5 8x6

®

76

Care • Wash with warm, soapy water • Avoid harsh detergents • Ultrasonic and steam cleaning are usually safe

Order # 074-611 074-612 074-613 074-614

1-2 each $16.80 39.60 70.80 133.20

3-5 6-11 each each $16.40 $16.00 38.65 37.65 69.05 67.30 129.90 126.55

074-615 074-616 074-617

$64.80 120.00 180.00

Sold individually $63.20 $61.60 117.00 114.00 175.50 171.00

Oval

Octagon 7x5 8x6

074-618 074-619

Sold individually $144.00 $140.40 $136.80 223.20 217.65 212.05

riogrande.com

800.545.6566


FACETED STONES LAB-GROWN RUBY Round

chatham® created ruby Quality • Growth Method: Laboratory • Mohs Hardness: 9 • Treatment: Synthetic (SYN)

mm 3 5 6

Care • Wash with warm, soapy water • Avoid harsh detergents • Ultrasonic and steam cleaning are usually safe

chatham® created sapphire Quality • Growth Method: Laboratory • Mohs Hardness: 9 • Treatment: Synthetic (SYN)

7x5 8x6

Care • Wash with warm, soapy water • Avoid harsh detergents • Ultrasonic and steam cleaning are usually safe

mm 3 4 5 6

5 Oval

5.5

6

6x4

7x5

8x6

6.5 Octagon

7x5

7

3

3.25

7.5

8x6

RIO GRANDE MACHINE-CUT CZ Round Sold in packages of 100 mm 1 1.25 1.5 1.75 2 2.25 2.5 2.75 3

Order # 091-120 091-121 091-122 091-123 091-124 091-125 091-126 091-127 091-128

1-2 3-5 pkg pkg $12.00 $10.65 12.00 10.65 12.00 10.65 12.25 11.00 13.00 11.75 13.50 12.25 14.15 12.75 14.85 13.50 16.25 14.75

6-11 pkg $9.55 9.55 9.55 9.90 10.55 11.00 11.55 12.25 13.25

3.25 3.5 4 4.5 5

091-129 091-130 091-131 091-132 091-133

Sold in packages of 50 $12.35 $11.15 $10.00 12.75 11.50 10.35 14.00 12.75 11.45 15.00 13.55 12.20 16.25 14.75 13.25

5.5 6 6.5 7

091-134 091-135 091-136 091-137

Sold in packages of 20 $11.75 $10.50 $9.45 13.25 12.00 10.75 14.50 13.00 11.75 16.50 15.00 13.50

7.5 8 9

091-138 091-139 077-913

Sold in packages of 10 $12.25 $11.00 $9.90 13.65 12.30 11.00 14.35 12.75 11.60

Sold individually $97.80 $95.30 175.70 171.20 273.50 266.50

077-742 077-744

Sold individually $221.00 $215.50 $209.95 340.00 331.50 323.00

4

3.5

8

Order # 077-737 074-624 074-625 074-626

1-2 each $25.50 40.80 79.20 138.00

Sold individually 3-5 6-11 each each $24.90 $24.25 39.80 38.80 77.25 75.25 134.55 131.10

074-627 077-739 077-741

$70.80 180.20 280.50

Sold individually $69.05 $67.30 175.70 171.20 273.50 266.50

Oval 6x4 7x5 8x6

7x5 8x6 2.75

$100.30 180.20 280.50

LAB-GROWN SAPPHIRE Round

Octagon

2.25 2.5

074-623 077-738 077-740

Octagon

Round 2

Sold individually 3-5 6-11 each each $24.90 $24.25 109.40 106.60 190.65 185.75

Oval 6x4 7x5 8x6

SIZING CHART

1 1.25 1.5 1.75

Order # 077-736 074-621 074-622

1-2 each $25.50 112.20 195.50

077-743 077-745

Sold individually $221.00 $215.50 $209.95 340.00 331.50 323.00

4.5

9

rio grande machine-cut CZ At last! A CZ that is beautiful and affordable. Cut in Switzerland specially for Rio Grande, these CZs sparkle in your PMC® designs. Quality • Refractive Index: 2.15 • Specific Gravity: 5.8 • Mohs Hardness: 8.5 • Treatment: Lab-created (IMIT)

Care • Wash with warm, soapy water • Avoid harsh detergents • Safe for both ultrasonic and steam cleaning

77


CABOCHONS

moonstone hematite Hematite is an iron oxide, ore found in igneous rock. Hematite gemstones are opaque with iridescent surfaces. Quality • Mohs Hardness: 6–6.5 • Treatment: None (N) Color: Blackish gray with a metallic luster Round Sold in packages of 50 mm 3 4 5 6 8 10

Order # 085-130 085-131 085-132 085-133 085-125

1-2 pkg $10.50 10.50 11.50 12.50 15.00

085-126

Sold in packages of 20 $10.50 $9.45 $8.95

Oval

3-5 pkg $9.45 9.45 10.35 11.25 13.50

6-11 pkg $8.95 8.95 9.80 10.65 12.75

1-2 pkg $7.95 11.00

3-5 pkg $6.75 9.75

5 6

066-890 066-891

Sold in packages of 6 $10.55 $9.00 $8.25 14.85 13.20 12.05

8

066-892

Sold in packages of 2 $12.50 $11.00 $9.75

10 12 14 16

066-893 066-905 091-388 091-389

Sold individually $11.70 $10.40 $9.50 24.65 23.65 22.95 31.75 30.80 30.05 64.80 63.20 62.00

066-894 066-895

Sold in packages of 6 $10.95 $9.50 $8.35 13.65 13.05 12.55

066-896

Sold in packages of 3 $9.60 $9.15 $8.80

9x7

066-897

Sold in packages of 2 $9.00 $8.20 $7.85

10 x 8 12 x 10 14 x 10 16 x 12 18 x 13

066-898 066-900 066-914 066-915 091-391

Sold individually $7.75 $7.25 $6.75 14.10 12.50 11.40 18.90 18.15 17.60 30.35 29.45 28.70 45.10 43.75 42.70

12 x 10 14 x 10

085-155 085-141

6x4 7x5

085-157 085-143 085-145

Sold in packages of 10 $11.25 $10.15 $9.60 13.00 11.70 11.05 13.00 11.70 11.05

8x6

16 x 12 18 x 13 22 x 8 25 x 18 30 x 22

085-149 085-128

Sold in packages of 4 $9.50 $8.55 $8.10 12.30 11.05 10.45

40 x 30

065-129

Sold in packages of 2 $10.50 $9.45 $8.95

Oval

SIZING CHART

1-2 pkg $8.50 8.90 10.20 14.50

090-121

Sold in packages of 10 $12.00 $10.80

Oval 8x6

3-5 pkg $7.65 8.05 9.20 13.05

lab-grown blue sapphire Laboratory-grown corundum Round mm 4 5 6 8

Pkg Qty 10 6 6 4

Packaging varies; please see below 1-2 3-5 Order # pkg pkg 090-210 $15.00 $13.50 090-211 11.70 10.55 090-212 16.50 14.85 090-125 18.60 16.75

6 1 1

Packaging varies; please see below 090-127 $19.50 $17.55 077-796 7.00 6.25 077-797 9.50 8.75

Oval 8x6 10 x 8 12 x 10

Oval

Round

5

Order # 090-205 090-206 090-207 090-119

6-11 pkg $5.50 8.50

Order # 066-888 066-889

Sold in packages of 20 $14.00 $12.60 $11.90 15.00 13.50 12.75

4

mm 4 5 6 8

mm 3 4

Sold in packages of 50 $13.25 $11.95 $11.30 16.00 14.40 13.60 17.00 15.30 14.45 22.00 19.80 18.70

3

Laboratory-grown corundum Round Sold in packages of 10

Color: Soft milky white with a gray/blue sheen Round Sold in packages of 12

085-135 085-136 085-137 085-139

6x4 7x5 8x6 10 x 8

lab-grown ruby

Moonstone is one of the best known and most valuable varieties of feldspar. This translucent gemstone features an iridescent sheen called “adularescence.” Quality • Mohs Hardness: 6–6.5 • Treatment: None (N)

6

8

10

6x4 12

14

16 x 12

18 x 13

7x5

8x6

16

Oval (cont.)

9x7

10 x 8

12 x 10

14 x 10

22 x 8

25 x 18 30 x 22 40 x 30

78

riogrande.com

800.545.6566


CABOCHONS

peridot Rio Grande peridot cabochons are the highest quality available. • Mohs Hardness: 6.5–7 • Treatment: None (N) Color: Medium green Round mm 3

Order # 066-838

Sold in packages of 6 1-2 3-5 6-11 pkg pkg pkg $10.50 $9.45 $8.95

4

066-839

Sold in packages of 3 $9.00 $8.10 $7.65

066-907 066-840 074-654

Sold individually $6.50 $5.75 $5.35 10.25 9.50 8.75 72.90 71.10 69.75

6x4

066-842

Sold in packages of 2 $8.00 $7.20 $6.80

7x5 8x6 9x7 10 x 8

066-843 066-844 066-845 074-655

Sold individually $8.75 $7.95 $7.40 15.00 13.50 12.75 32.00 29.00 27.25 91.85 89.10 86.90

4x4x4

066-054

Sold in packages of 2 $10.00 $9.00 $8.50

5x5x5

070-925

Sold individually $13.50 $12.50 $11.75

5 6 8

Oval

Bullet

almandine garnet

lab-grown pink sapphire

Rich in iron and chromium, which gives this garnet its color, garnet exhibits few inclusions. Those inclusions that are present tend to be rounded, seed-like crystals with irregular edges. • Mohs Hardness: 7–7.5 • Treatment: None (N))

Laboratory-grown corundum

mm 4 5 6 8

Oval Color: Red to brownish plum 8x6 Round Sold in packages of 6 1-2 pkg $5.00 8.00 12.15 18.35

3-5 pkg $4.25 7.00 10.80 16.75

Order # 066-853 066-854 066-906 066-855

8

066-902

Sold in packages of 2 $15.60 $14.20 $13.60

10

066-903

Sold individually $25.35 $24.15 $23.10

6x4 7x5

066-857 066-858

Sold in packages of 6 $12.15 $10.35 $9.50 17.20 16.40 15.70

8x6 10 x 8

066-859 066-861

Sold in packages of 2 $10.90 $9.80 $8.80 23.35 22.40 21.75

067-161

Sold in packages of 3 $8.50 $7.25 $6.00

Oval

Bullet

Bullet

4x4x4

Order # 090-215 090-216 090-217 090-131

Sold in packages of 10 1-2 3-5 pkg pkg $9.10 $8.20 12.50 11.25 13.00 11.70 20.50 18.45

090-133

Sold in packages of 10 $16.00 $14.40

6-11 pkg $3.75 6.25 10.35 16.05

mm 3 4 5 6

SIZING CHART

lab-grown emerald Laboratory-grown corundum Round mm 4 5 6

Order # 090-822 090-823 090-824

Sold individually 1-2 3-5 each each $13.00 $11.70 19.95 18.25 28.00 26.50

090-826

Sold individually $36.00 $34.50

Oval

4 Square

4

Round

5

5

need be zel cups ? 6

8x6

See page 81 for a selection of fine silver bezel cups. Simply fire them into your PMC® designs, and set them with a cab!

“Fire-in-place bezels give you room for creativity!” —Yvonne M. Padilla PMC® necklace with cabochon-set fine silver bezels by Yvonne M. Padilla

79


PROJECT Metal Clay Bezel Cup Necklace Using bezel cups is an easy way to add a professional look to your metal clay designs. With the added benefit of being able to set a gemstone (heat-safe stones before firing or heat-sensitive stones after firing) you can take your designs into a more professional realm.

w h a t yo u ’l l n e e d :

Pendant by Patrik Kusek

• • • • • • • • • • • • •

PMC+™ (#100-880, pg. 6) • PMC® starter tool kit (#111-411, pg. 20) Rio PVC PMC® work surface (#111-567, pg. 21) (3) .999 fine silver serrated-edge bezel cups; 4mm (#696-184, facing pg.) Round doming plate (#111-656, pg. 44) (or ping-pong ball) High-speed twist drills, #53 and #56 (#349-412 and #349-415, see riogrande.com) • 3M sanding sponge (#337-318, pg. 67) Prodigy™ flex shaft (#117-095, pg. 142) Mini fiber wheel (#338-124, see riogrande.com) Sterling oval jump rings, 18-ga. (#696-307, see riogrande.com) Liver of sulfur (#331-030, see riogrande.com) • Emery nail file Alumina hydrate (#100-960, pg. 55) Bezel rocker & prong pusher set (#113-030, see riogrande.com) (3) almandine garnet bullets, 4mm (#067-161, pg. 79) Circle template

of the textured piece of rolledout clay to the base piece as shown (fig. f). Do not cover the indented part of the clay where you made the impression with the bezel cup.

Roll out a piece of PMC+™ using two of the blue thickness guides (4-cards thick) (fig. a).

a

Place a circle template on top of the clay. Using the awl from the metal clay kit, cut out 3 circles measuring 7⁄8", ¾" and 11 ⁄16" (fig. b).

e

Find the center of each circle using the grid and crosshairs on the work surface and make a small indentation with the awl, making sure to not poke all the way through the clay (fig. c).

b

c

d 80

Gently press the bezel cup into the clay to make an impression; this is where the bezel cup will be attached to the metal clay (fig. d). Roll out a piece of clay on top of a texture plate using two of the yellow thickness guides (2-cards thick). (fig. e). Leave the edge of the clay rough to use later as a design element. Using the utility knife from the tool kit, cut the rolled-out clay in half. Apply a bit of water to the base piece using the paintbrush from the tool kit, then adhere the halves

f

g

Carefully pick up the piece and turn it over. With the back of the clay now facing up, use the circle template and awl to cut away excess clay (fig. g). Drape the circle on a doming plate (or on a bisected pingpong ball) (fig. h). Allow the pieces to dry. Repeat steps e–h for all three circles. Drill 2 or 3 holes in the base of the bezel cups at the corners, using the #56 drill and flex shaft. Secure the bezel cup while drilling using the tweezer included in the metal clay tool kit (fig. i). Use the emery file to sand down any burs left on the back of the bezel cups after drilling.

h

Use a 3M sanding sponge to smooth any rough edges on the clay circles (fig. j).

riogrande.com

800.545.6566


Use the #53 drill and flex shaft to pierce both the top and bottom edge of each circle, except at the bottom of the smallest one, where only one hole is needed (fig. k).

i

p

Add jump rings and connect all three pieces together, starting with the large disc and ending with the smallest. String the piece on a chain or cord to complete the necklace!

Use the paintbrush to fill in any cracks or gaps in the clay with slip. Apply water and slip to the indented part of the pendant where the bezel cup will be placed (fig. l).

j

k

l

q

Finished? Not quite!

Place the bezel cup and press firmly (slip will squeeze out the sides and into the inside of the bezel cup (fig. m). Use a wet brush to smooth the slip on the the inside of the bezel and around the edges of the bezel cup (fig. n). NOTE: Make sure to not leave too much clay inside the bezel cup; you want just enough to make a good connection, but not so much that it will interfere with the stone. Repeat for all 3 circles. Nest the pieces in alumina hydrate on the kiln shelf to maintain their domed shape during firing. Fire according to the appropriate firing schedule. Once the pieces have cooled after firing, dip all three simultaneously in liver of sulfer to produce a consistent patina (fig. o).

m

the wall in, then bend the wall at the 9 o’clock position, then 6 o’clock, and finish at 12 o’clock. Continue in this pattern until the entire bezel cup secures the stone (fig. r).

Use the mini fiber wheel attached to the flex shaft to remove the liver of sulfur from the raised areas, leaving it in the recessed and textured areas (fig. p). Polish the pieces as desired.

Find that perfect display and just-right packaging at riogrande. com!

r

Bezel Cups

Round, Plain (10mm shown)

Round, Serrated (8mm shown)

Oval, Serrated (10 x 8mm shown)

.999 FINE SILVER BEZEL CUPS Fire these bezel cups right into your PMC® designs! Serrated and straight-edge cups are 32-gauge; scalloped-edge cups are 30 gauge. Wall heights may vary. See pages 78 and 79 for cabochons. Round, Plain Sold in packages of 20 Holds Stone Size 3mm 3.25mm 4mm

Approx. Wall Ht. 1.90mm 2.20mm 1.90mm

Order # 696-195 696-196 696-197

1-2 3-4 5-9 pkg (each) pkg (each) pkg (each) $2.50 (0.13) $2.02 (0.11) $1.68 (0.09) 3.67 (0.19) 2.96 (0.15) 2.47 (0.13) 4.47 (0.23) 3.61 (0.19) 3.00 (0.15)

5mm 6mm 8mm 10mm

2.41mm 2.20mm 2.20mm 2.50mm

696-198 696-199 696-200 696-201

$2.85 3.67 4.44 5.21

Sold in packages of 10 (0.29) $2.31 (0.24) $1.92 (0.20) (0.37) 3.18 (0.32) 2.74 (0.28) (0.45) 3.82 (0.39) 3.44 (0.35) (0.53) 4.69 (0.47) 4.17 (0.42)

696-184 696-185 696-186 696-187

$2.87 2.85 3.48 4.57

Sold in packages of 10 (0.29) $2.16 (0.22) $1.96 (0.20) (0.29) 2.15 (0.22) 1.95 (0.20) (0.35) 2.88 (0.29) 2.49 (0.25) (0.46) 3.66 (0.37) 3.33 (0.34)

696-188 696-189 696-190 696-191 696-192

$2.85 3.89 4.33 7.42 9.54

Sold in packages of 10 (0.29) $2.54 (0.25) $2.20 (0.22) (0.39) 3.05 (0.31) 2.70 (0.27) (0.44) 3.90 (0.39) 3.47 (0.35) (0.75) 6.68 (0.67) 5.94 (0.60) (0.96) 8.27 (0.83) 7.47 (0.75)

696-193 696-194

Sold in packages of 2 $3.23 (1.62) $2.51 (1.26) $2.03 (1.02) 5.06 (2.53) 4.55 (2.28) 4.05 (2.03)

Round, Serrated-Edge

n

o

Place the stone in the bezel (fig. q), making sure it is level. If the stone requires leveling, either add small pieces of cut paper under the stone, or file away excess clay inside the bezel cup. Secure the stone, using a bezel rocker to gently bend the bezel cup wall over the stone. Start at the 3 o’clock position and bend

Oval, Scalloped (25 x 18mm shown)

4mm 5mm 6mm 8mm

2.10mm 1.80mm 1.70mm 3.10mm

Oval, Serrated-Edge 6 x 4mm 8 x 6mm 10 x 8mm 12 x 10mm 14 x 10mm

1.60mm 2.00mm 1.70mm 2.05mm 2.05mm

Oval, Scalloped-Edge 18 x 13mm 25 x 18mm

1.90mm 2.50mm

Prices are based on an $18 silver market; please call for current pricing.

81


SUNSHINE

CLOTH, CLEANERS

®

Ke ep yo ur P M C ® pieces lo oking t h eir b est!

A Economical and ideal for small cleaning tasks!

B

C D

DIAMONDBACK DIGITAL ULTRASONIC CLEANERS High-quality ultrasonics feature stainless steel construction and digital controls. The 1.5-pint (item, A) features a digital timer with three- and six-minute intervals (this model does not have a heater.) The two-quart (item B) features a timer adjustable from 0–30 minutes and heat adjustable from 0–158°F (0–70°C). 1.5-pint 2-quart Exterior dimensions: 67⁄8"W x 4¼"D x 5"H 7"W x 6½"D x 83⁄8"H Tank dimensions: 57⁄8"W x 3¼"D x 2¾"H 6"W x 5½"D x 3¾"H Connected power: 35 watts; 40–50kHz 50 watts; 20–50kHz Shipping weight: 3 lbs. 5 lbs.

Use Sunshine® Cloths to remove tarnish from PMC® pieces.

SUNSHINE® CLOTHS Soft, effective Sunshine® Cloths, with their special non-scratch mirco-abrasives, clean your PMC® jewelry brilliantly! Cloths (7½" x 5") are packaged in resealable plastic bags individually or in bulk quantities to help you save! Description Single cloth

Order # 337-039

Description 10-cloth bulk package* 100-cloth bulk package *Not shown

Order # 337-038 337-036

$21.95

PUSH PLAY FOR PMC! with Celie Fago & Tim McCreight An informative PMC® video for pros and beginners including moldmaking, carving, slip, firing and finishing. DVD; approximately 90 minutes. 560-148

82

10-49 each $1.90

50-99 each $1.75

1-4 5-9 10+ pkg pkg pkg $18.00 $15.23 $13.20 118.50 108.00 99.00

$30.00

Order # 336-220 336-221

each $60.85 109.85

BASKET FOR ULTRASONIC CLEANER Plastic basket protects pieces during cleaning. Features 2" overhangs; use with the 2-quart ultrasonic (item B, above). Made in China. Size C. 4¾"L x 3¾"W x 2"D

Order # 336-463

each $9.95

SPARKLEAN Use this dry formulation cleaner in an ultrasonic cleaner or as a soak. Size D. 1 lb. (yields 32 gallons)

PMC BEADS with Tim McCreight Learn how to create unique PMC® beads with this DVD. Tim presents five bead projects, covering the basic techniques to complete them, while encouraging the artist to use their own skills to enhance the technique and design individuality. DVD; 70 minutes. 560-850

1-9 each $2.20

Size A. 1.5-pint B. 2-quart

Order # 336-318

1-2 each $20.70

PMC BASICS with Tim McCreight More than 30 short video clips from this PMC® expert with an introduction to PMC varieties. DVD; 70 minutes. 560-146

$30.00

PRECIOUS METAL CLAY with Tim McCreight Straightforward demonstrations show how to achieve creative effects ranging from the fluid forms of ceramics to rich textures. DVD; 90 minutes. 560-301

$29.95

riogrande.com

800.545.6566


M E TA L C L AY B O O K S & DV D s BRONZE METAL CLAY by Yvonne Padillo Explore the remarkable potential of bronze metal clay in this colorful book by metal clay artist, Yvonne M. Padilla. In clear, fun text, she helps you discover the differences between bronze clay and silver clay, including drying, firing and finishing. Learn intermediate as well as advanced techniques through 35 stepby-step projects for jewelry items such as earrings, necklaces, rings and bracelets. Includes an illustrated troubleshooting guide, answers to frequently asked questions, tips on making and using patinas, and information on constructing simple firing containers. Also enjoy an inspiring gallery of artists’ work created from this amazing material. Softbound; 128 pages. $17.95

550-712

SETTING STONES IN METAL CLAY by Jeanette Landenwitch This book includes more than 40 methods, techniques and variations for creating stone settings in metal clay. Jeanette Landenwitch provides useful drawings and examples throughout the guide, along with detailed instructions. Spiralbound; 119 pages. 550-858

$27.50

MIXED METAL JEWELRY WORKSHOP by Mary Hettmansperger Learn to combine metal clay, metal sheet and wire, mesh and more in this showcase of mixed metal jewelry techniques. With a non-traditional approach to jewelry-making, Mary Hettmansperger leads a workshop in cutting and shaping metal, using lowtech connection methods, and working with metal clays through a variety of jewelry projects. Step-by-step instructions and full-color photographs make this a fun and fascinating odyssey into the art of combined media jewelry. Hardbound; 127 pages. 550-790

$24.95

PMC TECHNIC by Tim McCreight This unique, valuable collection includes ten different technical approaches to Precious Metal Clay from ten professional artists in the field, including CeCe Wire, Celie Fago, Terry Kovalcik, Barbara Simon and J. Fred Woell. Includes personal experiences, tips, instructions, photos and comparisons. Share in their combined decades of experience to learn the many facets of this amazing medium. Hardbound; 120 pages. 550-851

$30.00

FUSING STERLING SILVER & METAL CLAY by Mardel Rein Learn how to fuse sterling and metal clay, as well as embed and fire findings such as settings and posts using a torch or kiln. The project also includes soldering, stone-setting, forming and polishing. Includes step-by-step instruction and a glossary. DVD; approximately 40 minutes. 560-851

$19.95

METAL CLAY: BEYOND THE BASICS by Carol A. Babineau Take your metal clay skills to the next level! Follow clear instructions, vibrant photographs and stunning final photography through 24 inventive projects to create earrings, pins, pendants, bracelets and more. Even incorporate more advanced techniques such as enameling and texturing! Includes beginning, intermediate and advanced projects involving a wide spectrum of jewelry designs. Softbound; 95 pages. 550-705

$19.95

83


M E TA L C L AY B O O K S & DV D s

“It allows me more freedom.”

NEW DIRECTIONS IN METAL CLAY by CeCe Wire CeCe’s latest book discusses the basics for creating with PMC® including some of the latest techniques that will propel your designs to the next level. Learn various finishing techniques and how to set stones. Beautiful color photographs portray the many ways you can work with this innovative material, including enameling methods and silk screening. Includes step-by-step instruction for 25 projects of varying degrees of difficulty. Hardbound; 144 pages. $24.95

PURE SILVER METAL CLAY BEADS by Linda Kaye-Moses Delve into the possibilities in metal clay through 15 fun silver bead projects. Projects are organized from beginner to advanced and are complete with material lists and step-by-step photos to allow any jewelry to gradually increase skills while creating stunning metal clay silver jewelry. Includes photo contributions from 19 metal clay artists, as well as their own insights, to highlight the versatility of metal clay. Hardbound; 160 pages. 550-711

$24.99

METAL CLAY BEADS by Barbara Becker Simon This comprehensive reference guide outlines innovative techniques for making beads from metal clay. Renowned metalworker and jeweler Barbara Becker Simon gives project advice, as well as inpsiration, in this colorful, practical book. Hardbound; 144 pages. 550-855

84

flatlands of Colorado, the bold, rural architecture keeps me company. The silos and barns have become so familiar, they’re like old friends, the kind I don’t get tired of visiting, the kind who, unknowingly, are my muse. I create things that connect me to this time and place.

—CeCe Wire

550-102

During my commutes through the

$24.95

—CeCe Wire

CREATIVE METAL CLAY JEWELRY by CeCe Wire Learn to work with this versatile and fun clay-like product. Discover how to combine PMC® and dichroic glass, enamel and beads to create jewelry, sculpture and carvings. Includes step-by-step techniques and beautiful color photos. Softbound; 144 pages. 550-900

$14.95

METAL CLAY RINGS by Irinia Meich Learn to make a variety of textured and shaped rings using metal clay. You'll get methods and techniques on working with this unique medium as well as tool recommendations and 18 original designs that you can experiment with. Softbound; 95 pages. 550-796

$19.95__

ENAMELING ON METAL CLAY by Pam East Add splashes of color to all your silver metal clay designs! This colorful book is packed with clear step-by-step instructions for specific projects, firing tips, reference information, detailed overviews of tools and techniques. Softbound; 95 pages. 550-695

$19.95

METAL CLAY: THE COMPLETE GUIDE by Jackie Truty This book is a great reference resource for all things metal clay! It covers tools and materials, clay care and handling, and techniques such as rolling, texturing, stamping and forming. Truty’s book also explores the possibilities for mixing metal clay with other media, such as enamel and glass. Includes instructions for creating a bracelet, bead, box pendant and ring, bails, connectors and beads, as well as helpful information on ring-sizing, firing and alternative firing methods. Spiralbound hardcover; 256 pages. 550-407

$29.99

riogrande.com

800.545.6566


L e t ’s ta l k

GLASS A colorful new world has opened up for jewelr y artists. “Eye Candy” bead by Chelsea Stone

In glass, jewelers are finding the perfect partnership of brilliant color and captivating fire. And PMC® users are finding exciting new opportunities in glass, using the tools already in their workshops!

“Vitality” by Jennifer Wood, 2008 Saul Bell Design Award Winner, Beads

Rio Grande is proud to offer three lines of high-quality glass to suit any design: Uroboros® FX 90 COE , Uroboros® System 96®, and Messy Color™ 104 COE. Messy Color™ 104 COE: One of the most popular, high-quality, hand-pulled rods in the industry! Soft and extremely malleable, these rods work beautifully in the flame and produce a rich color and a smooth finish. They can can also be used in fusing and for pickup in glass-blowing and are great for applying decorative elements on slumped and cast pieces. Uroboros® FX 90: The most widely-used glass in the industry! With a COE of 90, this glass requires a bit more heat, making it ideal in the kiln for casting, slumping, fusing and draping. Use stringers, noodles and frit for decoration. Uroboros® System 96®: With a coefficient of expansion (COE) of 96, this glass is just hard enough that it will not lose its shape during fusing and casting, yet it’s soft enough to require only moderate heat for flameworking. System 96® stringers, noodles and rods are ideal for decorative accents on slumped or cast pieces.

Throughout the following section, we’ve provided the Uroboros® or Messy Color® item number for each product to make re-ordering simpler. When you receive your glass, each item will be labeled with that item number, so you can easily identify and re-order any glass product, even ones you received as part of an assortment of randomly selected colors. Start browsing now to see what’s in store and what you can achieve with glass—fuse it, fire it, cast it, love it!

IMPORTANT The coefficient of expansion (COE) indicates how fast or slow a particular glass expands and contracts as it heats or cools. Pay close attention to this measurement with any glass you purchase; never mix glass with different coefficients of expansion. Doing so will cause weakness in and eventual breakage of your finished pieces.

85


104 COE ROD ASSORTMENTS

“I love the element of surprise with glass, especially when working with new colors!” —Felice Killian “Caviar” Necklace by Felice Killian 2004 Saul Bell Design Award 2nd Place, Beads

Messy Color™ 104 COE Rods 4–6mm

One of the most popular, high-quality, hand-pulled rods in the industry! Soft and extremely malleable, these rods work beautifully in the flame and produce a rich color and a smooth finish. They can also be used in fusing and for pickup in glass-blowing and are great for applying decorative elements on slumped and cast pieces. Available in transparent and opaque colors (see pages 87 and 88 for individual colors). MESSY COLOR™ 104 COE GLASS ROD ASSORTMENTS Choose from four different assortments! Visit riogrande.com for a complete list of the colors included in each assortment. These high-quality, hand-pulled glass rods are 13"L (approx.) x 4–6mm dia. Master Assortment This comprehensive master assortment includes 73 glass rods. Description A. Master assortment

Order # 360-000

A

Visit riogrande.com for a complete list of the colors included in the assortments on this page.

each $74.00

B

Starter Assortment This assortment includes 32 of Messy Color’s most popular colors. Description B. Starter assortment

Order # 360-001

each $34.00

Order # 360-002

each $38.00

“Special Colors” Assortment This assortment includes 33 exceptional colors. Description C. “Special Colors” assortment

“Pinks & Purples” Assortment This assortment includes 17 glass rods in beautiful pink and purple hues. Description D. “Pinks & Purples” assortment

Order # 360-003

C each $29.00

Important: The glass on pages 86–88 has a COE of 104. Never mix glass with varying COEs; doing so will result in eventual breakage of your finished glass pieces. D

86

riogrande.com

800.545.6566


104 COE RODS

All colors of rods are combineable for your best price break.

Rods ¼ lb. (6–10 rods)

Color Name

Opaque Rods 4 – 6m m di a. ¼ l b. ( 6 – 1 0 r ods)

Rods

Rods

¼ lb. (6–10 rods)

¼ lb. (6–10 rods)

1-2

Color Name Lipstick Messy Color #

Pumpkin

3+

$8.95 7.50

360-013 511140

360-014

Messy Color #

511223

*Clockwork

360-015

Messy Color #

511229

Creamsicle

360-016

Messy Color #

511241

Phoenix Messy Color #

Ghee Messy Color #

Stone Ground Messy Color #

Celadon Messy Color #

Elphaba Messy Color #

Dirty Martini

360-017

1-2 Color Name Poison Apple Messy Color #

French Blue Messy Color #

Glacier Messy Color #

Lapis Messy Color #

Electric Avenue

$8.95

3+

7.50

360-036 511487

360-037 511505

360-040 511519

360-041 511531

360-043

511277

Messy Color #

511547

360-018

Chalcedony

360-044

511346

Messy Color #

511550

360-019 511351

360-021 511402

360-024

Ming Messy Color #

Fremen Messy Color #

Smurfy

360-045 511562

360-047 511568

360-048

511430

Messy Color #

511569

360-025

Grump Bear

360-049

Messy Color #

511448

Messy Color #

511570

Kryptonite

360-026

Cornflower

360-050

Messy Color #

511449

Messy Color #

511571

Commando

360-027

Messy Color #

511475

Olive Messy Color #

Soylent Messy Color #

Split Pea Messy Color #

360-028 511476

360-031 511479

360-032 511481

Mermaid Messy Color #

Zachary Messy Color #

Thai Orchid Messy Color #

Heffalump Messy Color #

360-051 511586

360-052 511589

360-055 511632

360-056 511645

*Clockwork produces a saturated and vibrant orange color that ranges anywhere from transparent to opaque, depending on your working style and atmosphere.

1-2

$8.95

3+

7.50

Grape Ape

360-059

Messy Color #

511654

Eggplant Messy Color #

Plum Messy Color #

Evil Queen Messy Color #

Poi Messy Color #

Ginger Messy Color #

Butter Pecan Messy Color #

Khaki Messy Color #

Canyon de Chelly Messy Color #

Mink Messy Color #

Cirrus Messy Color #

Hades Messy Color #

Tuxedo Messy Color #

Adamantium Messy Color #

Gunmetal Messy Color #

Gelly’s Sty Messy Color #

Rose Quartz Messy Color #

360-060 511655

360-061 511658

360-063 511661

360-064 511667

360-065 511701

360-066 511703

360-067 511717

360-068 511722

360-072 511788

360-073 511806

360-074 511820

360-083 511872

360-084 511874

360-085 511885

360-088 511904

360-089 511907

87


104 COE RODS

Rods

Transparent Rods 4 – 6m m d i a.

¼ lb. (6–10 rods)

Rods ¼ lb. (6–10 rods)

Rods

¼ l b . ( 6 – 1 0 r o ds) Color Name

¼ lb. (6–10 rods)

1-2

$8.95

3+

7.50

Color Name Halong Bay Messy Color #

Bordello Messy Color #

Messy Color #

511109

511128

360-015

Messy Color #

511229

Sapphire

Pulsar

Great Bluedini Messy Color #

360-023 511413

Simply Berry Messy Color #

Oz Messy Color #

360-030 511478

Count Von Count Messy Color #

Mojito Messy Color #

Messy Color #

511482

Algae

Larkspur

Crocus

Sepia Messy Color #

Leaky Pen Messy Color #

511512

360-038 511508

*Clockwork produces a saturated vibrant orange color that ranges from transparent to opaque, depending on your working style and atmosphere.

7.50

360-071 511780

Peace

360-081 511835

360-042 511543

Marshmallow

360-046 511563

360-082

Messy Color #

511859

Pink Champagne

360-090

Messy Color #

511915

360-053 511590

Blush Messy Color #

360-054

Desert Pink

511618

Messy Color #

360-091 511921

360-093 511957

360-057 511652

Rods

360-058 511653

360-062 511660

360-035 511484

$8.95

3+

360-039

360-034 511483

1-2

¼ lb. (6–10 rods)

Messy Color #

Messy Color #

Maple Messy Color #

360-033 Messy Color #

Slytherin

7.50

360-011

Clockwork*

Messy Color #

3+

Messy Color #

Messy Color #

Peacock Green

$8.95

360-010 Messy Color #

Sangre

1-2

360-070 511742

Color Name *Clear rods are available in four different diameters!

(exc ept a s n o t e d )

Color Name

1-2

$8.95

3+

7.50

Clear* 2–3mm

360-077

Messy Color #

511834-02

Clear* 4–6mm

360-078

Messy Color #

511834-04

Clear* 6–8mm

360-079

Messy Color #

511834-06

Clear* 8–10mm

360-080

Messy Color #

511834-08

“I love working with the fluid nature of glass.” —Chelsea Stone “Eye Candy” beads by Chelsea Stone

88

riogrande.com

800.545.6566


Schauer Leaded Transparent & Opalescent Enamels Color it! See pg. 161..

Silver PMC3™, 50g Sculpt it! See pg. 7. 100-775 $88.04

Violet

Violet blue

Medium blue

300-290

300-279

300-283

$11.20

$11.20

$11.20

“Diversity is the spice of life. And mixed media is a visual and tactile feast,” says jewelry designer Haley Holeman, a 2008 Saul Bell Design Emerging Artist winner. In both her award-winning piece and the piece shown here, Haley mixed & mingled her media—metal clay, glass and enamel—to create pendants that are yummy with color and divinely designed. Jewelry designers like Haley and Wendy Wallin Malinow (who created the award-winning piece on our

front cover) are throwing everything into the mix, and it’s taking them on new paths in their work. “In art school,” Wendy remembers, “a professor remarked that I would have a difficult career because I would never be able to choose a path.” Turns out he was right—at least about choosing a path. “I like to try everything!” Wendy says. Marrying color to metal and adding some “history or quirkiness” to a piece with a found object are just a couple of the ways Wendy adds layers of meaning to her work. Her compulsion to explore the unknown has directed her along the path best traveled. Haley, still early in her successful career, is already looking for that next path, one that may include resins and laser-cut fabrics. “Masterpieces are conceived by those who are willing to dive into the mud, pull out handfuls of whatever they can grab, and fashion them in an artful way,” Haley says. And what a feast of goodies are out there. Waiting to be discovered. Waiting to come to life in the next great jewelry design.

PMC®, glass & enamel pendant by Haley Holeman

96 COE Transparent Glass, Deep Purple Flamework it! See 103. 340-037 $10.95

89


90 COE NOODLE & STRINGER ASSORTMENTS

"What is it about glass? Strength, versatility, beauty." —Ginger Kelly Bracelet by Ginger Kelly

Uroboros® FX 90 COE Noodles 4.76 mm approx.

FX 90 COE glass: the most popular glass in the industry! These flat, fettuccine-like glass noodles are indispensible. Snap or nip them with a glass cutter (see page 130) to your desired length, then use them as straight lines in your casting and fusing designs or bend them in a flame to create unique shapes. Noodles are also great for creating embellishments on beads.

UROBOROS® FX 90 COE GLASS NOODLE MARDI GRAS ASSORTMENT This transparent Mardi Gras assortment includes 5 oz. of noodles (~ 15) in a selection of bright colors. Noodles are 17"L x 3⁄16"W. Please Note: Contents are chosen at random; colors may vary. Description Mardi Gras noodle assortment

Uroboros # N-M-90-5

Order # 350-221

each $14.95

Watch noodles and stringers carefully when working them with a torch. Their thin structure means they will reach liquidity much faster than glass rods.

Uroboros® FX 90 COE Stringers 1.1 mm approx.

FX 90 COE glass: the most popular glass in the industry! These delicate transparent strands of color allow you to create finer, more intricate designs. Use them straight in fusing and casting work or shape them in a flame or apply to beads. If you’ll be using stringers in torch work, be careful to not keep them in the flame for long—stringers reach their liquid state very quickly in a flame. UROBOROS® FX 90 COE GLASS MARDI GRAS STRINGER ASSORTMENT The Mardi Gras assortment includes 5 oz. of stringers (~ 130) in a selection of bright, festive colors. Stringers are 17"L x 1.1mm dia. Please Note: Contents are chosen at random; colors may vary. Description Mardi Gras stringer assortment

90

Uroboros # S-M-90-5

Order # 350-321

each $14.95

Important: The glass on pages 90–99 has a COE of 90. Never mix glass with varying COEs; doing so will result in eventual breakage of your glass pieces.

riogrande.com

800.545.6566


90 COE NOODLES & STRINGERS 

Tra n s p a re n t Opaque Glass

Noodles

Stringers

5 oz. (~ 15 pcs.)

5 oz. (~ 130 pcs.)

Glass Color Name

All colors of rods, noodles, and stringers are combineable for your best price break.

1-2 3+

Color Name

$14.95 11.95

Noodles

Stringers

5 oz. (~ 15 pcs.)

5 oz. (~ 130 pcs.)

All colors of rods, noodles, and stringers are combineable for your best price break.

1-2 3+

$14.95 11.95

Grenadine Red

350-200

350-300

Uroboros #

N-606-90-5

S-606-90-5

White Opal

350-202

350-302

Vermilion

350-201

350-301

Uroboros #

N-05-90-5

S-05-90-5

Uroboros #

N-6071-90-5

S-6071-90-5

Lemon Yellow Opal

350-203

350-303

Lemon Chiffon

350-204

350-304

Uroboros #

N-356-90-5

S-356-90-5

Uroboros #

N-357-90-5

S-357-90-5

Cornflower Blue Opal

350-206

350-306

Cobalt Blue

350-205

350-305

Uroboros #

N-408-90-5

S-408-90-5

Uroboros #

N-403-90-5

S-403-90-5

Red Opal

350-209

350-309

Peacock Blue

350-207

350-307

Uroboros #

N-604-90-5

S-604-90-5

Uroboros #

N-417-90-5

S-417-90-5

Plum

350-208

350-308

Uroboros #

N-501-90-5

S-501-90-5

350-210

350-310

Uroboros #

N-2602-90-5

S-2602-90-5

Marigold Opal

350-212

350-312

Emerald Green

350-211

350-311

Uroboros #

N-351-90-5

S-351-90-5

Uroboros #

N-700-90-5

S-700-90-5

Black

350-213

350-313

Lime

350-214

350-314

Uroboros #

N-56-90-5

S-56-90-5

Uroboros #

N-703-90-5

S-703-90-5

Yellow Opal

Apple Jade Green Opal

350-215

350-315

Clear

350-216

350-316

Uroboros #

N-726-90-5

S-726-90-5

Uroboros #

N-00-90-5

S-00-90-5

Oasis Green Opal

350-219

350-319

Golden Amber

350-217

350-317

Uroboros #

N-761-90-5

S-761-90-5

Uroboros #

N-901-90-5

S-901-90-5

Root Beer

350-218

350-318

Uroboros #

N-905-90-5

S-905-90-5

Dichroic Glass DICHROIC NOODLE ASSORTMENTS Dichroic glass offers intense, reflected rainbow colors. An ultra-thin layer of quartz and a metallic coating on dichroic glass are applied with electron beams in a vacuum chamber to create a vibrant look. Available with a black or clear base. Please Note: Contents are chosen at random; colors may vary. 3-Piece Assortments; 5"L Description Black base Clear base

Uroboros # N-56-90DM N-00-90DM

Order # 350-800 350-801

each $11.95 11.95

Order # 350-802 350-803

each $89.00 89.00

Black-base noodles

12-Piece Assortments; 17"L Description Black base Clear base

Uroboros # N-56-90D N-00-90D

Clear-base noodles

91


90 COE FRIT Uroboros® FX 90 COE FRIT Vibrant, versatile crushed glass, frit is a staple in glass designs. Available in two grades—fine and medium—to create any pattern or look. Use fine frit to transition between colors or to blend colors together to create a new color. It’s also great as a filler between larger pieces of frit, and is ideal for creating straight lines.

Studio kit: random assortment of 50 colors and grades

Medium frit is used for creating speckled effects and is often used when casting in molds since it leaves fewer air bubbles than other grades of frit. Transparent frit is great for overlay work and as accents on your designs; opal (opaque) frit (page 93) provides bold, solid colors, making it an effective color base.

Fine

Starter kit: random assortment of 12 colors and grades

Frit Assortments Frit assortments contain 4-oz. jars of frit in a variety of popular colors and grades. Kits contain a selection of opaque, transparent, dual-tone and iridescent colors. Please Note: Assortment contents are chosen at random; colors and grades of contents may vary. Description Studio kit; 50 jars Starter kit; 12 jars

Uroboros # FSK-90 FSKM-90

Order # 350-400 350-401

each $189.00 56.00

Medium Transparent Frit  - o z . ja r s 8½

Fine

Medium

All colors of transparent and opalescent frit are combineable for your best price break.

Examples above are enlarged to show detail.

Clear

92

$6.95 5.70

350-440

350-480

F2-00-8

F3-00-8

350-441

350-481

F2-01-8

F3-01-8

Lemon Chiffon

350-446

350-486

Uroboros #

F2-357-8

F3-357-8

Uroboros #

Important: Always wear breathing protection when working with frit—we recommend item #201-654. See page 149 for a full selection of masks.

1-2 3+

Color Name

Water Clear Uroboros #

riogrande.com

800.545.6566


90 COE FRIT

“Glass still amazes me!” —Ginger Kelly

Bracelet by Ginger Kelly

Opaque Frit  - o z . ja r s 8½

Fine

Medium

All colors of transparent and opalescent frit are combineable for your best price break.

Transparent Frit  - o z . j ar s 8½

Fine

Medium

All colors of transparent and opalescent frit are combineable for your best price break.

1-2 3+

Color Name

1-2 3+

Color Name

$6.95 5.70

$6.95 5.70

Orchid Opal

350-442

350-482

Uroboros #

F2-0155-8

F3-0155-8

White Opal

350-443

350-483

F2-05-8

F3-05-8

Uroboros #

Aqua Blue

350-448

350-488

Antique White Opal

350-444

350-484

Uroboros #

F2-402-8

F3-402-8

Uroboros #

F2-330-8

F3-330-8

Cobalt Blue

350-449

350-489

Marigold Opal

350-445

350-485

Uroboros #

F2-403-8

F3-403-8

Uroboros #

F2-351-8

F3-351-8

Plum

350-451

350-491

Cobalt Blue Opal

350-447

350-487

Uroboros #

F2-501-8

F3-501-8

Uroboros #

F2-400-8

F3-400-8

Walnut

350-454

350-494

Cornflower Blue Opal

350-450

350-490

Uroboros #

F2-575-8

F3-575-8

Uroboros #

F2-408-8

F3-408-8

Grenadine Red

350-456

350-496

Plum Opal

350-452

350-492

Uroboros #

F2-606-8

F3-606-8

Uroboros #

F2-521-8

F3-521-8

350-453

350-493

F2-56-8

F3-56-8

Vermilion

350-457

350-497

Black

Uroboros #

F2-6071-8

F3-6071-8

Uroboros #

Tangerine

350-458

350-498

Red Opal

350-455

350-495

Uroboros #

F2-608-8

F3-608-8

Uroboros #

F2-604-8

F3-604-8

Emerald Green

350-459

350-499

Apple Jade Opal

350-461

350-501

Uroboros #

F2-700-8

F3-700-8

Uroboros #

F2-726-8

F3-726-8

Lime Green

350-460

350-500

Oasis Green Opal

350-462

350-502

Uroboros #

F2-703-8

F3-703-8

Uroboros #

F2-761-8

F3-761-8

350-463

350-503

F2-791-8

F3-791-8

Golden Amber

350-464

350-504

Seacrest Opal

Uroboros #

F2-901-8

F3-901-8

Uroboros #

Dichroic Frit

UROBOROS® FX 90 COE DICHROIC FRIT Coarse Dichroic glass offers intense, reflected rainbow colors. An ultra-thin layer of quartz and a metallic coating are applied to glass with electron beams in a vacuum chamber to create a vibrant look. Description Clear dichroic frit Black dichroic frit

Uroboros # DF5-00-90 DF5-56-90

Sold in 2-oz. bottles Order # each 350-804 $39.95 350-805 39.95

93


90 COE SHEET ASSORTMENTS Uroboros® FX 90 COE Sheet Assortments

A

FX 90 COE glass: the most popular glass in the industry! And sheet glass is one of the most versatile forms of glass—cut it into any shape, break it, fuse it or drape it. Thin glass (1.8mm) allows you to stack sheets for varying effects while keeping the overall weight low. Smaller 23/4" x 4" sheet assortments contain more colors at an economical price. Use larger 6" x 6" sheets (facing page) for bigger fusing projects, such as small bowls. The mini 2" x 2" sheets mean less cutting, making them ideal for creating pendants! Please Note: Assortment contents are chosen at random; colors and styles of contents may vary.

90 COE Sheet 2¾" x 4" UROBOROS® FX 90 COE 1.8MM SHEET ASSORTMENT This popular assortment of transparent and opalescent colors is a perfect way to start creating with thin sheet glass. Includes 20 sheets. Description A. Thin sheet assortment

Uroboros # EZA4-90

Order # 350-599

each $29.95

B

UROBOROS® FX 90 COE 3MM SHEET ASSORTMENT The sheet glass in this random assortment of transparent and opalescent colors is forgiving to cut, stable at re-melt and delivers consistent, dependable results. Includes 10 sheets. Description B. 3mm sheet assortment

Uroboros # EZA5-90

Order # 350-650

each $19.95

UROBOROS® FX 90 COE 1.8MM HOT-COLOR SHEET ASSORTMENT This assortment of hot and warm colors add bright, interesting color to all your designs. Includes 10 sheets. C

Description C. Hot-color sheet assortment

Uroboros # EZA6-90

Order # 350-651

each $19.95

When you apply the proper pressure, you will hear a gentle “scritching” sound as you move across the glass, and you will see a faint score.

SCORING Cutting glass can be intimidating, since both the tool and the glass itself present a risk of injury. Start out by selecting your cutter—we recommend the Toyo pistol-grip glass cutter (see page 130). Put just a few drops of oil into the handle (do not fill it completely). When you are preparing to make a cut, hold the cutter with the blade away from you. Slowly push the cutter away from you while pressing into the glass. Note: You don’t need to press hard, just enough to score the surface.

94

riogrande.com

800.545.6566


90 COE SHEET ASSORTMENTS 9h S 0 eCe O t EG lSah ses e t 6 6" 6"" xx 6" UROBOROS® FX 90 COE 3MM TRANSPARENT SHEET ASSORTMENT This sheet glass in this assortment is bright, easy to cut, stable at re-melt and delivers consistent dependable results. Layer on top of opal sheets to add elements of depth and refraction to your glass designs. Includes 20 sheets. Description Uroboros # A. 3mm transparent assortment EZA10-90

Order # 350-652

each $89.95

UROBOROS® FX 90 COE 3MM OPAL SHEET ASSORTMENT The opaque colors in this assortment are pure expressions of visible color. Combine with transparent colors to create an amazing depth and refraction in your glass work. Includes 20 sheets B.

Description 3mm opal assortment

Uroboros # EZA11-90

Order # 350-653

A

each $89.95

90 COE Mini Sheet 2" x 2" UROBOROS® FX 90 COE 1.8MM DICHORIC MINI SHEET ASSORTMENT Use these mini sheets for creating pendants. Includes six sheets. Description C. Dichoric mini assortment

Uroboros # DMSA-90

Order # 350-806

each $32.95

B

Fused glass watch bands by Jayne Persico, courtesy of Uroboros®.

C

Never Never stack stack sheet sheet glass glass flat—glass, flat—glass, particularly particularly dichroic glass, willwill scratch easily in this position. dichroic glass, scratch easily in this position. Instead, upright likelike books onon a shelf. Instead,stack stacksheets sheets upright books a shelf.

95


90 COE SHEET Uroboros

ÂŽ

FX 90 COE Glass Sheet

Choose 1.8mm or 3mm glass in a wide variety of colors. All colors sold individually.

1.8mm

Sheet

Tran s p a re n t S o l d i n p ac k s o f 10

6" x 6"

Color Name

1-2 $39.95 3+ 35.95

All colors of 6" x 6" sheet glass are combineable for your best price break.

Clear Uroboros #

1.8mm

350-600 EZ61-00-90-66

Sheet

Opa q u e So l d i n d i v i d u a lly

6" x 6"

Color Name

1-2 $8.95 3+ 7.60

All colors of 6" x 6" sheet glass are combineable for your best price break.

Black Uroboros #

FORMING Before you begin, coat the bracelet-forming mandrel with kiln wash (#703-050, pg. 132) or cover it with firing paper (#500-192 or #500-194, pg. 133) to prevent the glass from sticking. Once your fused glass piece has cooled completely (after resting naturally inside the kiln for approximately 1 to 2 hours), center the piece on the mandrel, then return it to the kiln and bring the temperature up to 1395°F. Peek through the bead door on the kiln and watch for the piece to begin to fall around the mandrel. Once it begins falling, turn off and unplug the kiln. CAUTION: Make sure to unplug the kiln since you will be reaching inside with forming tools. While wearing safety gloves (we suggest #704-104, see riogrande.com), use graphite tongs (#701-402, pg. 138) to carefully but firmly press the sides of the piece down around the curve of the mandrel, forming it into a bracelet shape. Once the piece begins to firm, close the kiln door and allow the piece to cool fully.

350-602 EZ61-56-90-661

Color Name Aqua Uroboros #

350-604 EZ61-402-90-661

Golden Amber Uroboros #

1-2 $8.95 3+ 7.60 350-608 EZ61-901-90-661

1.8mm Cobalt Blue Uroboros #

350-605

Emerald Green

350-609

EZ61-403-90-661

Uroboros #

EZ61-700-90-661

Sheet

Iri d e s ce nt S o l d ind iv id ua l l y

6" x 6"

Color Name

1-2 $8.95 3+ 7.60

All colors of 6" x 6" sheet glass are combineable for your best price break.

96

Grenadine Red

350-606

Uroboros #

EZ61-606-90-661

Tangerine

350-607

Uroboros #

EZ61-608-90-661

Lime Green Uroboros #

Plum Uroboros #

350-610 EZ61-703-90-661

350-611 EZ61-501-90-661

Clear Irid Uroboros #

Black Irid Uroboros #

riogrande.com

350-601 EZ61-00-90IR-661

350-603 EZ61-56-90IR-661

800.545.6566


90 COE SHEET 3mm

Sheet

Tra n s p a re nt S o l d i n pac ks of 10

6" x 6" Color Name

1-2 $39.95 3+ 35.95

All colors of 6" x 6" sheet glass are combineable for your best price break.

Clear Machine Rolled

350-700

Uroboros #

EZ63-00-90-661

3mm

Sheet

Opa qu e S ol d ind iv id ua l l y

6" x 6 "

Color Name

Color Name

1-2 $8.95 3+ 7.60

1-2 $8.95 3+ 7.60

Marigold Opal

350-708

Uroboros #

EZ60-351-90-661

All colors of 6" x 6" sheet glass are combineable for your best price break.

Black Machine Rolled

350-702

Uroboros #

EZ63-56-90-661

White Opal Uroboros #

Cobalt Blue Opal

350-710

Uroboros #

EZ60-400-90-661

Cornflower Blue Opal

350-704

Uroboros #

EZ60-05-90-661

350-712 EZ60-408-90-661

Glass-Forming Bracelet Mandrel 300-037

Red Opal

$69.95

Uroboros #

3mm 6" x 6"

Color Name

1-2 $8.95 3+ 7.60

350-706

Uroboros #

EZ60-610-90-661

Tangerine

350-707

Uroboros #

EZ60-608-90-661

Tra n s p a re n t S o l d i n d i v i d ually

Uroboros #

EZ60-604-90-661

Light Cherry Red

Sheet

Plum Opal

350-705

350-715 EZ60-521-90-661

Apple Jade Opal

350-718

Uroboros #

EZ60-726-90-661

Oasis Green Opal Uroboros #

350-719 EZ60-761-90-661

All colors of 6" x 6" sheet glass are combineable for your best price break.

Lemon Chiffon Uroboros #

350-709 EZ60-357-90-661

Color Name Cobalt Blue Uroboros #

350-711 EZ60-403-90-661

Emerald Green Uroboros #

1-2 $8.95 3+ 7.60 350-716 EZ60-700-90-661

3mm

Sheet

Iri d e s ce nt S o l d ind iv id ua l ly

6" x 6"

Color Name

1-2 $8.95 3+ 7.60

All colors of 6" x 6" sheet glass are combineable for your best price break.

Caribbean Blue

350-713

Uroboros #

EZ60-413-90-661

Plum Uroboros #

350-714 EZ60-501-90-661

Lime Uroboros #

Golden Amber Uroboros #

350-717 EZ60-703-90-661

350-720 EZ60-901-90-661

Clear Irid Uroboros #

Black Irid Uroboros #

350-701 EZ60-00-90IR-661

350-703 EZ60-56-90IR-661

97


90 COE SPECIALTY SHEET & PRE-CUT SHAPES

Uroboros® FX 90 COE Specialty Sheet

Uroboros® FX 90 COE Pre-Cut Circles We’ve cut FX 90 sheet glass into circles so you don’t have to! Machine-rolled sheets offer the smoothest possible surface; free of frustrating marks, artifacts, grains and surface bubbles. Available in clear and black; perfect for fusing projects. Circles measure 7" in diameter.

Specially designed glass sheet is an easy way to add a one-of-a-kind look to all your pieces. Sold individually.

3mm

Sheet

So l d i n d i v i d u ally

6" x 6" Color Name

Clear with Black Streamers

350-750

Uroboros #

EZ12-56-90-661

Uroboros #

Cut

Circle

S o l d ind iv id ua l l y

7 " di ame t e r 1-2 $8.95 3+ 7.60

All colors of 6" x 6" specialty sheet glass are combineable for your best price break.

Herringbone Ripple Clear Irid

3mm

Color Name Machine Rolled Clear Uroboros #

1-2 $11.95 3+ 10.75

Color Name

1-2 $11.95 3+ 10.75

350-654

Machine Rolled Black

350-656

EZ63-00-90-71

Uroboros #

EZ63-56-90-71

Machine Rolled Clear Irid

350-655

Machine Rolled Black Irid

350-657

Uroboros #

EZ63-00-90IR-71

Uroboros #

EZ63-56-90IR-71

350-751 EZ50-00-90IR-661

Granite Ripple Black Irid

350-752

Uroboros #

EZ51-56-90IR-661

Fibroid Texture Black Irid

350-753

Uroboros #

EZ70-56-90IR-661

Radium Texture Black Irid

350-754

Uroboros #

EZ80-56-90IR-661

Glass pendant by MariaElena Baca

98

riogrande.com

800.545.6566


90 COE DICHROIC SHEET Dichroic

4" x 4"

1. 8 m m S h e e t

Cyan/Copper Dichroic Thin on Black

S o l d i n d i v i d u ally

Uroboros #

No two sheets of dichroic glass are the same! Dichroic sheet features either a black or clear base. Depending on the base color, the resulting color effects will vary. 1-2 $23.95 Color Name

Color Name

3+

19.95

1-2 $23.95 3+ 19.95

350-812 DCC-61-56-90

350-807

Uroboros #

DRB1-71-00-90

Cyan/ Dark Dark Red Thin on Clear

350-813

Uroboros #

DCZ-61-00-90

350-808

Uroboros #

DRB1-71-56-90

Rainbow on Clear Radium

350-809

Uroboros #

DRB1-81-00-90

Rainbow on Black Radium

350-810

Uroboros #

DRB1-81-56-90

Green/ Magenta Blue Aurora Borealis Dichroic Thin on Black Uroboros #

Cyan/ Dark Dark Red Dichroic Thin on Black Uroboros #

Rainbow on Black Fibroid

Green/ Magenta Blue Aurora Borealis Dichroic Thin on Clear Uroboros #

All colors of 4" x 4" dichroic sheet glass are combineable for your best price break.

Rainbow on Clear Fibroid

Color Name

Pink/Teal Dichroic Thin on Clear Uroboros #

Pink/Teal Dichroic Thin on Black Uroboros #

Green/ Magenta Dichroic Thin on Clear Uroboros #

Corkscrews Dichroic Thin on Clear 350-814

Uroboros #

1-2 $23.95 3+ 19.95

350-821 DPGMAB-61-00-90

350-822 DPGMAB-61-56-90

350-823 DPC-61-00-90

DCZ-61-56-90

350-815 DPT-61-00-90

350-816 DPT-61-56-90

Corkscrews Dichroic Thin on Black Uroboros #

Pixie Stix Dichroic Thin on Clear Uroboros #

Pixie Stix Dichroic Thin on Black 350-817

Uroboros #

350-824 DPC-61-56-90

350-825 DPPS-61-00-90

350-826 DPPS-61-56-90

DG DGM-61-00-90

Cyan/Copper Dichroic Thin on Clear Uroboros #

350-811 DCC-61-00-90

Green/ Magenta Dichroic Thin on Black Uroboros #

“Glass has a certain magic that draws you in and gets you hooked.” —MariaElena Baca

Red/Silver Dichroic Thin on Clear Uroboros #

Red/Silver Dichroic Thin on Black Uroboros #

Reptilian Dichroic Thin on Clear 350-818

Uroboros #

350-827 DPR-61-00-90

DGM-61-56-90

350-819 DRS-61-00-90

350-820 DRS-61-56-90

Reptilian Dichroic Thin on Black Uroboros #

Cyan/Dark Red Rainbow Dichroic Thin on Clear Uroboros #

Cyan/Dark Red Rainbow Dichroic Thin on Black Uroboros #

350-828 DPR-61-56-90

350-829 DPCZRA-61-00-90

350-830 DPCZRA-61-56-90

99


96 COE ROD ASSORTMENTS

“Color isn’t just visual— it’s a connection.” —Mary Smith

by Mary Smith, 2007 Saul Bell Design Award Winner, Beads

The molten state is mesmerizing. Glass can be a challenging medium, but is breathtakingly beautiful. When somebody looks at one of my pieces, I want them to catch their breath on the color, exhale, catch their breath again when they realize it is made out of glass, exhale, catch their breath again after they touch it.

Uroboros Rods

®

—Mary Smith

Important: The glass on pages 100–115 has a COE of 96. Never mix glass with varying COEs; doing so will result in eventual breakage of your finished glass pieces.

96 COE 6.35 mm approx.

Glass rods are a basic ingredient in any glass jewelry artist’s studio! With a COE of 96, these glass rods from Uroboros® are soft enough to require only moderate heat for flameworking beads. They’re also ideal for creating straight lines in fusing and casting. Uroboros® glass rods are specially annealed to minimize popping and feature a bright, stable color. Available in transparent, opaque (opalescent) and dichroic colors (see pages 102 and 103 for individual colors). UROBOROS SYSTEM 96® GLASS ROD STARTER ASSORTMENTS These inclusive starter assortments each contain 32 glass rods. Rods are 10"L x ¼" dia. Please Note: Contents of color assortments are chosen at random; colors may vary. Color A mix of transparent and opalescent colors makes a great base or accent. Use opals as base colors for more striking color statements. Description Color rod starter kit

Uroboros # RMG-10

Order # 340-001

each $39.95

Clear Add a transparent look to your designs. Clear glass lends a perception of depth to a piece when layered on base colors. Description Clear rod starter kit

100

Uroboros # RT-070-96

Order # 340-002

each $25.95

riogrande.com

800.545.6566


96 COE NOODLES & STRINGERS Uroboros Noodles

®

96 COE 4.76 mm approx.

These flat, fettuccine-like glass noodles are indispensible. Snap or nip them with a glass cutter (see page 130) to your desired length, then use them as straight lines in your casting and fusing designs or bend them in a flame to create unique shapes. Noodles are also great for creating embellishments on beads. UROBOROS® SYSTEM 96® GLASS NOODLE MARDI GRAS ASSORTMENT This transparent Mardi Gras assortment includes 5 oz. (~ 15) of noodles in a selection of bright colors. Noodles are 17"L x 3⁄16"W. Please Note: Contents are chosen at random; colors may vary. Description Mardi Gras noodle assortment

Uroboros # N-M-96

Order # 340-129

each $14.95

Watch noodles and stringers carefully when working them with a torch. Their thin structure means they will reach liquidity much faster than glass rods.

“Glass has the ability to create luminescent, three-dimensional shapes in a broad color palette.” —Chelsea Stone

“Glass Rings” by Chelsea Stone

Uroboros® 96 COE Stringers

1.1 mm approx.

These delicate transparent strands of color allow you to create finer, more intricate designs. Use them straight in fusing and casting work or shape them in a flame or apply to beads. If you’ll be using stringers in torch work, be careful to not keep them in the flame for long—stringers reach their liquid state very quickly. UROBOROS® SYSTEM 96® GLASS MARDI GRAS STRINGER ASSORTMENT The Mardi Gras assortment includes 5 oz. (~ 130) of stringers in a selection of bright, festive colors. Stringers are 17"L x 1.1mm dia. Please Note: Contents are chosen at random; colors may vary. Description Mardi Gras stringer assortment

Uroboros # S-M-96

Order # 340-188

each $14.95

101


96 COE RODS, NOODLES & STRINGERS

Opaque (or “Opal”)

“You get to use a torch!”

colors are great bases for glass designs; use transparent colors as overlays and accent colors over opal colors. Rods, noodles and stringers are great for fusing, casting and flamework. 10"L rods are sold in 4-oz. packages; 17"L noodles and stringers are sold in 5-oz. packages (approximately 15 noodles or 130 stringers). To re-order, simply find the Uroboros number below that corresponds to your desired color.

—Chelsea Stone When you have reached the last few inches of a glass rod, tack it to a fresh piece by fusing the two together in the torch flame. This gives you plenty of room to use the rest of the rod. Rods 4 oz. (8 pcs.)

Opaque Glass

Stringers

1-2 3+

$10.95 8.95

Cloud Opal

340-003

Uroboros #

RO-070-96

Cherry Red Semi-Opal

Rods 4 oz. (8 pcs.)

1-2 3+ —

$14.95 11.95 —

1-2 Color Name

3+

1-2

$14.95

8.95

3+

11.95

Alpine Blue Opal

340-017

Uroboros #

RO-2382-96

Mauve Opal Uroboros #

340-109

340-168

N-2402-96

S-2402-96

340-160

Lilac Opal

340-019

N-151-96

S-151-96

Uroboros #

RO-2404-96

Yellow Semi-Opal

340-005

Uroboros #

RO-1611-96

Orange Semi-Opal

340-006

340-101

340-161

Yellow Opal

Uroboros #

RO-1711-96

N-171-96

S-171-96

Uroboros #

White Opal

340-007

340-102

340-162

Uroboros #

RO-200-96

N-200-96

S-200-96

Crystal Opal

340-008

Uroboros #

RO-209-96

Almond Opal

340-009

Dark Green Opal Uroboros #

Pastel Green Opal

340-020

340-110

340-169

RO-2502-96

N-2502-96

S-2502-96

340-021

340-111

340-170

RO-2602-96

N-2602-96

S-2602-96

Sunflower Opal

340-022

Uroboros #

RO-2672-96

Orange Opal Uroboros #

340-163

Champagne Opal

340-023

340-112

340-171

RO-2702-96

N-2702-96

S-2702-96

340-024

RO-2911-96

RO-2107-96

N-2107-96

S-2107-96

340-010

Marigold Opal

340-025

340-113

340-172

RO-2206-96

Uroboros #

RO-355-96

N-355-96

S-355-96

340-011

Riviera Blue Opal

340-026

Uroboros #

RO-421-96

RO-2222-96

Turquoise Green

340-012

Uroboros #

RO-2232-96

Uroboros #

Red Opal Uroboros #

Uroboros #

Uroboros #

Amazon Green Opal

340-018

340-100

Uroboros #

RO-2402-96

340-004

340-103

Stringers

$10.95

RO-1511-96

Uroboros #

Noodles

5 oz. (~ 15 pcs.) 5 oz. (~ 130 pcs.)

All colors of rods, noodles, and stringers are combineable for your best price break.

“Glass Bead” by Chelsea Stone

5 oz. (~ 15 pcs.) 5 oz. (~ 130 pcs.)

All colors of rods, noodles, and stringers are combineable for your best price break.

Color Name

102

Noodles



Plum Opal

340-027

Uroboros #

RO-520-96

340-013

340-105

340-164

Black Opal

340-028

340-114

340-173

RO-2264-96

N-2264-96

S-2264-96

Uroboros #

RO-56-96

N-56-96

S-56-96

340-115

340-174

N-602-96

S-602-96

340-116

340-175

N-755-96

S-755-96

340-117

340-176

N-782-96

S-782-96

Medium Blue Opal

340-014

340-106

340-165

Flame Opal

Uroboros #

RO-2302-96

N-2302-96

S-2302-96

Uroboros #

Cobalt Blue Opal

340-015

340-107

340-166

Fern Green Opal

Uroboros #

RO-2306-96

N-2306-96

S-2306-96

Uroboros #

Turquoise Blue Opal

340-016

340-108

340-167

Olive Green Opal

Uroboros #

RO-2334-96

N-2334-96

S-2334-96

Uroboros #

riogrande.com

800.545.6566


96 COE RODS, NOODLES & STRINGERS 



Rods 4 oz. (8 pcs.)

Tra n s p a re n t Glass

Noodles

Rods 4 oz. (8 pcs.)

Stringers

Color Name

3+

$10.95

1-2

$14.95

8.95

3+

11.95

Clear

340-029

340-118

340-177

Uroboros #

RT-00-96

N-00-96

S-00-96

Urobium Pink

340-030

Uroboros #

RT-015-96

Pale Amber

340-031

Uroboros #

RT-1102-96

1-2

340-032

340-119

340-178

RT-1108-96

N-1108-96

S-1108-96

Dark Amber

340-033

340-120

340-179

Uroboros #

RT-111-96

N-111-96

S-111-96

340-034 RT-121-96

340-035

340-121

340-180

Uroboros #

RT-125-96

N-125-96

S-125-96

Dark Blue

340-036

340-122

340-181

Uroboros #

RT-136-96

N-136-96

S-136-96

Deep Purple

340-037

340-123

340-182

Uroboros #

RT-146-96

N-146-96

S-146-96

Pale Gray

340-038 RT-1808-96

Neon Orchid

340-039

Uroboros #

RT-476-96

Bronze

340-040

Uroboros #

RT-5181-96

$10.95

1-2

$14.95

8.95

3+

11.95

Moss Green

340-041

340-124

340-183

Uroboros #

RT-5262-96

N-5262-96

S-5262-96

Sea Green

340-042

340-125

340-184

Uroboros #

RT-5281-96

N-5281-96

S-5281-96

Olive Green

340-043

340-126

340-185

Uroboros #

RT-5284-96

N-5284-96

S-5284-96

Sky Blue

340-044

Uroboros #

RT-5331-96

Deep Aqua

340-045

340-127

340-186

Uroboros #

RT-5333-96

N-5333-96

S-5333-96

Violet

340-046

Uroboros #

RT-5342-96

Dark Green

Uroboros #

3+

Uroboros #

Uroboros #

Color Name

Medium Amber

Light Green

Stringers

All colors of rods, noodles, and stringers are combineable for your best price break.

5 oz. (~ 15 pcs.) 5 oz. (~ 130 pcs.)

All colors of rods, noodles, and stringers are combineable for your best price break.

1-2

Noodles

5 oz. (~ 15 pcs.) 5 oz. (~ 130 pcs.)

Steel Blue

340-047

Uroboros #

RT-5384-96

Navy Blue

340-048

Uroboros #

RT-5386-96

Grape

340-049

340-128

340-187

Uroboros #

RT-5432-96

N-5432-96

S-5432-96

Pink Champagne

340-050

Uroboros #

RT-5911-96

— Citron

340-051

Uroboros #

RT-707-96

— Mint Green

340-052

Uroboros #

RT-774-96

— Straw

340-053

Uroboros #

RT-906-96

Dichroic Glass UROBOROS® SYSTEM 96® DICHROIC NOODLE ASSORTMENTS Dichroic glass offers intense, reflected rainbow colors. An ultra-thin layer of quartz and a metallic coating on dichroic glass are applied with electron beams in a vacuum chamber to create a vibrant look. Available with a black or clear base. Please Note: Contents are chosen at random; colors may vary. 3-Piece Assortments; 5"L Description Black base Clear base

Uroboros # N-56-96DM N-00-96DM

Order # 340-850 340-851

each $11.95 11.95

Order # 340-852 340-853

each $89.00 89.00

Black-base noodles

12-Piece Assortments; 17"L Description Black base Clear base

Uroboros # N-56-96D N-00-96D

Clear-base noodles

103


96 COE FRIT

“Glass is dramatic!” —Ginger Kelley

Frit Assortments Frit assortments contain 4-oz. jars of frit in a variety popular colors and grades. Kits contain a selection of opaque, transparent, Dual-Tone and iridescent colors. Please Note: Assortment contents are chosen at random; colors and grades of contents may vary.

Bracelets by Ginger Kelly

Description Studio kit; 50 jars Starter kit; 12 jars

Uroboros # FSK-96 FSKM-96

Order # 340-300 340-299

each $189.00 56.00

Transparent Frit Uroboros® 96 COE Frit Vibrant, versatile crushed glass, frit is a staple in glass designs. Available in two grades—fine and medium—to create any pattern or look. Use fine frit to transition between colors or to blend colors together to create a new color. It’s also great as a filler between larger pieces of frit, and is ideal for creating straight lines. Medium frit is used for creating speckled effects and is often used when casting in molds since it leaves fewer air bubbles than other grades of frit. Transparent frit is great for overlay work and as accents on your designs; opal (opaque) frit (page 106) provides bold, solid colors, making it an effective color base. Frit is available in a wide variety of colors.

Fine

Medium

Examples above are enlarged to show detail.

104

8½  - o z . ja r s

Fine

Medium

All colors of transparent and opalescent frit are combineable for your best price break.

1-2 3+

Color Name

$6.95 5.70

Clear

340-400

340-488

Uroboros #

F2-00-96

F3-00-96

Water Clear

340-401

340-489

Uroboros #

F2-01-96

F3-01-96

Sapphire Blue

340-403

340-491

Uroboros #

F2-404-96

F3-404-96

Mint Green

340-405

340-493

Uroboros #

F2-774-96

F3-774-96

Citron

340-406

340-494

Uroboros #

F2-707-96

F3-707-96

Straw

340-407

340-495

Uroboros #

F2-906-96

F3-906-96

Champagne

340-408

340-496

Uroboros #

F2-5911-96

F3-5911-96

Pale Amber

340-409

340-497

Uroboros #

F2-1102-96

F3-1102-96

Medium Amber

340-410

340-498

Uroboros #

F2-1108-96

F3-1108-96

Dark Amber

340-411

340-499

Uroboros #

F2-111-96

F3-111-96

Bronze

340-412

340-500

Uroboros #

F2-5181-96

F3-5181-96

riogrande.com

800.545.6566


96 COE FRIT Important: Always wear breathing protection when working with frit—we recommend item #201-654. See page 149 for a full selection of masks. Fine

Medium

All colors of transparent and opalescent frit are combineable for your best price break.

1-2 3+

Color Name

Transparent Frit 8 ½ - o z . j ar s

Fine

Medium

All colors of transparent and opalescent frit are combineable for your best price break.

1-2 3+

Color Name

$6.95 5.70

Tangerine

340-414

340-502

Uroboros #

F2-1702-96

F3-1702-96

Dark Purple

340-416

340-504

Uroboros #

F2-146-96

F3-146-96

Violet

340-418

340-506

Uroboros #

F2-5342-96

F3-5342-96

Light Purple

340-419

340-507

Uroboros #

F2-142-96

F3-142-96

Pale Purple

340-420

340-508

Uroboros #

F2-1408-96

F3-1408-96

Grape

340-424

340-512

Uroboros #

F2-5432-96

F3-5432-96

Pale Blue

340-425

340-513

Uroboros #

F2-1308-96

F3-1308-96

Hunter Green

340-434

340-522

Uroboros #

F2-5238-96

F3-5238-96

Dark Green

340-435

340-523

Uroboros #

F2-125-96

F3-125-96

Light Green

340-436

340-524

Uroboros #

F2-121-96

F3-121-96

Sea Green

340-437

340-525

Uroboros #

F2-5281-96

F3-5281-96

Sky Blue

340-438

340-526

Uroboros #

F2-5331-96

F3-5331-96

Deep Aqua

340-439

340-527

Uroboros #

F2-1308-96

F3-1308-96

Lime

340-440

340-528

Uroboros #

F2-7312-96

F3-7312-96

Teal Green

340-441

340-529

Uroboros #

F2-1308-96

F3-1308-96

1-2 3+

Color Name

Light Blue

340-426

340-514

Uroboros #

F2-132-96

F3-132-96

Dark Blue

340-425

340-513

Uroboros #

F2-1308-96

F3-1308-96

Cobalt Blue

340-428

340-516

Uroboros #

F2-424-96

F3-424-96

Steel Blue

340-429

340-517

Uroboros #

F2-5384-96

F3-5384-96

Navy Blue

340-430

340-518

Uroboros #

F2-538696

F3-5386-96

$6.95 5.70

$8.95 7.70

Neon Orchid

340-404

340-492

Uroboros #

F2-476-96

F3-476-96

Yellow

340-413

340-501

Uroboros #

F2-161-96

F3-161-96

Orange

340-416

340-503

Uroboros #

F2-171-96

F3-171-96

Cherry Red

340-421

340-509

Uroboros #

F2-151-96

F3-151-96

340-422

340-510

F2-612-96

F3-612-96

Light Cherry

340-423

340-511

Uroboros #

F2-611-96

F3-611-96

Grenadine Uroboros #

Pale Gray

340-431

340-519

Uroboros #

F2-1808-96

F3-1808-96

Moss Green

340-432

340-520

Urobium Pink

340-402

340-490

F2-5262--96

F3-5262--96

Uroboros #

F2-6120-96

F3-6120-96

Olive Green

340-433

340-521

Turns Pink

340-417

340-505

Uroboros #

F2-5284-96

F3-5284-96

Uroboros #

F2-103-96

F3-103-96

Uroboros #

1-2 3+

Color Name

$11.95 9.95

105


96 COE FRIT

Fine

Medium

All colors of transparent and opalescent frit are combineable for your best price break.

Opal Frit 8½ -oz. j a r s The color of fired frit may differ from its pre-fired color based on the thickness of the frit applied, the surface over which it is applied and the color itself—blues and greens tend to change color less during firing. Fine

Medium

All colors of transparent and opalescent frit are combineable for your best price break.

1-2 3+

Color Name

106

1-2 3+

Color Name

$6.95 5.70

Sunflower Opal

340-442

340-530

Uroboros #

F2-2672-96

F3-2672-96

Marigold Opal

340-443

340-531

Uroboros #

F2-355-96

F3-355-96

Chestnut Opal

340-444

340-532

Uroboros #

F2-2114-96

F3-2114-96

Riviera Opal

340-448

340-536

Uroboros #

F2-421-96

F3-421-96

Mariner Opal

340-449

340-537

Uroboros #

F2-2335-96

F3-2335-96

Alpine Opal

340-450

340-538

Uroboros #

F2-2382-96

F3-2382-96

Lilac Opal

340-452

340-540

Uroboros #

F2-2404-96

F3-2404-96

Plum Opal

340-453

340-541

Uroboros #

F2-520-96

F3-520-96

Mauve Opal

340-454

340-542

Uroboros #

F2-2402-96

F3-2402-96

Cobalt Opal

340-456

340-544

Uroboros #

F2-2306-96

F3-2306-96

Medium Blue Opal

340-457

340-545

Uroboros #

F2-2302-96

F3-2302-96

Turquoise Blue Opal

340-458

340-546

Uroboros #

F2-2334-96

F3-2334-96

$6.95 5.70

Pastel Green Opal

340-462

340-550

Uroboros #

F2-2222-96

F3-2222-96

Fern Green Opal

340-463

340-551

Uroboros #

F2-755-96

F3-755-96

Ivory Opal

340-465

340-553

Uroboros #

F2-209-96

F3-209-96

Crystal Opal

340-464

340-552

Uroboros #

F2-2101-96

F3-2101-96

White Opal

340-466

340-554

Uroboros #

F2-200-96

F3-200-96

Black Opal

340-467

340-555

Uroboros #

F2-56-96

F3-56-96

Cloud Opal

340-468

340-556

Uroboros #

F2-2181-96

F3-2181-96

Stone Opal

340-469

340-557

Uroboros #

F2-2101-96

F3-2101-96

Olive Opal

340-470

340-558

Uroboros #

F2-782-96

F3-782-96

Dark Green Opal

340-471

340-559

Uroboros #

F2-2206-96

F3-2206-96

Khaki Opal

340-472

340-560

Uroboros #

F2-2161-96

F3-2161-96

Champagne Opal

340-473

340-561

Uroboros #

F2-2911-96

F3-2911-96

Almond Opal

340-474

340-562

Uroboros #

F2-2107-96

F3-2107-96

1-2 3+

Color Name

$8.95 7.70

Orange Opal

340-445

340-533

Uroboros #

F2-2702-96

F3-2702-96

Flame Opal

340-446

340-534

Uroboros #

F2-602-96

F3-602-96

Red Opal

340-447

340-535

Uroboros #

F2-6120-96

F3-6120-96

Turquoise Green Opal

340-459

340-547

Uroboros #

F2-2232-96

F3-2232-96

Yellow Opal

340-460

340-548

Grape Opal

340-451

340-539

Uroboros #

F2-2602-96

F3-2602-96

Uroboros #

F2-6120-96

F3-6120-96

1-2 3+

Color Name

$11.95 9.95

Amazon Opal

340-461

340-549

Opal

340-455

340-543

Uroboros #

F2-2264-96

F3-2264-96

Uroboros #

F2-2902-96

F3-2902-96

riogrande.com

800.545.6566


96 COE SPECIALTY FRIT Iridescent Frit 8½-oz. jars

D u a l - To n e Frit

Dual-tone frit is a mixture of two colors of frit, producing a unique blend that adds vibrance to your designs, whether you’re casting, fusing or flameworking. Fine

8 ½ - o z . j ar s

Medium

All colors of Dual-Tone frit are combineable for your best price break.

1-2 3+

Color Name

$6.95 5.70

Grenadine & Clear

340-476

340-572

Uroboros #

F2-6120-96

F3-6120-96

Grenadine & White

340-477

340-573

Uroboros #

F2-6125-96

F3-6125-96

Chocolate & Clear

340-478

340-574

Uroboros #

F2-5000-96

F3-5000-96

Chocolate & White Uroboros #

340-479

1-2 $9.95 3+ 7.95

Color Name

All colors of iridescent frit are combineable for your best price break.

Clear Iridescent

340-564

340-660

Uroboros #

F3-00-96

F5-00-96

Pink Iridescent

340-565

340-661

Uroboros #

F3-015-96

F5-015-96

Aqua Iridescent

340-566

340-662

Uroboros #

F3-402-96

F5-402-96

Orchid Iridescent

340-567

340-663

Uroboros #

F3-476-96

F5-476-96

Black Iridescent

340-563

340-659

Graphite Paddle (page 126)

Uroboros #

F3-476-96

F5-476-96

701-401

Citron Iridescent

340-569

340-665

Uroboros #

F3-707-96

F5-707-96

$15.95

340-575

F2-5005-96

F3-5005-96

Orange & Clear

340-480

340-576

Uroboros #

F2-2700-96

F3-2700-96

Orange & White

340-481

340-577

Uroboros #

F2-2705-96

F3-2705-96

Black & Clear

340-482

340-578

Uroboros #

F2-5600-96

F3-5600-96

Black & White

340-483

340-579

Uroboros #

F2-5605-96

F3-5605-96

Cobalt & Clear

340-484

340-580

Uroboros #

F2-4245-96

F3-4245-96

Cobalt & White

340-485

340-581

Uroboros #

F2-4240-96

F3-4240-96

Fern & Clear

340-486

340-582

Uroboros #

F2-7550-96

F3-7550-96

Fern & White

340-487

340-583

Uroboros #

F2-7555-96

F3-7555-96

1-2 3+

Color Name

Iridescent frit reveals a full spectrum of colors with a higher reflectivity than that of glass itself. Available in medium and coarse grades and eight bright colors. Medium Coarse

$8.95 7.70

Cherry Blossom

340-475

340-571

Uroboros #

F2-29-96

F3-29-96

Mint Green Iridescent

340-568

340-664

Uroboros #

F3-774-96

F5-774-96

Straw Iridescent

340-570

340-666

Uroboros #

F3-906-96

F5-906-96

Dichroic Frit

DICHROIC FRIT Medium Dichroic glass offers intense, reflected rainbow colors. An ultra-thin layer of quartz and a metallic coating are applied to glass with electron beams in a vacuum chamber to reate a vibrant look. Description Clear dichroic frit Black dichroic frit

Uroboros # DF5-00-96 DF5-56-96

Sold in 2-oz. bottles Order # each 340-854 $39.95 340-855 39.95

107


96 COE GLASS SHEET Toyo Pistol-Grip Glass Cutter (page 130) 111-681

$29.95

“Glass-cutting is not a strength contest—just scritch it.” —Mary Datwyler

A

U9 r6o b C oOr Eo sG® l 9a 6s sC O E G l ae ses t SAhs es e Sh o tr t m e n t s Assortments Sheet glass is one of the most versatile forms of glass—cut it

Sheet glass is one of the most versatile forms of glass—cut it into any shape, break it, fuse it or drape it. Thin glass (1.8mm) allows into any shape, break it, fuse it or drape it. Thin glass (1.8mm) allows you to stack sheets for varying effects while keeping the overall you to stack sheets for3 varying effects while keeping the overall weight low. Smaller 2 /4" x 4" sheet assortments contain more colors weight low. Smaller 2¾" x 4" sheet assortments contain more colors at an economical price. Please Note: Assortment contents are at an economical price. Please Note: Assortment contents are chosen at random; colors and styles of contents may vary. chosen at random; colors and styles of contents may vary.

B

96 COE Sheet Glass 2¾" x 4" 1.8MM SHEET ASSORTMENT UROBOROS® SYSTEM 96®of1.8MM SHEET ASSORTMENT This popular assortment transparent and opalescent colors is This popular of transparent opalescent colors20 is a a perfect wayassortment to start creating with thinand sheet glass. Includes perfect sheets. way to start creating with thin sheet glass. Includes 20 sheets. Description Description A. A. Thin Thinsheet sheetassortment assortment

Uroboros # #Order # Order # Uroboros EZA1-96 EZA1-96 340-700 340-700

each each $29.95 $29.95

UROBOROS® SYSTEM 96® 3MM SHEET ASSORTMENT 3MM SHEET ASSORTMENT The sheet glass in this random assortment of transparent and The sheet glass in this random assortment of transparent and opalescent colors is forgiving to cut, stable at re-melt and delivers opalescent colors is forgiving to cut, stable at re-melt and delivers consistent, dependable results. Includes 10 sheets. consistent, dependable results. Includes 10 3mm-thick sheets. C

Description Description B. 3mm sheet assortment B. 3mm sheet assortment

Uroboros # Order # Uroboros # Order # 340-702 EZA3-96 340-702 EZA3-96

each each $19.95 $15.95

UROBOROS® SYSTEM 96® 1.8MM HOT-COLOR SHEET 1.8MM HOT-COLOR SHEET ASSORTMENT ASSORTMENT Thisassortment assortmentof ofhot hotand andwarm warmcolors colorsadd addbright, bright,interesting interestingcolor color This to all your designs. Includes 10 sheets. to all your designs. Includes 10 sheets. Description Description C. Hot-color sheet assortment C. Hot-color sheet assortment

Uroboros # Order # Uroboros # Order # 340-703 EZA4-96 340-703 EZA4-96

each each $15.95 $19.95

1.8MM IRIDESCENT UROBOROS® SYSTEMSHEET 96® 1.ASSORTMENT 8MM IRIDESCENT SHEET This assortment of iridescent colors adds a flare of unique patterns ASSORTMENT andassortment color to your jewelry designs. 3mm-thick This ofglass iridescent colors addsIncludes a flare of10 unique patterns sheets. and color to your glass jewelry designs. Includes 10 sheets. D

108

Description Description D. Iridescent Iridescentsheet sheetassortment assortment D.

Uroboros Uroboros # #Order # Order # EZA5-96 340-704 340-704 EZA5-96

riogrande.com

each each $15.95 $19.95

800.545.6566


96 COE GLASS SHEET

SCORING Cutting glass can be intimidating, since both the tool and the glass itself present a risk of injury. Start out by selecting your cutter—we recommend the Toyo pistol-grip glass cutter on the facing page. Put just a few drops of oil into the handle (do not fill it completely). When you are preparing to make a cut, hold the cutter with the blade away from you. Slowly push the cutter away from you while pressing into the glass. Note: You don’t need to press hard, just enough to score the surface. A

96 COE Sheet Glass 6" x 6" Use larger sheets of glass for your bigger fusing projects, such as small bowls. UROBOROS® SYSTEM 96® 1.8MM SHEET ASSORTMENT This assortment of transparent and opalescent colors gives you a great start to creating with thin sheet glass. Thin glass is especially suited to overlay work and reduces the weight of your pieces while adding an element of delicacy. Includes 20 sheets. Description A. Thin sheet assortment

B

Uroboros # EZA2-96

Order # 340-701

each $89.95

UROBOROS® SYSTEM 96® 3MM TRANSPARENT SHEET ASSORTMENT This sheet glass in this assortment is bright, easy to cut, stable at re-melt and delivers consistent dependable results. Layer on top of opal sheets to add elements of depth and refraction to your glass designs. Includes 20 sheets. B.

Description Uroboros # 3mm transparent assortment EZA10-96

Order # 340-705

each $89.95

UROBOROS® SYSTEM 96® 3MM OPAL SHEET ASSORTMENT The opaque colors in this assortment are pure expressions of visible color. Combine with transparent colors to create an amazing depth and refraction in your glass work. Includes 20 sheets Description C. 3mm opal assortment

C

Order # 340-706

each $89.95

UROBOROS® SYSTEM 96® 1.8MM BLACK & WHITE SHEET ASSORTMENTS This sheet glass is a staple; it’s bright, easy to cut and delivers consistent dependable results. Includes 10 sheets. Description D. Clear thin sheet E. Black thin sheet

Never stack sheet glass flat—glass, particularly dichroic glass, will scratch easily in this position. Instead, stack sheets upright like books on a shelf.

Uroboros # EZA11-96

Uroboros # EZ61-00-96-66 EZ61-56-96-66

Order # 340-717 340-720

each $34.95 39.95

You’ll use these colors in every piece! Black is a perfect base; use clear glass as an overlay to add depth.

D

E

109


96 COE GLASS SHEET 1.8mm

6" x 6"

Sheet Color Name

Tra n s p a ren t Sol d indiv idual l y

1-2 $8.95 3+ 7.60

Color Name

All colors of 6" x 6" sheet glass are combineable for your best price break.

Clear Fibroid Uroboros #

Aqua Uroboros #

Neon Orchid Uroboros #

Uroboros #

340-724 EZ61-402-96-66

340-742

Urobium Pink

340-743

EZ61-476-96-66

Uroboros #

EZ61-015-96-66

1.8mm

Sheet

Op a q ue Sol d indiv idual l y Color Name

1-2 $8.95 3+ 7.60

340-734

Dark Blue Opal

340-729

Uroboros #

EZ61-2306-96-66

Amazon Green Uroboros #

Uroboros #

340-738 EZ61-2264-96-66

Fern Green Opal Uroboros #

Red Opal Uroboros #

Sheet

340-741 EZ61-774-96-66

6" x 6 "

Color Name

1-2 $8.95 3+ 7.60

Color Name Aqua Irid Uroboros #

All colors of 6" x 6" sheet glass are combineable for your best price break.

Uroboros #

Warm Yellow Uroboros #

Dark Green Uroboros #

Light Cherry Red Uroboros #

110

340-740 EZ61-755-96-66

340-730 EZ61-2502-96-66

340-737

I r i d e s c e nt Sol d indiv idual l y

Cobalt Blue

340-739 EZ61-2264-96-66

EZ61-7312-96-66

1.8mm

Uroboros #

Apple Jade Opal

1-2 $8.95 3+ 7.60

340-728 EZ61-1308-96-66

EZ61-1108-96-66

Mint Green

Color Name

All colors of 6" x 6" sheet glass are combineable for your best price break.

Uroboros #

Uroboros #

1-2 $8.95 3+ 7.60

340-719

Medium Amber

Lime Green

Color Name

EZ71-00-96-66

6" x 6 " Pale Blue

1-2 $8.95 3+ 7.60

340-726 EZ61-424-96-66

340-733 EZ61-358-96-66

340-735 EZ61-700-96-66

340-731 EZ61-611-96-66

Clear Irid Uroboros #

Black Irid Uroboros #

Black Fibroid Irid Uroboros #

White Opal Irid Uroboros #

340-718 EZ61-00-96-IR66

340-721 EZ61-56-96-IR66

340-722 EZ71-56-96-IR66

Cobalt Irid Blue Uroboros #

Light Cherry Red Irid Uroboros #

Dark Green Irid Uroboros #

1-2 $8.95 3+ 7.60

340-725 EZ61-402-96IR66

340-727 EZ61-424-96IR66

340-732 EZ61-611-96-66

340-736 EZ61-700-96IR66

340-723 EZ61-05-96-IR66

riogrande.com

800.545.6566


96 COE GLASS SHEET Breaking Pliers (page 131) 111-633

$12.50

3mm

Sheet

Tra n spare n t S old i n d i vi d u a l l y

6" x 6"

Color Name

1-2 3+

$8.95 7.60

Clear Machine Rolled

340-744

Uroboros #

EZ63-00-96-66

BREAKING If you’ve scored your glass sheet properly (see page 109 for tips), it will be relatively simple to break the glass along the score. Techniques for safely completing the break include pulling the glass apart, pushing the glass upward along the score, or using pliers and other tools to accomplish a combination of the two. One of the easiest tools to use is a grozier plier. Grozier pliers feature one flat side and one curved side, forcing glass to bend and fracture along your score with little effort. The breaking pliers, shown here, are best suited to pulling glass apart—a method most often used when breaking glass along a curved score. See a full selection of breaking tools starting on page 131.

3mm

Sheet

Irid e s c e nt Sol d i ndi v i du ally

6" x 6"

Color Name

1-2 3+

$8.95 7.60

All colors of 6" x 6" sheet glass are combineable for your best price break.

Clear Radium Irid Uroboros #

340-748 EZ80-00-96-66

Clear Irid Uroboros #

340-745 EZ60-00-96-IR66

3mm

Sheet

Opaq ue S o l d i n d i vi d u a l l y

6" x 6"

Color Name

1-2 3+

$8.95 7.60

All colors of 6" x 6" sheet glass are combineable for your best price break.

White Opal Uroboros #

Color Name Black Machine Rolled

Uroboros #

EZ60-2302-96-66

Riviera Blue Opal

340-760

Uroboros #

EZ60-421-96-66

Uroboros #

340-761

Yellow Opal

1-2 3+

Red Opal

340-758 EZ60-2602-96-66

Uroboros #

Plum Opal

340-762

Uroboros #

EZ60-520-96-66

Marigold Opal Uroboros #

Black Irid Uroboros #

340-755 EZ60-2502-96-66

Uroboros #

Orange Opal

340-746 EZ60-00-96GIR66

340-747 EZ60-00-96-SIR66

$8.95 7.60

Uroboros #

EZ60-2232-96-66

Uroboros #

Clear Silver Irid

EZ60-00-96-IR66

340-759

Uroboros #

340-749

Uroboros #

Medium Blue Opal

Clear Gold Irid

EZ63-56-96-66

340-754

Color Name

Turquoise Green Opal

1-2 $8.95 3+ 7.60

Black Gold Irid Uroboros #

340-756 EZ60-2702-96-66

Black Silver Irid Uroboros #

340-757 EZ60-355-96-66

Black Radium Irid Uroboros #

340-750 EZ60-56-96-IR66

340-751 EZ60-56-96GIR66

340-752 EZ60-56-96-SIR66

340-753 EZ80-56-96-IR66

111


96 COE SPECIALTY SHEET Uroboros速 96 COE Specialty Sheet Specially designed glass sheet is an easy way to add a one-of-a-kind look to all your pieces. Streaky designs feature random swirls of color, while Streamer and Mardi Gras designs feature chunks of bright color.

3mm

Sheet

S o l d i n di v i d u a lly

6" x 6"

Color Name

Wire-wrapped glass pendant by MariaElena Baca

1-2 $8.95 3+ 7.60

All colors of 6" x 6" specialty sheet glass are combineable for your best price break.

Streaky Red on White Uroboros #

Color Name

1-2 $8.95 3+ 7.60

340-769

Streaky Orange on White

340-774

EZ60-6125-96-66

Uroboros #

EZ60-2705-96-66

Color Name Streaky Red on Red Uroboros #

Streaky Blue on White Uroboros #

340-770

Streaky Root Beer on White

340-775

EZ60-625-96-66

Uroboros #

EZ60-93-96-66

Streaky Dark Green on White

340-771

Uroboros #

EZ60-4245-96-66

Streaky Black on White

340-772

Uroboros #

EZ60-5605-96-66

Fractured Streamer Green, Purple & Blue Uroboros #

Streaky Chocolate on White

340-773

Uroboros #

EZ60-5005-96-66

Streamer Bits on Black

Dichroic

Uroboros #

Mardi Gras Black Uroboros #

Mardi Gras Red Opal 340-776

Uroboros #

1-2 $8.95 3+ 7.60

340-764 EZ13-56-96-66

340-765 EZ13-2502-96-66

EZ60-77-96-66

Mardi Gras White Opal Uroboros #

340-766 EZ13-200-96-66

340-763 EZ11-51-96-66

340-768 EZ12-56-96-66

Mardi Gras Moss Green Uroboros #

340-767 EZ13-5262-96-66

2" x 2"

1.8mm Sheet UROBOROS速 SYSTEM DICHROIC THIN SHEET DICHROIC THIN SHEET96速 MINI ASSORTMENT MINI ASSORTMENT Dichroic glass offers intense, reflected rainbow colors. Dichroic glasslayer offers intense,and reflected rainbow colors. An ultra-thin of quartz a metallic coating on An ultra-thin layer of quartz and a metallic coating is dichroic glass are applied to glass with electron beams in applied to glass with electron beams in a vacuum a vacuum chamber to create a vibrant look. Assortment chamber to create a vibrant look. Assortment includes includes six random-color sheets. Please Note: Contents six random-color sheets. Please Note: Contents are are chosen at random; assortments may vary. chosen at random; assortments may vary. Description Description Dichroic assortment Dichroic assortment

112

Uroboros # Uroboros # DMSA-96 DMSA-96

Order # Order # 340-856 340-856

pkg each $31.00 $32.95

riogrande.com

800.545.6566


96 COE DICHROIC SHEET Dichroic

4" x 4"

1. 8 m m S h e e t ; S o ld i n d i v i d u ally No two sheets of dichroic glass are the same! Dichroic sheet features either a black or clear base. Depending on the color base, the color effects will vary. 1-2 $23.95 Color Name

3+

19.95

All colors of 4" x 4" dichroic sheet glass are combineable for your best price break.

Rainbow on Clear Fibroid

340-857

Uroboros #

DRB1-71-00-96

Rainbow on Black Fibroid

340-858

Uroboros #

DRB1-71-56-96

Rainbow on Black Radium

340-859

Uroboros #

DRB1-81-00-96

“Fused glass and PMC®: a combination where possibilities are endless!” —MariaElena Baca Color Name Pink/Teal Dichroic Thin on Clear Uroboros #

Pink/Teal Dichroic Thin on Black Uroboros #

Green/ Magenta Dichroic Thin on Clear Uroboros #

Rainbow on Clear Radium

340-860

Uroboros #

DRB1-81-56-96

Cyan/Copper Dichroic Thin on Clear Uroboros #

Cyan/Copper Dichroic Thin on Black Uroboros #

340-861 DCC-61-00-96

340-862 DCC-61-56-96

Cyan/ Dark Dark Red Thin on Clear

340-863

Uroboros #

DCZ-61-00-96

Cyan/ Dark Dark Red Dichroic Thin on Black Uroboros #

340-864 DCZ-61-56-96

Pink/Teal Dichroic Thin on Black Uroboros #

Red/Silver Dichroic Thin on Clear Uroboros #

Red/Silver Dichroic Thin on Black Uroboros #

Aurora Borealis Dichroic Thin on Clear Uroboros #

Aurora Borealis Dichroic Thin on Black Uroboros #

Glass & PMC® piece by MariaElena Baca

1-2 $23.95 3+ 19.95

Color Name

340-865

Corkscrews Dichroic Thin on Clear

DPT-61-00-96

340-866 DPT-61-56-96

Uroboros #

Corkscrews Dichroic Thin on Black Uroboros #

MX Pixie Stix Dichroic Thin on Clear 340-867

Uroboros #

1-2 $23.95 3+ 19.95

340-873 PC-61-00-96

340-874 DPC-61-56-96

340-875 DPPS-61-00-96

DGM-61-00-96

340-868 DGM-61-56-96

340-869 DRS-61-00-96

340-870 DRS-61-56-96

MX Pixie Stix Dichroic Thin on Black Uroboros #

Reptilian Dichroic Thin on Clear Uroboros #

Reptilian Dichroic Thin on Black Uroboros #

Cyan/Dark Red/Rainbow Thin on Clear 340-871

Uroboros #

340-876 DPPS-61-56-96

340-877 DPR-61-00-96

340-878 DPR-61-56-96

340-879 DPR-61-00-96

DPGMAB-61-00-96

Cyan/Dark Red/Rainbow Thin on Black 340-872

Uroboros #

340-880 DPR-61-56-96

DPGMAB-61-56-96

113


96 COE CONFETTI Confetti 4 - o z. j ar Hand-blown, eggshell-thin shards of intense color, confetti is great for layering and shading, or in combination with frit, noodles or stringers. Packed in clear 4-oz. re-useable screw-top clear jars. Color Name

Yellow Green

340-900

Uroboros #

CN-704-96

Uroboros #

1-2 $17.95 3+ 14.95

White Opal

340-908

Uroboros #

CN-05-96

1-2 $17.95 3+ 14.95

All colors of glass confetti are combineable for your best price break.

Blue Green

Color Name

340-901 CN-5-96

Color Name

1-2 $17.95 3+ 14.95

Lemon Yellow Opal

340-904

Uroboros #

CN-356-96

Flame Opal

340-905

Uroboros #

CN-602-96

Plum Opal

340-909

Uroboros #

CN-520-96

Purple

340-911

Uroboros #

CN-15-96

Color Name Forest Green

340-902

Uroboros #

CN-30-96

Chestnut Opal

340-906

Uroboros #

CN-2114-96

Cobalt Blue

340-903

Burgundy

340-907

Uroboros #

CN-424-96

Uroboros #

CN-62-96

1-2 $23.95 3+ 19.95

Gold Pink

340-910

Uroboros #

CN-100-96

7-oz. jar

Color Name Mardi Gras Mix Uroboros #

1-2 $29.95 3+ 25.95

340-912 CN-MGM-96

Soft Grip Mold Brushes (page 138) 330-026

$16.95 set/3

114

riogrande.com

800.545.6566


96 COE PRE-CUT SHAPES Uroboros

®

96 COE Pre-Cut Shapes

We’ve cut a few of the most popular, fun shapes so you don’t have to. Available in clear, black and dichroic on clear or black bases, pre-cut circles, ovals, hearts and crosses are perfect for fusing projects. Choose individual shapes, or get them all with an assortment. Heart, circle and oval shapes are 1"H; cross shapes are 1¼"H.

Clear 10 pieces Color Name

&

Black

1-2 $21.95 3+ 17.95

Dichroic Color Name

1-2 $21.95 3+ 17.95

Circle

340-707

Circle

340-712

Uroboros #

EZ00-96-1

Uroboros #

EZ56-96-1

Oval Uroboros #

Heart Uroboros #

Cross Uroboros #

Clear

340-708

Oval

EZ00-96-11

Uroboros #

340-709

Heart

EZ00-96-12

Uroboros #

340-710

Cross

EZ00-96-13

&

Uroboros #

340-713 EZ56-96-11

340-714 EZ56-96-12

340-715 EZ56-96-13

4 p ieces Color Name

1-2 $17.95 3+ 14.95

Color Name

1-2 $17.95 3+ 14.95

Circle on Clear

340-881

Circle on Black

340-886

Uroboros #

DSC-00-96-1

Uroboros #

DSC-56-96-1

Oval on Clear

340-882

Oval on Black

340-887

Uroboros #

DS0-00-96-1

Uroboros #

Heart on Clear

340-883

Heart on Black

340-888

Uroboros #

DSH-00-96-1

Uroboros #

SH-56-96-1

Cross on Clear

340-884

Cross on Black

340-889

Uroboros #

DSCR-00-96-1

Uroboros #

DSCR-56-96-1

DSO-56-96-1

Black

Assortments

10 p iec es

PRE-CUT UROBOROS® SHAPE SYSTEM ASSORTMENTS 96® PRE-CUT SHAPE ASSORTMENTS Use Use transparent transparent heart-, heart-, circlecircle- and and cross-shapes cross-shapes to to add add fun fun designs and interesting elements to jewelry—great for designs and interesting elements to jewelry—great for fusing. Assortments include two pieces each oval- and cross shapes fusing. Assortments include two pieces each oval- and cross and three pieces each heart and circle shapes. shapes and three pieces each heart- and circle -shapes. Description Description Clear Clear Black Black

Uroboros # Order # Uroboros # 340-711 EZ00-96-1CSA EZ00-96-1CSA340-716 EZ56-96-1CSA EZ56-96-1CSA

Order # 340-711 340-716

each each $23.95 $24.0023.95 24.00

Dichroic Assortments

4 pie ces

UROBOROS® SYSTEM 96® PRE-CUT DICHROIC SHAPE ASSORTMENT Use dichroic shaped glass to add geometric elements to jewelry—they’re great for fusing. Assortments include one piece each cross, heart, circle and oval shapes. Description Clear Black

Uroboros # DSA-00-96D-1 DSA-56-96D-1

Order # 340-885 340-890

each $17.95 17.95

Shown actual size.

115


FLAME Maybe it’s the way the glass comes to life when it meets the flame, or the glow that lingers when the flame is gone. Maybe it’s the thrill you get when you see what all that color did under the careful direction of your hands. Or maybe it’s the chance to play with fire! Whatever the reason, the moment you light up that torch and watch molten glass come to life, you’ll be hooked!

Since I am a glass beadmaker, I love that I am able to design and make pieces I could never find anywhere else. There is no way I could do what I do if I had to buy other people’s beads. Making beads myself allows my work to be unique!

—Eleanore Macnish

Flameworked glass beads by Eleanore Macnish

“It’s such an accepting medium. It can be cut, molded, squashed, poked and stretched!” —Eleanore Macnish

w h a t yo u ’l l n e e d :

PROJECT Flameworked Ruffled Cone Bead Play with color. Develop your own rhythm and techniques. Create beads that are truly one-of-a-kind. Prepare the bead-making mandrel. Make sure the mandrel is clean, then dip it into the Bead Separator, covering as much of the mandrel as will be used to form the bead.

a

• • • • • • • • • •

Glass rods (starting on pg. 86) Glass stringers (starting on pg. 90) Bead Separator (#701-406, pg. 124) Bead-making mandrel (#701-408, pg. 123) Hot Head torch (#500-118, pg. 119) or Minor Burner torch (#500-110, pg. 120) Graphite paddle (#701-401, pg. 126) Aluminum shaping marver (#119-007, pg. 126) Blunt-end tweezers (#119-019, pg. 124) Tool & mandrel rest (#111-631, pg. 123) Small bowl of water

TIP: Keep the mandrel level and parallel to the work surface to prevent the glass from sliding sideways, pulled by gravity.

TIP: Prepare several mandrels ahead of time and stand them, coated side up, in a cup of sand.

Light the torch. Adjust the flame size using the regulator knob on the torch. Position the bead-making mandrel at the very end of the flame to dry the Bead Separator (fig. a); simultaneously position the glass rod at the top of the blue area of the flame, moving the rod quickly in and out of the flame. This will begin warming the glass slowly, then move the rod out, directly above the blue area of the flame.

b

To start building the cone, create a second bead around the mandrel about half a bead-width from the first bead. Then, create a third bead, laying the molten strand between the first two beads.

When the glass rod starts to slump, position the end of the rod on the mandrel and begin turning the mandrel away from you with your fingertips. (You will eventually find the most efficient and comfortable hand position for turning the mandrel.) As you turn the mandrel, the molten glass will form a bead around it (fig. b).

116

riogrande.com

800.545.6566


TIP: Rest hot tools or glass rods on the tool & mandrel rest. This holds both tools and glass securely yet keeps them accessible as you work.

c

heat the rod, moving it quickly in and out of the flame. The rod should have a straight tip for best results.

Roll the mandrel in one direction between your fingertips and allow the flame to even out and shape the bead (fig. c).

h

Remove the bead from the flame and roll it along the surface of the graphite paddle, slowing forming the bead into a cone shape (fig. d). Return the bead to the flame to reheat it, then continue to shape the cone until you achieve the shape you want.

d

e

TIP: Shaping beads is easier on a larger marver (such as the aluminum shaping marver, #119-007) that has more room to allow the bead to roll. Use a stringer to add stripes to the bead. Keep the bead warm out at the end of the flame while you heat your stringer. Important: Beads must be kept warm and rotating to maintain the integrity of the glass, preventing thermal shock and breakage.

i

j

Turn the bead away from you and repeat the above step, working your way all the way around the bead (fig. l). Every two or three twists, quench the tweezer in a small bowl or jar of water to cool it and keep it from sticking to the glass. IMPORTANT: After quenching, be very sure the tweezer is dry before it touches your bead again.

k

l

Roll the bead in the flame to fully soften the stringer lines, fusing them to the bead (fig. f). Then marver the bead, blending the stringer lines into the bead to create stripes (fig. g). TIP: Use the side of the paddle to even and flatten the end of the cone.

g

Next, add a thick band around the broad base of the bead using a different color rod. Again, keep the bead warm and rotating out at the end of the flame while you

m

n Italian-Style Glass-Rod Holder See page 123. 119-016 $34.95

Roll the bead in the flame to fuse the band securely to the bead. When the band is fully fused, remove the bead from the flame briefly and check that the seal is complete around the entire bead (fig. i). To form the ruffle, heat a single area of the bead above and below the band to soften it. Pull the bead from the flame, pinch the heated area with a long tweezer and twist it 90° (figs. j, k).

Heat the stringer just until it glows. Working at mid-flame and at the outer edge of the flame, set the end of the stringer against the narrow end of the cone bead and push the cone upward, “drawing” a line on the bead (fig.e). Repeat at intervals around the bead.

f

When the rod is soft and malleable, move the bead into the mid-flame area. Working at the lower edge of the flame, lay the tip of the molten rod on the base of the bead and slowly rotate the mandrel away from you, creating a band around the base (fig. h).

Finished? Not quite!

If desired, use a bit of stringer to add dots to the bead. Rotate the bead out at the end of the flame to prevent it from cooling. Heat the stringer in the flame; watch carefully as stringer will become soft very quickly. Bring the bead back into mid-flame, working at the edge of the flame, and touch the end of the stringer to the bead and pull it away, leaving a small dot on the bead (fig. m). Rotate the bead to add the next dot; create as many dots as you like—even add dots to the ruffle. When finished, roll the bead in the flame to ensure that all parts of the bead are securely fused to the bead and are uniformly warm (fig. n). Set the finished bead in a kiln heated to 960°F to protect it from thermal shock. Anneal beads to strengthen them (allow 15 mins. per ¼" of thickness, timed from the last bead you set in the kiln). Then turn off the kiln and allow beads to cool completely in the kiln. Now you’re ready to string your beads into a finished design!

Find that perfect display and just-right packaging at riogrande. com!

117


KILNS & COOLING BLANKET RIO KILN WITH BEAD DOOR Designed for fusing glass and annealing glass beads, as well as a wide range of other applications, this kiln is an excellent value— especially if you’re also a PMC® artist! Place the mandrel rest just inside the special built-in bead door to anneal several beads at once. For more information, see page 62. Description A. Rio kiln with bead door

Description B. Caldera kiln C. Bead collar

B

C

Item A, D and E features a special door for supporting bead mandrels.

20" x 9" interior

E 20" x 5" interior

118

Reduce the risk of cracking flameworked beads by slowly cooling them folded inside a fiber blanket.

Order # 703-112 703-113

each $649.95 135.00

BLUEBIRD GLASS KILNS The perfect kilns for annealing glass beads and/or fusing glass! Item D offers a 20"W x 9"D firebrick interior that allows you to fuse and anneal glass, and to fire enamels and PMC®; item E offers a 20"W x 5"D fiber muffle interior for annealing glass beads. Please Note: If you will be fusing or firing, we strongly recommend the Bluebird XL model. The mandrel holder on both models allow you to anneal large batches of glass beads all at once. Both kilns feature a three-key Sentry Xpress controller that stores up to four programs; includes both single-speed and eight-segment ramp-hold modes. • The element is seated in pinless grooves in the roof. • Conveniently plugs into a standard outlet. • Controller displays temperatures thoughout the cycle in your choice of Fahrenheit or Celsius; easy-to-read LED display. • Includes one-year warranty. The BlueBird XL kiln (item D) features durable insulating firebricks in the roof, walls and floor and a 20-slot mandrel holder. Overall dimensions: 32½"W x 15"D x 12½"H (826 x 381 x 318mm) Inside chamber: 20"W x 9"D x 4½"H (508 x 229 x 115mm) Power: 120 volts, 1700 watts, 14 amps Max. temperature: 1700°F (926°C) Shipping weight: 86 lbs. (39kg) The BlueBird kiln (item E) Features high-tech ceramic fiber insulation interior and 20-slot mandrel holder. Overall dimensions: 33½"W x 11½"D x 13"H (851 x 293 x 331mm) Inside chamber: 20"W x 5"D x 5"H (508 x 127 x 127mm) Power: 120 volts, 1500 watts, 13 amps Max. temperature: 1200°F (648°C) Shipping weight: 48 lbs. (22kg) Description D. Bluebird XL kiln E. BlueBird kiln

F

each $775.00

CALDERA® KILN AND BEAD COLLAR Use the bead collar with 7½" x 2" door (item C) with the Caldera® kiln to anneal glass beads and to stack two or more of these compact, portable kilns, creating as much room as you need for fusing large pieces. Kiln can reach temperatures high enough to fuse glass, fire enamel, porcelain, ceramics, bead components, stoneware, pottery and all formulas of PMC®. For more information see page 62.

A

D

Order # 703-118

Order # 703-130 703-140

each $825.00 685.00

SUPER CERAMIC FIBER BLANKET Fold this ceramic fiber blanket over your newly made flameworked beads to safely cool them, minimizing the risk of thermal shock damage. Manufactured using a special process that makes the fibers soluble and amorphous, the blanket is less likely to “crackle” due to stiffness—and those fibers that are sometimes released are also safer than those released by other ceramic fiber blankets should they be inadvertantly inhaled. F.

Description Cooling blanket, 12" x 6"

Order # 119-056

riogrande.com

each $15.95

800.545.6566


HOT HEAD TORCH & ACCESSORIES HOT HEAD TORCH KITS Ready to start flameworking? These kits include everything you need to get started (and hooked!). Kits includes: • Hot Head torch (item C) • Fiber cooling blanket • Dual-sided marver • Solaris kiln glasses, IR green #3 lens • Mandrel & rake set • Gas cylinder holder • Tweezer • Stainless steel tool & mandrel rest • Bead Separator (page 124) • You Can Make Glass Beads! book Plus: • Uroboros® System 96® 32-rod starter assortment (#340-001, pg. 100) OR • Messy Color™ 104 COE 32-rod starter assortment (#360-001, pg. 86) Description Order # A. Hot Head torch kit w/96 COE rods 500-002 Hot Head torch kit w/104 COE rods 500-001

1-2 3+ kit kit $145.95 $135.95 145.95 135.95

HOT HEAD MOUNTING BRACKET WITH WORK SURFACE Use this convenient mounting bracket to securely hold the gas cylinder and Hot Head torch. Features a stainless steel work surface to protect your bench and support flameworking tasks. Measures 9"W x 15"L (5"L lip); comes pre-drilled for attaching to a bench. B.

Description Hot Head mounting bracket

Order # 500-116

A Please Note: Items A, C and D do not include MAPP gas; gas is available at your local hardware/home improvement store.

1-2 3+ each each $29.95 $23.96

HOT HEAD TORCH Perfect for the beginning flameworker! The Hot Head torch allows more oxygen to mix with MAPP gas (available at your local hardware/ home improvement store) to provide a clean flame. Adjust the flame size with a single dial. Screws directly onto gas cylinder. Description C. Hot Head torch

Order # 500-118

1-2 3+ each each $38.95 $31.50

MAPP GAS CYLINDER HOLDER KIT Designed to be used with the Hot Head torch, this MAPP gas cylinder holder can be attached to just about any work surface using the included C-clamp. Please Note: Disposable cylinders with MAPP gas are available at your local hardware/home improvement store. Description D. MAPP gas cylinder holder kit

Order # 701-404

1-2 kit $9.25

B The stainless steel mounting bracket holds a gas cylinder and provides a large work surface for flameworking.

3+ kit $7.40

GRAPHITE MARVER ATTACHMENT FOR HOT HEAD TORCH Attach this graphite marver directly to the Hot Head torch to shape glass beads without having to hold a graphite paddle. E.

Description Marver attachment

Graphite Work Surface Order # 500-103 3" x 2"

1-2 3+ each each $25.50 $20.40

Find bead-making mandrels and graphite paddles on pages 123 and 126.

C

E

D The cylinder holder easily attaches to most surfaces.

119


MINOR BURNER TORCH & ACCESSORIES NORTEL MINOR BURNER TORCH KIT This kit includes everything you need, from the torch to the accessories, to create flameworked beads. The Minor Burner torch allows you to easily control the size of your flame with adjustable oxygen and propane valves. This comprehensive kit includes: • Nortel Minor Burner torch (item B, below) • Dual T-grade LP hose with B-fittings (item C, facing page) • Safe-D-Tect leak detector, 8-oz. bottle (item G, facing page) • Smith® single-stage propane regulator (item A, facing page) • Smith® single-stage oxygen regulator (item, B, facing page) • Graphite marver attachment (item, D, below) • Stainless steel work surface (item C, below) • Flashback arrestor set (item D, facing page) Description A. Nortel Minor Burner torch kit

A

NORTEL MINOR BURNER TORCH Perfect for working soft glass such as Uroboros® System 96®, Uroboros® FX 90 and Messy Color™ 104 COE. Great for controlling flame size; oxygen and propane valves are easily adjustable. Base comes pre-drilled for securing to your bench (screws not included). See the tip below on how to light your Minor Burner torch. B.

Fuel and oxygen tanks are not included; see riogrande.com or your Tools & Equipment catalog.

1-2 3+ kit kit $452.00 $429.50

Order # 500-010

Description Nortel Minor Burner torch

1-2 3+ each each $187.95 $178.55

Order # 500-110

STAINLESS STEEL WORK SURFACE FOR NORTEL MINOR BURNER Manufactured by Rio Grande, this stainless steel work surface is designed for use with the Minor Burner torch and effectively protects your bench during flameworking. Comes pre-drilled for easy attachment to your bench (screws not included). Description C. Work surface for Minor Burner

The Nortel Minor Burner torch allows you to control the size of your flame; simply adjust the oxygen and propane dials.

1-2 3+ each each $24.95 $19.95

Order # 500-040

GRAPHITE MARVER ATTACHMENT FOR MINOR TORCH Attach this graphite marver directly to your Minor Torch to shape glass beads without having to hold a graphite paddle. B Description D. Marver attachment

Graphite Work Surface Order # 500-112 3" x 2"

1-2 3+ each each $29.95 $23.95

D

S O , H E R E ’ S T H E P. O . O . P. C

120

With the Nortel Minor Burner torch, you enjoy the benefit of complete control of your flame size with minor adjustments to the oxygen and propane dials. Operating the torch is simple if you remember the acronym P.O.O.P. To light the torch, turn on the propane, then the oxygen; to turn the flame off, reverse the order, turning off the oxygen first, then the propane.

riogrande.com

800.545.6566


TORCH ACCESSORIES ®

PROPANE/MAPP AND OXYGEN SINGLE-STAGE REGULATORS Choose Smith® regulators for their dependability and efficient control—two crucial factors for flameworking. These single-stage regulators offer filtered seat technology that virtually eliminates debris in the regulator; deliver high flow capacities and better flow stability; and are resistant to carbon dioxide freeze-up in the lines. Both feature precision-machined brass and have built-in safety check-valves and standard 9⁄16" outlet fittings. UL-listed. Made in the USA. Description A. Propane/MAPP single-stage precision-machined solid brass regulator

Tank Type standard propane

B. Oxygen single-stage precision-machined solid brass regulator

any commercial oxygen cylinder

DURABLE LONG-LIFE UNIVERSAL TORCH HOSES These tough hoses are made of reinforced rubber and rated to 250psi for long wear. Description C. Dual hose Dual T-grade LP hose*

Torch Fitting 3⁄8" A 9⁄16" B 3⁄8" A 9⁄16" B

Regulator Fitting 9⁄16" B 9⁄16" B 9⁄16" B 9⁄16" B

Length 12½ ft. 12½ ft. 12½ ft. 12½ ft.

Order # 500-190 500-250 500-141 500-144

each $23.75 25.95 43.25 31.50

CGA Tank Number 510

No. of Gauges 2

Order # 500-133

each $109.95

540

2

500-127

109.95

510 tank

9⁄16" B hose

B. single-stage oxygen

A. single-stage propane

*Uses B-A adapter ® FLASHBACK ARRESTORS A must for your flameworking torch! Flashback arrestors are built with in-line check-valves to prevent a hose fire from reaching the regulators or tank and are strongly recommended for all torches. This dual-duty arrestor also cuts off gas flow when back pressure drops to 0.5psi—an added safety feature. UL-listed. Made in the USA.

Description D. Set of two 9⁄16" flashback arrestors (one fuel/one oxygen); regulator mount

Order # 500-008

C

D. set of 2

1-2 each $56.95

PROPANE AND OXYGEN TANKS Use these propane and oxygen tanks with your Nortel Minor Burner torch. Tanks are sold empty due to federal shipping restrictions; visit your local dealer for an easy fill-up. E. F.

Tank Type Propane Oxygen

Tank Size — M

Capacity 5 lbs. 40 cu. ft.

Weight 11 lbs. 30 lbs.

Order # 500-136 500-063

1-2 each $89.95 158.75

SAFE-D-TECT LEAK DETECTOR Apply this safety fluid every time you change your torch, hook up a new tank or torch, or want to check for leaks in current connections. If there is a leak, the solution will bubble within five seconds. Bottle contains an easy-to-use applicator. Caution! Do not use standard soap solutions to test for leaks; these solutions may contain combustible ingredients. Description G. 8-oz. bottle

Order # 500-238

1-2 each $9.50

E

Propane and oxygen tanks are sold empty.

F

3-5 each $8.55

TORCH STRIKER The easiest way to light your torch! This friction striker produces up to 2000 ignition sparks; includes 15 flints. Description H. Torch striker with 15 flints

Order # 503-025/15

1 each $8.15

2+ each $6.95

G

H

121


FLAMEWORKING TOOLS

Glass beads lined with fine silver tubing created by Jerry Gaydusek

A

BEADLINER KIT An elegant, professional finish for your glass beads in seconds! Form sterling lining for all your new glass beads in one simple turn of the wheel—lining beads has never been this easy (or fun!). The beadliner kit includes four dies in the most common bead hole sizes (1/8", 3/16", 3/32" and 5/32"), a wood organizer case and an instructional DVD. All you need is the sterling tubing! We recommend item B, below. Description A. Beadliner kit

.201"

.210"

.355"

.460"

.231"

.250"

.375"

.500"

Range/Accuracy 0"–3" by 1/16" 0–80mm by 0.1mm

OD .091" .128" .160" .192" .231" .250" .375" .500"

ID .071" .108" .130" .162" .201" .210" .355" .460"

Holds Wire Size 14 ga. 10 ga. 8 ga. 8 ga. 6 ga. 4 ga. 0 ga. —

Oz./ Foot .170 .247 .455 .555 .670 .960 1.48 2.00

Order # 100-930 100-931 100-932 100-933 100-937 100-934 100-935 100-936

Sold in 12" lengths Minumum Purchase 3 ea. 2 ea. 1 ea. 1 ea. 1 ea. 1 ea. 1 ea. 1 ea.

GERMAN SLIDING POCKET-SIZE GAUGE The smooth finish and fine, crisply stamped numerals and lines on this high-quality gauge ensure a long, productive life for this instrument. Measures both ID and OD in inches and millimeters. Made in Germany.

C

Description C. Brass sliding gauge

D

E

Order # 116-075

1-2 3-5 each each $13.95 $12.95

TUBE CUTTER Use this sturdy tool to cut silver tubing (above) for lining glass beads. • Precisely cut tubing or rods up to 1/8" in diameter x 13/8" (3 x 35mm). • The adjustable stop lets you make precise cuts. • Made of precision steel with a contoured wood handle; handle is removeable for mounting the jig in a bench vise. • Thumb keeper and V-groove hold material firmly in place while you cut. Description D. Tube cutter

Order # 113-839

each $42.95

PHILLIPS ACE SAFETY GLASSES These safety glasses are recommended for flameworking tasks. The didymium lens protects eyes from sodium flare while providing a clear view of the flame. Item E comes with detachable side shields; item F features a comfortable wrap-around frame.

Use Phillips ACE safety glasses while flameworking glass to protect your eyes and ensure a clear view of the glass as it forms around the mandrel.

F

122

kit $325.00

B. .999 FINE SILVER SEAMLESS TUBING Hard Great for lining glass beads (use with the Beadliner kit above). Pricing is based on silver market; please call for current pricing.

B

ID: .071" .108" .130" .162" OD: .091" .128" .160" .192"

Order # 111-650

E. F.

Description With detachable shields With wrap-around frame

Order # 201-055 201-056

riogrande.com

each $54.95 120.00

800.545.6566


FLAMEWORKING TOOLS BEAD-MAKING MANDREL SET WITH RAKE Form flameworked glass beads around these stainless steel mandrels. Use the rake to pull color along the bead for beautiful details. The set (item A) includes eight 10"L x 3/32"-dia. mandrels and a bead rake. Additional 12"L mandrels are available below. Description A. Bead-making mandrel set with rake

Mandrel; 12"L

Diameter 1⁄16" 3⁄32" 1⁄8" 5⁄32" 3⁄16"

Order # 701-408

1-2 set $11.50

3+ set $9.50 The stainless steel tool rest (item B) is a must for flameworking! It safely holds your glass (and hot mandrels) while keeping them separated and ready to pick up and use.

Packaging varies; please see below 1-2 3+ pkg pkg 119-010 $9.50 $7.50 119-011 9.95 7.95 119-012 10.95 8.95 119-013 11.95 9.95 119-014 12.95 10.95

Pkg Qty 12 12 12 6 6

STAINLESS STEEL TOOL & MANDREL REST Protect your work surface with this stand. Perfect for resting hot mandrels and tools while keeping them nearby and ready to use. B.

Description Tool & mandrel rest; 7½"L x 1½"W

Order # 111-631

1-2 each $8.95

3+ each $6.95

GLASS-BLOWING MANDRELS Use stainless steel hollow mandrels for creating hollow, glass-blown beads. Puffy mandrels (item C) are open on both ends and have a hole on the side; use the tip of your finger to close off one end while blowing into the other. The assortment includes three 1⁄8"-diameter and three 3⁄32"-diameter mandrels. Closed-end mandrels (item D) have one closed end and a small hole on the side. Dimensions C. Puffy mandrel 12"L x 1⁄8" dia. 12"L x 3⁄32" dia. D. Closed-end 12"L x ¼" dia. mandrel 16"L x ¼" dia.

Pkg Qty 2 2 1 1

Puffy mandrel assortment

6

A

This tool rest is also great for resting hot glass rods and stringers after you’ve used them in the flame.

Packaging varies; please see below 1-2 3+ Order # pkg pkg 119-026 $17.00 $15.00 119-027 15.00 13.00 119-029 18.00 16.00 119-030 19.00 17.00 119-028

B

$43.00 $39.00

3⁄32"-dia.

C

THIMBLE MANDRELS Create functional glass thimbles with these stainless steel mandrels. The mandrels are sized to accommodate a coating of bead release. E. F.

Mandrel Dimensions 11½"L x 16mm dia. 11½"L x 17mm dia.

Thimble Dimensions 1"H x 12–16mm 1"H x 13–17mm

Order # 119-031 119-032

1⁄8"-dia.

Puffy mandrels are open on both ends and have a hole on the side; cover one end with your fingertip while blowing into the other end to make glass-blown beads.

1-2 3+ each each $12.50 $10.75 12.50 10.75

D

G. HEAVY-WALL STAINLESS STEEL TUBING MANDRELS Perfect for flameworking large beads and washer-style glass pendants. Diameter ¼" 3⁄8" ½"

Length 12" 16" 12" 16" 12" 16"

Order # 119-033 119-034 119-035 119-036 119-037 119-038

1-2 each $9.50 10.50 10.00 11.00 10.50 11.50

3+ each $8.00 8.75 8.50 9.00 8.75 9.50

Item D has one closed end, one open end and a small hole on the side; use this mandrel for making glass-blown beads.

E

F

ITALIAN-STYLE GLASS-ROD HOLDER Constructed of durable, heavy-walled stainless steel tubing, this glass-rod holder firmly holds rods while you’re flameworking— perfect for working with short lengths of rod! The gripping end works like a clothespin, with one jaw firmly pressing the glass rod into the V-shaped trough of the other jaw. Secures rods 2–12mm in diameter. Description H. Italian-style glass-rod holder; 12"L

Order # 119-016

1-2 3+ each each $34.95 $29.95

G

H

Insert 1" to 1¼" of the rod into the jaw; the length of the rod will extend straight out the other end of the holder.

123


FLAMEWORKING TOOLS BEAD SEPARATOR Ready-to-use Bead Separator makes removing cooled glass beads from mandrels easy! Dip the mandrel into the jar, air or flame dry, then begin creating your glass bead around the mandrel. Once the bead cools, carefully pull the bead off the mandrel and soak in water. Description A. Bead Separator; 4-oz. jar

A

C B

E D

Order # 701-406

3+ each $6.95

DIP-N-GO SLUDGE This quality release keeps a strong hold on your beads while flameworking—it can take the pulling that occurs as you work the bead—then, when it cools, the pieces release easily. Shake jar thoroughly, then dip the mandrel into the jar. Allow the release to dry completely before you begin adding glass. A thin coat dries almost instantly with a quick touch of the torch flame; heavier coats will dry farther out on the torch in 10–20 seconds. Also available without graphite (items D and E) for an even stronger hold on heavier pieces. Description B. Dip-N-Go Sludge with graphite; 4 oz. jar C. Dip-N-Go Sludge with graphite; 16 oz. jar D. Dip-N-Go Blue Sludge; 4 oz. jar E. Dip-N-Go Blue Sludge; 16 oz. jar

F

1-2 each $7.95

Order # 119-001 119-002 119-003 119-004

1-2 each $7.95 21.00 7.95 21.00

3+ each $6.95 18.00 6.95 18.00

LOOP HEMOSTATS These hemostats are useful to have nearby while flameworking beads. The loop ends help you safely and securely retrieve dropped hot beads, or beads you've pre-heated in an oven. G

H

Description F. Small; 6"L G. Medium; 7"L H. Large; 9"L

1-2 each $9.75 11.75 12.50

3+ each $7.75 9.75 10.50

Description Murrini hemostat; 8½"L

Order # 119-025

1-2 3+ each each $24.95 $21.95

TWEEZER-STYLE MASHERS These stainless steel tweezer-style mashers feature two platens for gently shaping beads. The ¾"-square platens on item J are parallel as they close. The small ½" x ¼" flat, thin platens on item K are ideal for working tiny beads and for doing detailed work in tight places.

I

J

Description J. Masher; 8"L K. Micro-masher; 4¾"L

K

124

Order # 119-058 119-059 119-060

MURRINI HEMOSTAT Use this durable stainless steel hemostat to pick up hot or cold glass rods or to handle murrini bundles. I.

L. set of 4

Loop Tip Dimensions ¾"L x 7⁄16"W ¾"L x ½"W 1"L x 9⁄16"

Platen Dimensions ¾" x ¾ ½" x ¼"

Order # 119-020 119-041

1-2 each $11.95 8.95

3+ each $9.50 6.50

BLUNT-END TWEEZER SET The smooth, narrow tips on these stainless steel tweezers are ideal for intricately shaping molten glass to create forms such as fish fins, candy wrappers, flower petals, leaves and ruffles. They’re also handy for pinching off unwanted bubbles and for holding components while annealing in a flame. Set includes 6"-, 8"-, 10"and 12"-long tweezers. L.

Description Blunt-end tweezers; set/4

Order # 119-019

riogrande.com

1-2 3+ set set $16.75 $14.00

800.545.6566


FLAMEWORKING TOOLS The small handles on items B and C fit nicely in the hand for more control while working in tight places.

STAINLESS STEEL FLOWER & STEM TWEEZERS The bezeled tips on these tweezers are perfect for making flower and stem shapes and other details on the surface of flameworked beads. Description A. Bent B. Straight C. Curved

Length 6½"L 4"L 4¼"L

Order # 119-042 119-043 119-044

1-2 each $10.95 9.95 9.95

3+ each $8.95 7.95 7.95

A

B C

TUNGSTEN RAKES The end of item D is bent nearly 90°, making it ideal for raking and sculpting glass (3⁄32"-dia. shaft provides strength to withstand the pressure required to shape). Use the straight rake (item E) to “drag” glass, creating feathering and marbled effects, making bubbles, and poking holes. Rake lengths can be adjusted from 1" to 2¾" depending on the rake’s placement in the collet. Handles are 3½"L. Rake Length Order # 3½"L x 33⁄32" dia. 119-022 3½"L x 33⁄32" dia. 119-023

Description D. Bent rake; E. Straight rake

Platen Dimensions 2" x 2" 1¼" x 1¾" 1¼" x 2"

Order # 119-017 119-039 119-040

F

1-2 3+ each each $38.95 $34.95 48.95 44.95 48.95 44.95

HOT FINGERS Use these must-have tools to securely hold glass buttons, marbles or irregularly shaped objects in the flame while you work. Both accommodate pieces 3⁄8"–¾" in size. The tips of the fingers on item I flare slightly to hold objects from the inside. I. J.

Description With flare Without flare

Length 95⁄8" 93⁄8"

Order # 119-045 119-046

G

Glass can be shaped on the platens of items G and H to create beads that are longer or shorter than the length of the platen and have either blunt or tapered ends.

1-2 3+ each each $48.00 $44.00 48.00 44.00

SHAPING & FLARING TOOLS Use these versatile tools to create flares, fluting, spirals and twists in flameworked pieces. Item K features several shaping profiles (a 90° point with two single-thickness edges, a folded side creating a double thickness edge and a rolled side creating quadruple thickness) that provide many options for shaping glass pieces. Item L has a triangular wedge tip—great for making holes, flaring and basic forming. Description K. Multi-profile L. Flaring

Length 7" 5½"

Order # 119-008 119-009

E

1-2 3+ each each $14.95 $11.95 12.95 9.95

FLAMEWORKING MASHERS These durable, .125"-thick steel mashers are made in the USA and are perfect for forming beads. An adjustable set-screw allows you to control the distance between the platens; rubber grips offer comfort and protection from heat. The “BBQ” mashers (item F) have two 2"-square platens. The olive mashers (items G and H) have two curved platens to form olive-shaped beads. The curve on item G creates a 2½"-diameter (approx.) circle and is 1¾" long; the curve on item H creates a 3½"-diameter (approx.) circle and is 2" long. Description F. “BBQ” masher; 11¾"L G. Small olive masher; 12"L H. Large olive masher; 12"L

D

1-2 each $8.95 7.95

3+ each $6.95 5.95

H

I J With flare

K L

Use Hot Fingers tools to hold irregularly shaped glass beads in the flame while you work. Slide the collar back to open the fingers, then forward to grab the bead. Item I has flared “fingers” for holding objects from the inside.

Without flare

125


FLAMEWORKING TOOLS GRAPHITE PADDLES Use graphite paddles for shaping flameworked glass beads. Try sprinkling frit on the surface and roll a hot glass bead through it to enhance your bead designs.

B

A

Description A. Aluminum handle; 9"L B. Wood handle; 8¾"L

Graphite Surface 3" x 2" 3" x 2"

Order # 701-409 701-401

1-2 3+ each each $26.95 $22.95 15.95 12.95

GRAPHITE FLAMEWORKING BAROQUE SHAPER This cleverly designed graphite mold has two sizes of ogee profiles to create Baroque-style glass beads. One side makes a bead with a maximum diameter of approximately ¾" (19 mm); the other side makes a bead with a maximum diameter of 1" (25mm). Roll a molten ball of glass bead back and forth along one of the two profiles to make a Baroque-shaped bead.

Length C. 8"

C

Paddle Dimensions 1¾"W x 1¾"D x 1¼"H

Order # 119-006

1-2 3+ each each $28.95 $24.95

ALL-IN-ONE GRAPHITE BUTTON MOLD This graphite paddle features nine round holes of different profiles and sizes ideal for forming glass buttons and knobs. Profile dimensions: (4) 1"-dia., (4) ¾"-dia., (1) ½"-dia. (depths vary). Length D. 8" Create glass buttons and knobs in many sizes using this graphite mold!

3⁄32"-dia. tines

F E

To make a button blank, melt a ball of glass on the end of a rod, then press the molten glass ball onto G a graphite paddle to flatten one side (the rod will be pointing straight upward). Reheat the ball in the flame, then use the mashers to form the button.

Order # 119-005

1-2 3+ each each $39.95 $35.95

TRIMLETT TWO-HOLE MANDRELS Make two button holes in glass designs with these stainless steel mandrels! Shaped like a tuning fork, each mandrel has two 2"L tines spaced 3⁄16" apart (adjust distance with pliers). Mandrel release required.

D

E. F.

1⁄16"-dia. tines

Paddle Dimensions 3"W x 2"D x ¾"H

Length 11"

Tine Diameter 1⁄16" 3⁄32"

Order # 119-015 119-052

1-2 each $6.95 6.95

3+ each $5.75 5.75

SMIRCICH BUTTON-MASHER PLIERS Developed by glass artist Jim Smircich, these mashers can make a 1⁄8"-thick glass button blank. The long stainless steel platen forms the face; the short one rests against the rod while forming the back. Length G. 6¾"

Platen Dimensions Order # 1½"W x 1½"D and 1½"W x 1"D 119-018

1-2 3+ each each $29.95 $25.95

GLASS-CUTTING SHEARS SET Durable old-world design makes these comfortable glass-cutting shears (6"L, 7½"L) a must-have at your bench. Super-sharp steel blades efficiently cut hot, pliable glass as well as hard, cooled glass. Description H. Glass-cutting shears; set/2

Order # 119-021

1-2 3+ set set $16.95 $13.95

ALUMINUM SHAPING MARVER This aluminum marver has a flat side to roll, smooth and shape glass beads, and a ridged side for creating grooves on the surface of beads. I.

H. Set of 2

I

126

Order # 119-007

1-2 each $9.95

3+ each $7.95

STAINLESS STEEL HOLEY ROLLER Use this handy stainless steel platform to create a hobnail (bumpy) pattern in your flameworked beads. Rest the platform on your work table (it sits 3⁄8" above the table) and roll the hot bead across the 3⁄16"-diameter perforations. The perforations are spaced on ¼" centers. J.

J

Description Dimensions Marver 4" x 2" x 3⁄8"

Description Dimensions Holey roller 4" x 3" x 3⁄8"

Order # 119-024

riogrande.com

1-2 each $8.95

3+ each $6.95

800.545.6566


BASE-METAL FINDINGS BEAD BARS & LINKS, Plated Simply unscrew the 6mm threaded ball on the end of items A and B to add beads (minimum hole size is .061"). Items (C–H) have a .036" hole at one end and a 2.8mm (.114") ball at the other to hold beads with holes at least .094" diameter in place. Links (items I–K) have a .036" hole at each end. Add beads, then link them together, or hang a drop from one end. Choose rhodium-plated (/12) or gold-plated (/13) styles. All pewter sold by Rio is 100% lead-free. Brass Bead Bars Packaging varies; please see below Length A. 2¼" B.

Ring Pkg Plating ID Qty silver 5.7mm 4 gold 5.7mm 4

Order # 629-763 629-764

1-2 pkg $6.25 7.30

3-4 pkg $5.40 6.30

5-9 pkg 4.85 5.65

Order #/color 629-336/12, 13 629-337/12, 13 629-338/12, 13 629-340/12, 13 629-341/12, 13 629-342/12, 13

1-2 pkg $6.70 7.80 8.90 10.00 10.40 11.35

3-4 pkg $5.75 6.70 7.65 8.65 9.65 10.50

5-9 pkg $5.20 6.05 6.90 7.75 8.70 9.45

629-343/12, 13 629-344/12, 13 629-345/12, 13

$6.70 7.80 8.90

$5.75 6.70 7.65

$5.20 6.05 6.90

Britannia Pewter Bead Bars, Cast C. D. E. F. G. H.

Pkg Qty 10 10 10 10 10 10

Length ¾" 1" 1¼" 1½" 1¾" 2

Britannia Pewter Links, Cast I. ¾" J. 1" K. 1¼"

10 10 10

BRITANNIA PEWTER GLUE-IN PENDANT FINDINGS Cast Perfect for your glass designs! Glue items L and M into large-hole (at least .96" dia.) beads or components to create a bail. Glue bail ends (item N) into the opposite hole to neatly finish the pendant. All pewter sold by Rio is 100% lead-free. Sold in packages of 10 Dia. 1-2 3-4 5-9 Description (mm) Order #/color pkg pkg pkg L. Cap w/bail, 5.8 x 3mm opening 7.4 629-356/12, 13 $10.00 $8.65 $7.75 629-355/12, 13 8.90 7.65 6.90 M. Cap w/ring 7.4 N. End cap 7.4 629-354/12, 13 7.80 6.70 6.05

A

B

/12 Rhodium-plated

Size Desription (mm) O. Bead cap 7 P. 10 Q. Bead aligner 6 R. 8 S. 8 T. Spacer bead 8 U. 10 V. 8 W. 8 X. 10 /12 Silverplated

/13 Goldplated

Hole Pkg Size Qty .092" 20 .100" 10 .042" 20 .042" 20 .042" 20 .10" 10 .10" 10 .103" 10 .134" 10 .124" 10 side view

/12 Silverplated

/13 Goldplated

C D E I

F

J

K

G H Choose one of the cap styles (items L and M) and glue it into the top hole of your bead. Glue in an end cap (item N) to finish the pendant/drop.

/16 Antique silver-plated

/17 Antique gold-plated

side view

Bead aligners S

/12 Rhodiumplated

/13 Goldplated

side view

Spacer beads T

Bead caps O

U

P V

bottom view

Bead aligners M

/13 Gold-plated

Items C–K are available in two finishes

BRITANNIA PEWTER BEAD COMPONENTS Cast The holes on the bead caps (items O and P) are perfect for use with items C–K. Use bead aligners (items Q–S) with large-hole glass beads to keep them centered and secure on chain or cord; insert the small end into the bead hole, then string onto cord. The spacer beads (items T–X) are great as accents in your glass bead designs. All pewter sold by Rio is 100% lead-free. Packaging varies; please see below 1-2 3-4 5-9 Order #/color pkg pkg pkg 629-346/12, 13 $8.40 $7.60 $6.75 629-347/12, 13 8.95 7.75 7.20 629-352/12, 13 5.70 4.90 4.45 629-353/12, 13 9.75 8.40 7.60 629-351/16, 17 9.80 8.45 7.75 629-361/16,17 7.70 6.70 5.75 629-362/16,17 9.00 7.80 6.70 629-359/16,17 7.70 6.70 5.75 629-348/16,17 8.90 8.30 7.65 629-349/16,17 10.00 9.30 8.65

Finish bead bars (items A and B) with a variety of glass beads to create fun and interesting pendants and dangles. Beads by Chelsea Stone.

W

Q

L N

R

X

127


FUSING Add all the colorful glass ingredients you want.

Layer them up. Then fire in a kiln. And just like any tried & true recipe, all the pieces come together. They complement and enhance each other. Some provide the base; others vie for attention and add astonishing depth. The result? A single piece of glass, perfectly combined, that commands all the attention.

Fused glass pendant by Valerie Hensen

“Depth and rich color on a fired piece never cease to amaze me!” —Valerie Hensen

PROJECT Fused Glass Pendant In just a few simple steps, you can create colorful fused glass pieces— and no two will ever look alike! Mark the size of your base layer with a permanent marker; we marked a 2¼ x 1¼" piece for our design shown here (fig. a). Score the piece with the Toyo pistol-grip glass-cutter, starting at the edge of the glass and pushing the cutter away from your body (fig. b). You will hear a faint ‘scritch’ as the blade scores the glass. Only light pressure is required to make a proper score. See pages 109 and 111 for tips on scoring and breaking glass sheet. TIP: Make sure your work surface is flat and clear of debris to avoid accidental breakage!

w h a t yo u ’l l n e e d : • Fused glass pendant kit* (#340-800, facing pg.) • Toyo pistol-grip glass-cutter (#111-681, pg. 130) • Breaker/grozier pliers (#111-635, pg. 131) • Running pliers (#111-634, pg. 131) • Rio enamel adhesive (#350-041, pg. 168) • Primo Primer (#701-411, pg. 138) • Firing paper (#500-194, pg. 133) * System 96® glass is included in this particular kit. But if you prefer to use Uroboros® FX 90, see pages 90–99 for a selection!

a

Line up the mark on the top of the running pliers with the score line you made in the glass sheet (fig. c). Hold the glass on the side opposite the pliers with your free hand. Gently squeeze the plier handles, applying just enough pressure to snap the glass (fig. d).

b

Toyo Pistol-Grip Glass-Cutter (page 130) 111-681 $29.95

continued on facing page

128

riogrande.com

800.545.6566


Running Pliers (page 131) 111-634 $12.95 continued from facing page

This will be the base of your pendant. Repeat these steps to cut a piece of clear glass 1mm larger on each side for the top layer of your design.

FUSED GLASS PENDANT KIT This kit includes the supplies you need to create finished fused glass pendants: • Uroboros® System 96® 3mm sheet assortment (#340-702) • Uroboros® System 96® 1.8mm dichroic thin sheet mini asst. (#340-856) • E-6000 epoxy (#206-006) • Sterling glue-on leaf pendant with bail (#689-298) • Black 3mm rubber cord with sterling clasp, 18"L; pkg/2 (#690-934/18)

Select the colors of glass you wish to place between these two layers. Mark your shapes again with a permanent marker. Score the piece with the Toyo pistol-grip glass-cutter (again, starting at the edge of the glass and pushing the cutter away from your body), following the curved lines you marked on the glass (fig. e). You will hear a faint ‘scritch’ as the blade scores the glass. Hold the glass in one hand, and with the other, use the breaking pliers to carefully break off small sections of glass at a time around the scored shapes (fig. f). For finishing curved pieces, a benchtop grinder like the one on page 141 will give the fastest results. You can also use diamond grinding wheels with a flex shaft or Dremel® tool. Once you have cut all the pieces you need, thoroughly clean them using glass cleaner and a white, lint-free cotton towel. Arrange the pieces in your desired layout. Use a few drops of Rio enamel adhesive on the base layer to hold the pieces in place; the adhesive will burn off during firing (fig. g).

Description Fused glass pendant kit

c

Order # 340-800

kit $69.00

It may be necessary to use tweezers to place tiny pieces (fig. h). TIP: Pay close attention when placing your dichroic glass. Your results will vary significantly depending upon which side is facing up. Lay the clear sheet on top and align the edges with the base (fig. i). For smooth edges on your fired piece, you can grind the edges of the top sheet slightly round.

d

g

Arrange your piece for firing. You can use a Solderite™ pad (see riogrande.com or your Tools & Equipment catalog) covered with firing paper or you can set your piece on a kiln shelf which has been prepared with Primo primer.

e

Ramp the kiln at 450°F/hour to 1450°F and hold for 10 minutes. After the hold, open the kiln door ½" to crash-cool to 1100°F then close the door again and allow the kiln to cool completely. Remove the fused piece and clean it with water.

h

To finish this pendant, attach the sterling pendant bail using E-6000 adhesive and string on cord, or see page 187 for ideas on a unique wire-wrapping finish.

f

Finished? Not quite!

i

Find that perfect display and just-right packaging at riogrande. com!

129


FUSING KIT & TOOLS FUSING KIT WITH KILN This kit includes the basics you'll need to fuse glass—even a 120-volt Firefly kiln! Add the glass-cutting kit below to get started right away. This kit includes: • Firefly kiln, 120V (page 63) • Shelf kit (page 62) • Radnor® heat resistant gloves (page 148) • Kiln wash (page 132) • Solaris IR green safety glasses (page 147) • Haik brush (page 132) • Introduction to Glass Fusing by Petra Kaiser (page 154) Description A. Fusing kit with kiln

B. The glass-cutting kit includes all the necessary tools to cut and break glass sheet.

Description Glass-cutting kit

Use item C for cutting special shapes and curves.

Description C. With standard head; 6"L Replacement head D. With straight-edge head; 6"L Replacement head

C

kit $59.95

Order # 111-681 111-681/1 111-636 111-636/1

1-2 3+ each each $29.95 $26.95 17.95 14.95 29.95 26.95 17.95 14.95

BRASS GLASS CUTTER WITH STRAIGHT-EDGE HEAD Get strong, clean scores with this brass cutter. The barrel design and weight make it great for in-line cutting. The oil-fed cutting head is specially designed to run along a straight edge for making long, straight cuts; not recommended for cutting curves and shapes. Description E. Brass glass cutter; 6½"L Replacement head

All glass cutters (items C–F) include a syringe for adding cutting oil.

Order # 340-202

TOYO PISTOL-GRIP GLASS CUTTERS Toyo pistol-grip glass cutters make cutting sheet easy and comfortable. Score sheet with the oil-fed cutting head. Handle color may vary. Use item C for cutting curves and shapes. Item D is ideal for cutting sheet along a long, straight edge (the special head reduces visibility of the cutting wheel; not recommended for cutting curves and shapes).

B

Use item D for cutting sheet along a long, straight edge.

kit $485.00

GLASS-CUTTING KIT Includes tools and supplies for cutting and breaking glass sheet. • Breaker/grozier plier, 3/8"; running plier with plastic-lined jaws, 1"; and breaking plier, 1/2" (all described on the facing page) • Toyo pistol-grip glass cutter (item C, below) • Glass-cutter oil (item G, below)

A

D

Order # 340-200

Order # 111-637 111-637/1

1-2 3+ each each $24.95 $21.95 18.95 15.95

CUSTOM GRIP GLASS CUTTER WITH STRAIGHT-EDGE HEAD This custom-grip cutter features a self-oiling, durable carbide steel wheel and four saddle positions. Remove the oil screw and add or remove the spacer to lengthen or shorten the saddle. The cutting head is designed to run along a straight edge; not recommend for cutting curves and shapes. Barrel color may vary.

E

Description F. Custom grip glass cutter; 5¼"L Replacement head

Order # 111-639 111-639/1

1-2 3+ each each $32.95 $29.95 23.95 20.95

GLASS-CUTTER OIL This cutting oil helps your glass cutter make perfect scores every time and extends the life of your cutter. Water soluble, easy to wipe away.

F

Description G. Glass-cutter oil; 4-oz. bottle

Order # 111-640

1-2 each $4.95

3+ each $4.55

G

130

riogrande.com

800.545.6566


CUTTING & BREAKING PLIERS WHEELED GLASS NIPPERS Use these nippers to cut and shape glass sheet; they also work great for snipping rods and noodles. Replacement wheels are available. Description A. Wheeled glass nippers; 8"L Replacement wheels; pkg/2

Order # 111-630 111-630/2

1-2 3+ each each $24.95 $21.95 11.40 9.00

BREAKER/GROZIER PLIERS These pliers break glass sheet along a score line; they work especially well along curves and require very little pressure to break the glass. B.

Jaw Width 3⁄8"

Jaw Length 11⁄8"

Overall Length 6"

Order # 111-635

1-2 each $11.50

3+ each $8.50

A

Items B–D are included in RUNNING PLIERS WITH PLASTIC-LINED JAWS a convenient glass-cutting kit (item B, facing page). These easy-to-use pliers break straight and shallow curved scores in glass sheet. Simply align the score line on the jaw with the score on your glass sheet and squeeze. Tips are lined with plastic to protect the glass. Set screw prevents crushing the glass.

Jaw Width C. 1"

Jaw Length 1½"

Overall Length 8"

Order # 111-634

1-2 each $12.95

3+ each $9.95 B

BREAKING The tools on this page are must-haves for breaking glass sheet once it’s been properly cut (see page 109 for a cutting tip). And once you see how easily, safely and cleanly they break glass, they’ll find a permanent home in your studio! See page 111 for tips on breaking glass sheet. C

BREAKING PLIERS Use these pliers to break narrow cuts in glass sheet and to hold glass while using the breaker/grozier pliers (item B, above). Jaw Width D. ½"

Jaw Length 1"

Overall Length 6½"

Order # 111-633

Align the score line on the jaw with the score in the glass sheet and gently squeeze to break glass.

1-2 3+ each each $12.50 $10.75

PLASTIC RUNNING PLIERS These lightweight running pliers offer good control while breaking straight or gently curved scores in glass sheet. The jaws are designed to apply proper pressure to the score for a clean break. Made of fiberglass-reinforced plastic. Includes one pair of replacement tips. E.

Jaw Width 1"

Jaw Length 1¼"

Overall Length 8"

Order # 111-641

1-2 each $9.95

3+ each $7.95

D

HARDWOOD BENCH BRUSH This bench brush is great for collecting even the finest pieces of glass! Features four rows of 1½" horsehair bristles. F.

Description Bench brush; 9¼"L

Order # 113-586

1 each $11.95

2 each $9.95 Item E includes replacement tips.

E

F

131


FUSING KILN & ACCESSORIES RIO ENAMEL ADHESIVE This water-soluble adhesive is ideal for temporarily securing confetti, coarse frit and small pieces of glass in place before fusing—great for layering glass. Adhesive will burn off during firing. Important: Allow adhesive to dry before firing. Description A. Rio enamel adhesive, 1 pint

each $10.95

E-6000 ADHESIVE Use this all-purpose adhesive for attaching findings to glass pieces. No mixing required! Please Note: Cannot be shipped by air. Made in the USA. • Also bonds plastic, rubber, leather, metal and other materials. • Dries clear in 24 hours; non-flammable and waterproof.

A Use adhesives (items A and B) to temporarily hold layers of glass in place during fusing.

Order # 350-041

B

C B.

Description E-6000 adhesive; 3.7-oz. tube

Order # 206-006

1-2 each $5.95

3-5 each $5.45

6-11 each $4.80

5-MINUTE EPOXY & HARDENER Use this fast-setting, non-shrinking clear epoxy to secure findings, such as pendant bails, to glass pieces. A chemical reaction forges a strong bond that’s highly chemical-resistant. Can also be used on metals, wood, ceramics, stones and other non-porous surfaces. Mix in equal parts; pot life is five minutes, cure time is 1 hour. Use a small brush to apply.

D

E Description Order # C. 5-minute epoxy; two 4½-oz. bottles 206-025 Lengthen the life of your kiln by protecting it from glass or enamel drips with kiln wash (item F). Use a haik brush (item E) to apply the wash to the kiln floor, shelves and furniture.

F

1-2 3-5 6-11 each each each $15.75 $12.75 $10.75

SOLARIS KILN GLASSES These glasses offer comfortable PVC nose pads and rubber bayonet temples. Optical-grade lenses have a scratch-resistant coating and provide 99.9 % UV protection. Meets ANSI Z87.1 requirements. Description D. Kiln glasses with IR green #3 lens

Order # 201-052

1-2 3-5 each each $11.85 $10.80

HAIK BRUSH Use this lightweight brush to apply kiln wash to kiln furniture, shelves and kiln floor before fusing. Bristle length: 2". E.

Description Haik brush; 6"L x 1¾"W

Order # 330-028

1-2 each $8.95

3-5 each $6.95

KILN WASH Mix with water to the consistency of thick cream and paint it on the kiln floor, shelves and furniture to prevent damage caused by glass and enamel drips. Use the haik brush (item E, above) to apply. F. See page 62 to learn all about the Rio PMC® kiln and all it can do for your fusing, firing and enameling applications.

Order # 703-050

1-2 each $3.95

3+ each $2.95

G

H Item H includes two shelves and eight feet; item I includes one shelf and four feet.

132

Description Kiln wash; 1-lb. bag

RIO PMC® KILN & SHELF KITS Designed for fusing glass and annealing beads as well as a wide range of other applications, this kiln is an excellent value—especially if you’re also a metal clay artist! Easy to use and program, the kiln provides five pre-set programs and four that you can custom-design. Add one of our stackable shelf kits (items H and I) to increase capacity as your production needs require. See page 62 for more information about the Rio kiln and shelf kits. I

Description G. Rio PMC® kiln H. Ceramic shelf kit I. Solderite™ shelf kit

Order # 703-117 703-080 703-067

riogrande.com

each $715.00 25.50 12.95

800.545.6566


FUSING KILNS & ACCESSORIES FUSION-7 GLASS-FIRING KILN This large kiln is perfect for fusing glass jewelry pieces and small glass bowls, slumping, draping and firing on bracelet mandrels (page 138). Please Note: Glass must be fired on a shelf or kiln furniture (item B, below); never fire glass directly on the kiln floor. The durable kiln furniture features cordierite construction and resists warpage and thermal shock; includes a 1-lb. bag of kiln wash. • Sentry Xpress three-key controller allows you to control heating and cooling; stores up to four programs and includes both single-speed and eight-segment ramp-hold modes. • Single top door allows easy access to the 61/2" deep x 141/2" diameter interior. • Features durable insulating firebricks in the lid (3" thick), walls and floor (both 21/2" thick), durable contruction and a galvanized steel base. • The element is seated in pinless grooves in the roof. • Conveniently plugs into a standard outlet. • Controller displays temperatures thoughout the cycle in your choice of Fahrenheit or Celsius; easy-to-read LED display. • Includes one-year warranty and instruction manual. Overall dimensions: 22"W x 241/2"D x 21"H (559 x 663 x 534mm) Inside chamber: 61/2"H x 141/2" dia. (166 x 369mm) Max. temperature: 1700°F (926°C) Power: 120 volts, 1800 watts, 15 amps Shipping weight: 94 lbs. (42.6kg) Description Order # A. Fusion-7 glass-firing kiln 703-135 B. Kiln furniture; 703-106 includes 1-lb. bag of kiln wash (item F, facing page)

each $775.00 34.95

FIREFLY KILN This powerful, portable kiln gives you the freedom to create anywhere you find a standard 120-volt outlet. Fire glass, stoneware, PMC®, enamels and more. Adjustable temperature control with digital accuracy allows you to fire with precision. Constructed of 21/2"thick insulating firebrick, interlocked at the corners for durability, this kiln holds heat efficiently and ensures a safe, gradual cool-down. Sturdy 3" steel base and rubber feet allow you to set up on any heatsafe surface without stands. A digital pyrometer is included. Overall dimensions: 15"W x 181/2"D x 12"H (38 x 47 x 30.5cm) Inside chamber: 8"W x 8"D x 41/2"H (20.3 x 20.3 x 11.4cm) Max. temperature: 2350°F (1288°C) Power: 120 volts, 1680 watts, 14 amps Shipping weight: 45 lbs. (20.4kg) Description C. Firefly kiln

Order # 703-114

A

Use kiln furniture (item B) inside your kiln to fuse glass. Important: Never fire glass directly on the kiln floor. Use the haik brush (item E, facing page) to apply the included kiln wash to protect the floor from glass drips.

B

each $395.00

FIRING PAPER When fusing, protect the kiln floor with firing paper. Item D is re-useable if used with care; item E is effective for one-time use. Description D. Thick, 24" x 24" x 1⁄8"; pkg/1 E. Thin, 12" x 12" x 1⁄32"; pkg/5

Order # 500-192 500-194

D

1-2 3+ pkg pkg $14.55 $12.35 6.75 5.65

E

C

133


Matching cast glass earrings and pendant by Patti Sowell

CASTING Sure, you can fire dozens of pieces at once, but the best part of glass-casting? Knowing that each and every piece that comes out of the mold will have its own character just because the color combination you used in each little mold reacted just a bit differently to the heat than its neighbor did.

“The simplest thing can give your piece character.” —Patti Sowell

What better way to add character to your jewelry design?

PROJECT Cast Glass Pendant & Earring Set Create several fused-glass components at once! Choose a mold shape (we have lots to choose from!), apply a layer of primer, fill the mold with colorful glass, and fire it in a kiln. It’s that easy!

w h a t yo u ’l l n e e d : • • • • • • •

Cast glass pendant & earring kit (#340-801, facing pg.) Haik brush (#330-028, pg. 132) PMC® beading awl (#111-386, pg. 20) 3M N100 respirator (#201-654, pg. 149) Solderite™ pad (#502-052, see riogrande.com) Pattern hole punch Mixing bowl

134

Preparing the mold. For this project, we used the two molds included in the Cast Glass Earring & Pendant Kit (#340801, facing page). If you would like to use different molds, see pages 136 and 137. Since you will be using two molds that hold different volumes of glass, a separate firing will be required. NOTE: If you decide to use molds of a similar volume, you can fire them both at once.

a

Mix the Primo Primer in a small resealable bowl according to the instructions; make sure to wear the particulate respirator while mixing. Place the mold on top of a Solderite™ pad. Using the haik brush, apply 4–5 layers of Primo Primer to both the interiors of the mold cavities and to the entire top of the mold, then allow it to dry. You can use a blow dryer to accelerate drying.

riogrande.com

800.545.6566


b

c

d

e

f

g

h

The primer will turn from purple to white once it is fired (fig. a). Store the remaining mixed Primo Primer for future use. NOTE: When using Primo Primer, you may notice rough edges on the fired glass. If this happens, use a diamond file to smooth the edges, then fire the glass a second time. Using a small spoon, fill the large mold to the top with fine frit (fig. b). Carefully tap the side of mold to fill in the edges and level the frit. If you get any frit on the top of the mold, lightly brush it back into the cavity with a fine paintbrush. Be careful not to brush so hard that you remove the dried layer of primer. Take a stiff piece of paper (cardstock works well) and cut out your design using any pattern hole punch. Lay this template over the filled mold (fig. c), and lightly sprinkle the cutout with a spoonful of a different color of fine frit (fig. d). Spread the frit around the cutout shape with the back of the spoon until it is completely covered with a thin layer of frit. Take the beading awl and carefully slide it under a corner of the paper template. Slowly lift it up and grab the opposing corner of the template, gently lifting the template off the mold (fig. e). Lift slowly to avoid disturbing the frit; your template will leave a crisp pattern of opposing color on the top of the mold (fig. f). Pour the frit left on the template back into its container. Fire the large mold (see Firing) and let the kiln cool to room temperature before opening. NOTE: Remember that, for this particular project, you will need to fire molds of varying volumes separately. Fill the smaller molds close to the top with one color of fine frit (fig. g). Lightly tap the sides and make sure the frit is level and the edges are filled. Fire (see Firing) and let the kiln cool to room temperature before opening. Remove the cool molds and finish filling them along the edges and on top with the same color of fine frit. Leave just enough room on top for a small sprinkling of your second color of frit. Sprinkle this color by lightly tapping the bowl of your small

CAST GLASS PENDANT & EARRING KIT Create earring and pendant sets using the supplies in this kit! Includes: • Uroboros® System 96® frit assortment (#340-299) • Ceramic teardrop pendant molds (#340-985 and #340-979) • Sterling glue-on fluted pendant bail; pkg/2 (#686-840) • Sterling glue-on fluted component with ring; pkg/2 (#686-841) • E-6000 epoxy (#206-006) • Primo Primer; 1-lb. tub (#701-410) • Black rubber cord with sterling clasp, 18"L; pkg/3 (#632-826/18) • Sterling ear wires; pkg/4 (#693-162) Description Cast glass pendant & earring kit

Order # 340-801

kit $89.00

spoon with your finger (fig. h). Brush back any errant frit into the mold with a fine paintbrush. Check that all the smaller molds are equally filled, then fire again. Firing. Place the mold and Solderite™ pad in the kiln making sure they are lying flat and not touching the walls of the kiln. When firing more than one mold, make sure they do not touch each other. Note: Never stack molds. If using a Fusion-7 kiln, remove the vent plug (see the Fusion-7 on page 133). Ramp at 500°F per hour to 1480°F and hold for the approximate times below: • ½" x ½" molds: 5 mins. • 1" x 1" to 2" x 2" molds: 8–10 mins. • 2" and larger molds: 10–12 mins. Please Note: These times and temperatures will vary with different kilns, especially smaller kilns. It’s okay to peek inside the kiln to make sure the glass is fusing properly, but never open the kiln when the temperature is below 1000°F, as this may crack the glass. Once the firing cycle is complete and the kiln is at room temperature, remove the mold. Turn the mold upside down and allow the glass pieces to fall into your hand. Wearing the respirator, clean the mold with a brush and paper towel. Clean gently; the walls of the mold are thin. Use E-6000 epoxy to glue the glass pieces to the glue-on bail and components. Attach the earring components to the ear wires, string the pendant onto the rubber cord, and your set is complete!

Finished? Not quite! Find that perfect display and just-right packaging at riogrande. com!

135


CERAMIC MOLDS CERAMIC MOLDS FOR GLASS Add glass to these re-useable ceramic molds to create fused glass pieces in a kiln. Items A–K have four cavities per mold. Items L–N come as shown below. Coat molds with Primo Primer (page 138) before each use to prevent glass from sticking to them.

Items A–K each have four cavities like those shown above.

A

A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. L. M. N.

Shape Squares Slashed squares Stars Hearts Crosses Triangles Spheres Circles Rectangles Ovals Bars Teardrop Cross Mixed shapes

Overall Mold Size 5" x 5" 5" x 5" 7" x 7" 6" x 6" 5¼" x 4½" 6½" x 5" 5" x 5" 5" x 5" 6½" x 5¼" 6" x 4½" 5¼" x 23⁄4" 2½" x 2" 4" x 3" 7¾" x 2¾"

Cavity Size 1½" x 1½" 1½" x 1½" 2" 2" 2" x 1½" 2" 1½" dia. x ½"D 1½" dia. x ½"D 2½" x 1¼" 2" x 1½" 1¾" x ¾" 2¾" x 1¼" 3¼" x 2½" 2"

Order # 340-970 340-971 340-973 340-974 340-987 340-975 340-978 340-977 340-972 340-976 340-986 340-985 340-984 340-992

1-2 each $12.95 12.95 12.95 12.95 12.95 12.95 12.95 12.95 12.95 12.95 12.95 10.95 14.95 25.95

3+ each $9.95 9.95 9.95 9.95 9.95 9.95 9.95 9.95 9.95 9.95 9.95 7.95 11.95 22.95

Use a mold brush to apply Primo Primer to your ceramic molds before filling them with glass; see both on page 138.

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

Items B–K each have four cavities like those represented in item A, above.

L

136

M

N

riogrande.com

800.545.6566


C EI N RA T RMOI C D UM CO T ILO DN S

“Glass offers an endless spectrum of color!” —Valerie Hensen

Mold Brushes (page 138) 330-025 $9.95 each 330-026 16.95 set/3

CERAMIC MOLDS FOR GLASS Add glass to these re-useable ceramic molds to create fused glass pieces in a kiln. Coat molds with Primo Primer using a small brush before each use; primer and brushes are available on page 138. Items A–F have 16 cavities per mold. Items G–J come as shown below. A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J.

Shape Heart Square Circle Teardrop Leaf Squares Smooth bracelet Rope bracelet Woven bracelet Oval bracelet

Overall Mold Size 5½" x 5½" 5½" x 5½" 5½" x 5½" 5¾" x 5" 6" x 4½" 5½" x 5½" 8¼" x 2½" 8¼" x 2½" 8¼" x 2½" 8¼" x 2½"

Shape Sizes (16) ¾" (16) 5⁄8" x 5⁄8" (16) ¾" dia. (16) ¾" x ½" (16) ¾" x ½" (16) 1" x 1" (1) 7¼" x 1¾" (1) 7¼" x 1¾" (1) 7¼" x 1¾" (1) 7¼" x 1¾"

B

Order # 340-980 340-981 340-983 340-979 340-982 340-993 340-988 340-989 340-990 340-991

1-2 3+ each each $13.95 $10.95 13.95 10.95 13.95 10.95 13.95 10.95 13.95 10.95 25.95 22.95 25.95 22.95 25.95 22.95 25.95 22.95 25.95 22.95

C

Items A–F each have 16 cavities like those shown above.

D

E

A

F

Items B–F each have 16 cavities like those represented in item A, above.

detail, item I

detail, item G

G

I

detail, item H

detail, item J

H J

137


CASTING TOOLS MOLD BRUSHES Use the very soft, wide primer brush (item A) to apply Primo Primer (item G, below) to ceramic molds and kiln furniture prior to firing glass. The brush sets (items B and C) are ideal for arranging dry frit or “packing” frit that has been moistened with fusing adhesives. Item B includes three small brushes. Item C includes four Murena-Sable and four Tamara-Kolinsky brushes in sizes 00, 0, 2 and 4.

A

Description A. Primer brush; ¾" wide

Order # 330-025

B. Mold brushes; set/3 C. Premium artist’s brushes; set/8

330-026 350-060

1-2 each $9.95

B. set of 3

3+ each $7.95

Sold as a set $16.95 $13.95 29.95 25.95

GRAPHITE TONGS Use these graphite-tipped tongs to form molten glass around the bracelet molds below to create cuff bracelets. Description D. Graphite tongs; 10½"L C. set of 8

Use these tongs to form molten glass around the bracelet forming mandrels below. We recommend using a top-load kiln such as the Fusion-7 (page 133).

D

E

1-2 3+ each each $27.95 $23.95

STAINLESS STEEL GLASS-FORMING BRACELET MANDREL Form and fuse glass bracelets right in the kiln with this stainless steel bracelet mandrel. The leg design offers stability and allows for easy bracelet removal. Use it for making bracelets smaller than 6" in circumference. Recommended for use in top-loading kilns. See a tip on forming bracelets on page 96. E.

Description Bracelet mandrel

1-2 3+ each each $69.95 $64.95

Order # 300-037

RADNOR® SAFETY GLOVES These heat-resistant gloves are great for working with hot glass and enamels. Flexible enough to grip even small tongs securely! Blue shoulder-split gloves are made of tough cowhide, are lined with cotton and foam and feature a reinforced thumb wing. F.

See a tip on forming glass bracelets around this mandrel on page 96.

Graphite Surface Order # 1¾" x 1¼" 701-402

Description Small Large

1-2 pair $11.75 11.75

Order # 350-051 350-050

3+ pair $9.50 9.50

PRIMO PRIMER Use Primo Primer to keep fused glass from sticking to kiln shelves, furniture and casting molds. Easy to apply and easy to clean after firing—remove the residue with a wet sponge. Mix with water to the consistency of thick cream and paint it on surfaces to prevent sticking. Description G. 5-lb. tub 1-lb. tub

1-2 3+ each each $21.95 $15.95 8.95 6.95

Order # 701-411 701-410

F

G

138

Use the ceramic bracelet molds from page 137 (items G–J) to create colorful fused-glass cuff bracelets. Form the cuff using the graphite tongs (item D, above) around the bracelet forming mandrel (item E, above). We recommend using a top-load kiln such as the Fusion-7 (page 133).

Fused glass bracelets by Jayne Persico, courtesy of Uroboros®.

riogrande.com

800.545.6566


POLISHING EQUIPMENT & SUPPLIES The fast rotation plus the slits in each disc or pad allow you to work from the underside of the unit and have a clear view of your piece from above.

JOOLTOOL SHARPENING & POLISHING SYSTEM AND ACCESSORIES This innovative system is ideal for polishing glass, metal clay pieces, fine jewelry, wood and more. The rotation is so fast that the piece doesn’t feel the interruptions and you can always see your progress. The vortex design keeps your piece cool. An attachment is available to attach the system directly to a vacuum for dust collection. The discs and pads feature innovative See-Thru Design™, providing a clear view of the workpiece for more accurate results. Attach discs to the hard backup pad (#330-571) when you need a flat surface for lapping processes, or the cushioned backup pad with PSA peel and stick backing (#330-572) when there is a need to contour your piece. Visit riogrande.com for more information about JoolTool accessories. Description A. JoolTool system

Order # 330-570

Backup Pads Description Hard backup pad Cushioned backup pad with PSA

Visit riogrande. com for more information about JoolTool accessories.

each $275.00

A

Packaging varies; please see below Pkg 1-2 Qty Order # pkg 3 330-571 $38.99 3 330-572 38.99

Metal Applications 3M purple asst.; 3 each of 80-, 120-, 220-grit Purple disc, 80-grit 120-grit 220-grit 3M microfinishing film kit 3 each of 60, 30, 15, 9 micron 3M Scotch-Brite™ unitized kit; 1 each of coarse, medium and fine 3M Scotch-Brite™ unitized, coarse medium fine 3M Scotch-Brite™ flap wheel, medium

9 6 6 6 12

330-580 330-573 330-574 330-575 330-583

$26.99 17.99 17.99 17.99 25.99

3

330-596

73.99

1 1 1 1

330-593 330-594 330-595 330-597

25.99 25.99 25.99 18.99

3M stone and carbide polishing kit; 6 330-584 1 each of 1800, 3000, 8000, 50000 mesh; 2 each cerium oxide 3M diamond disc, 220-mesh 1 330-585 3M diamond microfinishing film kit; 4 330-586 1 each of 74, 45, 30, 20 micron 3M diamond microfilm 125 micron 2 330-587 74 micron 2 330-588 330-589 45 micron 2 30 micron 2 330-590 20 micron 2 330-591 Buff and polish felt disc 1 330-592

$89.99

Metal, Glass and Stone Applications 19.99 39.99

B 247⁄8"

97⁄8"

B. ½HP VARIABLE SPEED MAX 007 GRINDER Run up to six different wheels, including expandable drums with belts at their optimum speeds on this universal grinder, ensuring maximum production value in both performance and service life. Great for metal or glass work! For specifications, visit riogrande.com. Description Max polishing unit, 007

25.99 25.99 25.99 25.99 25.99 18.99

C

This long-wearing, diamond abrasive with flexible film backing delivers fast, repeatable results and is suitable for lapidary or metal working applications. Run wet or dry. Made in the USA. Mesh 120 220 320 400 600

Order # 203-030 203-031 203-032 203-033 203-034

each $995.00

C. ALUMINUM HUB True-running with no wobble or bounce, this precision-machined aluminum hub eliminates chatter and delivers better control. The slightly harder-durometer rubber reduces cupping.

675L DIAMOND MICRO-FINISHING FILM BELTS

Size D. 4" x 1"

Order # 203-090

each $6.75 6.75 6.75 6.75 6.75

Size 4" x 1"

Center Hole 3⁄8"

Order # 201-076

each $49.00

F D E

DIAMOND CABBING AND POLISHING BELTS Cloth-backed diamond abrasive, graded from .5 micron to 15 microns, produces an ultra-high finish on most materials. Use for all lapidary finishing, cutting, shaping and smoothing. Run wet for best results. E.

Size 4" x 1"

Grit 3000 8000 50000

Order # 203-036 203-037 203-038

1 each $13.90 13.90 13.90

2+ each $12.80 12.80 12.80

RIO SUPER SANDING BELTS Carefully graded silicon carbide abrasive is resin-bonded to durable backing. Use wet or dry in lapidary and metalworking applications. F.

Size 4" x 1" pkg/5

Grit 120 220 320 400 600

Order # 201-780 201-781 201-782 201-783 201-784

1 pkg $3.20 3.20 3.20 3.20 3.20

2-9 pkg $2.70 2.70 2.70 2.70 2.70

10+ pkg $2.35 2.35 2.35 2.35 2.35

139


GRINDING & SHAPING EQUIPMENT

Grinding, polishing & shaping glass . . . made fast & easy! Now that you’ve created a vivid fused glass

to smooth the back of a fused piece; to create a notch around a

piece, or you’ve flameworked an incredible bead,

bead for wire-wrapping; or to fine-tune the shape of a piece so it

it might be necessary to smooth out the rough

fits nicely in a bezel setting. The result? The professional, finished

edges. The equipment below can be used to grind

look your pieces deserve.

down sharp points left over from a casting mold; Trim saw work top (shown with drip system in place; the system can be used with any of the work tops)

Grinder/shaper work top

Flat lap work top

All-In-Wonder™ base

A. All-In-Wonder™ lapidary workshop

SWAPTOP™ 6" AND 8" ALL-IN-WONDER™ COMPLETE LAPIDARY WORKSHOPS Choose either the 6" or 8" workshop, and set up your All-In-Wonder™ The base machine features a sturdy, 11"W x 10"D x 7"H support as a flat lap, a trim saw, or a grinder/shaper—and change the set-up surface with a ½" arbor that drives any of the work top components. as often as you need to. This complete workshop includes a base • Direct-drive, permanent magnet motor with precision speed control machine and all three specialized glass and lapidary components. (up to 2800rpm); powerful enough for all your lapidary applications. • Water-drip system helps protect your work pieces, ensures a cleaner If you don’t need the complete workshop today, simply choose workspace and provides the most efficient use of each component. the component you want; all are available individually with a base Description Order # each machine. When you’re ready, just order the next component you 204-053 $385.00 A. 6" All-In-Wonder™ lapidary workshop want as a conversion kit (the component without a base machine). 8" All-In-Wonder™ lapidary workshop 204-082 475.00 SWAPTOP™ FLAT LAP WORKSHOPS & 8" CONVERSION KIT The SwapTop™ flat laps are powerful cabbing and grinding machines; great for shaping glass to fit into bezel or other settings and for smoothing and flattening the ends of flameworked beads. Both flat laps include a spacious work surface, four diamond laps (170-, 325-, 600- and 1200-grit), a miter guide, a master lap and a polishing pad. Description B. SwapTop™ machine with 6" flat lap SwapTop™ machine with 8" flat lap C. SwapTop™ 8" flat lap conversion kit

Order # 204-056 204-080 204-081

each $280.00 360.00 278.00

riogrande.com

800.545.6566

B

Please Note: Both base machines accommodate any of the conversion kits.

140

C


GRINDING & SHAPING EQUIPMENT SWAPTOP™ TRIM SAW WORKSHOP & CONVERSION KIT The SwapTop™ 6½" trim saw meets your glass and stone trimming and cutting needs. The trim saw includes an aluminum work surface with rip fence and protractor, blade-guard, water shroud and one 6½" x .020" diamond blade. Description A. SwapTop™ machine with trim saw B. SwapTop™ trim saw conversion kit Replacement diamond saw blade, 6½" dia.

Order # 204-054 204-055 204-067

each $169.00 84.00 26.25

SWAPTOP™ GRINDER/SHAPER WORKSHOP & CONVERSION KIT The tough, efficient SwapTop™ grinder/shaper is ideal for smoothing out rough or sharp edges left in glass after cutting, firing or casting. Use it to grind, shape, finish and drill a wide variety of mineral-based materials such as stone, marble and tile. The grinder/shaper includes a gridded work surface with guide fences, a 100-grit 1"-dia. diamond shaper and splash guard. Additional diamond shaper grits are available (item E, below) to allow maximum flexibility of grinding operations. Use the lower grit numbers for fast, rough shaping and the higher grit numbers for finer, smoother finishes. Description Order # C. SwapTop™ machine with grinder/shaper 204-058 D. SwapTop™ grinder/shaper conversion kit 204-059 E.

SwapTop™ diamond shaper, 1" dia.

Grit 60 80 100 200 325

204-068 204-069 204-070 204-071 204-072

B A

D

each $112.00 34.00

C

Please Note: Both All-In-Wonder™ base machines accommodate any of the conversion kits.

each $22.65 22.65 22.65 22.65 22.65

E

F

SWAPTOP™ ACCESSORIES Attach an arbor/nut set (item F) to each of your diamond laps, allowing you to change them out quickly and easily. Use the grooving bit (item G) with your SwapTop™ grinder/shaper to cut neat, professional, 1mm grooves into glass or glass pieces for wire-wrapping applications. Grooves hold 20-gauge wire. Description F. Arbor/nut set G. Diamond grooving bit, 1mm

Order # 204-060 204-073

each $13.50 23.20

INLAND DB 100 BAND SAW The Inland DB 100 diamond band saw cuts glass, stone, tile, marble, plastics and more. Great for cutting intricate shapes and corners quickly and more efficiently than cutting them by hand! Its work surface is 9" x 10" machined aluminum. The coolant system provides a continuous, regulated flow of coolant to the diamond blade for wet-sawing and features an integrated internal drain. Its permanent-magnet, high-torque motor with build-in speed control (up to 2800rpm) maintains torque as speed decreases. Includes one diamond band-saw blade; replacement blades available below. Overall dimensions: 8"H x 10"D x 12"W Throat depth: 4¾" Weight: 9 lbs. Description H. DB 100 band saw Replacement diamond band saw blade

Order # 204-061 204-066

G

each $228.00 61.75

The built-in coolant system protects the saw blade against heat damage, ensuring a longer service life.

H

Glass cabochon bracelet by Patti Sowell. Sterilng ring & connector bracelet (#632-441/7) can be found at riogrande.com.

141


FLEX SHAFT & MINI DRILL PRODIGY™ FLEX SHAFT SYSTEM One of the tools jewelery-makers covet most is a flex shaft. Compared to using more traditional hand tools, a flex shaft drastically reduces the time and effort needed to complete a wide variety of tasks and allows you to focus on the creative and aesthetic end result you’re after. The Prodigy™ flex shaft is very affordable, extremely well built, and is easy to set up and use. Although the flex shaft is compatible with most handpieces, the system includes a key-type chuck-style handpiece that holds a wide variety of attachments and tools. Use the Prodigy for reaming and polishing glass beads as well as for polishing, grinding, cutting, texturing, drilling and carving your metal clay designs. System includes: • 1/8 hp ball bearing 20,000rpm motor. • Electronic foot control with plastic housing for hands-free speed control. • Key-type chuck (holds shanks up to 5/32" (4mm) in diameter). • Prodigy™ key-type handpiece (also available separately; item B, below); fits most standard flex shaft motors with quick-attach shafts.

A. Prodigy flex shaft system

B. Prodigy™ handpiece (included with item A)

Shipping Description Amps Weight A. Prodigy™ flex shaft system 2.6 12.5 lbs. B. Prodigy™ flex shaft handpiece only

Item A includes a key-type handpiece and chuck handle.

Order # 117-095 117-098

each $99.00 27.95

FLEX SHAFT SWING-AWAY™ MOTOR STAND Rio Grande’s exclusive heavy-duty Swing-Away™ motor stand allows you to pull your motor toward you while working. When released, the arm automatically swings the motor and shaft out of your way. Order extra swing-away arms to accommodate as many motors as you need. Swing-away arms are engineered to be self-centering. Orient the arms on the stand to achieve the desired staggered height and radius alignment for your motors. The sturdy aluminum Swing-Away™ stand is 42" tall and screws onto your benchtop. Description C. Swing-Away™ stand with one arm D. Additional Swing-Away™ arm

Looking down at the bench from above, you can see how the flex shaft motor swings automatically out of the way when released.

Order # 117-291 117-292

each $29.95 14.00

Item C is shown with an additional Swing-Away™ arm (item D, not included).

C

D

MINI DRILL PRESS Perfect for the smaller workshop, this mini drill press is great for quickly drilling holes in metal and glass to make beads and pendants. It offers excellent control, increasing the life of your drills. Variable speeds are at your fingertips in three ranges: low (0–5000rpm), medium (0–6500rpm) and high (0–8500rpm). Jacobs chuck spindle accommodates shank diameters up to 6.5mm. Work surface is die-cast for durability. • Work surface dimensions: 6¾" x 6¾" • Max. drill height: 5" • Throat depth: 3¾" • Spindle travel: 1" E.

142

Description Mini drill press

Order # 330-012

each $59.00

E

riogrande.com

800.545.6566


DRILLS & ABRASIVES 2.0

2.5

3.0

5.0

1.0

6.5

1.3

1.4

1.6

1.8

2.1

1.0

1.25

1.5

1.75

2.0

2.5

B

9.5

11.0

10.0

A

A. DIAMOND CORE DRILL SET The open-cylinder, fine-wall design of these 1/8"-shank core drills helps you cut precsion cores faster and cooler. They work quickly and accurately on glass, stone, metal and ceramic. Industrial diamonds are metalbonded inside and outside of the cylinders. Set includes sizes 2.0, 2.5, 3.0, 5.0, 6.5, 9.5, 10.0 and 11.0mm. Description Diamond core drills; set/8

Order # 349-000

B. DIAMOND TWIST DRILL SET For glass, stone and plated materials, these 3/32"-shank diamond twist drills clean out material better than regular diamond drills. Recommended speed: 5000–30,000rpm. Set includes sizes 1.0, 1.3, 1.4, 1.6, 1.8 and 2.1mm. Description Diamond twist drills; set/6

Order # 349-020

set $27.50

C

C. DIAMOND CORE DRILL SET These drills are hollow all the way through the shaft, so they drill faster with less clogging. Ideal for reaming beads and drilling smaller holes in glass, stone, metal and ceramic. Nickel-plated with industrial diamonds, 180-grit. Shank size varies with head size. Set includes sizes 1.0, 1.25, 1.5, 1.75, 2.0 and 2.5mm. Made in China. Description Diamond core drills; set/6

Order # 349-016

set $18.75

set $71.50

E

D

FLEXIBLE DIAMOND SANDING DISC KIT Metal-bonded diamond discs shape and smooth glass, metal, stone and other materials—ideal for working around contours. Discs have a 7/8" diameter with a 1/16" center-hole mounting. Kit includes a screw mandrel and five sanding discs of each mesh: 60, 120, 200, 400 and 800.

FLEX DIAMOND™ ABRASIVE BAND KIT Metal-bonded diamond removes material quickly and leaves a uniform pattern; use them to carve, shape and smooth glass, stone, metal and other materials. Kit includes one drum arbor mandrel and five 1/2" x 1/2" bands (60, 120, 200, 400 and 800 mesh)

Description Diamond sanding disc kit

Description 3M abrasive band kit

D.

F

Order # 337-605

kit $25.75

E.

Order # 200-200

kit $22.60

Adhere strips to a blank sanding stick (item I, below).

H I G

30-PIECE DIAMOND BUR VARIETY SETS Each 30-piece multi-purpose set includes a wide variety of 3/32"-shank burs, including balls, cylinders, cones, footballs and points in a range of head sizes. Each is plated with 120-grit diamond abrasive. Made in China.

PSA FLEX DIAMOND™ ABRASIVE STRIPS & SANDING STICK BLANK Metal-bonded diamond removes material quickly and leaves a uniform pattern. Shape and smooth glass, stone, metal and many other materials. Strips measure 7"L x 3/4"W. Set includes one strip in each mesh: 120, 280, 400 and 800. Peel off backing and press strips to the 12"L x 3/4"W sanding stick blank (item I) for an effective tool.

Shank Head Sizes F. 3⁄32" 1–5mm G. 3⁄32" 1–3.2mm

Description H. 3M PSA Flex Diamonsd™ abrasive strips; set/4 I. Sanding stick blank; pkg/6

Order # 346-063 346-064

set $12.75 11.75

Order # 337-079 337-080

each $18.95 9.95

143


PEN-PLATING SUPPLIES Removeable weighted nylon beaker tray prevents spills. 30ml glass beaker removes easily for washing and refilling.

pen plating

Eyelets in “rabbit ears” keep tension in cords and keep them out of the way.

A Independent solid-state voltage control dials for each pen.

Quick and easy pen changes with quick-connect jacks.

Pen-plate your metal clay and glass designs with Rio Grande’s exclusive MIDAS® line of plating products and equipment! Enjoy the high-quality, repeatable results you can depend on for every job. MIDAS systems offer: • Quick and easy pen changes with quick-connect jacks. • Pens featuring platinum collars that provide greater surface contact with the felt tip and protect against solution contamination. • A console with removeable beaker tray and an airtight color-coded pen rest that allows for easy identification. • A weighted nylon beaker tray to prevent spills. • Solid-state voltage control dials. • A 30ml glass beaker that removes easily for washing and refilling. • High-quality, long-lasting construction; corrosion-resistant stainless steel.

High-quality, corrosion-resistant stainless steel.

IMPORTANT: Before plating glass designs, first apply a layer of MIDAS® conductive paint (item C, page 146).

Trays slide out independently.

MIDAS® PEN-PLATING SYSTEMS Increase speed and avoid errors by setting the voltage control separately for each pen. One- or two-pen systems are available. Up to two people can work at once, each with separate colorcoded pens, leads, solutions and voltages. Rubber feet provide no-slip traction. Each system includes one dozen replacement tips and a The MIDAS® Guide to Plating booklet. Both operate on 110 volts. Made in the USA.

B

An epoxy-filled cavity keeps the connection between the lead and platinum collar free of corrosion and ensures a strong connection.

Platinum collar

Cut-away view shows the platinum collar that holds the felt tip in place (ensuring full contact), protects the solution from contamination and improves current flow.

Description A. MIDAS® pen system B.

C

D

1-5 6-11 each each $91.50 $85.20

Order # 335-139

MIDAS® PEN-PLATING TIPS These premium tips fit most pen-plating systems and can be used with all pen solutions. High-density, long-wearing fibers keep tips sharp for accuracy. Recommended for rhodium plating to avoid solution contamination. Made in Germany. Description D. Regular tips E. Fine tips

Order # 335-160 335-161

Sold in packages of 12 1-2 3-9 10-49 pkg pkg pkg $6.30 $4.75 $3.60 6.85 5.75 4.35

PYREX® PLATING BEAKER Ideal for holding and heating plating baths. Use this beaker for pen-plating.

E F

F.

144

each $229.00 395.00

MIDAS® PLATING PEN & LEAD MIDAS® pens feature platinum collars to ensure full contact with the felt tip and to reduce the risk of contamination. To keep the pen clean, rinse in water after removing the tip. Includes 12 pen tips, one lead and a protective airtight cap. Description C. Pen & lead

MIDAS® pens will adapt to most rectifiers.

# of pens Order # 1 335-136 2 335-137

Description 30ml plating beaker

Order # 335-064

1 each $4.75

riogrande.com

2-5 each $4.30

6-9 each $3.80

800.545.6566


PLATING SOLUTIONS pen-plating solutions MIDAS® solutions are specially developed, formulated and concentrated by Rio Grande to deliver rapid deposition rates and consistent results. Available in a wide range of brilliant colors, all MIDAS pen solutions are sold ready to use. IMPORTANT: Before plating glass designs, first apply a layer of MIDAS conductive paint (item C, page 146). RHODIUM PEN-PLATING SOLUTION This highly concentrated formula produces a brighter, whiter finish that will not tarnish; plates directly onto platinum, gold, nickel or fine-silver only. Hazardous shipping charges apply when shipped by air; inquire when placing your order. Size A. 25ml (½ gram of rhodium) 50ml (1 gram of rhodium)

Order # 335-103 335-104

each $101.75 206.57

All MIDAS products are Rio Grande exclusives. ®

A. rhodium, extra-bright white

A

B. black rhodium

B C. 24K gold, cyanide-based

D. 14K gold, cyanide-based

BLACK RHODIUM PEN-PLATING SOLUTION This highly concentrated solution adds a durable, deep-gray shade to your piece. Hazardous charges apply when shipped by air; inquire when placing your order. B.

Size 25ml (½ gram of rhodium)

Order # 335-168

Order # 335-320 335-321 335-322 335-323

Order # 335-330

Order # 335-165

F. green gold, cyanide-based

E F

G. 24K gold, acid-based

H. 24K gold, quick deposit, acid-based

G H

each $52.84

24K YELLOW GOLD QUICK DEPOSIT PEN-PLATING SOLUTION Acid-Based This complex-bound (contains no free cyanide), concentrated solution contains .8g of gold per 1-oz. bottle. Cannot be shipped by air. Size H. 1 oz. (29.5ml)

E. rose gold, cyanide-based

each $51.53 45.19 50.90 45.39

24K YELLOW GOLD PEN-PLATING SOLUTION Acid-Based Add a rich 24K yellow gold to designs with the ease and convenience of pen plating. Contains ¼ dwt. of gold per 1-oz. bottle. Size G. 1 oz. (29.5ml)

D

each $94.31

GOLD PEN-PLATING SOLUTIONS Cyanide-Based Concentrated, full-strength liquid can be plated directly over silver, nickel, gold, steel or platinum. Karat descriptions refer to color, not content (each contains ¼ dwt. of pure gold per 1-oz. bottle). Description C. 24KY gold, 1 oz. D. 14KY gold, 1 oz. E. Rose gold, 1 oz. F. Green gold, 1 oz.

C

I. silver, cyanide-free

J. flat black, cyanide-free

I.

Order # 335-167

each $9.60

FLAT-BLACK PEN-PLATING SOLUTION For an even, flat-black finish, apply several layers of this solution to the piece. Use on all metals except aluminum, stainless steel and zinc or tin alloys. Do not clean with ultrasonics or steam. Contains nickel chloride. Hazardous shipping charges apply when shipped by air; inquire when placing your order. J.

Size 1 oz. (29.5ml)

Order # 335-164

J 1 pennyweight (dwt.) = 1.5552 grams

each $76.04

SILVER PEN-PLATING SOLUTION Cyanide-Free Add a silver touch to your piece with MIDAS® silver pen-plating solution. Plate this solution directly onto most common metals except chromium, aluminum and stainless steel. Size 1 oz. (29.5ml)

I

K

IMPORTANT: Before plating glass designs, first apply a layer of MIDAS® conductive paint (item C, page 146).

K. nickel pre-plating, cyanide-free (shown enlarged)

Please Note: Prices are based on precious metal market prices. Please call for exact pricing based on daily market.

NICKEL PRE-PLATING SOLUTION Solve the problem of copper color migration through gold plate with this pre-plating solution. For use on sterling and all copper-alloy metals. each $9.60

Size K. 1 oz. (29.5ml)

Order # 335-169

each $8.80

145


PLATING ELECTROFORMING KIT This kit includes the equipment and supplies you need to start electroforming with great results. Qty. 1 1 4 1 1 1 2 1 1 24 1 1 1 4 1

A

Description Digital 5-amp plating rectifier Magnetic stirring system 1000ml PyrexÂŽ beakers MIDASÂŽ conductive paint* Lacquer* 1 quart electroforming solution* Copper anodes SunshineÂŽ Cloth The MIDASÂŽ Guide to Plating book Neolatex glove (12 pairs) 1-lb. spool copper wire, 24-ga. 12" glass stirring rod MIDASÂŽ electro-cleaner mix Safety bottles Plating thermometer

Order # 335-202 335-210 335-040 335-068 335-149 335-074 335-045 337-039 550-289 335-071/12 132-324 335-095 335-076 335-090 700-411

Description Order # kit 335-600 $395.00 A. Electroforming 5-amp kit* *Hazardous charges apply when shipped by air; inquire when placing your order.

MIDASÂŽ SILVER CONDUCTIVE PAINT AND PAINT THINNER Use this paint to prepare non-metallic surfaces such as glass for electroforming. Because silver is highly conductive, you can electroform at a lower amperage and get a brighter plate. MIDASÂŽ conductive paint is solvent-based. Use MIDAS conductive paint thinner to replace loss from evaporation or to thin the paint for application with an air brush. Both contain butyl acetate.

B

C

D

Description Order # each 335-068 $67.73 B. Conductive paint*, 1 oz. C. Conductive paint thinner*, 2 oz. 335-073 13.95 *Hazardous charges apply when shipped by air; inquire when placing your order.

MIDASŽ BRIGHTENER FOR ELECTROFORMING COPPER Acid-Based Add 2–3 drops of this replenishing brightener as needed to MIDASŽ electroforming copper solution to maintain the bath’s ability to produce a bright finish. Description Order # each 335-065 $15.25 D. Brightener; 2-oz. *)B[BSEPVTDIBSHFTBQQMZXIFOTIJQQFECZBJSJORVJSFXIFOQMBDJOHZPVSPSEFS

Plating Non-Metallic Patterns E

F

Use MIDASÂŽ conductive paint followed by a bright electroforming acid copper (below) to prepare a non-metallic pattern for plating.

O rg a n i c To M e ta l l i c To plate a leaf, follow these simple steps: 1. Paint the leaf (or any organic substrate) with lacquer sealant (item F) to seal porous surfaces. 2. Paint with MIDASÂŽ silver conductive paint (item B) to create a metalized finish. 3. Electroform the piece with MIDAS electroforming copper solution (item E). Now you have a metalized piece that you can plate!

146

MIDASÂŽ BRIGHT ELECTROFORMING COPPER SOLUTION Acid-Based MIDASÂŽ bright electroforming copper keeps your work clean and bright throughout the cycle with built-in chemical brighteners. One quart of ready-to-use solution; use with a pure copper anode. Description Order # each 335-074 $16.45 E. Electroforming solution; 1 qt.* *)B[BSEPVTDIBSHFTBQQMZXIFOTIJQQFECZBJSJORVJSFXIFOQMBDJOHZPVSPSEFS

CLEAR LACQUER SEALANT & TARNISH INHIBITOR Use this lacquer to seal porous surfaces before applying conductive paint and to prevent tarnish on metal pieces, increasing their shelf life. Brush on or dip pieces into the lacquer for a transparent coating. Description Order # each F. Clear lacquer sealant; 1 pt.* 335-149 $16.45 *)B[BSEPVTDIBSHFTBQQMZXIFOTIJQQFECZBJSJORVJSFXIFOQMBDJOHZPVSPSEFS

riogrande.com

800.545.6566


OPTICAL & SAFETY

for your bench. Self-locking dial adjustment fits the Optivisor™ to any size head.

DONEGAN OPTIVISOR™ AND LENS PLATES The ever-popular Optivisor™ is the first choice of many jewelers because its lightweight glass lenses are ground and polished to high prismatic optical standards to provide clearer, better optics. Features a genuine leather comfort band. Made in the USA. • Self-locking dial adjustment provides a good fit on any size head. • Adjustable tension-pivot assembly keeps visor in desired position. • Interchangeable lens plates available. A. Optivisor™ with Lens Focal Power Length Lens # 1.5X 20" 2 1.75X 14" 3 2X 10" 4 2.5X 8" 5 2.75X 6" 7 3.5X 4" 10 Optivisor™ without lens Replacement leather comfort band Replacement pivot assembly

Order # 113-200 113-201 113-206 113-208 113-209 113-199 113-212 113-196 116-430

each $34.00 34.00 34.00 34.00 35.00 35.00 21.00 17.50 10.75

113-202 113-203 113-204 113-205 113-207 113-210

$24.00 24.00 24.00 24.00 25.00 25.00

Glass lenses are interchangeable to optimize the visor for each task.

A Genuine leather band provides comfort during extended wear.

B Single-lens plates offer precise magnification for each task.

B. Individual Lens Plates 1.5X 1.75X 2X 2.5X 2.75X 3.5X

20" 14" 10" 8" 6" 4"

2 3 4 5 7 10

MEGAVIEW WITH THREE LENSES High-quality Japanese optics ensure that you can view micro-fine details without distortion. These magnifyers are lightweight and durable, with scratch-proof coating on each lens. Includes 2X, 2.5X and 3X lenses, each housed in a color-coded leatherette pouch so they are easy to identify and you can change the lens without touching it. Can be worn over glasses. Description C. Megaview; 2X, 2.5X, 3X

Order # 115-717

C

set $82.95

for your safety. GUARD-DOG SAFETY GLASSES Use these safety goggles for cutting glass. They’re lightweight and adjustable, with bayonet temples and a comfortable, no-slip nose-piece. Lenses provide 99.9% UV protection and meet ANSI Z87.1 requirements. Lens Material D. Polycarbonate

Order # 201-050

D

each $8.25

E

SOLARIS SAFETY GLASSES These glasses offer soft PVC nose pads and rubber bayonet temples for extra comfort. Optical-grade lenses have a scratch-resistant coating and provide 99.9% UV protection. Available with clear or green shade lenses; IR green lenses are ideal for working with kilns. Use the clear-lens glasses while cutting glass. Both styles meet ANSI Z87.1 requirements. E. F.

Lens Color/ Shade Clear IR green, #3

Lens Material polycarbonate polycarbonate

F Order # 201-051 201-052

each $4.95 11.85

147


SAFETY

Liquid glass is like a live creature.” —Chelsea Stone

Glass bead earrings by Chelsea Stone

THE ORIGINAL ATLAS SUPER GRIP® GLOVE These gloves are a favorite among our in-house glass experts! Perfect for cutting glass, thin, comfortable and flexible nitrile-coated gloves feature extra puncture resistance. Enjoy a secure grip while protecting fingers from minor cuts, abrasions and burns. Nylon knit backing allows air to circulate; gloves are machine washable. Size A. Small Medium Large

Order # 335-004 335-005 335-011

1-5 pair $4.95 4.95 4.95

6-11 pair $3.75 3.75 3.75

12+ pair $2.90 2.90 2.90

RADNOR® HEAT-RESISTANT GLOVES These flexible, heat-resistant gloves are ideal for fusing, glass casting and enameling projects, allowing you to remove even small items securely. Gloves are made of tough shoulder-split cowhide, lined with cotton and foam, and have reinforced thumb wings. Description Length B. Men’s 12" Ladies’ 12"

1-2 pair $11.75 11.75

Order # 350-050 350-051

ASBESTOS-FREE GLOVES Use these gloves when working around hot objects and during flameworking. Effective for use up to 800°F (427°C), with brief momentary contact of items up to 1000°F (538°C). Made with Kevlar® thermal material, these gloves contain no fiberglass or asbestos.

A A great glove for cutting glass! The palm side offers a secure grip . . .

. . . the back side is elastic and breathable for flexibility and comfort.

Length C. 14" (36cm) * 18" (46cm), elbow-length *Not shown

1 2-5 pair pair $36.00 $34.00 47.00 45.00

Order # 704-104 704-105

GENUINE ALLIGATOR SKIN® Higher-quality, thicker, tackier, more flexible and longer-lasting than any imitator, Alligator Skin® sticks to itself but not to clothing, skin or hair. Wrap it around twice to protect fingers and wrists from minor cuts, abrasions and burns, especially while grinding glass. Allows a good grip; open mesh ensures breathability. Made in the USA.

B

Roll Size D. ¾"W x 90 feet

Order # 201-329/4

Sold in packages of 4 rolls 1-3 4-9 10+ pkg pkg pkg $8.30 $6.25 $5.25

COBAN™ WRAP Protect, secure and support your fingers and wrists with this nonadhesive wrap—it sticks to itself, but not to your skin. This natural rubber latex wrap is lightweight, durable, and provides excellent grip, even on small workpieces. Use during grinding tasks.

C

E.

Roll Size 2"W x 5 yards

Order # 201-327

Sold in packages of 6 rolls 1-2 3+ pkg pkg $11.50 $10.75

The original Genuine Alligator Skin®

D

148

Genuine Alligator Skin® sticks to itself,not your skin, clothing or hair. Use it as protection while grinding glass.

E

3M Coban™ wrap sticks to itself, but not to you.

riogrande.com

800.545.6566


SAFETY PARTICULATE RESPIRATORS Use these respirators for all fusing and casting tasks, especially while mixing mold releases and cleaning glass casting molds.

back view, item A

8515, N95 (item A) This respirator features Advanced Electret media and the Cool Flow™ exhalation valve to help make breathing cooler and easier. Also protects from metal fumes; use when welding, brazing, metal cutting or pouring, and to protect from certain non-oil-based particles. NIOSH/N95 approved.

A

8233, N100 (item B) back view, item B

This respirator features a Cool Flow™ exhalation valve, adjustable straps and a contoured rubber face seal for effectiveness and better comfort. Also works great for welding and work involving certain regulated particles (e.g.: lead, cadmium, arsenic); does not filter gases. NIOSH/N100 approved. Description A. 3M particulate respirator 8515, N95

B. 3M particulate respirator 8233, N100

Order # 201-683

201-654

Sold in packages of 10 1-2 3-7 8+ pkg pkg pkg $28.00 $26.00 $24.00 1-4 $9.25

Sold individually 5-9 10+ $8.50 $7.50

HAKKO FUME EXTRACTION SYSTEM Capture potentially dangerous or unpleasant fumes sometimes emitted during flameworking tasks (as well as solder and wax fumes) before they dissipate throughout your shop. Filter features dual connections to accommodate two benches at once. The system includes one Loc-Line kit; choose any of the three additional kits to fit your production needs (all kits include the mounting bracket and clamps needed to attach them to your bench and/or the system. • Greater than 98% filter efficiency with three stages of filtering— a pre-filter, a main HEPA filter and a standard filter featuring activated carbon. • Silencer hood (included) reduces noise output from 58dB to 50dB. • Alsident® kit (item D) features a stainless-steel swing arm that positions easily. • Bench-top kit (item E) includes an extra-wide hood that creates an effective cross-suction to clear the air at your bench from any angle. • Loc-Line® kit (item F) features a rectangular nozzle, three feet of positionable hose, six feet of flexible hose, and a mounting bracket for attaching to your work surface (the system includes one kit). Power: 115 volts Motor: Thermally protected Dimensions: 11"W x 9"D x 18"H Weight: 18 lbs. (8.16kg) with filters Description C. Hakko fume extraction system D. Alsident® swing arm kit E. Bench-top kit F. Additional Loc-Line® kit G. Replacement HEPA/carbon filter

B

Order # 500-098 500-096 500-097 500-099 500-095

Loc-Line® kit includes 3 ft. adjustable tube (position it as needed), a mounting bracket and clamps and 6 ft. of flexible hose.

Haako filtration motor, triple filters and silencer hood

C bench not included

D

E

F

G

each $795.00 395.00 149.00 142.00 112.00

Ready to start working with glass? See pages 86–115 for all the colors and forms of glass you need to fire up your creativity!

149


FINDINGS STERLING GLUE-ON BAILS & COMPONENTS Cast Use these glue-on bails to show off your glass cabs or unique glass pendants. Glue your glass design onto the front (textured) surface of the mounting; the decorative side gives your pendant a 3-D appeal.

D

C B A

H

F

E

Opening Pkg Description (mm) Qty A. Tulip w/bail 5.2 x 3.8 2 B. Tulip w/ring — 2 C. Heart w/bail 4.9 x 3.6 2 D. Heart w/ring — 2 E. Fluted w/bail 5 x 3.8 2 F. Fluted w/ring — 2 G. Maple leaf w/bail 5.1 x 3.6 1 H. Maple leaf w/ring — 2 I. Flower w/bail 4.8 x 3.7 2 J. Flower w/ring — 2 K. Flower w/bail, sm. 4.9 x 3.7 2 L. Flower w/ring, sm. — 2 M. Flower w/bail, med. 4.8 x 3.7 2 N. Flower w/ring, med. — 2 O. Flower w/bail, lg. 5 x 3.6 2 P. Flower w/ring, lg. — 2 Q. Leaf w/bail 5.1 x 3.6 2 R. Leaf w/ring — 6 S. Ginkgo w/bail 4.8 x 3.8 1 T. Ginkgo w/ring — 2 U. Daisy w/bail 4.8 x 3.7 2 V. Daisy w/ring — 3 W. Filigree w/bail 5.7 x 3.5 2 X. Filigree w/ring — 3 Y. Leaf w/bail 8.3 x 4.9 1 Z. Triple heart w/bail 7.9 x 5.1 1 A1. Celtic triad w/bail 8.3 x 5.1 1

G

L

J K

I

N P

O

M

side view, items A, C, E, G, I, K, M, O, Q, S, U and W

Packaging varies; please see below 1-2 3-5 6-11 Order # pkg pkg pkg 686-063 $5.51 $4.75 $4.27 686-064 4.61 3.97 3.58 686-065 5.13 4.43 3.98 686-066 4.51 3.89 3.50 686-840 6.00 5.19 4.48 686-841 4.37 3.78 3.52 686-838 5.46 4.73 4.07 686-839 9.56 8.27 7.13 686-842 7.68 6.64 5.73 686-843 5.21 4.51 3.89 686-067 3.90 3.38 2.91 686-068 3.45 2.89 2.51 686-069 4.41 3.80 3.42 686-070 3.56 3.09 2.66 686-071 5.81 5.01 4.51 686-072 4.61 3.97 3.58 686-836 4.52 3.92 3.38 686-837 9.65 8.35 7.78 687-023 5.86 5.07 4.37 687-024 9.91 8.58 7.39 687-002 8.79 7.61 6.56 687-001 12.19 10.55 9.10 687-006 5.55 4.80 4.14 687-005 8.32 7.20 6.21 689-298 7.03 6.06 5.46 689-299 5.72 4.93 4.44 689-300 6.59 5.68 5.12

Green order numbers indicate sustainable items.

Fused glass pendant (by Rosie Riley) attached to a bronze pendant bail (facing page) and satin cord (visit riogrande.com).

Q

R

V

U

T

S

X W Prices for all sterling items are based on an $18 silver market. Please call for exact pricing based on daily market.

front view, item Y

Y

150

Z

A1

front view

back view, item Y

The front of the glue-on pendant mountings on this and the facing page are textured (see front view, item A1) to allow secure gluing of glass designs. They’re a great way to show off glass pendants such as the dichroic glass cabochon shown above.

riogrande.com

800.545.6566


FINDINGS GLUE-ON BAILS Cast Use these glue-on bails to show off your glass cabs or unique glass pendants. Glue your glass design onto the front (textured) surface of the mounting; the decorative side gives your pendant a 3-D appeal. We recommend using E-6000 (item U, below). All pewter (items Q and R) sold by Rio is 100% lead-free. ArgentiumÂŽ 930 Silver Sold in packages of 3 Opening ID Description (mm) A. Tulip 18.9 x 10.4 B. Flower 15.6 x 9.5 C. 15.6 x 9.5 D. 16.9 x 11.1 E. Heart 16 x 10.6 F. Triple heart 7.9 x 5.1 G. Leaf 8.3 x 4.9 H. Celtic 8.3 x 5.1

Order # 686-904 686-906 686-907 686-908 686-905

1-2 pkg $9.16 6.50 7.80 10.13 8.61

686-910 686-909 686-911

Sold individually $7.15 $6.16 $5.55 8.25 7.12 6.40 7.98 6.88 6.19

686-946 686-948 686-949 686-950 686-947 686-952 686-951 686-953

Sold in packages of 10 $10.05 $8.05 $6.75 6.45 5.15 4.35 7.50 6.00 5.05 9.45 8.40 7.00 9.10 7.30 6.10 13.35 12.40 11.50 15.45 14.40 13.30 15.70 14.60 13.55

629-357/12, 13, 18 629-358/12, 13, 18

Sold in packages of 10 $9.15 $7.90 $7.10 9.95 8.60 7.75

Bronze I. J. K. L. M. N. O. P.

Tulip Flower

18.9 x 10.4 15.6 x 9.5 15.6 x 9.5 15.6 x 9.5 Heart 16 x 10.6 Triple heart 7.9 x 5.1 Leaf 8.3 x 4.9 Celtic 8.3 x 5.1

Britannia Pewter Q. Drop R. Heart

2.3 3.7

3-4 pkg $7.90 5.63 6.75 9.43 7.42

B

5-9 pkg $7.11 4.85 5.82 8.73 6.68

Description With 13.8mm pad

F

J

K

I

L

front view

front view

M N

/13 Goldplated

/12 Silverplated The front of the glue-on pendant mountings on this and the facing page are textured (see front view, item P) to allow secure gluing of glass designs. They’re a great way to show off glass pendants such as the dichroic glass cabochon shown on the facing page.

H

G

Sold individually 1-2 3-5 6-11 each each each $19.13 $17.67 $16.21

Order # 698-388

D

E

STERLING RING Cast This adjustable ring has a 13.8mm pad for gluing on glass cabochons or metal clay designs, or for soldering on bezel cups.

S.

C

A

O

P front view

/18 Antique copperplated

back view

Q

R

E-6000 ADHESIVE Use this all-purpose adhesive for attaching glass designs to findings. No mixing required! Dries clear in 24 hours; non-flammable and waterproof. Please Note: Cannot be shipped by air. Made in the USA. T.

Description E-6000 adhesive; 3.7-oz. tube

Order # 206-006

1-2 each $5.95

3-5 each $5.45

Item S shown finished with a dichroic glass component.

6-11 each $4.80

S

T

151


FINDINGS EAR POST WITH PAD & EAR NUT This ear post features a pad for gluing glass components. Item A is hypoallergenic. Ear Post with Pad Sold in packages of 144 Description A. Surgical steel

B

A

C

D

Pad Size (mm) Post Size Order # 8 .030" x 3/8" 635-741

Friction Ear Nut 631-031

B. Surgical steel; .031" hole

1-2 pkg $8.60

3-5 pkg $7.00

6-9 pkg $5.70

Sold in packages of 144 $5.45 $4.10 $3.20

BRASS EAR WIRES WITH LOOP, BEAD & COIL Wire Size .026" .027"

Finsih C. Yellow D. White

Order # 631-002 631-003

Sold in packages of 144 1-2 3-4 5-9 pkg pkg pkg $7.00 $6.50 $5.85 7.50 6.75 6.00

E F

G

BRASS EAR CLIPS Use E-6000 (page 132) to glue glass cabs to the pads of these ear clips. Finish E. Nickel-plated

H

I

F. Nickel G. Yellow

J

Pad (mm) 10

Order # 631-041

Sold in packages of 144 1-2 3-4 5-9 pkg pkg pkg $29.60 $27.30 $25.20

15 15

631-152 631-153

Sold in packages of 72 $12.70 $11.30 $10.30 17.05 16.25 14.60

BRASS BUTTON SHANKS Glue glass cabs onto these button shanks. Finish H. Yellow I. White

M

K

N

L

Q

P

Pin Dia. .029"

K. .036" L.

Pad Size 5/8"

Order # 685-602

1" x 4.5mm 685-603/1 11/2" x 4.5mm 685-603/1.5

Yellow Finish M. .036" N.

R. 3" x 3" sheet

S. 3" x 3" sheet

T. 5" x 5" sheet

U. 5" x 5" sheet

152

Order # 631-316 631-317

STEEL ONE-PIECE PIN BACKS Glue components onto these pin backs. Nickel Finish J.

O

Diameter 12mm 12mm

Sold in packages of 36 1-2 3-5 6-11 pkg pkg pkg $5.57 $5.18 $4.80 5.56 5.17 4.79

1" x 4.5mm 685-604/1 11/2" x 4.5mm 685-604/1.5

Sold in packages of 72 1-2 3-4 5-9 pkg pkg pkg $7.05 $6.20 $5.20 Sold in packages of 100 $7.60 $6.55 $5.90 8.15 7.00 6.30 Sold in packages of 100 $7.65 $6.60 $5.90 8.35 7.20 6.50

BASE METAL CUFF LINK FINDINGS Create one-of-a-kind cuff links by gluing glass cabs on the metal pad. Finish O. Yellow P. White Q. Bronze

Pad Size 15mm 15mm 14mm

Order # 638-111 638-112 687-408

Packaging varies; please see below Pkg 1-2 3-4 5-9 Qty pkg pkg pkg 24 $9.66 $8.67 $7.72 24 9.95 8.50 7.40 10 11.90 10.30 9.60

METAL LEAF Layer these ultra-thin sheets (approx. .000142" thick) in your fused glass designs. Sheets are packaged in layers with protective paper. Keep leaf in its packaging until you’re ready to use it. Description R. Gold, 23KY S. Silver

Order # 681-128 681-127

Sold in packages of 25 sheets (3" x 3") 1 2 3-5 6+ pkg pkg pkg pkg $55.05 $53.22 $51.38 $50.47 19.14 18.37 17.82 17.38

T. Copper U. Bronze

681-126 681-150

Sold in packages of 25 sheets (5" x 5") $27.39 $26.57 $25.92 $25.42 12.00 11.00 10.25 9.50

riogrande.com

800.545.6566


BASE-METAL FINDINGS

B

The clever accessory no girl should leave home without! Glue your own uniquely designed fused glass to the plate of this purse holder to create must-have gifts your customers will love.

A Glue fused glass designs onto items A–C to create designs customers will love! Find E-6000 epoxy on page 132.

NICKEL-PLATED STEEL COMPONENTS These components feature a bezel or a plate—what you add to them is up to your imagination! Perfect for gluing large fused glass pieces; we recommend using E-6000 epoxy (page 132) or serving as a canvas for Raindrop™ resin designs (find Raindrop resin on page 177).

C See more glue-on bails on pages 150 and 151.

The drawer pull (item A) has a 26mm bezel and includes two screws (1"L and 1½"L to accommodate almost any drawer size). The substantial, 5½"-long bookmark (item B) has a 24.7mm bezel. Item C is a 4¼"long purse hanger (what every girl needs!) featuring a 50.8 x 38.1mm plate that swivels flat for easy carrying. Description A. Drawer pull; 26mm bezel B. Bookmark; 24.7mm bezel C. Purse hanger;

Pkg Qty 4 1 1

back view

E

D

Packaging varies; please see below 1-2 3-4 5-9 Order # pkg pkg pkg 629-616 $11.50 $10.70 $9.90 629-387 7.15 6.15 5.55 629-401 7.15 6.15 5.55

side view

F G

BASE METAL LEAF-SHAPED GLUE-ON COMPONENTS Cast Use these base metal glue-on components to highlight your glass designs or cabochons. Glue your design to the textured surface of the mounting using E-6000 epoxy (page 132). Finish D. Silver-plated E. 18K gold-plated

Size (mm) 13.5 x 6.4 13.5 x 6.4

Opening ID (mm) 2.1 2.1

Order # 629-907 629-908

Sold in packages of 24 1-2 3-4 5-9 pkg pkg pkg $14.40 $12.80 $11.65 18.30 16.70 15.40

F. Nickel-plated G. H. Silver-plated I. J. K. 18K gold-plated L. M.

16.4 x 6.5 25.4 x 8.6 16.4 x 6.5 21.7 x 8 25.4 x 8.6 16.4 x 6.5 21.7 x 8 25.4 x 8.6

3.8 x 2.8 5.8 x 4 3.8 x 2.8 5.8 x 4 7.8 x 5 3.8 x 2.8 5.8 x 4 7.8 x 5

629-915 629-916 629-909 629-910 629-911 629-912 629-913 629-914

Sold in packages of 25 $13.15 $11.70 $10.65 13.80 12.25 11.15 12.95 11.80 10.90 13.15 11.95 11.05 13.30 12.15 11.20 18.30 16.70 15.40 19.30 17.60 16.25 20.25 18.45 17.05

H I

J

K L M

153


GLASS-WORKING BOOKS & DVDS PASSING THE FLAME: A BEADMAKER’S GUIDE TO DETAIL & DESIGN by Corina Tettinger Inside this charming book, you’ll find information, inspiration and the techniques you’ll need to work with glass to create a wide variety of beautiful flameworked beads. Read about the different kinds of glass and their properties; learn how to use the tools, light the torch and work the flame; discover what’s possible when mixing colors; learn how to shape different styles of beads and so much more! Large, full-color photographs accompany detailed instructions—you’ll be creating your own glass beads in no time! 550-496

$75.00

THE EXOTIC ART OF GLASS BRACELET FORMING by Ron Bearer Jr. & Rocio Bearer Start with a simple introduction to making glass jewelry and jump right into 16 start-to-finish bracelet projects that get progressively more advanced. Complete with color photographs of finished projects as well as detailed stepby-step instructions and photos. Softbound; 45 pages. 550-145

$15.70

INNOVATIVE ADORNMENTS: AN INTRODUCTION TO FUSED GLASS & WIRE JEWELRY by Jayne Persico Learn everything you’ve wanted to know about making fused-glass jewelry. Gain a solid foundation in the first half of this easy-to-read book by learning about the techniques tools, materials and used to create spectacular glass and wire-wrap jewelry. Then put your knowledge to use as you complete 10 projects. Features sharp, full-color photographs and clear instructions. Softbound; 79 pages. 550-332

$23.95

GLASS BEADMAKING, SECOND EDITION DVD with Lewis C. Wilson This easy introduction to the art of making glass beads offers close-up photos with stepby-step instruction. Make a variety of beads, including eye beads and face beads, as well as raked or feather designs. Includes explanations of annealing glass, making stringers, preparing the items needed for working and creating new tools, plus helpful tips on torch, glass and equipment selection and lists of suppliers for all of these items. DVD; 60 mins.

154

560-042

$42.95

INTRODUCTION TO GLASS FUSING by Petra Kaiser A great starter book for beginning glass artists—glass fusing is one of the easiest ways to try your hand at this colorful art. Learn the basics of this skill, plus an introduction to warm glass, tools and equipment, kilns, molds and more. Then, start practicing your new skills by completing the 15 unique projects provided. Includes full-color photographs and helpful tips throughout. Softbound; 79 pages. $23.95

550-322

MAKING GLASS BEADS by Cindy Jenkins This book gives an introduction to the exquisite art of glass bead-making, revealing techniques used by Venetian glassmakers. Begin with the basics of making and accenting glass beads, then work up to advanced techniques. Color photographs, step-by-step instruction, helpful tips and beautiful examples. Softbound; 112 pages. $14.95

550-454

FLAMEWORKING by Elizabeth Ryland Mears Learn to manipulate glass using a torch to create beads, sculptures and functional objects. Close-up color photographs demonstrate flameworking techniques. Learn about glass, how to set up a studio for flameworking and what tools you’ll need. Hardbound; 176 pages. $29.95

550-671

YOU CAN MAKE GLASS BEADS! by Cindy Jenkins A short and to-the-point overview of the tools required to make glass beads with step-bystep instructions for beginners making their first glass beads. Packed with illustrations, clear instruction, tips and techniques that make easy work of crafting beautiful glass bead jewelry. Learn techniques for creating twisties, dots, feathering effects, stripes, tails and much more. Softbound; 32 pages. $14.95

550-997

GLASS FUSING & SLUMPING TECHNIQUES DVD with Vicki Payne Explore the basics of the fun, colorful art of glass jewelry while you complete two projects. In the first project, learn the basics of working with glass as you create a set of glass coasters. In the second project, expand your capabilities as you create a glass vase. DVD; 52 minutes. $29.95

560-160

riogrande.com

800.545.6566


ENAMEL Enameling: It’s one of those rewarding arts that welcomes the newcomer, yet

challenges the expert. Once applied, then fired in a kiln, enamels produce an incredible variety of color effects—effects that are responsive to the base metal, the precise content of the glass itself, and the firing. The logic of the process ensures good results and success, and experience, practice and control of the enamels and their properties releases the wonderful ingredient in art called creativity. Learn it in a minute; perfect it over a lifetime.

I just can’t make a piece without adding some sort of color to it. It’s like looking at a tree without leaves—interesting shape, dramatic—but add the leaves and you know it’s ALIVE! —Kristin Holeman

“Color is EVERYTHING in jewelry!”

design by Kristin Holeman

—Kristin Holeman

PROJECT Enameled CloisonnéPendant On the next page, you will learn step-by-step how to create a colorful enameled pendant using the cloisonné technique. Create your design using cloisonné wire, then wet-pack the cells (or “cloisons”) with enamel. Perfect for the beginning enamelist, this project guides you through the creation process while allowing you to practice skills such as sifting enamels, mixing and applying wet-pack enamels into cloisonné-style designs that you create with wire, firing, sanding and finishing enameled pieces. Make a habit of keeping a log of color identification and firing times and temperatures of your pieces. Enamels may have different appearances when fired, depending on the base metal, the firing temperature, the length of firing, and whether the enamel is fired over metal or another layer of enamel. This log will become a handy color reference of the enamels you’ve used and will help guide your choices. Let’s get started! Before you begin. If you decide to use transparent enamels in your work (which are NOT used in this particular project), it is best to clean the enamel powder first. Scoop only the amount of powder you’ll be using into a gem jar. Add enough water to nearly fill the jar, then swirl the solution until it is cloudy. Allow the enamel to settle to the bottom for about 20–30 seconds, then carefully pour off the water. Add water again and repeat. When the water runs clear within seconds after agitation, the powder is clean (typically after repeating 3–4 times). Your enamel is now ready to use! continued on next page

155


“Color can do a lot for the ‘attitude’ of a piece. Any kind of mood can be expressed.” —Jeanette Landenwitch

It’s challenging to ‘learn’ the colors, such as how they appear on different metals, how they look next to each other, blended, layered, etc. It’s a perpetual journey and exploration of color.

Enameled pendant by Jeanette Landenwitch

—Jeanette Landenwitch

continued from previous page

a

The base. Draw your design onto a piece of paper. Cut the cloisonné wire into pieces and begin to shape them by hand according to your design. Use tweezers to place the strips on

top of your drawing (fig. a). If further shaping is required to match your design, shape by hand or use pliers, especially for sharper bends. Set the wires aside. Your kiln should be preheated to 1425°F; we recommend turning on your kiln at the beginning of the day so it’s already heated when you begin to enamel.

To clean the disc base, heat it with a torch or in the kiln for a couple of minutes, then allow it to cool. Once the disc is clean, hold it only along the edges to avoid leaving fingerprints on the surfaces. Counter enamel. Applying a layer of counter enamel to the back of the disc helps equalize the expansion and contraction of the metal, preventing the enamel that will eventually be applied to the front of the disc from cracking. Use any color you like for the counter enamel (we chose blue to complement the design we will apply to the front). NOTE: “Cool” colors such as blue or green are more stable through multiple firings. Place a piece of paper on your work surface to catch sifted enamel powders so that you can later replace them in their jars. Make sure to keep each enamel color separate. Wear the respirator for the duration of the project to protect against the fine enamel dust. Fill the sifter half-way full with enamel (fig. b). Holding the disc along the edges with your fingers, sift a layer of enamel onto the back of the

b

c

156

w h a t yo u ’l l n e e d : • • • • • • • • • • •

Enameled pendant kit (#300-060, facing pg.) Blue Heron™ tweezers (#115-018, pg. 169) • Firing trivet (#350-006, pg. 170) Alundum stone, 220-grit (#350-030, 169) Glass brush, fine (#350-026) or coarse (#350-025), pg. 169 3M 8233 particulate respirator (#201-654, pg. 149) Radnor® safety gloves (#350-050 or #350-051, pg. 148) Lindstrom Rx flush cutter (#111-044, see riogrande.com) Murena-Sable premium artist’s brush (see pg. 168 for a selection) Gem jars (see riogrande.com) • Paper towels Mesh firing rack (#350-007, pg. 170) • Firing fork (#350-001, pg. 170) Small bowl • Cup or bowl of water • Dropper or cocktail straw

disc. Start along the edges, then work toward the center (fig. c). Sift a layer that is about ¾ the thickness of what the front enamel layer will be (fig. d). Run your fingertip along the edge of the disc to remove any excess powder. Carefully set the disc on the threeslant firing trivet, being careful to not disturb the enamel powder, then place the trivet on the firing rack. Wearing the safety glove, use the firing fork to place the rack into the center of the kiln (fig. e). Fire the counter enamel for approximately 2½ minutes. NOTE: The firing time may vary according to the kiln you’re using. Fold the piece of catch-paper and pour the unused powder back into its jar. After 2½ minutes, put on your safety gloves and remove the firing rack using the fork. Set it aside to cool. The surface of the counter enamel will resemble one of the following textures: • sugar (crystallized specks) • orange peel (dotted impressions) • fully fused (smooth and glossy—exactly what we want!)

d

e

riogrande.com

800.545.6566


f

g

h

i

j

k

l

m

If the surface exhibits a “sugar” or “orange peel” texture, allow the piece to cool, then fire again for approximately 2½ minutes. If the enamel layer is somewhat thin, you can sift on another layer, and then fire. Repeat this process until the surface of the enamel is fully fused. NOTE: It takes slightly less time to fire enamel onto enamel (rather than onto metal); if you add additional layers during this process, firing time may be slightly less. Clear flux. Flux serves as a barrier between the base metal and the enamel, allowing the true color of the enamel to come through after firing. Clear flux will also help hold the cloisonné wire in place. Sift a layer of clear flux onto the front of the disc using the same technique you used for applying the counter enamel (fig. f). Fire it for 2 min., 45 sec. If the surface exhibits the “sugar” or “orange peel” texture, sift on another layer of flux and fire again for approximately 2½ minutes. Once the enamel has completely cured, the surface will be fully fused. Pour some Rio enamel adhesive into a small bowl. Use the tweezers to dip one edge of each cloisoneé wire into the adhesive (fig. g), then place the wire onto the fluxed side of the disc according to your design (fig. h). Once all the wires are in place, allow the adhesive to dry completely. Place the disc back on the trivet and fire for approximately 2½ minutes. Remove the disc and allow it to cool. Applying color. You will be using the wetpacking method to apply color enamels to your piece. NOTE: We recommend applying “cool” colors first because they are stable enough to handle multiple firings. You can either fire after each color application or, to speed up the process, you can fire several colors simultaneously. Begin by scooping a small amount of the first color into a gem jar (blue for our project). Use a dropper or cocktail straw to add water to the powder (fig. i), then stir with a needle tool. The consistency should be just thin enough to pick up the solution with the brush you will be using to apply the enamel. Pick up some of the wet enamel with a sable artist’s brush or needle tool and apply it into the cloisons, or “cells” (fig. j). Fill each cell higher at the edges than in the middle. For areas that don’t have a wire border, make sure there’s enough enamel so that the color won’t round off to nothing during firing. TIP: Use a paper towel to carefully wick away excess water from the edges of the cells (fig. k). Thoroughly clean the brush in a cup of water, then apply the next enamel color (green for our project); repeat, then apply the black enamel (fig. l). Set the piece on the trivet, on top of the firing rack and set the rack on top of the kiln to speed up drying. Once the enamel is dry, fire it for

ENAMELED PENDANT KIT Create enameled pendants using the supplies included in this kit. Includes: • .999 fine silver cloisonné strip wire; 2 ft. (#102-202) • .999 fine silver round disc; pkg/2 (#696-603) • Lead-free enamel sampler set (#350-027) • Sterling glue-on pendant bail; pkg/10 (#689-298) • Rio enamel adhesive, 1 pint (#350-041) • Black rubber cord w/sterling clasp (#690-934/18) Description Enameled pendant kit

Order # 300-060

kit $59.00

approximately 2½ minutes. Remove the piece from the kiln and allow it to cool. Apply the remaining enamel colors (red and white for our project) as described above (fig. m), then allow them to dry. Fire the piece for approximately 2½ minutes, then remove it and cool for 3–5 minutes. NOTE: “Warm” colors may require slightly less firing time. Once the piece has completely cooled, use cutters to trim off excess cloisonné wire. Stone down. Use the alundum stone under running water to stone down the front of your piece (fig. n). Rub the piece in different directions to avoid creating any low spots in the enamel. Keep checking the surface of the piece with your fingers, continuing to stone down rough edges from the wire. Clean the enameled surface with a glass brush, then flash-fire the piece for 45–60 seconds, or until the surface becomes glossy. Use the E-6000 to attach your piece to the glue-on pendant bail. String onto the rubber cord to finish!

n

Finished? Not quite! Find that perfect display and just-right packaging at riogrande. com!

157


ENAMEL STYLES & STARTER KIT

Enamels are a great way to add color to your work. Don’t follow the rules, and anything is possible. —Kimberly Keyworth

by Kimberly Keyworth (photograph by George Post) Images below are reprinted courtesy of Mary Chuduk and Deborah Lozier.

Sifting—Enamel powders are evenly applied to metals through a mesh screen and fired in individual layers.

Stenciling—A design is cut into stiff paper or mylar, and enamel is sifted onto the work piece through the open spaces.

Silkscreening—Enamel is applied to workpieces through traditional and non-traditional silkscreening material.

Basse Taille—Base metal is textured by stamping, etching or engraving and enameled using transparent colors.

Cloisonné—Wire is used to create design cells (cloisons) that are then “wet-packed” with enamel.

Champlevé—Recessed areas are etched or carved out of the workpiece and filled with enamel up to the metal surface.

Sgraffito—Lines and designs are scratched into an unfired layer of enamel, and the work piece is then fired.

Limoges—Fine enamel particles are suspended in oil or water and “painted” onto the surface of the workpiece.

RIO ENAMELING EQUIPMENT STARTER KIT It’s all here! This kit contains everything you need—except a kiln and enamels—to start enameling. The kit contains: • 110V pickle pot, 16-oz. • Rio pickle, 3-lb. box • copper pickle tongs, 9" • Dumont Hi-Tech #AA tweezer • line sifter, 1/16" opening • small 40-mesh sifter • fine glass-polishing brush • fine-point sable brush • steel carving tools, 6-pc. set • 4-point firing trivet • small 3-slant trivet • medium 3-slant trivet • small woven support • 2-prong firing fork • spatula, 3½" blade • heat-resistant leather gloves • 3M particulate respirator • safety glasses  WARNING! Please see the warnings on page 165 regarding

Description Rio enameling starter kit

Order # 350-040

kit $169.00

lead-based enamel powders and follow all recommended safety procedures for handling and working with this product.

158

riogrande.com

800.545.6566


LEAD-FREE ENAMELS MILTON BRIDGE LEAD-FREE ENAMELS Lead-free enamels deliver durability and clean, brilliant color. Please Note: In their jars, enamel powders (especially transparent colors) may not look as they will after firing. Made in England

Sold in 100-gram jars

Transparent Colors A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. L. M. N. O. P. Q. R. S. T.

Description Medium flux* Hard flux Silver flux Soft flux Gold Elf green Peridot Turquoise* Mallard green* Cobalt blue* Celeste green Sapphire blue Crystal blue Light rose Ruby* Amethyst Bronze Autumn brown* Warm gray Kingfisher blue

Order # 300-100 300-101 300-102 300-140 300-106 300-113 300-117 300-116 300-115 300-111 300-114 300-110 300-109 300-103 300-104 300-105 300-107 300-108 300-112 300-141

1-2 each $8.75 8.75 8.75 8.75 11.50 8.75 9.85 9.85 9.85 10.70 8.75 9.85 9.85 10.70 10.70 9.85 9.85 9.85 8.75 8.75

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Q

R

S

T

U

V

W

X

Y

Z

A1

B1

C1

D1

E1

F1

G1

H1

I1

J1

K1

L1

M1

N1

O1

P1

Q1

Opaque Colors

Sold in 100-gram jars 300-118 $8.75 U. White* V. Black* 300-119 9.85 W. Cream 300-131 10.70 X. Marigold 300-120 10.70 Y. Lime green 300-152 10.70 Z. Spring green* 300-124 10.70 A1. Jade green 300-156 10.70 B1. Fir green 300-123 10.70 300-130 9.85 C1. Sea green D1. Turquoise 300-150 9.85 E1. Powder blue 300-126 9.85 F1. Riviera blue* 300-127 9.85 G1. Sky blue 300-128 9.85 H1. Etruscan blue 300-129 9.85 I1. Pink 300-151 10.70 J1. Purple 300-125 10.70 K1. Lavender 300-153 9.85 L1. Tangerine 300-121 10.70 M1. Scarlet* 300-122 10.70 300-132 10.70 N1. Arras red O1. Brown* 300-133 10.70 P1. Dark scarlet 300-154 10.70 Q1. Silver gray 300-155 9.85 These enamels are included in sampler set, item R1, below.

ENAMEL SAMPLER SET This sampler set includes (12) 10-gram vials of the lead-free enamels noted with an asterisk (*) in the grids above. Description Order # R1. Lead-free enamel sampler set 350-027

1-2 set $19.75

COUNTER-ENAMEL (not shown) Made with a wide variety of enamels, counter-enamel helps prevent the warpage of base metals and the cracking of colors due to rapid heat changes during firing and cooling. Description Order # Counter-enamel, speckle; 100g jar 300-398

1-2 each $8.75

Please Note: Enamel colors are shown fired over copper. Other metals will produce widely differing finished colors.

All individual enamel powders are delivered in easy-access wide-mouth jars that close securely.

R1

159


SCHAUER ENAMELS

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Q

R

S

T

U

V

W

X

Y

Z

A1

B1

C1

D1

E1

F1

G1

H1

I1

J1

K1

L1

M1

N1

O1

P1

Q1

SCHAUER LEADED TRANSPARENT & OPALESCENT ENAMELS Schauer transparent enamels are manufactured to be crystal clear, brilliantly colorful and to retain their fire and intensity through high-temperature firing. The hardness factors refer to expansion rates of various enamels. Please Note: In their jars, enamel powders (especially transparent colors) may not look as they will after firing. Transparent Colors (particle size: 60-mesh) Made in England

Sold in 100-gram jars Color HardUse 1-2 Color # ness† On† Order # each 300-201 $10.45 A. Clear flux* 1W S A B. 1380 M A 300-203 10.45 300-204 10.45 C. 100 M C, S D. 175 H A 300-205 10.45 E. 1012 M A 300-206 10.45 F. 6023 H A 300-207 10.45 G. Bluish flux 2A H C, S 300-202 10.45 H. Light amber yellow* 848 M A 300-208 12.85 I. Golden yellow 7137 M S, G 300-209 12.85 J. Dark amber 6377 M C, S 300-210 12.85 K. Brown 109 M A 300-211 10.45 L. Light brown* 109L M A 300-212 10.45 M. Light brown 6 M A 300-213 10.45 N. Light violet* 27 M C, S 300-216 11.20 12.85 O. Rose 1685 M Cf, Sf, G 300-217 P. Raspberry blue 6338 H Sf, Gf 300-218 12.85 Q. Light ruby red 116 S C, Sf, G 300-219 12.85 R. Ruby red 1216 M Cf, Sf, G 300-220 12.85 S. Brown-red* 6772 M A 300-221 11.20 T. Ruby red 5005 M Cf, Sf, G 300-224 12.85 U. Light ruby red 115 S Cf, Sf, G 300-225 12.85 V. Medium ruby red 9 M C, Sf, G 300-226 12.85 W. Dark ruby red 114 S C, Sf, G 300-227 12.85 X. Light ruby red* 10 M C, Sf, G 300-228 12.85 Y. Garnet red 111 S C, Sf, G 300-229 12.85 12.85 Z. Dark ruby red* 8 M C, Sf, G 300-230 A1. Wine red 1729 S Cf, S 300-231 12.85 B1. Light violet gray* 1698 M A 300-232 11.20 C1. Light olive 3 M A 300-234 10.45 D1. Olive 145 S A 300-235 10.45 E1. Olive brown 102 M C, S 300-236 10.45 F1. Medium brown* 5039 M A 300-238 10.45 G1. Light green 137 M Cf, S, G 300-240 10.45 H1. Yellowish green 20A M Cf, S, G 300-241 10.45 I1. Leaf green 19A M Cf, S, G 300-242 10.45 J1. Light green 132 M Cf, S, G 300-243 10.45 K1. Grass green 126 M Cf, S, G 300-244 10.45 300-245 10.45 L1. Yellowish green* 6039 M C, S M1. Light turquoise 140 M Cf,S, G 300-246 10.45 N1. Dark turquoise 138 M Cf, S, G 300-247 10.45 O1. Medium green 186 S Cf, S, G 300-248 10.45 P1. Dark green 125 M Cf, S, G 300-249 10.45 Q1. Medium green 5517 S Cf, S, G 300-250 10.45 * These enamels are included in the warm-color kit on the facing page.  Firing hardness: S = soft; M = medium; H = hard Use on: C = copper; S = fine silver; G = gold; A = all f requires flux.

Firing Temperatures by Hardness Factor

 WARNING! Please see the warnings on page 165 regarding lead-based enamel powders and follow all recommended safety procedures for handling and working with this product.

160

Soft (S)

Medium (M)

Hard (H)

700°C–730°C

730°C–770°C

770°C–820°C

1292°F–1346°F

1346°F–1418°F

1418°F–1508°F

riogrande.com

800.545.6566


SCHAUER ENAMELS SCHAUER LEADED TRANSPARENT & OPALESCENT ENAMELS, CONTINUED Transparent Colors (particle size: 60-mesh), continued Color Color # A. Dark grass green* 124 B. Dark turquoise 61A C. Medium green 185 D. Dark green* 128 E. Turquoise** 43 F. Turquoise 174 G. Turquoise 295T H. Turquoise 171 I. Forget-me-not 5275 J. Blue** 134 K. Dark blue** 5424 L. Gray** 6092 M. Steel blue 161 N. Light blue 1619 O. Light blue** 157 P. Gray blue 6041 Q. Violet blue 121 R. Medium blue** 156 S. Medium blue 165 T. Blue 6073 U. Medium blue 155 V. Steel blue 6040 W. Dark blue 5828 X. Dark blue** 154 Y. Sapphire blue** 41 Z. Dark blue 54 A1. Violet** 26 B1. Violet 150 C1. Violet** 6945 D1. Dark violet 6080 E1. Dark violet 5692 F1. Dark violet** 46 G1. Gray 122 H1. Dark steel blue** 6940

Hardness† M M S M M M S S M M M M S S M M M M S M M M M M M S M H M M M M S S

Sold in 100-gram jars Use 1-2 On† Order # each Cf, S, G 300-251 $10.45 Cf, S, G 300-252 10.45 Cf, S, G 300-253 10.45 Cf, S, G 300-255 10.45 C, S 300-257 10.45 A 300-258 10.45 Cf, S, G 300-259 10.45 10.45 Cf, S, G 300-260 A 300-261 11.20 A 300-262 11.20 A 300-263 11.20 A 300-273 10.45 A 300-274 11.20 A 300-276 11.20 A 300-277 10.45 C, S 300-278 11.20 C, S 300-279 11.20 A 300-280 11.20 A 300-281 11.20 300-282 11.20 A A 300-283 11.20 C, S 300-284 11.20 A 300-285 11.20 A 300-286 11.20 A 300-287 11.20 A 300-289 11.20 C, S 300-290 11.20 C, S 300-291 11.20 A 300-292 11.20 C, S 300-293 11.20 C, S 300-294 11.20 300-295 10.45 A A 300-296 10.45 A 300-297 11.20

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Q

R

S

T

U

V

W

X

Y

Z

A1

B1

C1

D1

E1

F1

G1

H1

I1

J1

K1

L1

M1

N1

Opalescent Colors

Sold in 100-gram jars 300-264 $11.20 I1. Opal white 64 H C, Sf 300-266 11.20 J1. Opal pale blue 78 H C, Sf K1. Opal gray 77 H C, S 300-267 11.20 300-268 11.20 L1. Opal blue 73 H C, Sf 10.45 M1. Opal brown gray 1658 H C, Sf, G 300-269 300-270 12.85 N1. Opal rose 75 H C, Sf 300-271 10.45 O1. Opal medium green 6969 H C, Sf 300-272 10.45 P1. Opal gray blue 80 M C, Sf  These enamels are included in the warm-color kit below.  These enamels are included in the cool-color kit below.  Firing hardness: S = soft; M = medium; H = hard Use on: C = copper; S = fine silver; G = gold; A = all f requires flux.

SCHAUER TRANSPARENT ENAMEL KITS These kits contain twelve 10-gram vials of transparent warm- or cool-color enamels. For use on copper or silver. Warm-color kits include one vial each of the enamels noted with one asterisk (*) in the grids above and on the facing page. Cool-color kits include one vial each of enamels noted with two asterisks (**). Description S1. Warm-color kit (noted by * above and on facing page) Cool-color kit (not shown; noted by ** above and on facing page)

Order # 350-075

1-2 kit $20.50

350-076

20.50

O1

P1

See a sampler of transparent and opaque colors on page 164.

Please Note: Enamel colors are shown fired over copper. Other metals will produce widely differing finished colors. S1

161


SCHAUER ENAMELS SCHAUER LEADED ENAMELS Schauer opaque enamels are manufactured to be deep, strong and durable. Even colors that are typically difficult to produce without muddying—such as browns and greens—present consistently rich and true tones. Please Note: In their jars, enamel powders may not look as they will after firing. Opaque Colors (particle size: 80-mesh)

 WARNING! Please see the warnings on page 165 regarding lead-based enamel powders and follow all recommended safety procedures for handling and working with this product.

Made in England

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Q

R

S

T

U

V

W

X

Y

Sold in 100-gram jars Color HardUse 1-2 Color # ness† On† Order # each 300-298 $10.45 A. White 200 H C B. White* 201 M C, S 300-299 10.45 C. White 202 M A 300-300 10.45 D. White 203 S A 300-301 10.45 E. Ivory* 6935 M C, S 300-302 11.20 F. Ivory 6873 M C, S 300-303 11.20 G. Ivory 9154 H C 300-304 11.20 300-305 10.45 H. Light gray 1132 S C, S I. Yellow 209 S A 300-306 11.20 J. Lemon 210A S A 300-307 11.20 K. Yellow* 6682 M C, S 300-308 11.20 L. Yellow 294 S A 300-309 11.20 M. Yellow 297 S A 300-310 11.20 N. Yolk yellow 211 S C, S 300-311 11.20 O. Ochre yellow* 7033 M C, S 300-312 11.20 P. Ochre yellow 212 M C, S 300-313 11.20 Q. Orange* 6800 M C, S 300-314 12.85 R. Reddish orange 6013 M C, S 300-315 12.85 S. Ecutchan red 6805 M C, S 300-316 12.85 300-317 12.85 T. Red 7152 M C U. Red* 6813 M C, S 300-318 12.85 V. Dark red 6662 M C, S 300-319 12.85 W. Bordeaux red* 6663 M C, S 300-320 12.85 X. Dark Bordeaux 6663D M C, S 300-321 12.85 Y. Olive brown 6991 S C, S 300-323 11.20 Z. Brown 6948 S C, S 300-324 11.20 A1. Light brown 6947 S C, S 300-325 11.20 B1. Brown* 6915 M C, S 300-326 11.20 C1. Brown 6916 M C, S 300-327 11.20 D1. Dark brown 6284 M C, S 300-328 11.20 E1. Dark brown 223 M C, S 300-329 11.20  These enamels are included in the warm-color kit on page 164.  Firing hardness: S = soft; M = medium; H = hard Use on: C = copper; S = fine silver; G = gold; A = all

Please Note: Enamel colors are shown fired over copper. Other metals will produce widely differing finished colors. Z

A1

B1

C1

D1

E1

OPAQUE MILLEFIORE Add these beads to copper, fine-silver or fired and polished metal clay and fire; the millefiore melts down to create colorful accents. Coefficient of expansion: 104. Description F1. 3–4mm; pkg/50g Millefiore beads add colorful accents to your enameled or metal clay designs.

162

Order # 350-045

pkg $12.50

F1

riogrande.com

800.545.6566


SCHAUER ENAMELS SCHAUER LEADED ENAMELS, CONTINUED Opaque Colors (particle size: 80-mesh), continued Sold in 100-gram jars Color HardUse 1-2 Color # ness† On† Order # each 300-330 $12.85 A. Light rose 7143 M C, S B. Light rose 7148 M C, S 300-331 12.85 C. Rose* 7142 M C, S 300-332 12.85 D. Rose 6913 S C, S 300-333 12.85 E. Violet 272 H C 300-335 12.85 F. Dark heliotrope* 811 M C, S 300-336 12.85 G. Heliotrope 806 S C, S 300-337 12.85 H. Light gray 1111 S C, S 300-338 10.45 300-339 10.45 I. Light gray* 218 M C, S J. Gray 216 M C, S 300-340 10.45 K. Gray blue 1108 S C, S 300-341 10.45 L. Medium gray 1120 S C, S 300-342 10.45 M. Dark gray 1125 S C, S 300-343 10.45 N. Dark gray-blue* 6927 M C, S 300-345 11.20 O. Parrot green 238 M C, S 300-346 10.45 P. Jade green 6229 M C, S 300-347 10.45 Q. Leaf green** 240 M C, S 300-349 10.45 R. Grass green** 225 M A 300-350 10.45 S. Black-green 817 S C, S 300-353 11.20 300-354 10.45 T. Turquoise blue** 816 M C, S U. Yellow-green 6967 S C, S 300-355 10.45 V. Light green 236 M C, S 300-356 10.45 W. Light green 6824 S C, S 300-357 10.45 X. Olive green 308 S C, S 300-358 10.45 Y. Olive green 314 S C, S 300-359 10.45 Z. Violet-gray 214 M A 300-361 11.20 A1. Light blue 6918 M C, S 300-362 11.20 B1. Light blue 345 S C, S 300-363 11.20 C1. Light blue** 246 M C, S 300-364 11.20 * These enamels are included in the warm-color kit on page 164. ** These enamels are included in the cool-color kit on page 164.  Firing hardness: S = soft; M = medium; H = hard Use on: C = copper; S = fine silver; G = gold; A = all

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Q

R

S

T

W

X

Y

U

V

See more colors on the following page.

Z

B1

A1

C1

I design pictures, but it’s no different for me than if I had composed a piece of music. If I focus intensely enough, the aura will appear, like an electric light blue! —Falcher Fusager

“Revelation 1” by Falcher Fusager 2009 Saul Bell Design Award First Place Winner, Enamel

163


SCHAUER ENAMELS SCHAUER LEADED ENAMELS, CONTINUED FROM PG. 163) Opaque Colors (particle size: 80-mesh), continued

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Q

R

S

T

SCHAUER OPAQUE ENAMEL KITS (not shown) These kits contain twelve 10-gram vials of opaque warm- or cool-color enamels. For use on copper or silver. Warm-color kits include one vial each of the enamels noted with one asterisk (*) in the grids above and on 162 and 163. Cool-color kits include one vial each of enamels noted with two asterisks (**).

See more colors on pages 160–163.

U

V

A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. L. M. N. O. P. Q. R. S. T. U. V. W. * ** 

Sold in 100-gram jars Color HardUse 1-2 Color # ness† On† Order # each 300-366 $11.20 Medium blue** 247 M C, S Blue 252 M C, S 300-368 11.20 Medium blue 5246 M C 300-369 11.20 Light turquoise 262 M C, S 300-370 10.45 Light turquoise** 263 M C, S 300-371 10.45 Light turquoise 888 S C, S 300-372 10.45 Turquoise** 290 M C, S 300-373 10.45 Turquoise 812 S C, S 300-374 10.45 300-375 10.45 Turquoise 267 S C, S Light blue 800 S A 300-377 11.20 Turquoise 291 M C, S 300-378 10.45 Turquoise blue** 5259 S C, S 300-379 11.20 Light blue 802 M C, S 300-380 11.20 Medium blue 6923 S C, S 300-381 11.20 Medium blue 6960 S C, S 300-382 11.20 Medium blue 6934 M C, S 300-385 11.20 Dark blue** 6075 M C, S 300-386 11.20 Dark blue 254 H C, S 300-388 11.20 Cobalt blue** 281 M C, S 300-389 11.20 300-390 11.20 Dark violet 867 S C, S Dark violet** 344 M C, S 300-391 11.20 Black 280 M C, S 300-392 11.20 Black** 6890 M C, S 300-393 11.20 These enamels are included in the warm-color kit below. These enamels are included in the cool-color kit below. Firing hardness: S = soft; M = medium; H = hard Use on: C = copper; S = fine silver; G = gold; A = all

W

Description Order # Warm-colors kit (noted by * on pages 162 & 163) 350-077 Cool-colors kit (noted by ** on pages 162 & 163) 350-078

1-2 kit $20.50 20.50

SCHAUER ENAMEL SAMPLER KIT The sampler contains twelve 10-gram vials of our most popular transparent and opaque enamel colors. For use on copper or silver. The transparent colors in the sampler include: Bluish Flux, Medium Ruby Red, Yellowish Green, Turquoise, Forget-me-not Blue, Opal White, Opal Blue. The opaque colors include: White, Medium Gray, Light Green, Light Blue, Black. Description D1. Enamel sampler kit

Order # 350-028

1-2 kit $20.50

Firing Temperatures by Hardness Factor

Soft (S)

Medium (M)

Hard (H)

700°C–730°C

730°C–770°C

770°C–820°C

1292°F–1346°F

1346°F–1418°F

1418°F–1508°F

D1

164

riogrande.com

800.545.6566


F I N E - S I LV E R S TA M P I N G S .999 FINE-SILVER STAMPINGS & CHARMS Die Struck Enamel color will vary greatly depending on the metal used as the base metal. Fine silver will not oxidize and A produces a brilliant white background for transparent enamel colors. Use counter-enamel (page 159) on lighter-gauge items to prevent warping. Stampings Packaging varies; please see below Shape A. Round B. C. D. Round E. F. Round G. H. Round I. Oval J. K. Square L. M. Square N. Teardrop O. P. Triangle Q. Heart R.

Pkg Qty 10 10 10 4 4 2 2 1 6 6 6 6 2 6 6 6 6 6

Size (mm) Gauge 12.7 22 15.9 22 19.1 22 22.2 22 25.4 22 31.8 22 38.1 22 50.8 22 18 x 13 26 25 x 18 26 15 x 15 26 20 x 20 26 27 x 27 26 30 x 18 26 39 x 12 26 24 x 24 25 13 x 11 26 20 x 17 26

Order # 696-597 696-598 696-599 696-600 696-601 696-602 696-603 696-604 682-197 682-198 682-199 682-200 682-201 682-202 682-207 682-203 682-204 682-205

18 25.6 34 x 26

Sold in packages of 4 1-2 3-4 682-445 $14.06 $12.80 682-446 17.70 16.06 682-451 18.72 17.17

Charms with Ring S. Round T. U. Oval

26 26 26

1-4 5-9 pkg pkg $13.18 $11.73 22.46 20.23 25.68 23.39 15.78 14.04 22.73 20.48 16.03 14.27 20.40 18.59 16.35 15.11 16.08 14.31 20.47 18.88 15.76 14.36 20.16 18.49 13.94 12.70 21.20 19.44 18.28 16.77 23.65 21.69 9.81 8.73 16.37 14.91

B C D

J

V.

Order # 102-202

each Call for pricing

G

L M

N O

Q

R

P

S

Sold on 1-oz. spools

Minimum purchase 25 ft. (½ oz.)

H F

K

I

.999 FINE SILVER CLOISONNÉ WIRE Use strip wire to create borders around stampings or to add designs within the borders. The strip is placed perpendicular to the surface of the base metal to form lines and enclosures for enamel. Ft./ Description Oz. Strip, 50 .060" x .005"

E

Find more sizes and shapes of fine silver stampings at riogrande.com

T

Prices for all silver and fine silver items are based on a $18 market. Please call for exact pricing.

U

V

Lea d Warn in g :

L e a d/ A rseni c Wa rni ng :

S i li c a Wa rni ng:

 WARNING! Schauer enamel powders contain

 WARNING! Some Schauer enamel powders

 WARNING! Kiln wash contains a blend of

lead, a chemical known to the State of California to cause cancer, birth defects, or other reproductive harm. Lead is toxic. Prolonged or repeated exposure above Occupational Exposure Limits may cause lung damage and accumulation of lead in the body. In serious cases this may cause anemia, damage to the kidneys and central nervous system, and impair reproductive fertility. Lead in the blood of pregnant women may affect the development of the unborn child. Do not use on jewelry or products intended for children. Persons exposed to lead compounds should have regular checks, which should include lead in blood monitoring. Wear a NIOSH-approved respirator to control lead exposure. Clean up carefully with a HEPA vacuum and a wet mop. Before using these products, find out how to protect yourself and your family by contacting the National Lead Information Hotline at 800.424.LEAD (5323) or log on to www.epa.gov/lead.

contain lead and arsenic, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer, birth defects, or other reproductive harm. Lead and arsenic are both toxic. Prolonged or repeated exposure above Occupational Exposure Limits may cause lung damage and accumulation of lead in the body. In serious cases this may cause anemia, kidney and central nervous system damage, and can impair reproductive fertility. Lead in the blood of pregnant women may affect the development of the unborn child. Do not use on jewelry or products intended for children. Persons exposed to lead compounds should have regular checks, which should include blood monitoring. Arsenic compounds can have cumulative effects. Wear a NIOSH-approved respirator to control lead exposure. Clean up carefully with a HEPA vacuum and a wet mop. Before using these products, find out how to protect yourself and your family by contacting the National Lead Information Hotline at 800.424.LEAD (5323) or log on to www.epa.gov/lead. Visit www.epa.gov/ttn/ atw/hlthef/arsenic.html for information on arsenic.

crystalline silica. Prolonged inhalation of this product may be harmful. IARC reports that there is sufficient evidence in humans of the carcinogenicity of inhaled crystalline silica in forms of quartz or cristabolite from occupational sources. Symptoms may not appear until permanent lung damage has occurred. Persons who use this product should have periodic physical examinations for silica exposure. Work areas should be periodically tested to determine the amount of airborne crystalline silica as compared to OSHA and MSHA accepted standards. Wear NIOSH-approved breathing protection for crystalline silica dust when working with the product or when possible exposure to product dust exists. Users must comply with all applicable health and safety regulations relating to t he safe handling of crystalline silica. See MSDS for further information. California Prop 65 Warning: This product contains crystalline silica, a chemical known to the State of California to cause cancer.

165


COPPER ACCESSORIES, STAMPINGS & BEADS COPPER ACCESSORIES 18-Gauge Switchplates include copper screws. Discs are ideal for custom shaping and enameling. Switchplates, 4½" x 2¾" Sold in packages of 4 Order # 692-462 682-589

Bowls

Sold in packages of 2 682-588 $23.50 $21.00 $18.50 682-461 26.50 24.00 21.50

C. 59⁄16" dia. x 1"H D. 5" dia. x 2¼"H

C

COPPER STAMPINGS With Hole B

Order # 682-599 682-600 682-596

Sold in packages of 10 1-2 3-4 5-9 pkg pkg pkg $15.25 $13.73 $12.20 15.75 14.18 12.60 14.00 12.60 11.20

H. 25.6mm dia. I. 27 x 26mm

682-598 682-597

Sold in packages of 10 $15.25 $13.73 $12.20 15.64 13.83 12.25

J. K. L. M. N.

300-811 300-810 300-812 300-809 300-801

Sold in packages of 12 $11.25 $9.00 $6.75 11.25 9.00 6.75 11.25 9.00 6.75 11.25 9.00 6.75 11.25 9.00 6.75

Size O. 8mm P. 9.5mm

Hole Size .078” .078”

Order # 682-590 682-591

Sold in packages of 50 1-2 3-4 5-9 pkg pkg pkg $11.46 $9.56 $8.55 13.16 11.50 10.26

Q. 16mm R. 19mm S. 22mm

.082” .084” .084”

682-592 682-593 682-594

Sold in packages of 20 $11.65 $9.70 $8.70 13.11 11.40 10.16 14.80 13.36 11.85

31 x 20mm .097”

682-595

Sold in packages of 20 $16.10 $14.56 $13.26

Size E. 27 x 19.8mm F. 32 x 23mm G. 24 x 19mm

With Ring A

Items A–D are not shown actual size.

D

30.5 x 20mm 31 x 2–16.7mm 28.3 x 16mm 18.5mm dia. 20 x 21mm

COPPER BEADS Round

G

E F

1-2 3-4 5-9 pkg pkg pkg $24.25 $21.75 $19.25 24.25 21.75 19.25

Description A. Standard switch B. Rocker switch

Melon T.

M I

H

O

166

P

K

J

Q

R

N

L

S

T

riogrande.com

800.545.6566


COPPER STAMPINGS COPPER STAMPINGS 18-Gauge, Die Struck A. Round Packaging varies; please see below Size (mm) 8 9 9.5 10 11 12 12.7 14.3 15.9 16 18 19.1 20 22.2 25.4 28.6 31.8 38.1 44.5 50.8 63.5

Pkg Qty 20 20 20 20 20 20 50 10 10 10 10 50 10 10 20 10 10 20 10 10 10

Order # 684-761 684-762 684-763 684-764 684-765 684-766 682-453 684-767 684-768 684-769 684-770 682-454 684-771 684-772 682-455 684-773 684-774 682-456 684-775 682-457 682-458

1-2 pkg $3.10 3.90 4.25 5.30 6.40 7.60 20.25 3.05 3.80 3.90 4.10 24.00 5.10 6.20 13.95 10.35 13.10 20.40 20.15 19.55 24.20

684-749 684-750 684-751 684-752 684-753 684-754 684-755 684-756 684-757 684-758 684-759 684-760

Sold in packages of 10 $5.00 $4.30 $3.60 5.20 4.45 3.70 6.15 4.40 3.50 6.30 5.05 4.25 4.55 3.25 2.60 8.45 6.75 5.65 6.30 5.05 4.25 7.35 5.85 4.90 9.90 8.30 7.20 12.70 11.00 10.25 13.20 12.30 11.40 18.75 17.35 15.65

B. Oval 16 x 12 18 x 11 18 x 13 21 x 16 22 x 8 25 x 18 26 x 13 28 x 14 30 x 22 36 x 28 40 x 30 46 x 36

C. Square 15.9 19 20.7 25.4

10 10 12 10

25.7 x 19.8 39.5 x 21.5 20.5 x 20.5 33.5 x 1–22 23.3 x 23.3 17.5 x 17.5 27 x 17 17.5 x 17.5 25.5 x 13.4

5-9 pkg $2.20 2.80 3.05 3.80 4.55 5.45 17.15 2.25 2.75 2.85 3.10 20.90 3.80 4.65 11.85 8.35 10.55 17.75 16.80 16.40 21.40

Round

Oval

A

Packaging varies; please see below 684-776 $4.05 $3.50 $3.00 684-777 5.80 5.00 4.30 300-800 11.25 9.00 6.75 684-778 12.30 10.30 8.95

Fancy Shapes D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. L.

3-4 pkg $2.65 3.35 3.65 4.55 5.45 6.50 18.00 2.55 3.20 3.25 3.55 21.85 4.40 5.40 12.40 9.00 11.30 18.55 18.65 17.20 22.25

300-803 300-805 300-806 300-804 300-807 300-808 300-813 300-802 300-814

B

Square

Sold in packages of 12 $11.50 $9.25 $7.00 14.50 12.00 9.50 11.50 9.25 7.00 12.50 10.25 8.00 11.50 9.25 7.00 11.50 9.25 7.00 11.50 9.25 7.00 11.50 9.25 7.00 12.50 10.25 8.00

C

Fancy Shapes

D

G

H

I

J

E

F

K

L

167


ENAMELING TOOLS ECONOMY LITTLE DIPPER™ LIGHT-DUTY PICKLE POT This 16-oz. capacity, stoneware pot has a plastic lid and a 2-ft. power cord. Pre-set at 140°F (60°C) to keep pickle at ideal temperature. Shipping weight: 2.6 lbs. UL-listed. Made in the USA.

Important: Pot must contain solution when it is heated; it will be irreparably damaged if allowed to run dry.

Description A. Little Dipper™; 4¼" ID x 2½" deep

Order # 501-012

1-5 each $18.95

COPPER TONGS Designed for use with pickling and acid solutions, these tongs won’t contaminate solution and are ideal for dipping hot parts into pickle.

A

Curved tips allow quick, easy access to smaller parts—heavy gauge means long life.

B.

Description Heavy-duty bent-nose tongs, 9"L

Order # 501-017

1-2 each $7.75

RIO PICKLE™ FOR NON-FERROUS METALS Mix these granules with water to produce a safer inflammable, non-explosive solution (contains sodium bisulfate). Works best when heated to 140°F (60°C); use with item A, above. Description C. 3-lb. box; makes 1.2 gallons

B

Order # 501-023/3

1-2 each $11.25

SCOTCHBRITE™ PAD DISPENSER BOX This economical box contains a roll of 30 tear-away pads. Use the non-woven abrasive pads to clean and prepare metal for enamels. Pad Size Grit D. 5" x 6" x ¼" 1200

C

Order # 337-390

1-2 each $24.00

NO-NAME METAL CLEANER

Use ScotchBrite™ pads to remove oils and oxides prior to enameling.

This cleaner features a soft abrasive powder that is especially effective at cleaning non-ferrous metals in preparation for enameling. E.

Description 3-oz. bottle

Order # 335-021

each $3.00

D

AMACOTE Use this inert firescale preventative to bare metal to prevent oxidation. F.

Description 16-oz. bottle

Order # 350-093

each $11.20

RIO ENAMEL ADHESIVE This water-soluble adhesive holds enamel in place and burns off during firing. Use with the spray water bottle below (item H). Description G. Rio enamel adhesive, 1 pint

Order # 350-041

each $10.95

Order # 350-038

pkg $2.95

PLASTIC SPRAY BOTTLE Description H. Plastic spray bottle, 4 oz.; pkg/2

E

F H

G

PREMIUM ARTIST’S BRUSHES Items I–L has a beveled handle for precise application. Items M–P are three-sided. Brush set includes one each of each style and size. Description Premium artist’s brush set (includes one each, items I–P)

High-quality, extra-soft brushes (items I–P) help you apply enamel to designs with precision and superior control.

I

168

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

I. Murena-Sable J. K. L. M. Tamara-Kolinsky N. O. P.

Size 00 0 2 4 00 0 2 4

Order # 350-060

set $29.95

350-061 350-062 350-063 350-064 350-065 350-066 350-067 350-068

Sold in packages of 2 $3.75 3.85 4.50 5.95 4.75 4.95 5.80 7.40

riogrande.com

800.545.6566


ENAMELING TOOLS MORTAR & PESTLE SET This 31/2"W x 17/8"H ceramic mortar and 61/4"L x 11/2"W pestle efficiently grinds enamels to the desired fineness. Made in Taiwan. Description A. Mortar & pestle set

Order # 350-024

set $19.95

A

ALUNDUM STONES Grind enamels quickly without contaminating glass particles. Size B. 6" x 1" x 1" C. 6" x 1" x 1"

Grit 150 220

Order # 350-029 350-030

1-2 each $12.50 12.50

D B

GLASS BRUSHES Use these fiberglass brushes for metal preparation and to clean out pores in enameled surfaces. Made in England. Description D. Fine brush (red) E. Coarse brush (blue)

Length 5¾" 5¾"

Order # 350-026 350-025

E

C

each $49.95 49.95

STACKABLE SIFTING PANS Use these 6½" screens individually or stack them in series to quickly and effectively separate grain sizes. Use the solid pan as a base under the mesh pans. Mesh size is marked on each pan. Description 60 mesh 80 mesh 100 mesh 150 mesh 200 mesh 325 mesh Solid (not shown) Set includes one of each above; set/7 F.

Order # 350-013 350-014 350-015 350-016 350-017 350-018 350-019 350-070

each $5.95 5.95 5.95 5.95 5.95 5.95 5.95 29.95

ENAMEL SIFTERS Lightweight sifters have ribbed handles and are easy to control. Simply slide a fingernail across the ribbed plastic to create vibration for effective sifting. Description G. Line sifter, 1⁄16" opening H. Line sifter, 1⁄32" opening I. Medium sifter, 40-mesh J. Small sifter, 40-mesh Set includes one each items G–J

Order # 350-020 350-021 350-023 350-022 350-071

Line sifters are used to create thin lines of enamel on workpieces.

G F H

I

each $6.95 6.95 5.95 5.95 14.95

J

SOFT TOUCH TOOL SET Each of these 10 high-quality steel tools has a 5/16" PVC-covered handle to ensure a sure, comfortable grip through hours of work. Description K. Set of 10

Length 5¾"

Order # 700-329

set $39.95

BLUE HERON™ PRECISION TWEEZERS, BEVELED TIP Fine-tipped tweezers make placing wire, glass pieces or foils easier and more precise. Description L. Curved M. Straight

Length 4½" 47⁄8"

Order # 115-017 115-018

K. set of 10

1-2 each $10.95 10.95 item K tips, enlarged

SCISSORS Fine, razor-sharp steel blades easily cut wire and foil. Oversized loop handles provide precise, comfortable control. Description N. Straight 7⁄8" blade

Length 3½"

Order # 114-670

1-2 each $13.95 L M

N

169


ENAMELING TOOLS STAINLESS STEEL FIRING TRIVETS During firing, these trivets support pieces that have enamel applied to both top and bottom surfaces.

1"

Description A. Single B. Three-slant C. Three-slant

11/4"

B

Size 1" x 1¼" 2" x 1" 3" x 2½" x 2"

Order # 350-010 350-005 350-006

each $5.70 6.35 8.10

2"

A 1"

SIX-STATION TRIVET Fire six pieces at once that have enamal applied to both top and bottom surfaces. Size D. 4" x 4" X 1¼" 21/2"

each $29.95

2"

C

Stilts support enameled pieces with minimum contact on the applied enamel.

Order # 350-090

STAINLESS STEEL MESH FIRING RACKS These mesh racks support workpieces directly or can be used to support the stainless steel stilts above. Description Size E. Small 3½"W x 3"D x ¾"H * Large 5"W x 5½"D x 1"H *Not shown

3"

4"

11/4"

Order # 350-007 350-008

each $4.95 6.95

STAINLESS STEEL FIRING TOOLS Use these tools to move hot workpieces from the oven or kiln to the cooling area. Each has a wood handle to insulate against hot metal and glass and to ensure a secure grip. Description Length F. Fork 17" G. Spatula 17½"

Order # 350-001 350-002

each $10.50 10.75

SILQUAR™ HIGH-HEAT PROTECTIVE BLOCK This ceramic block features padded feet to protect work surfaces from burning; it’s ideal for holding multiple hot items for cooling. Size H. 12" x 12" x ½"

4"

Order # 502-006

each $22.95

STEEL FIRING PRESS PLATE Set this plate on top of flat workpieces after firing to prevent warpage while they cool. The plate should be pre-heated to avoid thermal shock to the workpiece and used immediately after removing the workpiece from oven or kiln.

D

3/4"

3" 31/2"

E

Size I. 8" x 8"x ½"

Order # 350-035

each $39.95

WOOD-HANDLE SPATULAS Gently move enameled pieces to racks or stilts on the flexible, rounded stainless steel blade of item J. Wood handles provide a secure grip and act as a heat sink. Size J. 7"L x ¼"W K. 7½"L x 1¼"W

Order # 350-046 702-142

each $4.65 14.95

Please Note: Items on this page are not shown to scale. 171/2"

71/2"

12"

17"

K I F

170

G

12"

H

J

8" 8"

riogrande.com

800.545.6566


KILNS & CONTROLLERS ULTRALITE KILN Lightweight beehive-style kiln has a recessed 3"-diameter ceramic-embedded element; working temperature is 1550°F (843°C). Always use a disc (item B) to protect the floor of the kiln. Choose a controller to precisely and automatically control temperatures. Made in the USA. Power: 110 volts, 250 watts, 2.5 amps Dimensions: 5½"W x 5½"D x 6½"H Shipping weight: 1.8 lbs. Description A. Ultralite kiln Ultralite kiln controller (not shown) B. Discs; pkg/3

Order # 703-016 703-009 703-008

Use stilts up to 3" wide and 1" high in this kiln.

A

each $178.00 25.95 22.90

B A stainless steel work spatula is included with item A.

RIO ENAMELING KILNS The controller has three pre-set firing temperatures for enamels and six user-defined to set and maintain firing temperatures. It provides ample space for firing and has an easy-latch door that will not jar your enamels when opening and closing. This kiln is suitable for metal clay, glass and ceramics. Galvanized steel case with high-temperature insulating fire brick for efficient heating; elements are protected in recessed grooves. Rio Model 900 Perfect for enameling most small or flat pieces. Overall dimensions: 14"W x 18"D x 16¼"H Inside chamber: 8½"W x 9"D x 4½"H Max. temperature: 2000°F (1093°C) Power: 120 volts, 1100 watts, 9 amps Shipping weight: 63 lbs. (28.5kg) Description C. Rio Model 900 enameling kiln

Order # 703-119

C

each $685.00

The exclusive, easy-to-use Rio controller sets and maintains accurate firing temperatures.

Rio Model 1000 Ideal for all types of enameling; accommodates tall pieces. Overall dimensions: 14"W x 18"D x 20"H Inside chamber: 8½"W x 9"D x 8¾"H Max. temperature: 2250°F (1232°C) Power: 120 volts, 1680 watts, 14 amps Shipping weight: 74 lbs. (33.5kg) Description D. Rio Model 1000 enameling kiln

Order # 703-121

each $899.00

KILN WASH Mix kiln wash with water to a consistency of thick cream, and paint it on the kiln floor to prevent damage caused by enamel drips. E.

Size 1-lb. bag

Order # 703-050

each $3.95 “The Sun Sets Over the City” by Jeanette Landenwitch

E D

 WARNING! Please see the warning regarding silica on page 165 and follow all recommended safety procedure for handling and working with this product. Ask for and read the MSDS for this product.

Don’t see the kiln you need? We can get the kiln you need for your particular firing process. Call us today and we’ll find it!

“Break rules—be creative, push the limits, experiment. Look for happy accidents.” —Jeanette Landenwitch

171


AC RY L I N J E W E L RY PA I N T

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Q

R

ACRYLIN JEWELRY PAINT Your jewelry designs become a canvas for color with Acrylin Jewelry Paint! This thin, easy-to-apply paint can be sprayed on or brushed on. No need to mix; the color is ready to go right out of the jar. And it heat-cures (we recommend a toaster oven) to the same color, and it resists cracking after it cools. Although you should initially apply different colors separately, you can still mix them to explore unique color effects. The paint won’t run, so you can apply it to vertical designs—perfect for beads! Works on any metal, and is great with metal clay.

A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. L. M. N. O. P. Q. R. S.

Color Metallic copper White Black Metallic gold Metallic silver Lemon yellow Cyan blue Brown Red Green Orange Violet Matte black Matte silver Matte white Matte gold Magenta Yellow Purple

Order # 220-000 220-001 220-002 220-003 220-004 220-005 220-006 220-007 220-008 220-009 220-010 220-011 220-012 220-013 220-014 220-015 220-016 220-017 220-018

Sold in 2-oz. jars 1-2 3+ each each $9.75 $7.75 9.75 7.75 9.75 7.75 9.75 7.75 9.75 7.75 9.75 7.75 9.75 7.75 9.75 7.75 9.75 7.75 9.75 7.75 9.75 7.75 9.75 7.75 9.75 7.75 9.75 7.75 9.75 7.75 9.75 7.75 9.75 7.75 9.75 7.75 9.75 7.75

S

WROUGHT IRON EARRING STAND Find more handcrafted metal displays at riogrande.com! 400-729 Sold individually Qty 1 2 3-5

Price $18.35 16.80 15.80

BRONZclay™ earrings and pendant painted with Acrylin Jewelry Paint; by Yvonne M. Padilla.

172

riogrande.com

800.545.6566


COLORES™ KITS & COLOR SETS COLORES™ STARTER KIT The starter kit contains the components kit below, plus items B–D. Description A. Starter kit

Order # 638-960

Sold as a kit 1 kit 2 kit 3+ kit $139.00 $129.00 $121.00

COLORES™ COMPONENTS KIT Includes a complete set of instructions and the following supplies: • 16 oz. thin hardener • 8 oz. thick hardener • 8 oz. clear 1000 epoxy resin • 50 mixing sticks • 1 oz. #30 additive (thickening agent) • 50 measuring cups • 50 1-oz. plastic bottles with 25 lids • 60 blunt-end needles (15 each of four sizes: 18, 20, 21 and 22 ga.) Description Basic components kit

Order # 638-964

Sold as a kit 1 kit 2 kit 3+ kit $74.50 $69.00 $63.00

COLORES™ COLOR RESIN SETS These color resin sets contain convenient 2-oz. jars. See more colors on the following page. Basic Neutral Color Resins Includes two black, two white and one each navy, ivory, red, pearl, pewter, denim and gold.

B.

Description Set of 11 colors

Order # 638-961

Sold as a set 1 set 2 set 3+ set $27.95 $25.00 $23.50

Bright Opaque Color Resins Includes one each yellow, orange, coral, fuchsia, turquoise, royal blue, purple and green. C. Set of eight colors

638-962

Includes one each ruby, emerald, sapphire, amethyst, golden topaz, zircon and zinnia. 638-963

Easy to use Colores™ makes creating popular designs simple. The starter kit (item A) includes all the supplies listed, plus all 24 basic neutral, bright opaque and gemtone transparent colors (items B–D). • Use Colores™ on fired metal clay. • Place free-form designs under wax paper or plastic wrap and trace. • Match the color of inlaid stones; use the epoxy to glue the stones. • Decorate stained glass or create stained-glass effects. • Use to back opals in place of onyx. • Repair cloisonné or enameled jewelry. Please Note: Colores™ epoxy resins may become separated; gently stir to re-mix the color before adding hardener (stirring vigorously or shaking can cause air bubbles). Make a thin Colores mixture for filling cavities or one thick enough to apply to domed surfaces. When cured, Colores-filled pieces have a smooth, shiny finish.

$23.95 $21.50 $19.50

Gemtone Transparent Color Resins

D. Set of seven colors

A

$21.95 $19.50 $17.50

Please Note: The minimum mix ratio recommended is 10cc resin (clear or color) to 5cc hardener (thin or thick).

Mix Colores™ primary colors to create the exact colors you need.

B. Basic Neutral

Because Colores™ cures to a smooth, shiny finish without heat or polishing, it’s perfect with all formulas of metal clay.

C. Bright Opaque

D. Gemtone Transparent

173


COLORES™ COLOR SETS

A. Pastel Pearl

B. Earthtone Pearl

C. Opal

D. Glitter

Pendant by CeCe Wire

E. Classic

COLORES™ COLOR RESIN SETS These color resin sets contain convenient 2-oz. jars. See more colors on the previous page. Pastel Pearl Color Resins Includes one each rose, taupe, mint, peach, baby blue, lavender & teal. Description A. Set of seven colors

Order # 638-967

Sold as a set 1 set 2 set 3+ set $21.95 $19.50 $17.50

Earthtone Pearl Color Resins Includes one each mocha, moss, tiger’s eye, plum, strawberry, cinnamon & peacock. B.

Set of seven colors

638-968

$21.95 $19.50 $17.50

Opal Color Resins Includes one each white, blue-violet, coral-red, blue-rose, pink-mauve & green-gold. C. Set of six colors

638-973

$21.50 $19.00 $17.00

Glitter Color Resins Includes one each black AB (aurora borealis) shine, white shine, red fire shine, blue AB shine, green AB shine & yellow AB shine. This glitter resin will pass through a #22 syringe tip without clogging.

Mixing colors is a greate way to create various coloring effects; always mix the colors before

D. Set of six colors

623-020

$22.25 $20.00 $18.00

Classic Color Resins Use with thick, thin or grinding hardeners (page 175). Includes one each black, red, navy blue, light blue, green, yellow, white & clear. E.

Set of eight colors

625-485

$25.50 $23.00 $21.00

adding the hardener.

174

riogrande.com

800.545.6566


COLORES™ COLORS & SUPPLIES COLORES™ REPLACEMENT COLORS Keep 32-oz. cans of replacement colors on hand. Below are just a few of the most popular colors—replacements of all colors are available by special order; see colors on pages 173 and 174. Description A. Basic neutral red Basic neutral navy Gemtone transparent ruby Gemtone transparent emerald Gemtone transparent sapphire

Order # 623-022 623-021 623-023 623-024 623-025

Sold in 32-oz. cans 1 2 3+ each each each $41.95 $38.95 $36.95 41.95 38.95 36.95 41.95 38.95 36.95 41.95 38.95 36.95 41.95 38.95 36.95

C

A B

REPLACEMENT SUPPLIES Durenamel™ grinding hardener (item G) is specially formulated to allow grinding and polishing and offers a finished appearance similar to traditional glass enamels. Order # 638-979 638-978 638-976 638-975 638-977 625-484

Sold in 8-oz. bottles 1 2 3+ each each each $20.00 $18.00 $16.00 20.00 18.00 16.00 19.00 17.00 15.00 22.00 20.00 18.00 22.00 20.00 18.00 23.50 21.50 19.50

H. Bottle, 1 oz. I. Cap J. Mixing cup

638-991 638-990 638-992

Sold in packages of 50 $29.50 $26.50 $23.50 32.50 29.50 27.00 6.15 5.55 4.95

K. Syringe, 3cc capacity

638-972

Sold in packages of 20 $12.25 $10.25 $8.25

503-119 503-120 503-118 503-123

Sold in packages of 100 1-2 3-5 $11.25 $10.70 11.25 10.70 11.25 10.70 11.25 10.70

B. C. D. E. F. G.

L.

Description Black epoxy resin White epoxy resin Clear epoxy resin Thin hardener Thick hardener Durenamel™ grinding hardener

Replacement 18-gauge (pink) syringe tip 20-gauge (yellow) 22-gauge (gray) 26-gauge (beige)

F D E

H

J

CASTALDO® RESIN RELEASE SPRAY This all-natural, bio-degradable, non-flammable and non-toxic mold release is ideal for plastic resin models (such as those carved from butterboard model material; see your Tools & Equipment catalog). Resin release is colorless, greaseless, long-lasting and contains no silicone and no CFCs. Hazardous shipping charges apply when shipped by air. Description M. 12-oz. (355ml) can

Order # 701-104

1-2 3-11 12+ each each each $14.75 $13.30 $11.95

I G

K L Item K is shown with 22-gauge tips; tips are sold separately (item L).

MOLDS FOR COLORES™ Use these molds with any Colores™ epoxy resin on this page or the facing page to create resin components. Each mold set features different shapes—use them both for maximum design options. Description N. 22-mold set O. 26-mold set

Order # 330-064 330-065

1-2 set $7.95 7.95

O M

N

175


COLORES™ ACCESSORIES

“Doming resin magnifies your designs!” —Mark Nelson, Rio Grande Tech Team COLORES™ DOMING RESIN KIT Use versatile doming resin as a sealant to prevent oxidation of metal surfaces; use it artistically on charms and frame components to magnify objects or images below the domed surface. Please Note: Test the permanence of any ink-jet images; they may need to be sealed before applying resin. Kit includes: 8 oz. of clear resin, 8 oz. of hardener, 12 cups, 12 stirrers and instructions.

design by Mark Nelson

Learn how to make this pendant at riogrande.com in our Learning Center!

Description A. Doming resin kit

Order # 623-014

1-2 3-5 6+ kit kit kit $21.95 $19.95 $17.95

COLORES™ FINISH POWDER KITS Experiment to discover new effects and document them carefully so you can reproduce your favorite finishes. Kit includes one 2-oz. jar of each color plus applicator bottles. Use tape to guide the application of color or powders. Description B. Duo-chrome: red, blue, green C. Hilite: orange, blue, red, green

Order # 638-995 638-996

1 2 3+ kit kit kit $36.50 $34.50 $32.50 32.00 30.50 28.50

A

Please Note: Finish powders do not appear in the jar as they will after you apply them. The powder must interact with wet Colores™ to produce its highlights.

B

COLORES™ STAINED GLASS HEAVY-DUTY TAPE

Colores™ finish powders are absorbed by the wet surface, leaving a striking, iridescent finish. Try mixing finish powder into your Colores color mixture for varied effects; it won’t affect cure time or resin quality.

Description D. 4"-wide tape; roll is 108 ft. long

Order # 638-989

1 2 3+ each each each $25.50 $23.50 $21.50

USING EPOXY ENAMELS DVD (not shown) Learn the basics for using Colores™ in this exclusive overview. Description Using Epoxy Enamels DVD; 50 mins.

Order # 560-369

each $19.95

Use tape, item D, to cover areas you don’t want to fill with Colores™ or to prevent colors from mixing.

C

176

D

riogrande.com

800.545.6566


RAINDROP™ RESIN KIT & FINDINGS Use Raindrop™ resin with any of the findings on pages ??–??.

B

C

D

E

F

G

A

RAINDROP™ CLEAR RESIN KIT Use this resin over photos, vintage paper or other elements inside the bezel components shown on pages 177–183—the doming creates a magnifying effect on the images or textures beneath the resin. Also effective as a sealant to prevent oxidation of metal surfaces. You can even tint the resin to create an antiqued sepia effect over photos! Kit includes: • One 4-oz. bottle clear resin • One 4-oz. bottle hardener • 12 mixing cups • 12 stirrers • Instruction sheet Description A. Raindrop™ clear resin kit

Order # 623-012

kit $19.95

BASE METAL BEZEL-CUP RINGS Handcrafted These adjustable (size 8–10.5) rings feature large bezel-cup mountings that are ideal for designs using Raindrop™ clear resin. Glue a photo, mementos or other elements into the bottom of each cup, then use Raindrop™ clear resin to create an attractive domed finish. Wall height on each bezel is 3mm. Made in Mexico

B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. L. M.

Shape Round

Oval

Square

Rectangle

Metal/Finish brass, silver-plated brass, natural copper brass, silver-plated brass, natural copper brass, silver-plated brass, natural copper brass, silver-plated brass, natural copper

Size (mm) 23 23 23 30 x 20 30 x 20 30 x 20 21 21 21 29 x 15 29 x 15 29 x 15

Order # 629-733 629-734 629-735 629-736 629-737 629-738 629-739 629-740 629-741 629-742 629-743 629-744

1-2 each $7.50 7.50 7.50 7.50 7.50 7.50 7.50 7.50 7.50 7.50 7.50 7.50

Sold individually 3-4 5-9 each each $6.75 $6.00 6.75 6.00 6.75 6.00 6.75 6.00 6.75 6.00 6.75 6.00 6.75 6.00 6.75 6.00 6.75 6.00 6.75 6.00 6.75 6.00 6.75 6.00

H

K

I

J

L

M

Papers, fabrics, even found objects can be arranged in the bezel cup of these rings and encased in crystal-clear Raindrop™ resin (above) to create wearable works of art. Designs by Victoria Harben (left) and Yvonne M. Padilla (center, right).

177


FINDINGS

B

A

C From a miniature painting to a tiny collage, these bezel cup findings provide an amazing canvas for your creativity. Finish pieces with Raindrop™ clear resin (see page 177). Design by Shelby Chant.

BASE METAL BEZEL-CUP PENDANTS WITH RING Handcrafted These pendants are the perfect palette for inlay-style designs made with Raindrop™ clear resin (page 177). Glue a photo, mementos or other elements into the bottom of each cup, then use Raindrop™ clear resin to create an attractive domed finish. Made in Mexico

Oval E

D

Metal/Finish A. Brass, natural F

Size (mm) 23 x 17

Wall Ht. (mm) 2.7

Order # 629-697

Sold in packages of 2 1-2 3-4 5-9 pkg pkg pkg $7.60 $6.55 $5.90

11 x 17 40 x 21

2.8 5.5

629-698 629-699

Sold in packages of 2 $8.70 $7.50 $6.75 10.95 9.40 8.50

16 x 16 16 x 16 32 x 32

3.4 3 3.2

629-694 629-695 629-700

Sold in packages of 2 $6.60 $5.65 $5.10 6.60 5.65 5.10 10.95 9.40 8.50

17 x 14 17 x 14 26 x 22

3.5 3.5 3

629-692 629-693 629-696

Sold in packages of 2 $7.60 $6.55 $5.90 7.60 6.55 5.90 7.60 6.55 5.90

Rectangle B. Brass, silver-plated C.

Square D. Brass, silver-plated E. Brass, natural F. Brass, silver-plated

Heart G. Brass, silver-plated H. Brass, natural I. Brass, silver-plated

Diamond J.

H

G

I

Brass, natural

23 x 23

4

629-702

$5.05

Sold individually $4.35 $3.75

60 x 36

4

629-703

$9.35

Sold individually $8.45 $7.50

36 x 23 36 x 23 36 x 23

2 2 2

629-713 629-714 629-715

$7.50 7.50 7.50

Sold individually $6.75 $6.00 6.75 6.00 6.75 6.00

Cross K. Brass, silver-plated

Rectangle L. Brass, silver-plated M. Brass, natural N. Copper

J

178

K

L

M

riogrande.com

N

800.545.6566


FINDINGS BASE METAL BEZEL-CUP PENDANTS WITH BAIL Handcrafted Complete with a bail, these pendants are ideal for designing inlay-style pieces using Raindrop™ clear resin (page 177). Glue a photo, mementos or other elements into each cup, then use Raindrop™ clear resin to create an attractive domed finish. Round and small square pendants have a 13.3 x 6.2mm bail; oval and large square pendants have a 14.2 x 6.2mm bail; frame pendants have a 6.3mm three-ring bail. Made in Mexico

Round Size Wall Ht. Metal/Finish (mm) (mm) A. Brass, silver-plated 23 dia. 4 B. Brass, natural 23 dia. 4 C. Copper 23 dia. 4

Sold individually 3-4 5-9 each each $6.75 $6.00 6.75 6.00 6.75 6.00

Order # 629-704 629-705 629-706

1-2 each $7.50 7.50 7.50

4 4 4

629-707 629-708 629-709

$7.50 7.50 7.50

$6.75 6.75 6.75

$6.00 6.00 6.00

4 4 4 5

629-710 629-711 629-712 629-701

$7.50 7.50 7.50 10.35

$6.75 6.75 6.75 9.30

$6.00 6.00 6.00 8.30

K. Brass, silver-plated 32.5 x 32.5 6 L. Brass, natural 32.5 x 32.5 6 M. Copper 32.5 x 32.5 6

629-716 629-717 629-718

$11.25 $10.15 11.25 10.15 11.25 10.15

$9.00 9.00 9.00

B

A

C

Oval D. Brass, silver-plated 30 x 20 E. Brass, natural 30 x 20 F. Copper 30 x 20

Square G. H. I. J.

Brass, silver-plated 21 x 21 Brass, natural 21 x 21 Copper 21 x 21 Brass, silver-plated 38.5 x 38.5

Frame

G

H

D

E

F

I

J

K

L

M

179


FINDINGS

B

A

C

F

D

E

BASE METAL BEZEL-CUP COMPONENTS Handcrafted Finish the bezel cups on these components with inlay-style designs using Raindrop™ clear resin (page 177). Glue a photo, mementos or other elements into the bottom of each cup, then use Raindrop™ clear resin to create an attractive domed finish. All ear wires (items A–E) are made from .025" silver-plated brass. Link bracelets feature seven round bezel cups (item M) or five square bezel cups (item N) and include an extender chain. Made in Mexico

Ear Wires A. B. C. D. E.

I H

Bezel Wall Ht. Shape Metal/Finish (mm) (mm) Round brass, silver-plated 10.5 2.75 brass, natural 10.5 2.75 Oval brass, silver-plated 16 x 10 3.5 Rectangle brass, silver-plated 11 x 17 2.8 Tag brass, silver-plated 12 x 37 2

Cuff Links

G

F.

Square

brass, silver-plated 13 x 13 2

Sold in packages of 2 (1 pair) 1-2 3-4 5-9 Order # pkg pkg pkg 629-727 $5.25 $4.35 $3.75 629-728 5.25 4.35 3.75 629-729 5.25 4.35 3.75 629-730 5.25 4.35 3.75 629-731 15.05 13.05 11.25 Sold in packages of 2 (1 pair) 629-732 $11.25 $10.15 $9.00

Cuff with Bezel G. Round H. I. J. Square K. L.

brass, silver-plated 23 brass, natural 23 copper 23 brass, silver-plated 21 x 21 brass, natural 21 x 21 copper 21 x 21

4 4 4 4 4 4

629-719 $9.35 629-720 9.35 629-721 9.35 629-722 9.35 629-723 9.35 629-724 9.35

Sold individually $8.45 $7.50 8.45 7.50 8.45 7.50 8.45 7.50 8.45 7.50 8.45 7.50

Brass Silver-Plated Link Bracelets with Toggle Clasp Description M. Round, 7 bezels N. Square, 5 bezels

Sold individually Bezel Wall Ht. 1-2 3-4 5-9 Length (mm) (mm) Order # pkg pkg pkg 629-725 $18.80 $17.10 $15.80 7" 16 4 7¼" 19 x 19 4.25 629-726 12.00 10.95 10.10

L K J

item M includes a 1½" extender

M

N item N includes a 1¾" extender

180

riogrande.com

800.545.6566


FINDINGS STERLING BEZEL COMPONENTS Die Struck These bezel components are perfect for Raindrop™ and Colores™ designs. Items D, G and H are made in Israel.

A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. L. M.

Shape Oval, 1 ring

Oval, 2 rings Oval, 4 rings

Square, 1 ring Square, 4 rings

Stone Size (mm) 10 x 8 14 x 10 18 x 13 25 x 18 22 x 8 18 x 13 25 x 18 25 x 18 10 x 10 16 x 16 10 x 10 12 x 12 16 x 16

Order # 698-469 698-470 698-471 694-773 698-326 698-474 694-775 694-777 626-766 626-767 698-882 698-883 698-884

Green order numbers indicate sustainable items.

Sold in packages of 2 1-2 3-4 5-9 pkg pkg pkg $5.09 $4.58 $4.07 5.35 4.82 4.28 5.93 5.34 4.75 7.18 6.54 6.04 8.74 8.07 7.44 7.47 6.72 5.98 9.83 8.74 7.95 9.83 8.74 7.95 7.33 6.35 5.47 10.39 9.00 7.76 11.54 10.27 8.64 12.73 11.60 10.71 15.90 14.69 13.57

A

B

C

F H

G

PENDANT/CHARM FRAMES Cast Create and sell your own art with frame-style pendants/ charms, or offer customers a custom creation using their photograph or memento. Lay the design inside the frame and finish with Raindrop™ doming resin (page 177). Sterling Sold individually Frame size (mm) Order # 24.3 694-555

Description N. Square with hidden bail O. Square w/ring 22 P. Rectangle 14.1 x 11 Q. with ring 12 x 9.5 R. 12 x 9 S. Rectangle 18 x 12.8 T. with bail 14.7 x 9.2 U. 14.7 x 10.9 V. Rectangle 14.1 x 11 W. with 12 x 9.5 X. four rings 12 x 9

Argentium® 930 Silver Y.

Rectangle with ring

686-777 696-875 696-876 696-877 696-878 696-879 696-880 686-075 686-076 686-077

Rectangle with ring

26.03 5.63 7.93 6.67 12.82 11.54 14.77 7.29 10.62 8.10

K

J

L M

22.44 5.06 7.13 6.00 11.83 10.65 13.31 6.57 9.56 7.29

14.1 x 11

Sold individually 686-899 $13.65 $11.81 $10.19

14.1 x 11

686-954

Bronze Z.

I

1-2 3-4 5-9 each each each $33.17 $30.61 $28.68 30.06 6.53 9.19 7.73 13.76 12.38 15.95 8.46 12.32 9.39

E

D

P N

O

Sold in packages of 3 $9.00 $7.50 $6.50

Prices for all sterling items are based on an $18 silver market. Please call for exact pricing based on daily market.

R

Q

T S

V U

W X

Y

Z

Use vintage-style papers and Raindrop™ doming resin (page 177) to create a bracelet that boasts character! Bracelet design by Rosie Dotson.

181


FINDINGS STERLING BEZEL PENDANT MOUNTINGS Die Struck These bezel components are perfect for Raindrop™ and Colores™ designs. Items D and I are made in Israel. Round Packaging varies; please see below

A

C

B

A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. L. M. N.

D

E

Stone Size (mm) 8 10 12 15 18 20 25 30 35 12 16 20 25 30

Pkg Qty 10 10 6 6 6 6 4 2 1 3 3 3 1 1

Oval F

O. P. Q. R.

G

10 x 8 14 x 10 18 x 13 22 x 8

3 3 3 2

1-2 pkg $10.00 12.25 9.00 11.21 14.85 15.93 13.12 12.85 7.35 11.85 16.25 18.22 10.21 13.26

Order # 626-502 626-503 626-504 626-896 626-505 626-506 626-507 626-508 626-897 698-327 698-328 698-329 694-184 694-185

16

694-197

Sold in packages of 2 $17.89 $16.53 $15.27

694-199 694-200

Sold in packages of 2 $14.23 $12.96 $11.97 16.88 15.37 14.18

Square T. 12 U. 16

5-9 pkg $8.00 9.80 7.20 9.07 11.88 12.89 11.03 10.28 5.88 9.61 13.67 15.55 8.59 11.16

Packaging varies; please see below 694-186 $13.13 $11.82 $10.50 694-187 13.49 12.00 10.93 694-188 16.67 15.18 14.03 694-191 14.03 12.49 11.38

Diamond S.

3-4 pkg $9.00 11.03 8.10 9.96 13.37 14.16 11.94 11.57 6.62 10.55 14.80 16.83 9.30 12.08

Prices are based on an $18 silver market. Please call for exact pricing based on daily market. I

H

J

K L M N

O P Q

182

S R

T

riogrande.com

U

800.545.6566


FINDINGS /16 Antique silver-plated

/17 Antique gold-plated

reverse side

B

C

A

D

E

Bracelet design by Rosie Dotson.

BRACELET KIT WITH BRITANNIA PEWTER CHARMS Each kit includes one 8" textured, plated steel cable chain, 10 jump rings (4mm, 19-ga.) and four cast, lead-free pewter charms (one each of items B–E, below). Finish charms with photos, vintage paper or other elements. Glue them in place, then use Raindrop™ clear resin (page 177) to create an attractive domed finish. Attach the completed charms using the included jump rings. Description Order # A. Gold-plated kit (bronze jump rings) 629-522 Rhodium-plated kit 629-523 (nickel jump rings)

BRITANNIA PEWTER CHARMS & LINKS Cast All Rio pewter is 100% lead-free. Antique-Finish Description B. Hammered square with swirls C. Beaded round with leaves D. Square with swirls E. Flower with circles

Sold in packages of 10 1-2 3-4 5-9 pkg pkg pkg $14.55 $12.95 $11.75

Size ½"

Order #/color 629-365/16, 17

½"

629-366/16, 17

14.55

12.95

11.75

½" ½"

629-367/16, 17 629-368/16, 17

14.55 14.55

12.95 12.95

11.75 11.75

5⁄8" 3⁄8" x 7⁄8" ½"

629-369/12, 13 629-370/12, 13 629-371/12, 13

Bright-Finish F. Square G. Rectangle H. Square

Sold individually 1-2 3-4 5-9 kit kit kit $15.90 $13.75 $11.85 15.90 13.75 11.85

Sold in packages of 10 $16.25 $14.45 $13.15 16.25 14.45 13.15 16.25 14.45 13.15

/12 Rhodium-plated

/13 Gold-plated

reverse side

F

G

H

183


CHAIN MAIL KITS

Chain Mail Kits Yesterday it was worn to defend. To protect. Today it’s worn to stand out in a crowd and take charge! Chain mail jewelry retains A

its deep-rooted, romantic history with intricately woven, fluid patterns that behave like luxurious textiles—textiles with a kick! STERLING MAILLESMITH™ CHAIN MAIL BRACELET KITS Inside these kits, find the jump rings, clasp and instructions to create a chain mail bracelet. We recommend using two chain-nose pliers or one chain-nose and one flat-nose to make the bracelets. Inca Puno

B

Kit includes a sterling triple-bead S-hook clasp, enough 5mm (18-gauge) sterling TemprRings™ to make an 8"-long Inca Puno bracelet, and instructions. Description A. Sterling Inca Puno

Order # 627-363

each $75.19

Double Chain Kit includes a sterling oval-bead S-hook clasp, enough 5mm (16-gauge) sterling jump rings to make an 8"-long Double Chain bracelet, and instructions. B.

Description Sterling Double Chain

Order # 627-364

each $44.48

Triple Chain C

Kit includes a sterling oval-bead S-hook clasp, enough 5mm (16-gauge) sterling jump rings to make an 8"-long Triple Chain bracelet, and instructions. Description C. Sterling Triple Chain

Order # 627-365

each $68.86

Byzantine Kit includes a sterling S-hook clasp with coil, enough 3.5mm (18-gauge) sterling TemprRings™ and 4.2mm (20-gauge) sterling jump rings to make an 8"-long Byzantine bracelet, and instructions. Description D. Sterling Byzantine

D

184

Order # 627-367

each $43.93

Prices are based on an $18 silver market. Please call for exact pricing based on daily market.

riogrande.com

800.545.6566


CHAIN MAIL KITS

A

Swanstrom Short Chain-Nose Pliers (see riogrande.com) 111-046

$39.00 We’d like to thank Jacqueline Hutchinson and Cathy Contreras for their contributions on the development of our Maillesmith™ line!

BRONZE MAILLESMITH™ CHAIN MAIL BRACELET KITS Inside these kits, find the jump rings, clasp and instructions to create a chain mail bracelet. We recommend using two chain-nose pliers or one chain-nose and one flat-nose to make the bracelets.

B

Inca Puno Kit includes a bronze S-hook clasp, enough 5mm (18-gauge) bronze jump rings to make an 8"-long Inca Puno bracelet, and instructions. Description A. Bronze Inca Puno

Order # 629-903

each $17.00

Double Chain Kit includes a bronze S-hook clasp, enough 5mm (16-gauge) bronze jump rings to make an 8"-long Double Chain bracelet, and instructions. B.

Description Bronze Double Chain

Order # 629-904

each $11.95

C

Triple Chain Kit includes a bronze S-hook clasp, enough 5mm (16-gauge) bronze jump rings to make an 8"-long Triple Chain bracelet, and instructions. Description C. Bronze Triple Chain

Order # 629-905

each $18.00

Byzantine Kit includes a bronze S-hook clasp, enough 3.5mm (18-gauge) bronze jump rings and 4.2mm (20-gauge) bronze jump rings to make an 8"-long Byzantine bracelet, and instructions. Description D. Bronze Byzantine

Order # 629-906

each $11.25

D

185


S T E R L I N G Te m p r R i n g s ™ Gauge mm 1.6 Prices are based on an $18 silver market. Please call for exact pricing based on daily market.

2

24

22 A

C

2.4 F

2.5

“I love the idea of metal fabric! This is why I chose steel rings.” —Devon Tipp

20

STERLING ROUND TEMPRRINGS™ These easy-to-solder spring-hard jump rings are full-tempered, so they’re easier to close and retain their strength afterward for more secure connections. Plus, there’s less chance of marring the metal. Use them by the dozens (the thousands!) to create fluid chain-mail designs.

18

B

D

E

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Q

R

2.8 3

3.2

S

T

U

V

W

X

Y

Z

A1

B1

C1

D1

E1

F1

G1

H1

I1

J1

K1

L1

3.5

4

4.5

5

5.5 M1

N1

O1

P1

Q1

R1

6

6.5 S1

T1

U1

V1

W1

X1

Y1

Z1

A2

B2

C2

D2

E2

F2

G2

H2

7

7.5

8

8.5

9.5

186

Above: “Steel Tie” scarf by Devon Tipp Second Place, 2010 Saul Bell Design Award Emerging Artist

ID OD (mm) (mm) A. 1.6 2.6 B. 2.8 C. 2 3 D. 3.2 E. 3.6 F. 2.4 3.4 G. 3.3 H. 4 I. 2.5 3.5 J. 3.7 K. 4.1 L. 2.8 3.8 M. 4 N. 4.4 O. 3 4 P. 4.2 Q. 4.6 R. 5 S. 3.2 4.2 T. 4.4 U. 4.8 V. 5.2 W. 3.5 4.5 X. 4.7 Y. 5.1 Z. 5.5 A1. 4 5 B1. 5.2 C1. 5.6 D1. 6 E1. 4.5 5.5 F1. 5.7 G1. 6.1 H1. 6.5 I1. 5 6 J1. 6.2 K1. 6.6 L1. 7.5 M1. 5.5 6.7 N1. 7.1 O1. 7.5 P1. 6 7.2 Q1. 7.6 R1. 8.5 S1. 6.5 7.7 T1. 8.1 U1. 8.5 V1. 7 8.2 W1. 8.6 X1. 9 Y1. 7.5 8.7 9.1 Z1. A2. 9.5 B2. 8 9.2 C2. 9.6 D2. 10 E2. 8.5 10.1 F2. 11 G2. 9.5 11.1 H2. 11.5

Ga. 24 22 24 22 20 24 22 20 24 22 20 24 22 20 24 22 20 18 24 22 20 18 24 22 20 18 24 22 20 18 24 22 20 18 24 22 20 18 22 20 18 22 20 18 22 20 18 22 20 18 22 20 18 22 20 18 20 18 20 18

Packaging varies; please see below Pkg 1-2 3-4 5-9 Qty Order # pkg pkg pkg 100 684-517 $7.27 $6.23 $4.46 100 684-525 8.26 6.92 5.09 100 684-518 7.90 6.58 5.27 8.18 6.85 100 684-526 10.22 100 684-539 13.90 11.63 9.40 100 684-501 5.12 4.28 3.46 100 684-504 9.47 7.93 6.40 100 684-507 14.06 11.76 9.50 100 684-519 5.83 4.90 4.24 100 684-527 9.35 7.85 6.79 9.05 100 684-540 10.89 10.05 5.59 4.84 100 684-520 6.68 7.27 6.25 100 684-528 8.38 9.68 100 684-541 11.64 10.75 100 684-521 6.68 5.59 4.84 8.85 7.68 100 684-529 10.58 6.81 6.13 50 684-542 7.94 9.29 8.36 50 684-554 10.04 5.88 5.10 100 684-522 7.03 9.32 8.08 100 684-530 11.14 50 684-543 7.91 6.85 6.39 9.98 50 684-555 13.37 11.58 100 684-502 6.93 5.79 5.02 100 684-505 9.59 8.32 7.15 7.85 7.06 50 684-544 9.15 9.29 50 684-556 11.15 10.32 6.98 6.05 100 684-523 8.34 9.03 100 684-531 12.12 10.50 50 684-508 9.70 8.31 7.48 50 684-557 12.45 11.53 10.38 3.96 3.20 50 684-524 4.73 50 684-532 7.80 6.53 5.27 50 684-545 10.38 8.98 8.46 50 684-558 14.77 13.75 12.73 50 684-503 6.90 5.51 4.62 6.64 5.76 50 684-506 7.93 50 684-509 10.94 9.48 8.16 50 684-513 16.17 15.05 13.94 8.07 7.00 50 684-533 9.64 50 684-546 12.33 10.68 9.19 50 684-559 17.36 16.16 14.97 50 684-534 9.74 8.15 7.07 50 684-547 13.26 11.49 9.88 50 684-514 18.76 17.47 16.17 50 684-535 9.08 7.87 6.77 50 684-510 14.65 12.70 10.93 50 684-560 18.87 17.57 16.27 20 684-536 5.51 4.41 3.20 20 684-548 7.27 6.09 5.27 20 684-561 10.35 8.67 7.51 4.74 3.44 20 684-537 5.93 20 684-549 7.71 6.46 5.59 20 684-562 11.85 9.93 8.60 5.08 3.68 20 684-538 6.34 20 684-550 8.15 6.82 5.91 20 684-563 10.53 9.12 7.86 6.73 5.83 20 684-511 8.04 20 684-515 11.26 9.76 8.40 8.11 7.02 20 684-551 9.69 20 684-564 12.28 10.65 9.16

riogrande.com

800.545.6566


WIRE-WRAPPING Few embellishments are as elegant and captivating as wire-wrapping. Using

“Beautifully simple.” —Patti Sowell

Argentium® 930, gold-filled or traditional silver or gold, you can add interest to your designs. Easy to learn, and quick to master, wire-wrapping can quickly become a treasured way to change the look of any piece.

Wire-wrapped pendant by Patti Sowell

w h a t yo u ’l l n e e d : • Fused glass piece (see pg. 128 to learn how to make one) • Sterling 21-ga. square wire (#100-521, pg. 189) • Sterling 21-ga. half-round wire (#111-421, pg. 189) • Swanstrom flat-nosed pliers and cutters (#111-026, pg. 194) • Painter’s tape (available at your local hardware store) • Permanent marker

PROJECT Wire-Wrapped Pendant

a

b

c

Measure your finished glass piece by wrapping painter’s tape around the outer edge (fig. a). With a permanent marker, mark the tape at the center of each side, the bottom and on either side of the place where the tape meets. Remove the tape and measure the distance between the two furthest marks; add three inches to get your total measurement. Cut three pieces of 21-ga. square wire the length of your total measurement. Place the tape next to the wires and transfer the marks to the wires. Using your pliers, wrap the pieces together at three center marks with 21-ga. half-round wire (fig. b). Place your wire bundle around the outer edge of your glass piece (fig. c). Make sure the wire is snug against the piece.

d

e

f

Bend the wire around the top corners of the piece, then overlap the remainder at the center of the top of the piece. Use the marker to mark the wire at the center of the piece. Bend wire at this mark so all the ends of the wire are pointed away from the piece (fig. d). Once the wire is shaped, remove the glass piece and set it aside. Gather the wire ends and wire-wrap them at the point where they come together at the top of the frame. Wrap around the bundle four or five times with half-round wire (fig. e). Separate the wires between the wire wraps using your pliers (fig. f).

g

Place your glass piece back into the shaped frame and turn it over. Using a pair of pliers, bend the separated wires inward, shaping them to your desired pattern (fig. g). Repeat on the front of your glass piece. Your piece will lie snugly inside the frame.

h

Using your pliers, bend the four front wires at the top of the piece into individual spirals or into any shape you like (fig. h).

i

Bend the remaining two wires backward and down into a single small loop (fig. i)—this will form a bail for your finished piece.

187


ARGENTIUM® 930 S I LV E R W I R E

“There’s no end to wire-wrapping. The possibilities are as plentiful as your supplies.” —Patti Sowell ®

argentium

Wire-wrapped pendant by Patti Sowell

930 silver Argentium® 930 Silver from Rio Grande is a high-quality

argentium®

930 round wire 28

silver alloyed with just a touch of germanium, giving your wire-wrapped jewelry an extreme tarnish resistance and an extraordinary beauty.

26 24 22 21

ARGENTIUM® 930 SILVER ROUND WIRE Ideal for wire-wrapping and making earrings, dangles and more. 28- and 26-gauge wire must be spooled; 24-, 22- and 21-gauge wire may be coiled upon request (10-oz. maximum per coil). All wire 20-gauge or heavier must be coiled. ½-Hard Package spool only spool only spool/coil* spool/coil* spool/coil* coil only coil only coil only coil only

Order # 103-728 103-726 103-724 103-722 103-721 103-720 103-719 103-718 103-716

Minimum Purchase 63 ft. 38 ft. 24 ft. 15.5 ft. 12 ft. 9.5 ft. 7.5 ft. 6 ft. 4 ft.

103-926 103-924 103-922 103-921 103-920 103-919 103-918 103-916 103-914 103-912

38 ft. 24 ft. 15.5 ft. 12 ft. 9.5 ft. 7.5 ft. 6 ft. 4 ft. 2.5 ft. 1.5 ft.

22

26 .016 .400 76 ft. spool only 24 .020 .500 47 ft. spool/coil* 22 .025 .650 30 ft. spool/coil* 21 .028 .710 24 ft. spool/coil* 20 .032 .800 19 ft. coil only 19 .036 .920 15 ft. coil only 18 .040 1.00 12 ft. coil only 16 .051 1.30 7.5 ft. coil only 14 .064 1.60 4.7 ft. coil only 12 .080 2.00 3 ft. coil only *Normally delivered spooled; can be coiled by request.

21

ARGENTIUM® 930 SILVER SQUARE WIRE ½-Hard Order # 103-828 103-822 103-821 103-820 103-818 103-816

Minimum Purchase 18 ft 12 ft. 9 ft. 7.5 ft. 4.75 ft. 3.0 ft.

20 19 18 16 14

Gauge 28 26 24 22 21 20 19 18 16

1/1000" .013 .016 .020 .025 .028 .032 .036 .040 .051

Approx. mm .330 .400 .500 .650 .710 .800 .920 1.00 1.30

Length/ Oz. 125 ft. 76 ft. 47 ft. 30 ft. 24 ft. 19 ft. 15 ft. 12 ft. 7.5 ft.

Hard 12

argentium® 930 square wire 24

20 18 16

188

Approx. Length/ Oz./ Gauge 1/1000" mm Oz. Foot Package 24 .020 .500 36 ft. .028 spool/coil* 22 .025 .650 22.2 ft. .045 spool/coil* 21 .028 .710 18.5 ft. .054 spool/coil* 20 .032 .800 15 ft. .067 coil only 18 .040 1.00 9.3 ft. .107 coil only 16 .051 1.30 5.5 ft. .182 coil only *Normally delivered spooled; can be coiled by request.

riogrande.com

800.545.6566


STERLING WIRE

round

sterling

26 24

quality

22 21 20 19

STERLING ROUND WIRE ½-Hard Ideal for wire-wrapping and making earrings, dangles or any designs requiring stiffer wire. To avoid annealing, use only after soldering. Approx. Length/ Gauge 1/1000" mm Oz. Package 26 .016 .40 76 ft. spool only 24 .020 .50 48 ft. spool/coil* 22 .025 .65 30 ft. spool/coil* 21 .028 .71 24 ft. spool/coil* 20 .032 .80 19 ft. coil only 19 .036 .92 15 ft. coil only 18 .040 1.00 12 ft. coil only 16 .051 1.30 7.5 ft. coil only 14 .064 1.60 4.7 ft. coil only *Normally delivered spooled; can be coiled by request.

Order # 100-356 100-354 100-352 100-351 100-350 100-349 100-348 100-346 100-344

Minimum Purchase 38 ft. 25 ft. 15.5 ft. 12 ft. 9.5 ft. 7.5 ft. 6 ft. 4 ft. 2.5 ft.

14

half-round 24

21 Order # 100-424 100-422 100-421 100-420 100-418

Minimum Purchase 46 ft. 30 ft. 25 ft. 17 ft. 12 ft.

STERLING SQUARE WIRE ½-Hard Square wire is tempered for wrapping; anneal to soften for spiral twist. Approx. Length/ Gauge 1/1000" mm Oz. Package 24 .020 .50 39 ft. spool/coil* 22 .025 .65 24 ft. spool/coil* 21 .028 .71 19 ft. spool/coil* 20 .032 .80 15 ft. coil only 18 .040 1.00 9.5 ft. coil only 16 .051 1.30 6 ft. coil only *Normally delivered spooled; can be coiled by request.

16

22

STERLING HALF-ROUND WIRE ½-Hard Half-round wire is ideal for wire-wrapping. Width x Thickness Length/ Gauge inch mm Oz. Package 24 .020" x .010" .50 x .25 91 ft. spool only 22 .025" x .012" .65 x .32 60 ft. spool only 21 .028" x .014" .71 x .35 50 ft. spool/coil* 20 .032" x .016" .80 x .40 34 ft. spool/coil* 18 .040" x .020" 1.0 x .50 24 ft. spool/coil* *Normally delivered spooled; can be coiled by request.

18

Order # 100-524 100-522 100-521 100-520 100-538 100-536

Minimum Purchase 20 ft. 12 ft. 10 ft. 7.5 ft. 4.75 ft. 3 ft.

20 18

square 24 22 21 20 18

Prices are calculated using the daily silver markets; call or order online for current pricing.

16

189


GOLD-FILLED WIRE round

14⁄20 GOLD-FILLED ROUND WIRE ½-Hard

26

Order # 107-826 107-824 107-822 107-821 107-820 107-819 107-818 107-816

Minimum Purchase 42 ft. 28 ft. 18 ft. 14 ft. 11 ft. 8.75 ft. 7 ft. 4.5 ft.

107-242 107-241 107-240

18 ft. 14 ft. 11 ft.

Order # 107-859 107-858 107-857 107-856 107-849

Minimum Purchase 33 ft. 30 ft. 22 ft. 14 ft. 9 ft.

Package spool/coil* spool/coil* spool/coil* coil only coil only coil only

Order # 107-855 107-854 107-853 107-852 107-851 107-850

Minimum Purchase 28.25 ft. 13 ft. 11.5 ft. 8 ft. 5.25 ft. 3.5 ft.

24 .020 .50 43 ft. spool/coil* 22 .025 .65 25.89 ft. spool/coil* 21 .028 .71 23 ft. spool/coil* 20 .032 .80 15.95 ft. coil only 18 .040 1.0 10.5 ft. coil only *Normally delivered spooled; can be coiled by request.

107-224 107-222 107-221 107-220 107-218

28.25 ft. 13 ft. 11.5 ft. 8 ft. 5.25 ft.

Order # 101-822 101-821 101-820 101-819 101-818

Minimum Purchase 18 ft. 10.5 ft. 11 ft. 9 ft. 7 ft.

Order # 101-430 101-431 101-432

Minimum Purchase 25 ft. 20 ft. 12.5 ft.

101-853 101-852 101-857 101-851 101-856

10.5 ft. 8 ft. 9 ft. 5.5 ft. 4.5 ft.

18

Gauge 26 24 22 21 20 19 18 16

16

Full-Hard

24 22 21 20 19

half-round 22 21 20 18 16

square

1/1000" .016 .020 .025 .028 .032 .036 .040 .051

Approx. mm .41 .50 .65 .71 .80 .92 1.0 1.3

Length/ Oz. 83.33 ft. 55.55 ft. 35.55 ft. 27.75 ft. 21.68 ft. 17.54 ft. 14 ft. 8.80 ft.

Package spool only spool/coil* spool/coil* spool/coil* coil only coil only coil only coil only

22 .025 .65 35.55 ft. coil only 21 .028 .71 27.75 ft. coil only 20 .032 .80 21.68 ft. coil only *Normally delivered spooled; can be coiled by request.

14⁄20 GOLD-FILLED HALF-ROUND WIRE ½-Hard Width x Thickness Length/ Ga. inch mm Oz. Package 22 .025" x .012" .65 x .32 66.66 ft. spool/coil* 21 .028" x .014" .71 x .35 58.82 ft. spool/coil* 20 .032" x .016" .80 x .40 43.47 ft. spool/coil* 18 .040" x .020" 1.00 x .50 27.77 ft. spool/coil* 16 .051" x .025" 1.30 x .65 17.82 ft. spool/coil* *Normally delivered spooled; can be coiled by request.

24 22

14⁄20 GOLD-FILLED SQUARE WIRE ½-Hard

21 20 19 18 16

Gauge 24 22 21 20 18 16

1/1000" .020 .025 .028 .032 .040 .051

Approx. mm .50 .65 .71 .80 1.0 1.3

Length/ Oz. 43 ft. 25.89 ft. 23 ft. 15.95 ft. 10.5 ft. 6.91 ft.

Full-Hard Prices are calculated using the daily metal markets; call or order online for current pricing.

“There’s never a dull moment when working with glass!” —Patti Sowell

12⁄20 GOLD-FILLED ROUND WIRE ½-Hard Gauge 22 21 20 19 18

1/1000" .025 .028 .032 .036 .040

Approx. mm .65 .71 .80 .92 1.0

Length/ Oz. 35.75 ft. 20.93 ft. 22.22 ft. 17.72 ft. 13.88 ft.

Package spool coil coil coil coil

12⁄20 GOLD-FILLED WIRE ½-Hard Half Round Width x Thickness Length/ Gauge inch mm Oz. Package 22 .028" x .014" .71 x .35 50 ft. spool/coil* 20 .032" x .016" .80 x .40 40 ft. spool/coil* 18 .040" x .020" 1.0 x .50 25 ft. spool/coil* *Normally delivered spooled; can be coiled on request.

Square Wire-wrapped pendant by Patti Sowell. Wire-wrap your fused glass piece into an eye-catching pendant! Learn how to wire-wrap on page 187; see how to create a fused glass piece on page 128.

190

21 20 19 18 16

.028" x .028" .032" x .032" .036" x .036" .040" x .040" .051" x .051"

.71 x .71 .80 x .80 .92 x .92 1.0 x 1.0 1.3 x 1.3

21 ft. 16.3 ft. 17.54 ft. 11 ft. 8.8 ft.

coil coil coil coil coil

riogrande.com

800.545.6566


WIRE-WRAPPING TOOL KITS

A

PROFESSIONAL WIRE-WRAPPING KIT The perfect kit for the experienced wire-wrapping jewelry artist. Kit includes: • Swanstrom pliers & cutter set, set/4, with zipper case. • Wire rounder with hardwood handle and 1.8mm cup bur. • Thin flat-nose pliers with nylon jaws. • Three-step bail-shaping pliers. • Tapered ring mandrel, sizes 1–16 in ¼-size increments. • Hardwood ring stick with groove. • Brass-head hammer, 2 oz. • That’s A Wrap! CD-ROM with Linda Abbott. Description A. Professional wire-wrapping kit

Order # 116-521

kit $235.00

B

BASIC WIRE-WRAPPING KIT All the tools you need to begin wire-wrapping. Use practice wire while you acquire and polish your skills. Kit includes: • One each round-nose, chain-nose and flat-nose pliers and side cutter. • One pin vise with four interchangeable collets. • Wood ring stick, rawhide mallet, brass millimeter gauge, 6" steel ruler, equalling needle file and steel scribe. B.

Description Basic wire-wrapping kit

Order # 111-030

kit $59.00

CHAIN ASSEMBLY TOOL KIT This kit contains the basic tools you need for assembling chain: round-nose pliers, chain-nose pliers, flat-nose pliers, loop-closing pliers, a Xuron Maxi-Shear™ flush cutter, swivel pin vise and a 0–3mm chuck. These tools offer a very good overall fit and finish. All except loop-closing pliers and flush cutters have double-leaf springs. Description C. Chain assembly tool kit

Order # 111-094

C

1 kit $36.95

FLAT STOCK AND WIRE SHAPER This flat stock and wire shaper features parallel jaws to bend heavy wire and flat stock (up to 6-ga.). Made in Pakistan. • Make small rings, bracelets and other circular objects with ease. • Tool steel construction with non-reflective black finish and cushion grips. • Weight: 10 oz. Overall Length D. 7" (180mm)

Order # 111-629

1 2 each each $54.00 $51.00

Shape heavy wire and flat-stock up to 6 gauge with these easy-to-use shaping pliers.

D

191


TOOLS & ACCESSORIES ELECTRIC WIRE-WRAP COILER DRILL & MANDREL SET Quickly wind precision coils with this quick coiler. Includes eight mandrel diameters: 8.0, 6.0, 5.0, 4.0, 3.0, 2.5, 2.0, and 1.0mm. Use them for making coils or jump rings. Item A includes a 4.8-volt drill with a no-load speed of 150rpm and 21 torque control settings, plus a forward and reverse switch. The drill also includes a permanent rechargable battery with a direct plug-in charger that provides 3–5 hours of charge time. Item B includes mandrels and a hand winder. Description Order # A. Wire wrap coiler mandrels & drill set 110-181 B. Replacement mandrels (set/8) 110-182 and hand winder

A

set $59.95 34.95

WIRE-WRAPPING MANDREL SET These stepped mandrels create consistently sized loops, time after time. Both stainless steel mandrels have non-slip PVC handles. • Small mandrel has five diameters: 1.5, 2.5, 3.5, 4.5 and 5.0mm. • Large mandrel has five diameters: 6.0, 7.0, 8.0, 9.0 and 10.0mm. • Made in Pakistan. Description C. Wire wrapping mandrels; set/2

Order # 111-628

1-2 3-5 6+ set set set $16.25 $14.25 $12.25

WIRE ROUNDER The perfect tool for deburring cut wire with just a couple of twists. The hardwood handle holds a 1.8mm cup bur.

B

Description D. Wire rounder

C. set of 2 D

Order # 111-031

1-2 each $10.95

3-5 each $8.95

6+ each $6.95

HARDWOOD RING STICK WITH GROOVES The size markings on this finished hardwood ring stick are cut around the full circumference of the stick. Hexagonal handle prevents it from rolling away. 125⁄8" long. E.

Description Hardwood ring stick

Order # 116-001

1-2 3-5 6-11 each each each $15.00 $13.00 $11.00

JUMP/SPRING RING TOOL This extremely convenient tool eases the opening and closing of jump rings. Insert the jump or spring ring into the slot and twist to open or close the ring.

E

F.

F Position the ring in the slot on the ring tool and twist to easily open or close!

Description Jump/spring ring tool

Order # 680-700

Sold in packages of 2 1-2 3-5 pkg pkg $9.75 $7.75

JUMP RING OPENER TOOL Easily open jump rings they way they should be opened (by twisting them open sideways) with this handy tool! Four slots ranging from 0.9mm to 1.85mm wide accommodate a variety of sizes. Description G. Jump ring opener tool

Order # 116-608

Sold in packages of 2 1-2 3-5 pkg pkg $7.95 $5.95

G Simply slide on the ring, then hook a jump ring through one of the four slots (features two slots on one side of the ring and two more on the other side) and gently twist it open.

192

riogrande.com

800.545.6566


SWANSTROM SPECIALTY PLIERS SWANSTROM WIRE-LOOPING PLIER KITS Use Swanstrom wire-looping pliers to make consistent, perfect loops every time. Small pliers accommodate wire up to 18 gauge; large up to 12 gauge. Made and patented in the USA. • The small pliers kit comes with four pins (1.5, 2.5, 3 and 4mm) and a spiral plate for making perfect spiral components. • The large pliers kit comes with four pins (2.5, 3, 5 and 6mm). • Each kit includes an extra hex nut, a hex wrench, a Torx® wrench (to tighten jaws) and an Allen wrench (to adjust width between jaws.) Description A. Small pliers kit Large pliers kit (not shown)

Order # 111-132 111-131

Order # 111-200 111-199

Order # 111-434

E.

Stretch wire rings into any shape you want with the link-forming pliers.

E. Link-forming pliers kit

Order # 111-000

Allen wrench

Pin plate wrench

A. Small wire-looping pliers kit Swanstrom spiral-forming pliers allow you to make intricate patterns quickly and with minimal effort.

B

Swanstrom ear-wire forming pliers allow you to make perfect ear wires in a variety of lengths and styles.

1 2 kit kit $175.00 $168.00

SWANSTROM LINK-FORMING PLIERS KIT Use these pliers to create a variety of link shapes for your jewelry designs. The pliers come with steel pegs of varying diameters; place a wire ring (make your own or choose one ready-made) around the pegs. Squeeze the pliers to stretch the ring into its new shape. Pliers feature forged and machine-hardened high-carbon, high-chrome alloy steel construction, Soft-Touch™ handles, double-leaf spring and adjustable Scrivet® joint. Kit includes link-making pliers, plus: • Steel jig with 48 pre-drilled 1⁄8" holes; 16 round steel pegs (2 of each diameter: 1⁄16", 1⁄8", 3⁄16", ¼", 5⁄16", 3⁄8", 7⁄16", ½") to arrange in the holes to create the shape and size ring you want. • Undrilled Delrin® jig with eight 1⁄16" round steel pegs; drill the jig to accept the pegs in your pattern design to create even more customized shapes. • An Allen wrench and a 1⁄16" drill bit. Description Link-forming pliers kit

spiral plate

Torx® wrench

1 2 each each $74.00 $71.00 58.00 55.00

SWANSTROM WIRE-FORMING PLIERS COMPLETE KIT This kit includes all three of the Swanstrom popular wire-shaping pliers (items A, B and C, above) in an economical bundle. Description D. Wire-forming pliers complete kit

1.5mm 2.5mm 3.0mm 4.0mm

Use your small looping pliers with the accessory spiral plate to create intricate and unusual components!

1 2 kit kit $56.00 $53.00 64.00 61.00

SWANSTROM SPIRAL- AND EARWIRE-FORMING PLIERS Swanstrom specialty forming pliers help you make perfect spirals and ear wires quickly and easily. The spiral forming pliers are perfect for creating necklaces and earrings—even widely spaced and double earring designs. Swanstrom ear-wire forming pliers allow you to form ear wires with varying leg lengths so you can create short, medium or long earring designs—even bent-leg styles—all with one tool. Description B. Spiral-forming pliers C. Earwire-forming pliers

Accessory set

1 2+ kit kit $124.00 $119.00

C

D. Wire-forming pliers complete kit Necklace below created by Tim Sheriff using the link-forming pliers.

193


PLIERS & CUTTERS

SWANSTROM PLIERS & CUTTER SET Our best-selling pliers and cutter set! Description Flat-nose Round-nose Needle chain-nose Super flush-cutter

Each Swanstom set is delivered in a protective zipper case.

Overall Length 6" (152mm) 5.75" (146mm) 6" (152mm) 5.63" (143mm)

Description A. Set of 4

Jaw Length 1" (25mm) 0.75" (19mm) 1" (25mm) 0.63" (16mm)

Order # 111-026

Max. Cut — — — 14 gauge 1 2 set set $154.00 $148.00

SWANSTROM MICRO PLIERS & CUTTER SET All the quality you count on from Swanstrom in smaller sizes for intricate work.

A

Description Round-nose Flat-nose Chain-nose Super flush-cutter

B.

Overall Length 4.48" (114mm) 4.53" (115mm) 4.61" (117mm) 4.26" (108mm)

Description Set of 4

Jaw Length .75" (19mm) .80" (20mm) .88" (22mm) .40" (10mm)

Order # 111-729

Max. Cut — — — 20 gauge 1 2 set set $129.00 $124.00

B

SWANSTROM PARALLEL-ACTION BAIL-FORMING PLIER SET Use these pliers to create jump rings, S-clasps, loops, bails and more! Their parallel-action design ensures that wire is gripped securely; bronze jaws help reduce potential marring of your metal. Plier includes five interchangeable jaws (2.5, 3, 5, 7, 8.5, 9.5mm) that allow you to make just about any size finding. Fixed lower jaw is 9.5mm dia. Description C. Bail-forming pliers; 6¾"L

Order # 111-960

1 2 set set $72.00 $69.00

C For a selection of pliers visit riogrande.com or see your Tools and Equipment catalog.

Max. gauge: 18

D

Max. gauge: 16

WIRE-TWISTING PLIERS Uniformly twist in any wire! Secure a folded loop of wire into a bench vise or over a nail; grasp the loose ends in the jaws of the wire twister, squeeze plier (to latch it closed) and slide the center to lock the pliers. Grasp the handle knob with one hand, releasing the grip of your other hand on the plier handles, and smoothly twist. Features a cutting blade at the base of the jaw. Made in China. Length D. 6" (152.4mm) E. 10½" (267mm)

Jaw Length 7⁄8" (22mm) 11⁄8" (29mm)

Order # 111-227 111-281

1 2+ each each $17.95 $15.95 19.95 17.95

E

194

riogrande.com

800.545.6566


SPECIALTY PLIERS SPLIT-RING OPENING PLIERS Insert the curved tip into the side of the ring and squeeze plier handles to open split rings. The curved tip securely holds the ring. Great for assembly and bead stringing. Made in Pakistan. • Stainless steel with plastic-coated handles. • Box joint. Description A. Split-ring pliers

Overall Length 5.9" (150mm)

Order # 111-508

1 each $12.00

2 each $10.00

BOW-OPENING PLIERS These plliers are commonly used to open most sizes of bows, links and rings. Made in Germany. • Jaws open smoothly and evenly as you squeeze the handles. • Lap joint; coil spring holds the pliers closed. Description B. Bow-opening pliers

Overall Length 5.5" (140mm)

Order # 111-003

1 each $26.95

2 each $24.95

JUMP-RING CLOSING PLIERS Close jump rings in these grooved claws without scratching or twisting. Pliers made in Pakistan; handles made in the USA • Fine tips allow access into tight areas and hold jump rings for soldering tasks. Description C. Jump-ring pliers

Overall Length 4.5" (114mm)

Order # 111-621

1 each $15.95

Length 5" (128mm)

Order # 111-179

1 each $11.95

E.

Overall Length 5.5" (140mm)

Order # 111-171

1 each $26.95

F.

Jaw Length 1" (25.4mm)

Order # 111-957

1 each $21.00

Jaw Length .85" (21.5mm)

Order # 111-627

1 each $17.95

E

2 each $19.00

FLAT-NOSE PLIERS WITH NYLON JAWS These stainless steel pliers are great for holding and straightening wire for wrapping—its smaller size is perfect for smaller hands. • Comfortable PVC grips. • No-mar, durable nylon jaws are 7.5mm wide. Overall Length G. 5" (127mm)

D

2 each $24.95

BAIL-SHAPING PLIERS These looping pliers are great for making bails and offer three different combinations of looping sizes: (2, 3; 3.5, 5.5; 7 and 9mm). Jewelers, beaders and wire artists will find these extremely useful. Made in Pakistan. • Double-leaf spring. Overall Length 6" (150mm)

C

2 each $9.95

ROSARY PLIERS This combination round-nose plier and side-cutter is great for assembling chain and making loops and jump rings. Made in Germany. • Maximum cut (soft wire): 1mm, .040", 18 gauge. • Plastic-coated grips. Constructed with hardened tool steel and has a double-leaf spring to help reduce fatigue. • Box joint. Description German rosary pliers

B

2 each $13.95

LOOP-CLOSING PLIERS Hollowed, polished jaws easily close jump rings, bows, small loops and charm links. Made in Pakistan. • Hardened tool steel. • Box joint. Overall Description D. Loop-closing pliers

A

F

2 each $15.95

G

195


MINI BENCHES & ACCESSORIES JEWELER’S FOUR-DRAWER ORGANIZER This organizer fits atop either the Jeweler’s workbench (item B) or the Craftsperson’s bench (item D). It has four drawers for storing findings, files, pliers, burs and other small items as well as a removeable bar underneath for storing spools of Beadalon® wire. • Measures 18"W x 51/2"D x 13"H. • Made in China. • Shipping weight: 5 lbs.; some assembly required.

A

Description A. Jeweler’s four-drawer organizer

Order # 113-225

each $39.95

JEWELER’S WORKBENCH A mini-scale version of the popular Jeweler’s workbench design, this bench features a pull-out catch tray and space for a bench pin and an armrest. • Bench is 20"W x 16"D x 10"H with 11/4"-high protective railing. • Shipping weight: 25 lbs.; shipped in a protective heavy-duty box. • Made in Taiwan.

Mix & match items A–E to suit your needs. Above, items A, B and E are shown; below, items C, D and E are shown.

B B.

Description Jeweler’s workbench

Order # 113-223

each $69.95

CRAFTSPERSON’S WORKBENCH ORGANIZER Organizer fits atop either the Jeweler’s work bench (item B) or the Craftsperson’s bench (item D). It features hooks for hanging beadstring spools, wire and tools and a rack to hold pliers and various other items. • Measures 18"W x 5"D x 73/8"H. • Made in China. • Shipping weight: 2 lbs.; some assembly required. Description Order # C. Craftsperson’s workbench organizer 113-226

each $29.95

C

CRAFTSPERSON’S WORKBENCH This bench is great for beading and wire work. It has eight side drawers for storage, one locking drawer and a pull-out work surface. • Bench is 20"W x 16"D x 10"H with 11/4"-high protective railing. • Shipping weight: 26 lbs.; shipped in a heavy-duty box for safe shipping. • Made in Taiwan. Description D. Craftsperson’s workbench

Order # 113-222

each $69.95

JEWELER’S WORKBENCH STAND Stand supports the Jeweler’s workbench (item B) or the Craftsperson’s workbench (item D) and folds up for easy travel and storage. • Measures 173/4"W x 131/4"D x 251/2"H. • Shipping weight: 4.5 lbs. • Made in China.

D

E E.

Description Jeweler’s workbench stand

Order # 113-224

each $32.95

EYE-EASE CRAFTMATS™ The soft green color of these grip mats reduces eyestrain, allowing you to work comfortably with small parts for long periods of time. The mat’s unique gripping quality firmly holds objects in place as it stays in place on your bench or work surface. Description Size F. One compartment 18"L x 11"W G. Three compartments 18"L x 11"W H. Eight compartments 18"L x 5"W

F

196

G

Order # 113-752 113-753 113-754

Sold individually 1 2 3-5 each each each $17.50 $16.50 $15.50 17.75 16.75 15.75 14.50 13.50 12.50

H

riogrande.com

800.545.6566


VINTAGE-STYLE ORGANIZERS CRAFTER/BEADER VINTAGE-STYLE TOOL BOX Attractive vintage styling and a roomy, compartmented interior give this tool box a look and functionality reminiscent of a bygone era. Two hinged latches secure the lid over two doors. Behind the doors are two removeable 8¾" x 6¾" drawers and a compartment that holds a 12½" x 8½" flocked vacuformed bead board (included). Above these are a built-in pliers rack, seven individual compartments ideal for holding spools of Beadalon® or other cord and three storage wells for tools and other supplies. Two elastic bands inside the lid provide convenient access to small tools, needles or findings. Size A. 14"W x 11"D x 9"H

Order # 113-115

each $79.95

VINTAGE-STYLE TOOL BOXES With an antique look and feel, these vintage-style tool boxes feature lots of holders and compartments. Elastic straps help organize and secure small items in the lids. Multiple compartments keep items separate, yet easily accessible. Close and lock both styles and take them with you! • Item B includes one drawer, three straps, six internal compartments and a pliers and cutters bar. • Item C includes eight drawers, two elastic straps, a bur holder and a pliers and cutters bar. Size B. 6"H x 7"W x 10"D C. 18"W x 6"D x 9"H

Order # 113-110 113-112

each $29.95 79.95

A

VINTAGE-STYLE PORTABLE WORKBENCH Take your workspace and tools with you! This vintage-style portable workbench opens to reveal a 10" x 19" work surface, four built-in drawers and a moveable organizer with added storage for tools and supplies. To travel, simply move the organizer onto the work surface, fold the lid down and secure it into place, and you’re ready to go. Size D. 20"W x 16"D x 5"H

Order # 113-111

Keep your bench effectively organized with this attractive vintage-style box.

each $79.95

Item D is perfect for holding all your PMC® supplies..

B

D

C

197


ARTISTIC WIRE

Black

Brown

Dark blue

BEADALON速 ARTISTIC WIRE速 Artistic Wire速 will quickly become your favorite permanently colored wire for wire-wrapping, wire-forming and bead stringing! This pliable, high-quality copper wire is enamel-coated to resist tarnishing, chipping and peeling. Made in the USA. Please Note: Artistic Wire is not hypoallergenic; we do not recommend it for making ear wires. 20 Gauge Sold in packages of 15-yard spools 1-2 3-5 6+ Color Order # pkg pkg pkg 635-798 $16.95 $14.25 $11.75 Black Brown 635-800 16.95 14.25 11.75 Dark blue 635-799 16.95 14.25 11.75 Kelly green 635-801 16.95 14.25 11.75 Natural 635-802 16.95 14.25 11.75 Purple 635-803 16.95 14.25 11.75 Red 635-804 16.95 14.25 11.75 Burgundy 635-805 16.95 14.25 11.75 635-806 16.95 14.25 11.75 Brass (non-tarnish) Tinned copper 635-807 16.95 14.25 11.75 Assortment of 12 635-808 48.00 41.00 34.00 (includes two spools of tinned copper, two spools of non-tarnish brass and one each of black, dark blue, brown, kelly green, natural, purple, red and burgundy)

18 Gauge Kelly green

Natural

Sold in packages of 10-yard spools 635-787 $16.95 $14.25 $11.75 Black Brown 635-788 16.95 14.25 11.75 Dark blue 635-789 16.95 14.25 11.75 Kelly green 635-790 16.95 14.25 11.75 Natural 635-791 16.95 14.25 11.75 Red 635-792 16.95 14.25 11.75 Burgundy 635-793 16.95 14.25 11.75 Brass (non-tarnish) 635-794 16.95 14.25 11.75 Tinned copper 635-795 16.95 14.25 11.75 Assortment of 12 635-796 48.00 41.00 34.00 (includes two spools each of tinned copper, non-tarnish brass, burgundy and one each of black, dark blue, brown, kelly green, natural and red)

16 Gauge Purple

Black Kelly green Natural Burgundy Brass (non-tarnish) Tinned copper

635-780 635-781 635-782 635-783 635-785 635-784

Sold in packages of 25-ft. coils $14.95 $12.25 $9.75 14.95 12.25 9.75 14.95 12.25 9.75 14.95 12.25 9.75 14.95 12.25 9.75 14.95 12.25 9.75

Red

Burgundy

Brass

Bracelet by Patti Sowell Tinned copper

198

riogrande.com

800.545.6566


ARTISTIC WIRE BEADALON® 20-GAUGE SILVER-PLATED ARTISTIC WIRE® This 20-gauge, silver-plated Artistic Wire® offers permanent, vibrant colors to make your designs pop with intense, lustrous reflectivity. Perfect for wire-wrapping, wire forming and bead stringing. This pliable, high-quality copper wire is plated with silver, then enamelcoated to resist tarnishing, chipping and peeling. Please Note: Artistic Wire wire is not hypoallergenic; we do not recommend it for making ear wires. Sold in packages of 25-ft. spools 1-2 3-5 6+ Color Order # pkg pkg pkg 635-810 $19.95 $17.00 $14.30 Rose Seafoam green 635-811 19.90 17.00 14.30 Tangerine 635-812 19.95 17.00 14.30 Ice blue 635-813 19.95 17.00 14.30 Silver blue 635-814 19.95 17.00 14.30 Orchid 635-815 19.95 17.00 14.30 Assortment of 12 635-816 58.00 50.00 42.00 (includes two each of rose, seafoam green, tangerine, ice blue, silver blue and orchid)

WIRE TWISTER AND JUMP RING MAKER SET Get everything you need to create round and oval jump rings with the wire of your choice! You can also use the Beadalon® wire-twister tool to twist up to five different color wires together for a variety of color and texture combinations. Set includes round mandrel sizes 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14 and 16mm and oval mandrel sizes of 6 x 4, 7 x 5, and 8 x 6mm. Description Wire twister and jump ring maker set

Order # 116-581

Rose

Seafoam green

Tangerine

Ice Blue

Silver blue

1-2 3-5 6-11 set set set $45.95 $43.95 $41.95 Orchid

BEADALON® 316L STAINLESS STEEL WIRE These specially tempered stainless steel wires are a great alternative to other half-hard metals, such as gold-filled or sterling. Ideal for teaching classes, the strong material will work-harden faster than other wires. The 316L stainless steel round wire is ideal for wire-wrapping. Round Sold in packages of 3 coils Gauge 26 24 22 20

Length/Coil (meters) 20 12 10 6

Order # 116-569 116-568 116-567 116-566

1-2 3-5 6-11 pkg pkg pkg $19.75 $17.75 $15.75 19.75 17.75 15.75 19.75 17.75 15.75 19.75 17.75 15.75

3 3 3

116-606 116-605 116-604

Sold in packages of 3 coils $19.75 $17.75 $15.75 19.75 17.75 15.75 19.75 17.75 15.75

3 3 3 3

116-603 116-602 116-601 116-600

Sold in packages of 3 coils $19.75 $17.75 $15.75 19.75 17.75 15.75 19.75 17.75 15.75 19.75 17.75 15.75

Half-Round 22 21 20

Square 24 22 21 20

The wire twister and jump ring maker set (below) allows you to make round or oval jump rings in several sizes (depending on the mandrel you use) quickly and easily!

199

®


BOOKS & DVDS

CHAIN MAKING TECHNIQUES by Anne E. Mitchell This detailed instruction book contains 22 chain patterns, a brief history of chain mail jewelry, conversion tables, and professional chain-making techniques from master instructor Anne E. Mitchell. Also covered are methods for making your own jump rings, and instructions on recognizing and deciphering patterns. Spiral bound; 80 pages. 550-609

CONTEMPORARY COPPER JEWELRY by Sharilyn Miller Learn the skills you need to begin working with this versatile medium through 17 captivating projects with some of the top jewelry designers and wire-working artists in the field. Includes tips for creating mixed-media copper jewelry, an extensive techniques section and sidebars offering inspiring ideas and money-saving tips. Softbound; 127 pages. 550-372

$22.95

$40.00

CHAIN AND BEADED JEWELRY: CREATIVE CONNECTIONS by Scott David Plumlee Master the basics of metal wire, aspect ratio–precise jump rings, gemstone beads and simple hand tools. Discover wire-wrapping techniques that progress from simple to more complex techniques where gemstone beads are used to embellish a variety of age-old chains. Softbound; 160 pages. 550-371

THAT’S A WRAP!!! by Linda Abbott Learn the art of wire-wrapping with this two-disc series. In Volume 1, learn how to create a wire-wrapped pendant, matching earrings and bead applications. Continue the journey in Volume 2 when you learn to use different tempers of wire to create a three-strand neckwire. Requires Adobe® Reader®, free for download at www.adobe.com. CD-ROM. 560-603

200

$37.95 set/2

WEAVING SILVER CHAINMAIL BRACELETS VOLUMES 1 & 2 by Sarinda “Spider” Newell Easy-to-follow demonstrations of seven different chainmail weaving styles. Includes advice for choosing the right tools, developing good techniques and step-by-step instructions for each chain style. A section on finishing touches helps you achieve a professional look. DVD; 75 mins. total. Volume 1 560-068 Volume 2 560-138

$25.00 25.00

550-610

$19.95

$22.95

CREATIVE WIRE WRAPPING VOLUMES 1 & 2 by Camille Argeanas An introduction to the craft of creating attractive jewelry from copper, brass, silver, gold or gold-filled wire. Learn basic techniques to create bracelets, brooches, necklaces and earrings; then more advanced projects and special techniques for complex bracelet wraps. DVD; 120 mins. total. 560-310

WIRE STYLE: 50 UNIQUE JEWELRY DESIGNS by Denise Peck This step-by-step guide highlights dazzling jewelry designs using versatile wire as contributed by top jewelry-makers. Basic wire-working instructions and photos of each project are included. Softbound; 160 pages.

HAND-WOVEN CHAINS by Felicia Liban Learn to construct custom chain in easy-to-follow steps, beginning with simple projects. Seven chain styles include double loop-in-loop, Herecles’ knot, bird’s nest and a flat mesh chain. Gauges, link sizes and metal types are discussed. DVD; 45 mins. total. 560-021

$49.95

$39.95 set/2

riogrande.com

800.545.6566


BEAD-STRINGING TOOLS

A P e a r l S t r i n g e r ’s M o s t Va l u a b l e To o l ! Get consistent, professional results in a fraction of the time it would take to knot with the traditional awl-and-tweezers method! Your knotted strand is professionally finished with even, snug knots. Once you’ve mastered the Beadalon® Knotter, you can reduce your knotting time by as much as 50% and still maintain the high-quality results your customers expect!

Step 1: Make a loop over the fingers of your left hand with thread. Lead the end through the loop.

Step 2: Pick up the thread with the awl tip. Slide your fingers out of the loop; pull up on the thread to guide the knot down snugly against the pearl.

Step 3: Put the thread in the V-groove; keeping tension on the thread with your left hand, push the knot up and off the awl tip with your right thumb.

Step 4: Slide the next pearl against knot and repeat steps 1–3 above until your strand is complete. Your knots are snug and even.

Your knotted strand is professionally finished with even, snug knots.

BEADALON® KNOTTER TOOL This economical knotting tool from Beadalon® is perfect for knotting pearls and bead strands. Features comfortable wood handle and includes an instruction booklet. Description A. Beadalon® Knotter; 5¾"L

Order # 116-547

1 2 3-5 each each each $21.95 $19.95 $17.95

A

Find a wide selection of bead-stringing tools and supplies at riogrande.com or in your Tools & Equipment catalog.

BEADALON® SEVEN-PIECE TOOL KIT This tool kit from Beadalon® includes all the handy tools every bead stringer needs. Keep it all secure in a canvas zippered pouch with elastic straps. Made in China. • Round-nose pliers • Side-cutter • Chain-nose pliers • Snips • Tweezers • Bead scoop • Two three-compartment containers B.

Description Beadalon® tool kit

Order # 116-562

B

1 2 kit kit $16.95 $14.95

BEADALON® SNIPPER Comfortable, sharp-edged snipper cleanly finishes knots on even the finest beads with a simple squeeze. Lightweight and convenient. Overall Length C. 4½" (127mm)

Blade Length 9⁄16" (14mm)

Order # 116-559

1 each $8.95

2-5 each $7.95

C

THREAD-CUTTER PENDANT A beadstringer’s must-have gadget! A circular cutting blade is held within this small base-metal pendant, ready to snip stringing thread in an instant! Each notch is a cutting blade. Hang the pendant from a long cord or chain up to 2.5mm dia. (find our selection of chain at riogrande.com) and wear it around your neck or hang it on a nearby hook to have it handy while you’re stringing. Description D. Thread-cutter pendant; 1¼" dia.

Order # 116-609

1 each $11.95

2 each $8.95

D Hang this handy thread-cutter from a chain and wear it around your neck, keeping it ready to use while stringing!

201


BEAD-STRINGING TOOLS & SUPPLIES BEAD-CRIMPING PLIERS Use these pliers to sqeeze 2–3mm tubes and beads into smoothly rounded crimps. Item A has three cavities (two for folding, one for rounding) machined with computer-guided precision. Sturdy metal offers greater strength and accommodates longer tube crimps. Item B features hardened steel construction and has a glare-free finish; dual-duty jaws provide expert crimping. The final crimps are suited as floating beads, stations or spacers on Beadalon® wire or InvisiLine™ cord. Both styles have non-slip PVC handles.

A

Overall Description Length Order # A. EUROCrimper 5½" (139.7mm) 111-125 B. Bead-crimping pliers 5" (127mm) 111-616

B

1 2 each each $16.95 $15.95 12.95 11.95

“MAGICAL” CRIMP-FORMING PLIERS Finish 2mm crimps so cleanly and smoothly that they look like beads! The rounded scoop-like notch in each jaw produces a perfectly rounded crimp that grips securely. Crimps won’t budge and have no rough edges to scratch or snag fabric or cord. Use with wire stringing material, Beadalon® or flex-wire measuring .018" or .019" in diameter.

C

Description C. Original handles D. Ergonomic handles

Overall Length 4¼" (108mm) 4¼" (108mm)

Order # 111-195 111-230

1 2 each each $19.99 $18.99 19.99 18.99

BEADALON® EZ-CRIMP™ PLIERS Designed for closing EZ-Crimp™ findings, these pliers squeeze the spiral component of the finding closed easily and cleanly. Spring-action handles are foam-padded and ridged for a secure, comfortable grip.

D

E.

E

Description EZ-Crimp™ pliers

Overall Length 5" (127mm)

Order # 111-235

1 each $13.99

2 each $12.50

BEADALON® MICRO-TOOL SET This handy micro-pocket tool set includes a chain-nose, a side-cutter and a micro-crimp plier. Ergonomic handles have non-slip PVC surfaces. F.

Description Micro- tool set

Overall Length 3¾" (95mm)

Order # 111-582

1 2 set set $17.95 $15.95

BEAD STOPPERS™ Keeping your beads secure has never been so easy! Innovative Bead Stoppers™ hold your beads in place and prevent accidental spills. F

This tacky mat holds beads and other small components securely until you’re ready to use them.

G

H Squeeze the ends to open, then slip wire, thread or string into the stopper. To close, relax the squeeze. Simple!

Description G. Mini; pkg/20 H. Original; pkg/16

Length (mm) 7 12

Order # 116-576 116-573

1 2 pkg pkg $15.75 $13.75 14.75 12.75

BEAD-STRINGING MATS These mats have a sticky surface that keeps beads and components in place while you work, yet does not leave a sticky residue on items once they’re removed. To clean, rinse under warm water and air dry.

I I. J.

Description Size Order # Beadalon® tacky bead mat 4½" x 4½" 116-700 Sticky bead-stringing mat 55⁄8" x 2¼" 116-610

1 each $6.95 8.75

2 each $5.95 7.25

MINI STORAGE BOX ORGANIZER Use this plastic mini storage box to carry beads, findings, stringing material—all those little things you need to create your designs! Removeable dividers allow you to configure the interior to suit your individual needs. Includes a carrying strap. Size K. 4¾"W x 4¼"D x 1½"H (closed)

J

Order # 116-607

1 each $8.50

2 each $6.50

K

202

riogrande.com

800.545.6566


STRINGING SUPPLIES BEADALON® MINI-SPOOL ASSORTMENTS Beadalon® 7 (items A and B) is a strong, nylon-coated, abrasion-resistant wire made up of seven stainless steel wires—ideal for creating reasonably priced craft and beaded designs. Beadalon® 19 (items C and D) is an extra-supple, nylon-coated wire that contains 19 strands of stainless steel—ideal for seed beads, freshwater pearls and ceramic, glass and stone beads. Assortments include three spools in the indicated colors. Beadalon® 7 Assortments Color OD Test Order # 635-391 A. Metallic, .015" 10-lb. one each gold-color, silver-color and champagne-color B. Satin, .015" 12-lb. 635-393 one each gold-color, silver-color and copper-color

Beadalon® 19 Assortments 635-394 C. Metallic, .015" 12-lb. one each gold-color, silver-color, and champagne-color D. Satin, .015" 12-lb. 635-395 one each gold-color, silver-color and copper-color

C

Find Argentium® 930 Silver crimp beads in your Gems & Findings catalog and at riogrande.com.

Sold on 10-ft. spools 1 2 each each $11.75 $9.75 11.75

9.75

Find more colors at riogrande.com!

Sold on 10-ft. spools $18.75 $16.75 15.75

13.75

E. Sterling

PROFESSIONAL-SERIES BEADALON® 49 Our top-selling wire, and the best choice for your ready-to-sell designs! Forty-nine miniature stainless-steel strands are bound by a smooth nylon coating to provide the highest quality wire available. Beadalon® 49 is easy to use without a beading needle, but is flexible enough to be knotted. It is the preferred wire of professional designers who require premium strength, softness and flexibility.

E. F.

Color OD Sterling .018" .024" Bright .013" .018" .021" .024" .030"

mm .46 .61 .33 .46 .53 .61 .76

Test 8-lb. 13-lb. 13-lb. 26-lb. 26-lb. 40-lb. 65-lb.

Feet/ Spool 10 10 30 30 30 30 30

Order # 635-346 635-347 681-116 681-129 625-224 681-137 623-505

D

B A

Sold by the spool 1-4 5-9 10+ each each each $24.75 $21.75 $19.75 26.95 24.95 22.95 14.50 13.50 12.50 9.75 9.00 8.25 9.50 8.75 8.00 9.75 9.00 8.25 9.75 9.00 8.25

Find a wide selection of bead-stringing supplies at riogrande.com or in your Gems & Findings catalog.

F. Bright

G

H

I

J

ROUND GREEK LEATHER CORD This higher-quality cord is available in 10- or 100-meter lengths. To order 100-meter lengths, use the BK order number shown in the right hand column. Made in Greece.

G. H. I. J. K. L. M. N. O.

Individual 10-meter lengths or 100-meter lengths Approx. 10-meter 1-2 3-4 100-meter 100M Color mm Order # each each Order # Lengths Natural 1.2 636-260 $11.50 $9.75 636-260/BK $57.00 1.5 636-264 10.50 8.75 636-264/BK 55.00 636-246 10.25 8.50 636-246/BK 54.00 1.8 2.2 636-248 11.00 9.25 636-248/BK 56.00 Black 1.2 636-261 11.75 10.00 636-261/BK 58.00 1.5 636-265 10.75 9.00 636-265/BK 56.00 1.8 636-247 10.50 8.75 636-247/BK 55.00 2.2 636-249 11.25 9.50 636-249/BK 57.00 Dark brown 1.8 636-250 10.50 8.75 636-250/BK 55.00

K

L

M

N

O

203


STRINGING SUPPLIES KUMIHIMO KIT Create beautiful braiding projects quickly and easily with this Kumihimo kit—everything you need to get started, except the cord or wire, is included. Choose almost any thread, cord or flexible wire—even ribbon. Kit includes one round braiding board (for round braids), one square disc (for flat braids) and 10 bobbins you can use to secure your strands as your work; replacement bobbins are available. Description A. Complete braiding kit Replacement bobbin; pkg/10

A Replacement bobbins available!

The possibilities are endless!

B. Black, 20-lb.

1 2 each each $21.95 $19.95 8.75 6.75

Order # 116-579 116-590

NATURAL HEMP TWINE Try this natural, biodegradable and eco-friendly alternative to cotton and synthetic cord in your designs. The assortments include one spool of each color: black, brown and natural.

B. C. D. E. F. G.

Description Black Brown Natural Natural Natural Asst.; one spool of each color

Test. Strength 20-lb. 20-lb. 20-lb. 36-lb. 48-lb. 10-lb. 20-lb.

Spool Qty 60m 60m 60m 80m 60m 54m 27m

Packaging varies; please see below 1-2 3-5 6-11 12-35 Order # each each each each 680-422 $8.50 $6.00 $4.50 $3.00 680-423 8.50 6.00 4.50 3.00 680-424 8.50 6.00 4.50 3.00 680-428 9.25 6.75 5.25 3.75 680-429 9.25 6.75 5.25 3.75 680-407 7.95 6.50 5.25 4.25 680-406 7.95 6.50 5.25 4.25

BLACK 2MM LOCKING RUBBER TUBING The 2mm black rubber tubing features an innovative easy-to-use locking mechanism—just squeeze the wide end and push the ball tip into it. The result is a secure closure with a seamless look. String glass beads or chunky pendants onto the tubing to complete your necklace.

C. Brown,

D. Natural,

20-lb.

20-lb.

E. Natural,

F. Natural,

36-lb.

48-lb.

Description H. Locking rubber tubing

Length 18"

Order # 635-488

Sold in packages of 20 1-2 3-5 6-11 pkg pkg pkg $13.75 $11.25 $9.50

Get a secure closure with a seamless look!

H

G

This pendant was created using Colores™ doming resin (see page 176). Wire wrapped by Patti Sowell.

Assortments include one spool of each color.

204

riogrande.com

800.545.6566


STORAGE BAGS & POUCHES A. ZIPPIT® HIGH-QUALITY 2-MIL PLASTIC BAGS Wide white Klick-Zips™ open all the way to the edges of these high-quality bags, allowing full access to the interior. All Zippit® bags make quick work of identifying merchandise. WxH 2" x 2" 2" x 3" 3" x 3" 3" x 4" 4" x 4" 6" x 9"

Order # 402-001 402-002 402-003 402-004 402-008 402-014

1 pkg $2.02 2.16 3.15 3.44 3.60 5.85

Sold in packages of 100 10 30 50 100+ pkg pkg pkg pkg $0.47 $0.44 $0.41 $0.38 0.53 0.49 0.47 0.44 0.82 0.77 0.72 0.64 0.90 0.84 0.79 0.74 1.21 1.13 1.06 0.99 3.15 3.03 2.88 2.70

B. ANTI-TARNISH 2-MIL PLASTIC BAG Protect your jewelry from tarnish in this zip-close, clear plastic bag with copper-color backing. This anti-tarnish plastic bag prevents tarnish and corrosion of all ferrous and non-ferrous metals, electronics, optics, plastics, photographs, paper products and more. WxH 2 1/2" x 3" 4" x 4" 6" x 8"

1 pkg $3.65 4.60 7.20

Order # 401-113 401-114 401-115

A

Sold in packages of 10 3 6 10+ pkg pkg pkg $3.35 $3.10 $2.50 4.25 3.90 3.20 6.60 5.90 5.30

C. BIOZIP™ OXO-BIODEGRADABLE ZIPLINE™ 2-MIL PLASTIC BAGS BioZip™ recloseable, 2-mil bags are made of 100% oxo-biodegradable plastic that will break down naturally and return to nature once its useful life is finished. This plastic will not clog landfills for decades to come and will help reduce the unhealthy build-up of methane. WxH 2" x 2" 2" x 3" 3" x 3" 3" x 4" 4" x 4" 4" x 6"

Order # 401-210 401-211 401-212 401-111 401-213 401-112

1 pkg $2.03 2.40 3.04 3.25 4.67 5.65

Anti-tarnish 2-mil bags are non-toxic and fully recyclable; they contain no charcoals, oils or volatile chemicals.

Green order numbers indicate sustainable items.

B

Sold in packages of 100 10 30 50 100+ pkg pkg pkg pkg $0.52 $0.48 $0.45 $0.44 0.61 0.56 0.53 0.52 0.77 0.71 0.67 0.65 0.85 0.80 0.75 0.70 1.19 1.09 1.03 1.00 1.45 1.35 1.25 1.20

When you see the thin green line at the bottom of the bag, you’ll know you have a genuine oxo-biogradable bag.

C

Package it! The piece isn’t finished until it’s dropped inside the perfect pouch! Put your company’s name or logo on these satin bags using our Impressions™ customizing service to make the sale even more memorable! See your Gems & Findings and Display & Packaging catalog for more information.

D. SATIN-WEAVE POUCH ASSORTMENTS Smooth-finish nylon pouches have a satin-weave with matching-color drawstrings. Each package includes a random assortment of colors; sizes may vary slightly. Made in China. Size Inside WxH Height Order # 5" x 6½" 6" 400-937 2¾" x 3½" 3" 400-936

1-2 pkg each $9.65 $0.80 5.90 0.49

3-7 pkg each $8.05 $0.67 4.85 0.40

Sold in packages of 12 8-11 12-23 pkg each pkg each $7.25 $0.60 $6.45 $0.54 4.05 0.34 3.65 0.30

D

205


J E W E L R Y CA R D S & D I S P L AY Green order numbers indicate sustainable items.

1"W x 1"H

PLASTIC SELF-ADHERING CARD ADAPTER 405-536/37 Sold in packages of 100 Price/ Pkg $4.80 4.10 3.00 2.60

No. of Pkgs 1 2-4 5-9 10-24

Turn any card into a hanging card! Peel the paper tab off an adapter and press the adhesive area to the back of a paper card. Please Note: Adapters adhere best to nontextured paper cards.

price/ piece $0.05 0.05 0.03 0.03

3¾"W x 4¼"H 18 ivory 25⁄8"W x 4"H

11 black

Find more jewelry cards at riogrande.com

PIERCED/CLIP VERTICAL EARRING CARD Made with 30% post-consumer fibers; acid-feee.

3¼"W x 4½"H

1920 FLAPPER MOTIF EARRING CARDS 25 each of two designs. Made with 30% post-consumer fibers; acid-free. 400-804

Sold in packages of 50 Price/ Pkg $17.05 16.15 14.30 13.20

No. of Pkgs 1 2-4 5-9 10-24

price/ piece $0.35 0.33 0.29 0.27

FOUR-TIERED WOOD JEWELRY CARD DISPLAY Cherry-finished alder wood provides a warm background on this space-saving display. 9½"W x 31⁄8"D x 4½"H Please Note: Wood color may vary from shipment to shipment.

Available colors: black, ivory

Available color: gray

405-530/color #

405-521/15

Sold in packages of 100

Sold in packages of 100

No. of Pkgs 1 2-4 5-9 10-24

Price/ Pkg $15.40 13.95 12.50 11.65

price/ piece $0.16 0.14 0.13 0.12

No. of Pkgs 1 2-4 5-9 10-24

Qty 1-2 3-5 6-11 12+

3"W x 3½"H

Impressions™

Price $31.95 28.40 25.60 22.75

Show it! Present your jewelry designs beautifully for less! And with a variety of sizes, there’s a card for every style.

3"W x 3½"H

3"W x 3½"H

COPPRCLAY™ CARD

400-935

400-976

400-331

Sold in packages of 100

Sold in packages of 100

Sold in packages of 100

Price/ Pkg $21.75 20.30 18.75

price/ piece $0.22 0.21 0.19

price/ piece $0.13 0.11 0.09 0.08

Customizing service available on jewelry cards; see your Gems & Findings and Display & Packaging catalog for more information.

BRONZCLAY™ CARD No. of Pkgs 1-2 3-4 5-9

Price/ Pkg $12.55 10.50 8.65 7.70

400-931 Sold individually

UNIVERSAL JEWELRY CARDS The cards below are made with 100% post-consumer fibers and are acid-free.

206

15 gray

No. of Pkgs 1-2 3-4 5-9

Price/ Pkg $21.75 20.30 18.75

price/ piece $0.22 0.21 0.19

PMC® CARD No. of Pkgs 1-2 3-4 5-9

Price/ Pkg $21.75 20.30 18.75

price/ piece $0.22 0.21 0.19

riogrande.com

800.545.6566


PA P E R - C OV E R E D B OX E S

Box it! 100% recycled cardboard boxes (made with 77% post-consumer fiber and 23% pre-consumer fiber) are covered with recycled paper. Each box contains ½"-thick white poly-fill wadding. See your Gems & Findings and Display & Packaging catalog for many more colors and sizes of paper-covered boxes and dozens of packaging ideas! Combine any variety of box sizes and colors for your best price break. Made in the USA.

Impressions™

Green order numbers indicate sustainable items.

Customizing service available on lid tops; see your Gems & Findings and Display & Packaging catalog for more information.

3½"W x 3½"D x 2"H (available in purple and matte black)

2½"W x 1½"D x 7⁄8"H

31⁄16"W x 21⁄8"D x 1"H

450-321/color # Sold in packages of 100 No. of Pkgs 1-2 3-4 5-9 10-49

Price/ Pkg $27.30 26.15 24.55 23.05

3½"W x 3½"D x 1"H

450-324/color # Sold in packages of 100

450-323/color #

Sold in packages of 100

price/ piece

No. of Pkgs

$0.28 0.27 0.25 0.24

1-2 3-4 5-9 10-49

Price/ Pkg $30.70 29.45 27.60 25.90

price/ piece

No. of Pkgs

$0.31 0.30 0.28 0.26

1-2 3-4 5-9 10-49

Price/ Pkg $38.65 36.15 34.10 32.05

price/ piece $0.39 0.37 0.35 0.33

1-2 3-4 5-9 10-49

5¼"W x 3¾"D x 7⁄8"H

Price/ Pkg $43.75 41.05 37.95 36.50

price/ piece $0.44 0.42 0.38 0.37

No. of Pkgs 1-2 3-4 5-9 10-49

Price/ Pkg $48.05 44.90 41.75 39.85

price/ piece $0.49 0.45 0.42 0.40

450-328/color # Sold in packages of 100

450-326/color # Sold in packages of 100 No. of Pkgs

450-325/color # Sold in packages of 100

8"W x 2"D x 7⁄8"H

No. of Pkgs 1-2 3-4 5-9 10-49

Price/ Pkg $41.35 39.60 36.80 35.30

price/ piece $0.42 0.40 0.37 0.37

Visit riogrande.com for more colors and sizes!

available colors: 50 purple 33 sea foam

44 matte black 31 pine 40 paprika

22 brick 09 pink

21 navy blue Combine any variety of box sizes and colors for your best price break.

207


T R AV E L D I S P L AY & CA S E S 35-PIECE TRAVEL DISPLAY SET Travel display is trimmed with dark brown faux leather accented with soft, chestnut faux suede. The risers double as jewelry trays and nest together to protect jewelry and to fit easily into standard-size travel cases. Simply turn the risers over and store the pieces inside the trays, then insert the trays into easy-to-carry travel cases. Made in China.

Risers convert to trays to store all display pieces.

44¼"W x 16½"D x 10¾"H overall

This 35-piece set includes: • Two tray risers: 14¾"W x 8¼"D x 1"H • Three tray risers: 14¾"W x 8¼"D x 2"H • One tray riser: 14¾"W x 8¼"D x 3"H • Two bracelet ramps: 9¼"W x 1½"D x 1½"H • Two bracelet bars: 7¼"W x 2¾"D x 6¾"H • Three necklace displays: 3"W x 2"D x 3½"H • Three necklace displays: 55⁄8"W x 2"D x 7½"H

• Two watch displays: 2¾"W x 2¾"D x 23⁄8"H • Four earring displays: 2½"W x 2"D x 1¼"H • Three earring displays: 2½"W x 2"D x 4¼"H • Four single-ring displays: 2"W x 2"D x 5⁄8"H • Three two-ring displays: 3"W x 2"D x 5⁄8"H • Three 11-ring tray displays: 61⁄8"W x 4¼"D x 2½"H

400-943 Sold as a set Qty 1 2 3+

Price $160.10 148.10 137.85

SIDE-OPENING ALUMINUM ROLLING CASE An easy and professional way to transport samples, this sturdy, rolling aluminum case holds 12 1"H sample trays and has reinforced corners, two plastic wheels, a heavy-duty plastic carrying handle and a retractable pull handle. Features a fabric-lined interior, mesh pockets on the inside door, two combination locks and two keyed locks. Side access. Made in China. 400-342 Sold individually

Display it! (& take it)

Qty 1 2-3 4-7 8+

Show your designs at their very best when you travel! Choose from large sets that break down into trays that can be easily stored (above) or a smaller, simpler, elegant glass case (below). Find many more

Price $51.55 46.75 42.35 40.30

16½"W x 10¾"D x 16"H

travel-in-style options at riogrande.com

ALUMINUM ANGLED DISPLAY CASE The acrylic side panels on this aluminum case ensure your jewelry items are both protected and beautifully displayed. The top panel is tempered glass to enhance visibility and display options. Case is lockable. Made in China. DISPLAY PAD ALUMINUM DISPLAY CASE 400-564 Sold individually

24"W x 20"D x 3"H Display pad sold separately.

208

Qty 1 2-3 4+

Price $51.65 47.95 44.85

400-783/11 Sold individually Qty 1 2-3 4+

Price $12.15 11.05 9.95

riogrande.com

800.545.6566


A Accent Silver.....................................17 Acrylin jewelry paint .................. 172 Adhesives .....................132, 151, 168 Alumina hydrate .............................55 Aura 22 ................................................. 8 Awls .....................................................20

B Bags, storage ................................. 205 Beadalon® wire & tools ............. 198, ...........................................199, 201, 203 Bead cords ............................203, 204 Beads aligner ........................................ 127 copper ........................................ 166 millefiore ................................... 162 Bead separator ............................. 124 Bead-stringing stringing material..........203, 204 tools....................................201, 202 Benches..................................196, 197 Blocks, bench ............................21, 51 Books & DVDs Colores™ .................................... 176 enameling ................................. 176 glass-working .......................... 154 metal clay .................. 8, 13, 82–84 wire-wrapping ......................... 200 BRONZclay™ ..............................12, 13 Brushes bench .......................................... 131 finishing/texturing.............17, 20 glass/enamel ...................168, 169 haik .............................................. 132 mold ..........................114, 137, 138 Burnishers ............. 20, 24, 47, 49, 66 Burs ............................................ 44, 143

C Cabochons .................................78, 79 Carbon, activated ...........................14 Cards, jewelry................................ 206 Carving tools ...................... 15, 46, 47 Casting (glass) molds & tools .......... .......................114, 135, 136, 137, 138 Chain mail kits .....................184, 185 Cold Mold, Rio .................................55 Colores™ resin & tools...... 173–176 Confetti glass. See Glass Cooling blanket............................ 118 COPPRclay™ ......................................12 Cork clay ............................................55 Counter-enamel........................... 159 Cutters disc..................................................51 flush................................................50 glass .......108, 111, 128, 130, 131 tube ............................................. 122

D Dichroic glass. See Glass Disc cutter .........................................51 Displays ..................................206, 208

Doming plates .................................44 Doming resin ................................ 176 Drilling tools & equipment ........52, .................................................... 142, 143 DVDs. See Books & DVDs Dynasty stamps ...................... 26–37

E Embeddables™ ................................11 Enameling enamels Milton Bridge ...................... 159 Schauer ....................... 160–164 firing equipment ...........170, 171 tools....... 132, 157, 158, 168–170

J Jump rings & tools ......186, 192, 199

K Kilns enameling .......................... 63, 171 glass ............62, 63, 118, 130, 133 granulation ..................................60 metal clay ......... 15, 18, 60, 62, 63 supplies .............62, 132, 133, 171

L Lapidary equipment & accessories ............................139–141 Liver of sulfur ...................................66

PMC® (all forms) ....................... 5–7, 9 Polishing abrasives.....66, 67, 139, 143, 168 cloths .............................................82 tools & equipment ............17, 65, ......................... 66, 68, 69, 139–141 Primer, Primo................................. 138

R Raindrop resin .............................. 177 Ring making tools ........................57, 58 sticks ........................................... 192 RingMaker molds ...........................58 Rods, glass. See Glass

F

M

S

Files ...............................................49, 66 Findings Argentium® 930 .............151, 181 base metal ............ 127, 151–153, .................................... 177–180, 183 bronze ........................ 11, 151, 181 copper ................................. 11, 166 silver & fine silver................11, 81 sterling ........... 150, 181, 182, 186 Finishing equipment ............ 65–69, .......................................... 139–141, 143 Firing kilns ........................60, 62, 63, 118, ........................... 130, 132, 133, 171 paper........................................... 133 racks ............................................ 170 tools & equipment ............14, 15, .................................. 18, 59–62, 170 torches................59– 61, 119, 120 Flameworking tools................... 107, ....................................................117–126 Flex shaft, Prodigy™ ............. 52, 142 Foil, keum-boo .................................. 8 Frit. See Glass Fusing tools ......................... 128–133

Mandrels bead-making............................ 123 bracelet-forming ............. 97, 138 ring .................................................57 wire-wrapping ......................... 192 Measuring tools ..............20, 48, 122 Metal clay BRONZclay™ .........................12, 13 COPPRclay™ .................................12 extruders ......................................43 firing tools ........ 14, 15, 18, 59–63 forming & shaping ...................39, .......................................... 41–45, 51 mold-making .......................54, 55 PMC (all forms) ................ 5, 6, 7, 9 stamps & textures .......26–39, 53 tools............ 15, 17, 19, 20, 22–24, ................ 41, 42, 46–51, 53, 58, 66 Metal leaf ........................................ 152 Millefiore beads ........................... 162 Mold-making ............................54, 55 Molds Colores™ .................................... 175 for metal clay ..............................57 glass casting ....................136, 137

Safety supplies & equipment .......... .......60, 122, 132, 138, 147–149, 165 Shears/scissors ............. 50, 126, 169 Sheet glass. See Glass Sheet, metal ................................ 9, 10 Solder & solder paste ....................61 Stampings .............................165–167 Stamps, quality................................53 Stringers, glass. See Glass Sunshine® Cloth ..............................82

G Gemstones cabochons ............................78, 79 faceted .................................. 71–77 firing guide ..................................70 Glass 90 COE ................................... 90–99 96 COE .............................. 100–115 104 COE ................................ 86–88 confetti ....................................... 114 dichroic ..........91, 93, 95, 99, 103, ........................... 107, 112, 113, 115 frit ..........................92, 93, 104–107 iridescent .....................96, 97, 107, .....................................108, 110, 111 noodles ...............90, 91, 101–103 opaque (opal) ....... 86, 87, 90, 91, 93–97, 100–102, 106, 108–111 rods............. 86–88, 100, 102, 103 sheet ....................94–99, 108–113 specialty..................................... 112 stringers .............. 90, 91, 101–103 transparent ............86, 88, 90–97, ........100, 101, 103–105, 108–111

N Noodles, glass. See Glass

O Oil, glass cutting .......................... 130 Optical tools .................................. 147 Organizers .............33, 196, 197, 202

P Packaging ..............................205, 207 Paint, jewelry................................. 172 Pans firing ...............................................14 sifting .......................................... 169 Paper, firing.................................... 133 Patinas ................................................66 Pickle & pickle pot....................... 168 Plating ................................... 144–146 Pliers bead-stringing......................... 202 general purpose .............. 50, 185 glass-working ................111, 126, .............................................. 129, 131 wire-wrapping ...... 191, 193–195

T Torches accessories .......................119–121 flameworking .................119, 120 metal clay ..............................59–61 Travel displays/cases .................. 208 Tubing, fine silver ........................ 122 Tweezers 48, 57, 124, 125, 168, 169

U Ultrasonic cleaners ........................82

V Vac-U-Form model maker ...........54 Videos/DVDs. See Books & DVDs

W Warnings......................................... 165 Wire, bead-stringing.................. 198, .................................................... 199, 203 Wire & strip Argentium® 930 ...................... 188 Beadalon®.........................198, 199 bronze ...........................................12 fine silver ............................ 10, 165 gold .................................................. 9 gold-filled .................................. 190 rounder ...................................... 192 stainless steel ........................... 199 sterling ....................................... 189 Wire-wrapping tools ........191–195, ..............................................................199 Work surfaces ........ 21, 22, 196, 202

209


Our Guarantee: Yo u W i l l B e S a t i s fi e d ! We guarantee everything you buy from Rio Grande to be free from defects in material and workmanship. If you’re not completely satisfied with any product you purchase from us, return it unaltered within 30 days and we will either exchange it, replace it or refund your money, whichever you prefer (see more on the following page). This warranty does not include incidental or consequential expenses. No other warranty is implied. This warranty covers only items normally cataloged or stocked by Rio Grande.

one click or call

does it all!

Most orders placed by 5:00 p.m. Mountain Time are shipped the same day they are received (excluding international shipments). All others are shipped by the next business day.

ON THE WEB VISIT 24/7: riogrande.com Go to our website to place orders, to see specially priced merchandise, to watch instructional videos, to find helpful tips and tricks, to order catalogs or to learn more about our company!

PAYMENT METHODS

E-MAIL

Rio Grande Open Accounts If you are rated 1 or 2 with the Jewelers Board of Trade (JBT) or are rated low-risk with any of our credit reporting agencies, we can open an account for you upon receipt of your signed credit application (this can be faxed). If you are not rated as described above, ask for our Credit Policy Information and Application form. Allow approximately two weeks for processing. Some restrictions may apply.

E-MAIL TO: info@riogrande.com

Credit Cards We accept MasterCard, VISA, Discover and American Express. Customer/cardholder address and related information are verified with your issuing bank before your order is shipped. Some restrictions may apply.

ALBUQUERQUE AREA SALES/WILL-CALL (orders for pickup) Call 505.839.3300 8:30 a.m. to 5 p.m. MT, Monday through Friday Local Fax 505.839.3310 anytime

Prepaid Orders Certified funds are recommended (money orders or bank cashier’s checks). To expedite service, use a bank wire transfer. Please allow for price fluctuations and include shipping costs. If the quoted shipping cost is more than the actual cost, we will credit your account or issue a refund, whichever you request. If you send a check with your order, the check must include your name, address and daytime phone number. This information will be verified with your bank. Export funds are accepted in U.S. dollars only. Some restrictions may apply. RioCheq We welcome check-by-phone payments. Some restrictions may apply; inquire when you order. Short-Term Installment Plan (STIP) Available for approved customers who want an installment-pay option to purchase high-dollar tools or capital equipment. Call 800.545.6566 for information, approval guidelines and an initial quote. Restrictions may apply. PRICING GUIDELINES & STRUCTURE We do our very best to offer you the most competitive prices and best selection on all our products. Because our catalog is in use for a year, the prices shown may vary due to exchange rates, customs duties and other factors we cannot control. As a result, prices may vary; expect some variation depending on conditions at the time you order. The prices published in this catalog, current at press time (September, 2010), are intended as guidelines. Precious metal sample prices are based on $18 silver and $1200 gold markets. Please verify current pricing when you place your order. Our pricing is structured to help you save by buying in larger quantities. Ask about additional price breaks when ordering. HAZARDOUS SHIPPING Hazardous shipping charges apply for several products in this catalog. Please inquire about additional charges when placing your order. Please Note:Items that have been altered, special orders, and items custommade to your specifications are not returnable.

210

DOMESTIC ORDERS CALL US: 800.545.6566 7 a.m. to 6 p.m. MT, Monday through Friday FAX YOUR ORDER: 800.965.2329 anytime

CUSTOMER SERVICE: 800.545.6566 7 a.m. to 6 p.m. MT, Monday through Friday TECHNICAL INFORMATION: 800.545.6566 7 a.m. to 6 p.m. MT, Monday through Friday

GOVERNMENT, INSTITUTION & INTERNATIONAL ORDERS FROM: United States, Canada, Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin Islands Orders & Customer Service: 800.253.9738 7 a.m. to 5 p.m. MT, Monday through Friday FROM: MEXICO 1.95.800.253.9738 7 a.m. to 5 p.m. MT, Monday through Friday FROM: DIRECT LINE FOR ALL OTHER COUNTRIES 505.839.3011 7 a.m. to 5 p.m. MT, Monday through Friday FAX YOUR ORDER: 505.839.3016 anytime RETURNS, REPAIRS & CORRECTIONS Keep your invoice! It includes information about return procedures. Your invoice number is your return authorization and repair warranty. All returns and repairs must be accompanied by their invoice numbers or dates of purchase and your customer number. Returns will be credited or refunded by the same method of payment used for the purchase. Mail your return to: Rio Grande Returns Department 7500 Bluewater Road NW Albuquerque, NM 87121-1962 Include the top portion of the invoice with your return—it is your return form. To return an item: 1. Pack the item in a sturdy carton and seal with strong tape. We’re not responsible for any returns in non-padded envelopes. 2. Mark your package “ATTN: Returns Department.” Note your invoice and customer numbers to facilitate your return.

3. For your protection, ship all returns prepaid and insured. We’ll refund your return postage when appropriate. 4. If you need a replacement before the return is received, call us at 800.545.6566. Your replacement and your return may cross in the mail. We reserve the right to refuse to accept any merchandise returned after the 30-day warranty period or to charge additional restocking fees on such merchandise. Broken Packages Items sold in quantity packages must be returned complete. We charge a broken-package fee of $5 or 10%, whichever is higher, on packages returned with less than the quantity on the original invoice. Please Note: Bulk spools of chain are not returnable if not in their original, unbroken packaging. Please Note: None of our products are intended for use in children's jewelry.

riogrande.com

800.545.6566


3RZHUHG%\7KH6XQ

We’re soaking up rays from dawn . . .

. . . through noon . . .

. . . all the way until sunset!

Everything that requires electricity at Rio—from machinery and equipment to lights and computers—is powered by the sun, and we here at Rio are basking in the wonder of it all. A third of our 180,000 square foot facility is dedicated to manufacturing, where we use this solar-generated power to produce Rio-manufactured products. After installing close to five acres of solar panels at Rio Grande’s facility in New Mexico, we are now the first system in the state able to generate one megawatt of energy at peak output. Mega-what? Megawatt! All that sunlight adds up to more than 1.6 million kilowatt hours worth of electricity each year. That’s enough energy to power 147 homes annually. And as we produce more power than we use, Rio supplies energy back to the community. Like most ideas, this one began as a flicker of a possibility. It soon developed into a full-fledged effort to install more than 5000 solar panels atop the Rio parking lot, creating an opportunity like none other—a completely solar-powered operation. This forward thinking leads to increased efficiency, stable energy costs, and covered parking for associates (nice plus!), while filling the need to find renewable fuel sources. It’s wonderful to be a part of the solution and to use this abundant (especially in New Mexico!) natural resource to power our business—and yours.


you already know and love—like metal clay and wire wrapping . With over 200 colors to choose from, the possibilities are endless!

The adventure begins on page 155.

“Metamorphosis 3” by Falcher Fusager Second Place, Enamels—2010 Saul Bell Design Award

Everything that requires electricity at Rio—from machinery and equipment to lights and computers—is powered by the sun.

Presort Standard U.S. Postage PAID The Bell Group, Inc.

Powered By The Sun

Record your numbers here to make ordering easier!

Customer #:

Source Code:

beauty and stark contrast, and you can combine it with mediums

7500 Bluewater Road NW Albuquerque, NM 87121-1962

what are you waiting for? Enameling fills your designs with bright

Change Service Requested

If you haven’t already stepped into the colorful world of enamels,

©2010 The Bell Group, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed in the USA.

You’re not in Kansas anymore . . .

2011 Creative Arts Catalog  

Rio Grande Creative Arts Catalog 2011

2011 Creative Arts Catalog  

Rio Grande Creative Arts Catalog 2011

Advertisement